United States
         Environmental Protection
         Agency     	•
Office of Water
Engineering and Analysis Division (43O3)   December 1996
Washington, DC 20460	
SEPA    Methods for Organic Chemical
          Analysis of Municipal and industrial
          Wastewater
                                                   52-001-1-

                                               Printed on Recycled Pap

-------

-------
Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis
of Municipal and Industrial Wastewater
                    Prepared by

                Analytical Methods Staff
           Engineering and Analysis Division (4303)
             Office of Science and Technology
                   Office of Water
           U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
                  Washington, DC
                   December 1996

-------
                                        Foreword
       Ibis document contains a compilation of the test procedures approved for the analysis of
municipal and industrial wastewater under the Clean Water Act and listed at Appendix A to 40 CFR part
136. The compilation includes EPA 600- and 1600- series methods for the analysis of organic compounds.

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                                            Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 601
form any analysis necessary to deter-
mine  whether  the alternate method
satisfies the applicable requirements of
this parti; and the Director of EMSL-CI
shall recommend to the Administrator
that he/she approve or reject the appli-
cation and shall also notify the appli-
cant of such recommendation.
  (3) As expeditiouBly  as practicable,
an alternate method determined by the
Administrator to satisfy the applicable
requirements  of this part shall be pro-
posed by EPA for incorporation in sub-
section 136.3 of 40 CFR part 136. EPA
shall make available for review  all the
factual bases for its proposal, including
any performance data submitted by the
applicant and any available EPA anal-
ysis of those data.
  (4) Following:  a period of public com-
ment. EPA shall, as expedittpusly as
practicable,  publish  in  the FEDERAL
REGISTER a final decision to approve or
reject the alternate method.

[38 FR 28760. Oct. 16. 1913. as amended at 41
PR 52785. Dec.  1.  1976; 55 FR 33440. Aug. 15.
1990]

APPENDIX A TO PART 136—METHODS FOR
     ORGANIC   CHEMICAL ANALYSIS  OF
     MUNICIPAL     AND     INDUSTRIAL
     WASTEWATER

    METHOD 601—PDBOBABLB HALOCABBONS

          1. Scope and Application
  1.1 This method coven the determination
 of29purgeablehalocarbons.             .
  The following parameters may be deter-
 mined by this method:
     rifchto
 CMoroetham
 ChtoftrfofRi	•	
 CMOfOflMttllM 	'.	
 pfcfonxKShtaroflM'thftnft
 1.2-Ok
 1.3
 1,4-Ofchtorotoenzane
 DfchtorodMu
Bthara
 1.1-OicMoRMthane
  I.HJichtororttwne	
  trara-1 ^Oiehtoroethane
  d»-1,3-0ichloropcop.
  trara-l^Oichla
                        STORET
                          No.
             32101
             32104
             34413
             32102
             34301
             34311
             34576
             32106
             34418
34586
34571
4JMKI
wWHJD
34496
34531
34501
34546
34541
34704
34899
34423
                     CAS No.
         75-27-4
         75-25-2
         74-83-9
         58-23-5
         108-90-7
         75-00-3
         100-75-8
         67-66-3
         74-87-3
  95-60-1
 541-73-1
 106^46-7
  75-71-8
  75-34-3
 107-06-2
  75-35-4
 158-60-6
  78-87-5
10061-01-6
10061-02-8
  75-09-2
•PM*
1,1.22-TtfrHMaroadMM 	 .




vinyl eMnrkft ' < .

tilUHbl'
No.
34516
34475
34508
34511
38180
344S3
39715
CAS No.
79-34=5
127-18-4
71-66-8
79-00-5
79-01-4
75-80-4
75-01-4
  1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chroma-
 tographic (GC) method applicable to the de-
 termination of the compounds listed above
 In  municipal  and industrial discharges as
 provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this meth-
 od is used to analyze linfttrqWM' samples for
'any  or  all  of  the  compounds above.
 compound identifications  should  be  sup-
 ported by at least one additional qualitative
 technique. This method describes analytical
 conditions for a second gas chromatographic
 column that can be used to confirm measure-
 ments made with the primary column. Meth-
 od  624  provides  gas  chromatograph/mass
 spectrometer  (OC/MS)  conditions appro-
 priate for the qualitative and quantitative
 confirmation of results for most of the pa-
 rameters listed above.
  14 The method detection limit (MDL. de-
 fined in Section 12.1)« for each parameter is
 listed in Table  1. The MDL for & specific
 wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
 pending upon the nature of interferences  in
 the sample matrix.
  1.4 Any modification of this method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered as a major modification subject  to
 application and approval of alternate test
 procedures under 40 CFR 138.4 and 138.5.
   1.5 This method is restricted to use by or
 under the supervision of analysts experi-
 enced in the  operation of a purge and trap
 system and a gas chromatogFaph and in the
 interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each
 analyst must demonstrate the ability to gen-
 erate acceptable results  with this method
 using the procedure described in Section 8.2.

            2. Summary of Method

   2.1  An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL
 water sample contained  in a  specially-de-
 signed purging chamber at ambient tempera-
 ture. The halocarbons are efficiently trans-
 ferred from the aqueous phase to the vapor
 phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent
 trap  where  the  halocarbons are  trapped.
 After purging is completed, the trap is heat-
 ed and backflnshed with the inert gas to
 desorb   the  halbcarbons  onto   a  gas
 chromatographic  column.  The  gas  chro-
 matograph is temperature programmed to
 separate the halocarbons which are then de-
 tected with a hallde-specific detector.*-3
    2.2 The method provides an optional  gas
 chromatographic column that may be help-
 ful in resolving the compounds of interest
 from interferences that may occur.
                                         647

-------
 W..136, App. A, M«itl. 601
      *               •
             ••3. Interferences

   3.1 Imparities in the purge gas and or-
 ganic compounds outgassing from the plumb-
• ing ahead of the trap account for the major-
 ity of contamination problems. The analyt-
 ical system must be' demonstrated to be free
 from contamination under the conditions of
 the analysis by running laboratory reagent
 blanks as described in Section 8.13. The use
 of  non-Tenon plastic  tubing.  non-Tenon
 thread sealants, or now controllers withrub-
 ber components in the purge and trap system
 should be avoided,                 •
   3£  Samples can be contaminated by diffu-
 sion of volatile organics (particularly nuoro-
 oarbons and methylene chloride) through the
 septum seal ilto the sample during shipment
 and storage. A field reagent blank prepared
 from reagent water and carried through the
 sampling and handling protocol can serve as
 a check on such contamination.
   33 Contamination  by  carry-over  can
 oocur whenever high level and low level sam-
 ple* are sequentially  analysed. To reduce
 carry-over, the purging  device and sample
 syringe  must be rinsed with reagent water
 between sample analyses. Whenever an un-
  usually  concentrated sample is encountered.
  it should be followed by an analysis of rea-
  gent water to check for cross contamination.
  For samples containing large  amounts  of
 water-soluble  materials, suspended  solids.
 high boiling compounds or high organohalide
 levels, it may be necessary to wash out the
  purging  device with a  detergent solution,
  rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it
  in a 105*O oven between analyses. The trap
  and other parts of the system are also sub-
 •jftot to  contamination;  therefore, frequent
  bakeout and purging of the entire system
  may be required.       '  .

                   4:Safetu
    4.1  The toxicity  or cardnogenlcity  of
  each  reagent used in this method has not
  been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
  cal compound should be treated as a poten-
  tial health haxard. From this viewpoint,  ex-
  posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
   the lowest possible level by whatever means
   available. The laboratory is responsible  for
      -    -  -    a  current awareness  file  of
         .       ,
   OSHA regulations  regarding the  safe han
   dling of the ohftml
-------
Envifonmontat Protection Aojoncy
carder. A data system is rTtfmmmf"**'* tar
measuring peak areas.
  5.3.1  Column 1—8 ft Icmg x OJL in. ID stain-
less steel or glass, packed with 1%  8P-1000
on  Carbopaok B (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
This column was used to develop the method
performance  statements  in  Section  12.
Guidelines for the use of alternate  column
packings are provided in Section 10.L
  5.3.2 Column 2—« ft long x 0.1 in. ID stain-
less steel or glass,  packed with chemically
bonded n-octane on Porasil-C (100/120 mesh)
or equivalent.
  6&3 Detector—Electrolytic  conductivity
or microeoulometric detector. These types Of
detectors have proven effective in the analy-
sis of wastewaters for the parameters listed
in  the scope (Section 1.1). The electrolytic
conductivity detector was used to  develop
the method performance statements in Sec-
tion 12. Guidelines  for the use of alternate
detectors are provided in Section UU.
  5.4 Syringes—6-mL glass hypodermic with
Luerlok tip (two each), if applicable to the
purging device.
  5.6 Micro syringes—25-)iL. 0.006 in, ID nee-
dle.
  5.6 Syringe valve—2-way. with Luer ends
(three each).
  5.7 Syringe—6-mL, gas-tight with shut-off
valve.
  54 Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon
cap liner.
  5J Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g..

                6. Reagents

  6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
 fined as a water in which an interferent is
 not observed at the MDL of the parameters
 of interest.
  6.1.1  Reagent water can be generated by
 imitirtng tap water through a carbon filter bed
 containing about 1 Ib of activated carbon
 (Flltrasorb-aoo. Calgon Corp.. or equivalent).
  6.1.2  A   water   purification   system
 (Mlllipore  Snper-Q  or equivalent)  may be
 used to generate reagent water.
   6.1.3  Reagent water may also be prepared
 by boiling water for 15 min.  Subsequently.
 while maintaining  the temperature at 90 *C,
 bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through
 the water for 1  h. While  still hot. transfer
 the water to a narrow month screw-cap bot-
 tle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and
 cap.
   &2  Sodium thloBulfate—(ACS) Orannlar.
   6.3  Trap Materials:
   6.3.1 Coconut charcoal—6/10 mesh  sieved
 to 26 mesh, Barnabey Cheney. CA-590-26 lot #
 M-2649 or equivalent.
    6.3.2  2.6-Diphenylene   oxide   polymer—
 Tenax,  (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade
 or equivalent.
    6.35  Methyl silicone packing—8% OV-1 on
 Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
              Pt. 13A. App. A, Moth. 601

  6.3.4 Silica   gel-=35/30  mesh;  Dayison.
grade-15 or equivalent.
  6.4  Methanol—Pesticide quality or equiv-
alent.          ,           .
  6.5  Stock    standard   solutions—Stock
standard solutions may be  prepared  from
pure standard m*«»rt>iM or purchased as cer-
tified solutions. Prepare stock standard solu-
tions in methanol using assayed liquids or
gases as appropriate. Because of the toxidty
of some of the brganohalides, primary dilu-
tions of these materials should be prepared
in a  hood. A NIOSE/MESA approved  toxic
gas respirator should be used when the ana-
lyst handles high concentrations of such ma-
terials.
  6.5.1 Place about 9.8 mL of met&anol into
a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric
flask. Allow the flask to stand, uhstoppsfad,
for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted
surfaces have dried. Weigh the flask to the
Iearest0.1mg.                 .   ,
  6J^2 Add the assayed reference material:
  6.5.2.1  Liquid—Data? a 100 |iL syringe. Im-
mediately add two or more drops of assayed
reference  material to the  flask, then re-
weigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly
into the alcohol without contacting the neck
of the flask.
  6.5^2  Oases—To  prepare standards for
any of the six halocarbons  that boil below
30* C (bromometfaaae,  cbloroethftse.  chloro-
methane,         dicMorodifluoromethame.
trichloroflnoromethaae, vinyl chloride). Oil
a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the ref-
erence standard to the 5.0-mL mark. Lower
the needle to 5 mm above the methanol me-
niscus. Slowly introduce the reference stand-
ard above the surface of the liquid (the heavy
gas will rapidly dissolve into the methanol).
  6££ Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper.
then T"«»  by inverting  the flask  several
times. Calculate the concentration in |ig/|iL
from the net gain in weight. When compound
purity is assayed to be 98% or greater, the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
cftT» be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the malufecturer or by an inde-
pendent source.        ••     '     "
   &S.4  Transfer the stock standard solution
into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle.  Store,
 with T"^"*I headspaee, at  -10 to -20 *C
 and protect from light.
   6.5£ Prepare fresh standards weekly  for
 the six gases and 2-chloroethylvlnyl ether.
 All other standards must be replaced after
 one  month,  or sooner if comparison with
 check standards indicates a problem.
   6.6  Secondary  dilution  standards—Using
 stock standard solutions, prepare secondary
 dilution standards in methanol that contain
 the compounds of interest, either singly or
 mixed  together.  The secondary  dilution
 standards should be prepared at concentra-
 tions  such  that  the  aqueous calibration
                                          649

-------
 rt* »«x»,
 standards prepared In Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1
 will bracket the working range of the ana-
 lytic*! system. Secondary dilation standards
 should be stored with T»<«1in^-l headapace and
 should be checked frequently for signs  of
 degradation or evaporation,  especially just
• prior to preparing calibration standards from
 them.
   6.7  Quality  control check  sample  con-
 centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

                7. Calibration

   7.1  Assemble a purge and trap system that
 meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Con-
 dition  the  trap  overnight  at 180  *C by
 backflnshlng with an  inert gas flow of  at
 least 20 *r>Tifrn1lTir Condition the trap for  10
 min onoe daily prior to use.
   7.2  Connect the purge and trap system  to
 a   gas   chromatograph.  The  gas   chro-
 matograph must be operated using tempera-
 tare and flow rate  conditions equivalent  to
 thoee  given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge
 and trap-gas chromatographlc system using
 either the external standard technique (Sec-
 tion US)  or  the internal standard technique
 (Section 7.4).
   7.3-  External standard calibration  proce-
 dure:
   7.3.1  Prepare calibration standards at a
 tniminnm of three concentration levels for'
 each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 |iL of
 one or more secondary dilution standards  to
 100. £00. or 1000 |iL of reagent water. A 25-nL
 syringe with a 0.006- in. ID needle should be
 used for this operation. One of the external
 standards should be at a concentration near.
 but above, the HDL (Table 1) and the other
•concentrations should correspond to the ex-
 pected range of concentrations found  in real
 samples or should define the working range '
 of the detector. These aqueous standards can
 be stored up to 24 h.  If held In sealed vials
 with zero headspace as described in Section
 9.2. If not so stored, they must be discarded
 after ih.
   7.3.2  Analyze  each  calibration standard
 according, to Section  10.  and tabulate peak
 height or area  responses versus  the  con-
 centration in the standard. The. results can
 be used to prepare a calibration  curve for
 each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of
 response  to concentration (calibration fac-
 tor) is a constant  over the  working range
 (<10%  relative standard deviation. USD), lin-
 earity through the origin can be assumed
 and the average ratio or calibration factor
 can be used in place of a calibration curve.
   7.4  Internal  standard  calibration  proce-
 dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
 select one or more internal  standards that
 are similar in analytical behavior  to the
 compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
 ther demonstrate that the measurement of
 the internal standard is  not affected  by
 method or matrix interferences. Because  of
 these  limitations,  no internal standard can
 be suggested that is applicable to all sam-
 ples. The compounds recommended for use as
 surrogate spikes in Section 8.7 have been
 used successfully as internal standards,  be-
 cause  of their generally unique retention
 times.
  7.4.1  Prepare  calibration  standards at a
 minimum of three concentration levels  for
 each parameter  of Interest  as described In
 Section 7.3.1:
  7.4.2  Prepare a  spiking solution contain-
 ing each  of the Internal standards using the
 procedures described In Sections 6.5 and 6.6.
 It is recommended that the secondary dilur
 tion standard be  prepared at a concentration
 of  15   \iglmL of  each  Internal  standard
 compound. The  addition  of 10 |iL of this
 standard  to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration
 standard would be equivalent to 30 jig/L.
  7.4.3  Analyze  each  calibration standard
 according to Section 10. adding 10 |iL of in-
 ternal standard spiking solution directly to
 the syringe (Section  10.4).  Tabulate  peak
 height or area responses against concentra-
 tion for each compound and Internal stand-
 ard. and calculate response factors (RF) for
 each compound using Equation 1.
                    (A.XC*)
               RF= — — — —
                    (AuKC.)


  Equation 1
 where:
  A.=Reaponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
               for the internal standard.
  Ci.=Concentration of the internal standard.
.  -C,=Concentration of 'the parameter to be
    measured.
If the RF value over the working range is. a
constant (<10%'BSD). the RF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average RF can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults can be used to plot a calibration curve
of response ratios, AJAi.. vs. RF.
  7.5 The  working calibration curve, cali-
bration  factor, or RF must  be verified on
each. working day  by the measurement of a
QC check sample.
  7.5.1  Prepare the QC check sample as de-
scribed in Section B.2J2.
  7.5.2  Analyze the QC check sample accord-
ing to Section 10.
  7.5.3  For each parameter, compare the re-
sponse  (Q) with the corresponding calibra-
tion acceptance .criteria found in Table 2. If
the  responses for all parameters of Interest
fall within the designated ranges, analysis of
actual samples can begin, If any individual Q
falls outside the range, proceed according to
Section 7.5.4.
  NOTE: The large number of parameters in
Table 2 present a  substantial probability
that one or more will not meet the calibra-
tion acceptance criteria when all parameters
are  analyzed.
                                          650

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  7.5.4 Repeat the test only for those pa-
rameters that failed to meet the calibration •
acceptance criteria. If the response for a par
rameter  does not' fall within the range in
this second  test,  a new calibration curve.
calibration factor, or  RF must be prepared
for that parameter according* to Section 7.3
or 7.4.  .

             t. Quality Control
  8.1  Bach laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol in*"K'*™- The »»ntritmm> requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
         i records to document the quality, of
                                                         Pt. 1*6, App. A» Mefti. dOI
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared, with established per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
of analyses meet the performance character-
istics of the method. When results of sample
spikes Indicate atypical method perform-
ance, a quality control cheek standard must
be analyzed to confirm that the measure-
ments were performed in an In-control mode
of operation.
  8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial.
one-time, demonstration 'of  the ability to
generate acceptable accuracy and precision
with *h<" method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are
occurring in chromatography. the analyst is
permitted certain options (detailed in Sec-
tion 10.1) to improve the separations or lower
the cost of measurements. Bach time such a
modification is made to the method, the ana-
lyst is required to repeat the procedure in
Section 8 A.      •
  8.1.3 Bach day. the analyst must analyse a
reagent  water, blank  to demonstrate that
Interferences from the analytical system are
under control.
  8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a «*»j««<««n«n of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory  data  quality. This procedure is. de-
scribed In Section 8.3.
  8.1.5  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through  the analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This procedure is described in  Section
8.4. The frequency of the  check standard
 analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
 analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
 eries from samples  (Section 8.3) meet  all
 specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6 The  laboratory must maintain per-
 formance records to document the quality of
 data that is generated. This procedure is de-
 scribed in Section 8.5.
  8.2  To  establish the ability to generate
 acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
 lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QO check sample
concentrate is required containing each pa-
rameter of interest at a concentration of 10
lig/mL in methanol. The  QC check sample
concentrate must be obtained from  the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Environ-
mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not avail-
able from that source, the QC check sample
concentrate must be obtained from another
external source. If not available from  either
source above,  the QC check sample con-
centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
using  stock standards prepared independ-
ently from those used for calibration.
  8^2 Prepare a QC check sample to con- •
tain 20 |ig/L of each parameter by adding 209
tiL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL
of reagent water.
  8.241 Analyze four 5-mL  allqnots of the
well-mixed QC  check sample according to
flection 10.
  8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in
lig/L, and the standard deviation of the re-
covery (s) in pg/L, for each parameter of in-
terest using the four results.
  8££  For each parameter compare s and X
with the corresponding acceptance criteria
for  precision  and  accuracy*  respectively.
found in Table 2. If s and X for all param-
eters  of interest meet the acceptance cri-
teria,  the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any Individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, then the system performance is
unacceptable for that parameter.
   None  The large  number of parameters in
Table 2  present a substantial  probability
that one or more will  fail at least one of the
acceptance criteria when all parameters are
analyzed.
   8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters
 tested fall at least one of the acceptance cri-
 teria, the analyst must proceed according to
 Section 8.2.6.1 or 8^.6.2.
   8.2.6.1  Locate and  correct the source of
 the problem and repeat the test for all pa-
 rameters of interest beginning with Section
 8A3.
   S.2.&2  Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat
 the  test  only for those  parameters that
 failed • to meet criteria. Repeated  failure.
 however,  will  confirm a  general problem
 with the measurement system. If this occurs.
 locate and correct the source of the problem
 and repeat the test for all compounds of in-
 terest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
   8.3  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
 basis, spike at least 10%  of the  samples from
  each sample site being monitored to assess
  accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
  ten samples per month, at least one spiked
  sample per month is required.
   8.3.1  The concentration of the spike in the
  sample should be determined as follows:
                                          651

-------
  8.3.1.1  If, as  in  compliance monitoring.
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section &&2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  &3JJI  If the  concentration of a  specific
parameter in the  sample  is not being
chocked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at 20 pg/L or 1
to 6 time* higher than the background  con-
centration  determined  in  Section  S.&2.
whichever concentration would be larger.
  8,3*2 Analyse  one 5-mL sample aliquot to ,
determine the background concentration (B)
of each  parameter. If necessary, prepare a
new QC  check sample concentrate (Section
8&1) appropriate for  the  background  con-
centrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-
mli sample aliquot with 10 pL of  the QC
check sample concentrate and analyse it to
determine the concentration after  spiking
(A) of each parameter. Calculate  each  per-
cent recovery .(P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is
the* known true value of the spike.
  S&3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
acceptance criteria were calculated to in-
clude an allowance for error In measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
of &l. This error will be accounted for to the
extent* that the analyst's spike  to back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.' If spiking was
performed at a concentration lower than 20
pg/L. the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 2, or optional QC
acceptance criteria calculated for the spe-
cific spike concentration.  To calculate op-
tional acceptance criteria for the recovery of
a parameter: (1)  Calculate accuracy   (X')
using the equation in Table 3, substituting
the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) cal-
culate overall precision (8') using the equa-
tion in Table 3, substituting Xf for X; (3) cal-
culate the range for recovery at the spike
concentration as (100 X'/D±2.44{100 8VT)%.»
  8.3,4 ' If any Individual P falls outside the
designated range for recovery, that param-
eter  has failed  the acceptance criteria. A
ohi»oV standard  containing each parameter
that failed the criteria must be analyzed as
. described in Section 8.4.
  8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria for  recovery  in  Section  8.3. a QC
check standard  containing each  parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTC The frequency for the required  anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the number  of  parameters  being  simulta-
 neously tested, the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the labora-
 tory. If the entire list of parameters in Table
 2 must be measured in the sample in Section
8.3. the probability that the analysis of a QC
check standard will be required is high. In
this  case the QC check standard should be
routinely analyzed with the spiked sample.
  8.4.1  Prepare the QC check  standard by
adding 10 pL of QC check sample concentrate
(Section 8.2.1 or  8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent,
water. The QC check standard needs only to
contain the parameters'that failed criteria
in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2  Analyse the QC check  standard to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where  T is the true
value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3  Compare  the  percent recovery  (P.)
for each parameter with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared  with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side  the designated range,  the laboratory
performance for that parameter is Judged to
be but of control, and the problem must be
immediately  identified and corrected.  The
analytical  result  for that parameter in the
unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5 As part of the QC program for the  lab- ,
oratory,  method accuracy  for wastewater
samples must be  assessed and records must
be maintained. After the analysis of  five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8JB,
calculate the  average percent  recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (a,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery  interval from P-2a, to
P+2v If p*90% and s,dO%. for  example, the
accuracy interval is  expressed as 70-410%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that  are most productive depend upon
the needs of .the laboratory and  the nature of
the  samples. Field duplicates  may be  ana-
lysed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements. When  doubt  exists .
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram, confirmatory techniques such as
gas  chromatography  with a dissimilar col-
umn, specific  element  detector, or mass
spectrometer  must be used. Whenever  pos-
sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
reference  materials and participate in rel-
evant performance evaluation studies. .
   8.7 The analyst should monitor both the
performance of the  analytical .system and
 the  effectiveness of  the method in dealing
 with each sample matrix  by  spiking,  each
 sample, standard, and reagent water blank
 with surrogate halocarbons. A combination
 of     bromochloromethane.     2-bromo-l-
 chloropropane, and 1,4-dichlorobutane IB rec-
 ommended to encompass the  range of the
                                          652

-------
               Protection Agoncy
temperature program uaed la this method.
Prom Btook. standard solutions prepared as
in Section 6.5, add a volume to give 760 jig of
each surrogate to  45 mL of reagent  water
contained in a 60-mL volumetric flask. mix
and dilate to volume for a concentration of
IS ng/iiL. Add 10 pL of this surrogate spiking
solution directly into the 5-mL syringe with
every sample and reference standard ana-
lyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate spiking solu-
tion on a weekly basis. If the internal stand-
ard calibration procedure is being used, the
surrogate compounds may be added directly
to the  internal standard spiking solution
(Section 7.4.2).
                            ation.and
    9. Sample Collection, Pr
                Handling

  9.1  All samples  must  be  iced  or refrig-
erated from the time of collection until anal-
ysis. If the sample contains free or combined
chlorine, add  sodium thiosnlfate lueseiva-
ttve (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for  up to 5
ppm CU) to the empty sample bottle Just
prior to shipping to the «*»»pn«nr site. EPA
 Methods  830.4 and 330.5  may be used  for
 measurement of residual chlorine.* Field test
 kits are available for this purpose.
   9.2 Grab samples must be collected in
 glass containers having a total volume of at
 least 25 ml*  Pill  the sample bottle Just to
 overflowing in such a  manner that no air
 bubbles pass through the  sample as the bot-
 tle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no
 air  bubbles are entrapped in it. If preserva-
 tive has been added, shake vigorously for 1
 min. MHr**1" the hermetic seal on the sam-
 ple  bottle nrttM time of analysis.
   9.3  All samples must be analysed within
 14 days of collection.*

               10. Procedure
   10.1  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
 operating  conditions  for  the gas  chro-
 matograph. Included in this  table are esti-
 mated retention times and MDL that can be
 achieved under these conditions. An example
 of the separations achieved by Column 1  is
 shown in Figure 5. Other packed columns.
 chromatographic  conditions, or detectors
 may be used if the requirements .of Section
 8.2  are met.
   10.2  Calibrate  the  system daily as de-
 scribed in Section 7.
   10.3  Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or he-
 lium)  flow  rate  to 40 mLflmin. Attach the
 trap inlet to the purging device, and set the
 purge and trap system to purge (Figure  3).
 Open the syringe valve located on the purg-
 ing device sample introduction needle.
   10.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient
  temperature prior to  introducing it to the
  syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL sy-
  ringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open
  the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully
  pour the sample into the syringe  barrel to
             Pt. 136, App. X McS>- 601

Just short of overflowing. Replace the sy-   .
rlnge plunger and cbmprsii the sample. Open
the syringe valve and vent any residual air
while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL.
Since this process of taking? an aliquot de-
stroys the validity of the sample for future
analysis, the analyst should fill a second sy-
ringe at this time to protect against possible
loss of data. Add 10.0 pL of the surrogate
spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 10.0 |iL of
the Internal standard spiking solution (Sec-
tion 7.4.2), if applicable, through the valve
bore, then close the valve.
  10.5  Attach the syringe-syringe valve as-
sembly to the syringe valve on the purging
device. Open.the syringe valves and inject
the sample into the purging chamber.
  10.6  Cloee both valves and purge the sam-
ple for 'll.0±0.1 min at ambient temperature.
  10.7  After the 11-min purge time, attach
the  trap to the chromatograph, adjust the
purge and trap  system to the desorb mode
(Figure 4), and begin to temperature pro-
gram the gas chromatograph. Introduce the
trapped materials to the QC column by rap-
Idly heating  the  trap to  180  "C  while
baokfliiiiMtig the trap with an inert gas be-
tween 20 and 60 T"T^mi« for 4 min. If rapid
heating of the trap cannot be achieved, the
QC  column must be used as a  secondary
 trap by cooling It to 30 «C (subamblent tern-   .
perature. if poor peak geometry or random
retention time problems persist) instead of
the t«««*ai program temperature of 45 *C
  10.8  While the trap Is being deeorbed into
the gas chromatograpb, empty the purging
oframvw aging the sample introduction sy-
ringe. Wash the  chamber with  two 5-mL
 flushes of reagent water.
   10.9  After desorbing the sample for 4 min.
 recondition the trap by returning the purge
 and trap system to the purge mode. Walt 15
 s then close the syringe valve on the purging
 device to begin gas flow through the trap.
 The trap  temperature  should  be  main-
 tained at 180 "C After approximately 7 min.
 turn off the trap heater and open the syringe
 valve to stop the gas flow through the trap.
 When the trap is cool, the next sample can
 be analyzed.
   1010  Identify the parameters in the sam-
 ple by comparing the retention times of the
 peaks in  the  sample chromatogram with
 those .of  the   peaks    in   standard
 chromatograms. The width of the retention
 time window used to make identifications
  should be  based upon measurements of ac-
  tual retention time variations of standards
  over  the course of a day.  Three times the
  standard deviation of a retention time for a
  compound can be used to calculate a sug-
  gested window size; however, the experience
  of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
  Interpretation of chromatograms.
    10.11 If the response for a peak  exceeds
  the working range of the system, prepare a
  dilution of the sample with reagent water
                                           653

-------
 n. too, App. /s rvivm. ou i
 from tlit aliquot in the second syringe and
 reanslyse.

              XI. CoJculottoTU
,   11.1  Determine the concentration of Indi-
.vidual oompoonds in the sample.
   114.1  If the external standard calibration
 procedure is used,  calculate the concentra-
 tion of the parameter being measured from
 the peak response  using the  calibration
 curve  or calibration  factor determined in
 Section 7.8A
   11.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
 procedure is used,  calculate the concentra-
 tion in the sample  using the response factor
 (RF) determined in Section 7.4.3 and  Equa-
 tion 2.
   Equation 2
      Concentration (iig/L)
 where:
  A*sRstponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  AfcBResponse for the internal standard.
  Cfc*Concentration of the internal standard.
  11.2 Report results in |ig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

           12. Method Performance
  12.1 The  method detection limit (HDL) is
 defined as the minimum  concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with »% confidence that the value is above
 xero.1 The  HDL  concentration  listed  in
 Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.".
 Similar  results   were   achieved  using
 representative waatewaten. The MDL actu-
 ally achieved in a given analysis will  vary
 depending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
 trix effects.
       This method is recommended for use
 in the concentration range from the MDL to
 IQOOxMDL. Direct  aqueous  injection  tech-
 niques shotfld be used to measure concentra-
 tion levels above lOOQxMDL.
  12.3 This method was tested by 20 labora-
 tories using reagent water,  drinking water.
 surface   water,   and   three   industrial.
 wastewaters spiked at six. concentrations
 over the range 8.0 to COO »ig/L.» Single opera-
 tor precision, overall precision, and method
 accuracy were found to be directly related to
 the  concentration of the parameter and es-
 sentially Independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are. presented in Table 3.

                References
  1.40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2. Bellar. T.A.. and Idchtenberg. J.J. "De-
termining Volatile  Organlcs at Microgfram-
per-Lltre-Levela by Gas Chromatography."
Journal of the American Water Works Associa-
tion, 66,739 (MM).
  3.  Bellar.  T.A.,  and  Llchtenberg, J.J.
"Semi-Automated  Headspace Analysis  of
Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for
Purgeable  Volatile  Organic Compounds."
Proceedings from Symposium on Measure-
ment of Organic Pollutants in Water and
Waatewater,  American Society for Testing
and Materials. STP 686. C.E. Van Hall, edi-
tor, 1978.
  4.  "Carcinogens—Working  With Carcino-
gens," Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare,  Public  Health Service, Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-206, August 1077.
  5.  "OSHA Safety and  Health Standards.
General Industry" (29 CFR part 1910). Occu-
pational  Safety and Health Administration,
OSHA 2206 (Revised. January 1976).
  6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories." American Chemical Society Publica-
tion. Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd
Edition. 1979.
  7. Provost. L.P.. and Elder, R.8.  "interpre-
tation of Percent Recovery Data." American
Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983).  (The  value 2.44
used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  8. "Methods 330.4  (Titrimetric, DPD-PA8)
and  330.5  (Spectrophotometric.  DPD) for
Chlorine.  Total  Residual."  Methods for
Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA
600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
port Laboratory.  Cincinnati.  Ohio  45268,
March 1979.       ,
  9.  "EPA  Method  Study 24. Method  601—
Purgeable Halocarbons by  the  Purge and
Trap Method."  EPA 600/4-84-064. National
Technical Information Service, PB84-212448,
Springfield. Virginia 22161. July 1984.
  10. "Method  Validation  Data for  EPA
Method 601," Memorandum from  B. Potter,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, En-
vironmental  Monitoring and Support Lab-
oratory, Cincinnati. Ohio 45268. November 10.
1983.
  11. Bellar.  T.  A.. Unpublished  data, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Environ-
mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory.
Cincinnati. Ohio 45268,1981.
                                         654

-------
envtonmontal Protection Agoncy
Pt.
         TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPWC CONOTTIONS AND METHC» DETECTION Uwns

PuMMOar
etiloroiMtfun*




























RMMMon tkiw (nibi)
Cohmnl
140
2.17
242
247
343
7.18
743
940
10.1
10.7
134
13.7
144
162
154
164
164
184
192
214
21.7
242
344
344
364
Column 1 condMont; CarbOMCfc B MO/BO «"••"[«•'•* *g» 1* g'"10"?,?^??
OtMS column «rth h*lum onto gat at 40 mUnto tar rate. Column Mmpmfcn Md
Cchmn2
528
746
nd
528
848
10.1
nd
7.72
124
948
1Z1
164
13.1
144
144
184
184
13.1
164
184
nd
192
nd
154
184
22.4
234
224

048
1.16
141
0.18
042
nd
. 0.13
047
0.10
046
043
0.12
aio
044
044
0.12
049
on?
ais
020
043
043
026
0.16
024

rt 45 *C tor 3 n*i ttwn fto^mm,^a H 8
                    (W0rt» me*)
 umn wHh htfum cwriv got •! 4O 
-------
pf. 136, App. A, Moth. 601
                                                       40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edmon)
  P.
                            	AS&gft*!
          fKovtrf tor tour narMynmm\nmm\\i, jn pyL jSeOJon
           raw* Rutte
                                                    I.
  Nan: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data In Table 3.
Where necessary. the limits for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the
limits to concentrations below those used to develop Table 3.

 TABLE 3.— METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION— METHOD 601
                                                Accuracy. •> r»-
                                                omvy.X'big^)
                                                                           OWMI praoWan,
     rtcNc
                                               096C-2JS
      MthVW
                                                            0.11X«O04
                                                            0.12X40^8
                                                            O28X4O27
                                                                            021X4^41
                                                                            OJ6X4WJ04
Chtorob
                                               O96C-1.04
                                               1.00C-123
ChQRMlhBM
                                                            0.1SX-OQ2
                                                            ai4x-ai3
2OtowtiyMny1«(h<
CMorotoiTn _—
ChtoramMhm	
QbRMOCMORXMttlM
                                               1J30C
                                               O94C«2.72
                                               O93C*1.70
                                                            0.13X40.15
                                                            O2BX— (L31
                                                            0.11X4-1.10
                                                                            0.17X«OjB3
                                                                            O3SX
                                                                            0.19X-OJB
                                                                            O24&4.1J6S
                                                                            0.13X4«.13
1.14**HOR*h«w
I^WcN
1,1*OchlORM«WM
mwl^OfcMo
1^OfcWoroprop«n«'
          DfXCfM
taravl^OicMoropropWM*
MWhytamcMockte	
1,1A2-T*acrao
T*ncMtttai*m»
1',1,1-TikMoc
1,1^-TrieMor
                                               09SC-000
                                               (L96C-1.M
                                               1.04C-1D6
                                               (Xfiec- OJ7
                                               O07C-0.1B
                                               1.00C
                                               1JOC
                                               1.00C
                                               OB1C-OJ3
                                               096&I0.19
                                               OMC4006
                                               OfiOC-0.16
                                                jBAtQJO
                                               087C4048
                                               aeec-aor
                                               O97C-O36
                                                            0.15X44X29
                                                            OJKX40.17
                                                            0.11X40.70
                                                            OJ21X-023
                                                            0.11X4-1.46
                                                            0.13X
                                                            0.18X
                                                            0.18X
                                                            0.11X40J33
                                                            0.14X42X1
                                                            ai4x«aae
                                                            0.1SX«OJO«
                                                            0.13X-ai4
                                                            0.13X-O03
                                                            0.15X40.67
                                                            0.13X40J6
                                                                            0.14X«OA4
                                                                            0.17X4.1^46
                                                                            OJ3X
                                                                            OJ2X
                                                                            CL32X
                                                                            O23X42J*
                                                                            O26X4O41
                          fddwMk)
)t'*Expactid raooMty for OM or n
•.'•ExpccMd alngto amlyM tttndf
8*-E*»clKl \rttrtHxntorf stMKted dMtaUo
Q»Tn» vikM tor ttw oonomMion. In no/L.
XMvano* raoomy found tor imMuranMnte ol i
                                  of
                                  i of
                                       I0f««
                 « «M pcrtormMM In • aingto tabcntocy.
                                             ^tcoanMninga	
                                               •t an Mragc concentration found
                                               at n •Mrag* oononMaon found of

                                               ng • conoantntlon of C. in itpA-
                                                                            in|i0(L.
                                            656

-------
Environmental Ptotocitert Agoney
                                     PI. 136, App. A, Moth. 601
     OPTIONAL
     FOAM
     TRAP
                   EXIT V* IN.
                       0. D.

                  —14MM 0. D,

                   INLET 1/4 IN.
                        0. D.
0. D. EXIT
                         SAMPLE INLET
                                 * -
                         2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
                         17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

                             . 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM

                             10MM. 0. D.     1/16 IN. O.D.
                                        \ySTAINLESS STEa
                               INLET
                                 IN. 0. D.
      10MM GLASS FRIT
      MEDIUM POROSITY
                                           13X MOLECULAR
                                           SIEVE PURGE
                                           GAS FILTER
                                              PURGE GAS
                                              FLOW
                                              CONTROL
                  Figure 1. Purging device.
                              657

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 601

       PACKING PROCEDURE
                                 40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

                          CONSTRUCTION
      GLASS
      WOOL
  ACTIVATED, „„ .
  CHARCOAL 7.7CM
          4
  GRADE 15
  SILICA GEL
           7.7CM
TENAX  7.7 CM
  GLASS

            1
     7 A /FOOT
   RESISTANCE
 WIRE WRAPPED
      SOLID
(DOUBLE LAYER)
                          15CM.
     7~/FOOT4-
   RESISTANCE
  WIRE WRAPPED
        SOLID
 (SINGLE LAYER)
         8CNH
               TRAP INLET
COMPRESSION
FITTING NUT
AND FERRULES
    *   • .

 THERMOCOUPLE/
 CONTROLLER
 SENSOR
                                         ELECTRONIC
                                         TEMPERATURE
                                         CONTROL
                                         AND
                                         PYROMETER
                                          I TUBING 25CM
                                          / 0.105 IN. I.D.
                                           0.125 IN. O.D.
                                           STAINLESS STE
       Figure 2. Trap packings and construction to include
                 desorb capability
                             658

-------
           Protection AQoncy
 CARRIER GAS FLOW CONTROL
PRESSURE REGULATOR
                          UQU.P
PURGE GAS
FLOW CONTROL \|—
13X MOLECULAR
SIEVE FILTER
                                          .— CONFIRMATORY COLUMN
                                           TO DETECTOR
                                           *-- ANALYTICAL COLUMN
                                  OPTIONAL 4-PORT COLUMN
                           . ~~~ SELECTION VALVE
                           6-PORT   TRAP INLET
                            VA/VLrf// RESISTANCE WIRE

                            /S
                                                  HEATER CONTROL
                                    PURGING
                                    DEVICE
                                            Not«:ALL LINES BETWEEN
                                               TRAP AND GC
                                               SHOULD BE HEATED
                                               TO 80T
           Figure 3. Purge and trap system-purge mode.
           CARRIER GAS
           FLOW CONTROL
    PRESSURE
    REGULATOR
  PURGE GAS  V(_i
  FLOW CONTROLJj


   13X MOLECULAR
   SIEVE FILTER
                                         I    CONRRMATORY COLUMN
                                         DTD DETECTOR
                                	f ^-ANALYTICAL COLUMN
                                OPTIONAL 4*ORT COLUMN
                                SELECTION VALVE
                            6-PORT  TRAP INLET
                            VALV^*SISTANCE™RE   HEATER
                             ^T    TRAP /^^ CONTROL
                              IFLOW!—TBQOC
                                    PURGING
                                    DEVICE
                                                Note:
                                                ALL LINES BETWEEN
                                                TRAP AND GC
                                                SHOULD BE HEATED
                                                TO 80°C.
       Figure 4. Purge and trap system - desorb mode.
                                659

-------
                   owi
                                                **!"•» ***•• • \*~|—>w taMMrw*!
  CO
See

  s
 |C3 ut
       3NVH130U01H3VU131-Z 'Z 'I'I
                               ^i^^

          3NVdCWdOa01HOIHi-e 7 'I
                       -2 4i


       3NVHi30U01H3l}U -I'l'




  3N3H13OaO1HDia-Z'



      3N3H130a01HDia-t'l
    3NVH13WOUO1HO
           3N3dOUdOU01H3IQ-£'l • sum

           3N3dOUdOU01HOIQ-E'l - <
                                  660

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
             ft. 136, App. A.
                                              602
    METHOD 002—POROEABLE ABOMATXCS

          /. Scops and Application

  1.1  This method covers the determination
of various purgeable aromatics. The follow-
ing parameters may be determined by this
method:
CMorabMiM*,
1,4-OlcMarebMaM
Bhyfcenana	
TokMiw --,,••..-.........
                         STORET
                           Na
                           34030
                           34301
                           34638
                           34668
                           34671
                           34371
                           34010
CAS No.
 71-43-4
108-85-7'
 96-60-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
100-41-4
108-68-3
  1.2  This  is  a  purge  and  trap 'gas
chromatographic (OC) method applicable to
the determination of the compounds listed
above in municipal and industrial discharges
as provided under 40 CPU 136.1.  When this
method is used  to analyze
ples for any or all of the compounds above.
compound  identifications  should  be  sup-
ported by at least one additional Qualitative
technique. This method describes analytical
conditions for a second gas chromatographic
column that can be used to confirm measure-
ments made with the primary column. Meth-
od  624 provides  gas chromatograph/mass
spectrometer  (OG/M8)   conditions appro-
priate for the qualitative and quantitative
confirmation of results for all of the param-
eters listed above.
  1.3  The method detection limit (MDI*. de-
fined in Section 12.1) « for each parameter Is
listed  In Table 1. The  MDL  for a specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of interferences  in
the sample matrix.
  1.4  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a major modification subject  to
application and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 13&5.
  1.5  This method is restricted to use  by  or
under the  supervision  of  analysts experi-
enced In the operation  of a purge  and trap
system and a gas chromatograph and in the
interpretation of gas chromatograms.  Each
analyst must demonstrate the ability to gen-
erate acceptable  results with this method
using the procedure described in Section 8.2.

           2. Summary of Method

-• 2.1  An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mI*
water sample contained In a specially-de-
signed purging chamber at ambient tempera-
ture. The . aromatics are efficiently  trans-
ferred from the aqueous phase to the  vapor
phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent
trap where the aromatics are trapped. After
purging is completed, the trap is heated and
backflushed with the Inert gas to desorb. the
aromatics  onto a gas chromatographic col-
umn. The gas ehromatogmph is temperature
programmed  to  separate the  aromatics
which    are   then   detected,   with   a
photoionixatlon detector.2-3
  &2 The method provides an optional gas
chromatographic column that may be help-
ful in resolving  the  compounds of interest
from interferences that may occur.

              3. Interferences
  3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and  or-
ganic compounds ontgaseisg from the plumb-
ing ahead of the trap account for the major-
ity of contamination problems. The analyt-
ical system must be demonstrated to be free
from contamination under the  conditions of
the analysis by running laboratory reagent
blanks as described In Section 8.1*3. The use
of  non-Teflon plastic  tubing. non-Teflon
thread sealants, or flow controllers with rub-
ber components in the purge and trap system
should be avoided.
  32 Samples can be contaminated by diffu-
sion of volatile organics through the septum
tmp-1 into tfliE sample during shipment and
storage. A field reagent blank prepared from
reagent water and carried through the sam-
pling and handling protocol can serve as a
check on such contamination.
  3.3 Contamination  by   carry-over  can
occur whenever high level and low level sam-
ples are sequentially analysed. To reduce
carry-over, the purging device and sample
syringe  must be rinsed with reagent  water
between sample analyses. Whenever an un-
usually  concentrated sample is encountered.
it Should be followed by an analysis of rea-
gent water to check for cross contamination.
For samples containing large amounts  of
water-eolnble  materials,  suspended  solids,
high boiling compounds or high aromatic
levels, it may be neceBmry to wash the purg-
ing device with a detergent solution, rinse it
with distilled water, and then dry it in  an
oven at 105 *C between analyses. The trap and
other parts of the system are also subject to
contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout
and purging of the entire system may be  re-
quired.

                 4. Safety

  4J. The  toxlclty  or  carcinogenicity  of
each reagent used In this method has not
been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
cal compound should be treated as a  poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint,  ex-
posure to these chemical* must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever  means
available. The laboratory is responsible  for
             a  current awareness  file of
          OSHA regulations regarding the safe han-
          dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
          od. A reference file of material data handling
          sheets should also be made available to all
          personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
          Additional references, to laboratory  safety
                                         661

-------
 W. 136, App. A, MOffl. 602
cn. i (7-
                                 fcomon)
 *re available and have been identified4-* for
 the information of the analyst.
  4.2 The following  parameters covered by
 this method have been tentatively classified
 at  known  or  suspected,  human or  mam-
 malian   carcinogens:   benzene  and   1,4-
 dlchlorobenzene. Primary standards of these
 toxic compounds should be .prepared  in  a
 hood.  A  NIOSH/MESA  approved toxic gas
 reiplrator should be  worn when the analyst
 handles high concentrations of .these toxic
 compounds.

         • 5. Apparatus and Materials
  5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sam-
 pling.
  5.1.1  VialJ25-mL   capacity  or   larger,
 equipped with a screw cap with a hole in the
 center  (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Deter-
 gent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water.
 and dry at 106 *C before use.
  5.1.2  Septum—Teflon-faced      • silicons
 (Pierce  #12722  or  equivalent).  Detergent
 wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and
 dry at 105'C for 1 h before use.
  &2 Purge and trap system—The purge and
. trap system consists of three separate pieces
 of  equipment: A  purging  device, trap,  and
 desorber. Several complete systems  are now
 commercially available.
  &3.1  The purging device must be designed
 to accept 6-mIi samples with a water column
 at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space
 between the water column and the trap must
 have a  total volume of less than 15 mL. The
 purge gas must pass  through the water col-
 umn as finely divided bubbles with a diame-
 ter  of  less than  3 mm at the origin. The
 purge gas must be introduced no more than
 5 mm from the  base of the water  column.
 The purging device illustrated in Figure 1
 meets these design criteria.
  5JL2  The trap must be at least 25 cm long
 and have  an inside diameter of at least 0.105
 in.
  5.2.2.1 The trap is packed with 1 cm of
 methyl silloone  coated packing (Section
 6.4.2) and 23 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide poly-
 mer (Section 6.4.1) as shown in Figure 2. This
 trap was used to develop the  method per-
 formance statements in Section 12.
  5.2.2.2 Alternatively,  either  of the  two
 traps described in Method 601 may  be used,
 although water vapor will preclude the meas-
 urement of low concentrations of benzene.
  5.2.3  The deeorber  must be capable of rap-
 idly heating the trap to 180 "C. The  polymer
 section of the  trap  should not  be heated
 higher  than ISO *C and the remaining sec-
 tions should not exceed 200 *C. The  desorber
 illustrated in Figure.2 meets  these design
 criteria.
  5.2.4  The purge and trap system may be
 assembled as a separate unit or be coupled to
 a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Fig-
 ures 3.4, and 5.
  5.3  Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
system complete with.a temperature  pro-
grammable gas chromatograph suitable for
dn-column injection and all required acces-
sories including  syringes,  analytical  col-
umns, gases, detector, and strip-chart re-
corder. A data system is recommended for
measuring peak areas. >.
  5.3.1 .Column 1—6  ft. long x 0.082  in. ID
stainless  steel or glass, packed with 5% 8P-
1200 and  1.75% Bentone-34  on Supelcoport
(100/120 mesh) or equivalent.  This column
was used  to develop the method performance
statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the
use of alternate column  packings are  pro-
vided in Section 10.1.
  5.3.2 . Column 2—8 ft long x 0.1 in ID stain-
less steel or glass, packed with 5% 1&3-
Tris(2-cyanoethoxy)propane  on Chrpmosorb
W-AW (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
  5.3.3. Detector—Photoionlzation  detector
(h-Nu Systems, Inc. Model PI-51-02 or equiv-
alent). This type of detector has been proven
effective  in the analysis of wastewatera for
the parameters listed in the scope (Section
1.1), and was used to develop the method per-.
fonnance statements in Section 12. Guide-
lines for  the use of alternate  detectors are
provided in Section 10.1.
  5.4  Syringes—6-tnL glass hypodermic with
Luerlok tip  (two each), if applicable  to the
purging device.
  5.5  Micro syringes—25-|iL. 0.006 in. ID nee-
dle.
  5.6  Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer  ends
(three each).   .
  5.7  Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with  Teflon
cap liner.                           .
  5.8  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.

                6. Reagents
 .6.1  Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in which an interferent is
not observed at the MDL of the parameters
of Interest.
  6.1.1 Reagent water can be  generated by
passing tap water through a carbon filter bed
containing about 1 Ib of activated carbon
(Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
  6.1.2 A   -water   purification   system
(Mllllpore Super-Q or equivalent) may be
used to generate reagent water.
  6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared
by  boiling water for 15 min.  Subsequently.
while maintaining the temperature at 90 •C,
.bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through
the water for  1 h. While still hot, transfer
the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bot-
tle and seal  with a Teflon-lined septum and
cap.
  6.2  Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
  6.3  Hydrochloric acid (1+1>—Add 50 mL of
concentrated HC1 (ACS) to 50 mL of reagent
water.
  6.4  Trap Materials:
                                          662

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  6.4.1  2,6-Diphenylene   oxide   polymer—.
Tenaz,. (GO/BO mesh), chromatographic grade
or equivalent.                 .     •      .
  6.4.2  Methyl silicone packing:—3% OV-1 on
•Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
  6.5  Methanql—Pesticide quality or equiv-
alent.
  6.6  Stock   standard   solutions—Stock
standard  .solutions  may  be prepared  from
pure standard materials or purchased as cer-
tified solutions. Prepare stock standard solu-
tions in methanol using assayed liquids. Be-
cause of the tozicity of benzene  and 1,4-
dichlorobenzene. primary dilutions  of these
materials should be prepared  in a  hood. A
NIO8H/MESA approved toxic gas respirator
should  be used when the  analyst  handles
high concentrations of such materials.
  6.6.1  Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into
a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric
flask. Allow the flask  to stand, unstoppered,
for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted
surfaces have dried. Weigh the flask to the
nearest 0.1 mg.
  6.&2  Using a 100-fiL syringe, immediately
add two or more drops of assayed reference
material to the flask,  then reweigh. Be sure
that  the drops fall directly into the alcohol
without contacting the neck of the flask.
  6.6.3  Reweigh. dilute to volume,  stopper,
then  mix by  inverting  the.  flask  several
times. Calculate the concentration  in |ig/|iL
from the net gain in weight. When compound
purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared  stock standards
can be used at any concentration if  they are
certified by the manufacturer or by  an inde-
pendent source.  •
  6.6.4  Transfer the stock standard  solution
into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store
at 4 *C and protect from light.
•  6.6J»  All standards must be replaced after
one month, or sooner if comparison with
check standards indicates a problem.
  6.7  Secondary dilution standards—Using
stock standard  solutions, prepare secondary
dilution standards in methanol that contain
the compounds of interest,  either singly or
mixed  together.  The secondary  dilution
standards should be prepared at  concentra-
tions such  that  the aqueous  calibration
standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1
will bracket the working range of  the ana-
lytical system. Secondary solution standards
must be stored with zero headspace and
should be checked frequently for  signs  of
 degradation or evaporation, especially just
 prior to preparing calibration standards from
 them.
   6.8 Quality control check sample con-
 centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7.  CoHiratton
   7.1  Assemble a purge and trap system that
 meets the specifications in Section  5.2. Con-
              Pt. 136, App. A, Meta. 602

dition the  trap overnight  at 180  *C by
backflushing with an inert gas flow of at
least 20 mL/min. Condition the trap for  10
min once daily prior to use.
  7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to
a   gas  chrbmatograph.  The  gas   chro-
matograph must be operated using tempera-
ture and flow rate conditions equivalent to
those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge
and trap-gas chromatographic system using
either the external standard technique (Sec-
tion 7.3) or the  internal standard technique
(Section 7.4).
  7.3 External  standard calibration  proce-
dure:
  7.3.1 Prepare  calibration  standards at a
minimum of three  concentration levels for
each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 |iL of
one or more secondary dilution standards to
100, 500, or 1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-pL
syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be
used for this operation. One of the external
standards should be at a concentration near.
but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other
concentrations should correspond to the ex-
pected range of  concentrations found in real
samples or should define the working range
of  the  detector. These  aqueous standards
must be prepared fresh daily.
  7.3.2 Analyze  each calibration  standard
according to Section 10. and tabulate peak
height or  area  responses  versus  the  con-
centration in the standard. The results can
be  used to  prepare a calibration curve .for
each compound.  Alternatively, if the ratio of
response to concentration (calibration fac*
tor) is a .constant  over the  working range
(<10% relative standard deviation. BSD), lin-
earity through  the  origin can be  assumed
and the average ratio or calibration factor
can be used in place of a calibration curve.
  7.4 Internal  standard calibration  proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
.select one or more internal standards that
are similar  in  analytical behavior to the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the internal  standard is  not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations, no internal standard can
be  suggested that is applicable to all  sam-
ples. The compound, aAO,-trlfluorotoluene,
recommended   as   a   surrogate   spiking
compound in Section 8.7 has been used suc-
• cessfully as an internal standard.
  7.4.1  Prepare calibration standards  at  a
minimum  of three concentration levels for
each parameter of interest as described in
Section 7.3.1.
  7.4.2  Prepare a spiking solution contain-
ing each of the Internal standards using the
procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7.
It  is recommended that'the secondary dilu-
tion standard be prepared at a concentration
of   15  iig/mL  of  each  internal  standard
compound. The addition  of 10 |iT  of this

-------
W. 136, App. A, Melh. 602

standard to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration
standard would be equivalent to 30 |ig/L.
  7.4.3  Analyze  each calibration  standard
according' to Section 10, adding 10 |iL of in-
ternal standard* spiking  solution directly to
the syringe (Section 10.4).  Tabulate peak
height or area responses against concentra-
tion for each compound and internal stand-
ard, and calculate response factors (BF) for
ftgfft compound T'ffoB' Equation 1.
                    (AuXC.)
                               Equation 1

where:
  A«*Besponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Afe«Besponse for the internal standard.
  Ctt*Conoentration of the internal standard
  C.»Conoentration. of the  parameter to be
    measured.
If the BF value over the working range is a
constant (<10% BSD), the BF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average BF can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults can be used to plot a  calibration curve
of response ratios, AJAu, vs. BF.
  7.5 The working calibration curve,  cali-
bration factor, or BF must  be verified on
each working day by the measurement of a
QC check sample.
  7.5.1 Prepare the QC  check sample as de-
scribed in Section 8JL2.
  7J>Jt Analyze the QC cheek sample accord-
ing to Section* 10.
  7Jx3 For each parameter, compare the re-
sponse (Q) with  the  corresponding  calibra-
tion acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If
the responses for all  parameters  of  Interest
fall within the designated ranges, analysis of
actual samples can begin. If any individual Q
falls outside  the range, a new  calibration
 curve, calibration factor, or BF must be pre-
 pared for that parameter according to Sec-
 tion 7.3 or 7.4.

             8. Quality Control

   8.1 f$*f** laboratory that uses this method
 is required to operate a formal quality con-
 trol program. The Tn<*«<™"»  requirements
 of this program consist of'an initial dem-
 onstration of laboratory capability and an
 ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaln-
* ate and document data quality. The labora-
 tory must w»«"t-AiT» records to document the
 quality  of data  that is generated.  Ongoing
 data quality checks are compared  with es-
 tablished performance  criteria to determine
 if the results of analyses meet the  perform-
 •anoe characteristics of the method. When re-
 sults of sample spikes  indicate  atypical
 method performance, a quality control check
 standard most be analyzed  to confirm that
          40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

the measurements were performed in an in-
control mode of operation.
  8.1.1  The  analyst must make an initial,
one-time, demonstration of the  ability' to
generate acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2  In recognition of advances that are
occurring in chromatography. the analyst is
permitted certain  options (detailed in Sec-
tion 10.1) to improve the separations or lower
the cost of measurements. Each time such a
modification is made to the method, the ana-
lyst is required to repeat the procedure in
Section 8.2.
  8.1.3  Each day. the analyst must analyze a
reagent water  blank to demonstrate  that
interferences from the analytical system are
under control.
  8.1.4  The  laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a mirtmnm of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.3,
  8.1.5  The  laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through  the  analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This procedure is described in Section
8.4. The frequency of the  check standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from  samples  (Section 8.3) meet  all
specified quality control criteria.
  8J.6   The laboratory  must maintain per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
  62  To establish the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and' precision, the ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
                                                   A quality control (QC) check sample
                                            concentrate is required containing each pa-
                                            rameter of interest at a concentration of 10.
                                            Hf/rnT.  in methanol. The QC check sample .
                                            concentrate must be obtained from the U.8.
                                            Environmental Protection Agency. Environ- .
                                            mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
                                            in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not avail-
                                            able from that source, the QC check sample
                                            concentrate must be obtained from another
                                            external source. If not available from either
                                            source above, the QC  check sample  con-
                                            centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
                                            qytog  stock  standards  prepared independ-
                                            ently from those used for calibration.
                                              8^2 Prepare a QC check sample to con-
                                            tain 20 jig/L of each parameter by adding  200
                                            pL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL
                                            of reagant water.
                                              8^3 Analyze  four 5-mL  aliqnots of the
                                            well-mixed QC check sample according to
                                            Section 10.
                                              8£.4  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
                                            lig/L. and the standard deviation of the  re-
                                            covery (s) in MS/L. for each parameter of in-
                                            teract using toe four results.
                                          664

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  8.2.5 'For each parameter compare s and X
with  the 'corresponding acceptance criteria
for precision -and accuracy,  respectively.
found In Table 2. If a and X for all param-
eters of Interest meet  the  acceptance cri-
teria. the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the  precision limit
or any  individual  X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that parameter.
  'NOTE: The large number of parameters  in
Table 2 present a  substantial probability
that  one or more will fall at least one of the
acceptance criteria when  all  parameters are
analyzed.
  8.2.6  When one or more of the parameters
tested fail at least one of the acceptance cri-
teria, the analyst must proceed according to
Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.    .
  8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the  source  of
the problem and repeat the  test for all pa-
rameters of  interest beginning with Section
  8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8 A3. repeat
 the test only  for  those  parameters  that
 failed  to meet  criteria. Repeated failure.
 however, will confirm  a  general problem
 with the measurement system. If this occurs.
 locate and correct the source of the problem
 and repeat the test for all compounds of In-
 terest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
  8.3 The laboratory must, oh an ongoing
 basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
 each sample site being monitored to assess
 accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
 ten samples per month, at least one spiked
 sample per month is required.
   8.3.1  The concentration of the spike in the
 sample should be determined as follows:
   8.3.1.1  If,  as  in  compliance  monitoring,
 the concentration of a specific parameter in
 the sample is being checked against a regu-
 latory concentration limit, the  spike should
 be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
 the background concentration determined In
 Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
 be larger.
   8.3.1.2  If the concentration of a specific
 parameter  in  the  sample  is  not   being
 checked against a limit specific to that pa-
 rameter. the spike should be at 20 |ig/L or 1
 to 5 times higher than the background con-
 centration  determined  in  Section  8.3.2.
 whichever concentration would be larger.
   8.3.2  Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to
 determine the background concentration (B)
 of each parameter. If necessary, prepare  a
 new QC check sample concentrate (Section
 8.2.1)  appropriate for the background con-
 centrations in  the sample. Spike a second 5-
 mL sample  aliquot with  10 i»L of the QC
 check sample concentrate and analyze it to
 determine the  concentration after spiking
  (A) of each  parameter. Calculate each per-
cent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is
the known true value of the spike.
  8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter  with the  corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found  in Table 2. These
acceptance criteria were  calculated to in-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, ftwroming a spike to background  ratio
of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent that the analyst's spike to  back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.7 If spiking was
performed at a concentration lower than 20
lig/L, the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 2. or optional QC •
acceptance criteria calculated for the spe-
cific spike concentration. To calculate op-
tional acceptance criteria  for the recovery of
a parameter:  (1)  Calculate  accuracy (X*)
using the equation in Table  3, substituting
the spike concentration (T)  for C; (2) cal-
culate overall precision (S') using the  equa-
tion in Table 3, substituting X' for X; (3) cal-
culate the range for recovery at the  spike
concentration as (100 X'/T) ± 2.44(100 SVT)%.7
  8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
designated range for recovery, that param-
eter has failed  the acceptance criteria. A
check standard  containing each parameter
that failed the criteria must be analyzed as.
described in Section 8.4.
  8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria for recovery in  Section 8.3,  a  QC
check standard  containing each parameter
that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTK The frequency for the required anal-
ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
the number of parameters  being  simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the labora-
tory.
  8.4.1. Prepare  the QC check standard by
ftfrflug 10 jiL of QC check sample concentrate
(Section 8.2.1 or 8^2) to 5  mL of reagent
water. The QC check standard needs only to
contain the parameters that failed criteria
 in the test in Section 8.3.
   8.4.2 Analyze the QC  check  standard to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
 covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%.  where T Is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
   8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery  (P.)
 for each parameter with the corresponding
 QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
 parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
 need to be compared with these criteria. If
  the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
  side the  designated range,  the laboratory
  performance for that parameter is Judged to
  be out of control, and the problem must  be
  Immediately identified and  corrected. The
  analytical result for that parameter  in the
  unspiked sample is suspect  and may  not be
  reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
   8.5 As part of the QC program for the lab-
  oratory,  method  accuracy  for wastewater
                                           665

-------
W. 136, App. A, M«!h. 602

samples must be asiessod and records must
be maintain^ i After the analysis of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8J3.
calculate the average percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (a,). Bjuyess the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from P-2a, to
P+2v If P*90V« and 8p=10V., for example, the
accuracy interval is expressed as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a  regular basis  (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6  it is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and .the nature of
the samples. Field duplicates may be ana-
lysed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements. When doubt  exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matograni. confirmatory techniques such as
gas chromatography with a dissimilar col-
umn, specific  element detector,  or mass
spectrometer must be used. Whenever pos-
sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
reference materials and participate in rel-
evant performance evaluation studies.
  8.7  The analyst should monitor both the
performance of the  analytical system and
the effectiveness of the method in dealing
with each sample matrix by spiking each
sample, standard, and reagent water blank
with surrogate compounds  (e.g.  0,0,0*-
trifluorotoluene) that  encompass the range
of  the temperature program used  in this
method. From stock standard solutions pre-
pared as in Section 6.6. add a volume to give"
760 |ig of each surrogate to 45 mL of reagent
water contained in a 50-mL volumetric flask.
mHy and dilute to-volume for a concentration
of 15 mg/iiL. Add 10 ML of this surrogate spik-
ing solution directly into the 5-mL syringe
with every sample and reference standard
analyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate spiking
solution on a weekly  basis. If the internal
standard calibration procedure is being used.
the surrogate  compounds may be added di-
rectly to the internal standard spiking solu-
 tion (Section 7.4.2).

     9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                 Handling

   9.1  The samples must be iced pr refrig-
 erated from the time of collection until anal-
 ysis. If the sample contains free or combined
 chlorine, add sodium  thioaulfate preserva-
 tive  (10 mg/40 TT»T- is  -sufficient for up to 5
 ppm Cla) to .the empty  sample bottle Just
 prior to shipping to the sampling site. EPA
 Method S30.4 or 330.5 may be used for meas-
 urement of residual chlorine.* Field test kits
 are available for this purpose.
   9.2  Collect about 500 mL of sample in a
 clean container. Adjust the pH of the sample
 to about 2 by adding  1+1 HC1 while stirring.
 Fill the sample bottle in such a manner that
            40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 EdHton)

 no air bubbles pass through the sample as
 the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so
 that no air bubbles are entrapped in it. Main-
 tain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle
 until time of analysis.
   9.3  All samples must be analysed within
 14 days of collection.1

                10. Procedure

   10.1  Table 1 unrnTnurliw* thg rtfaffininendfld
 operating  conditions   for the  gas  chrom-
 atograph. Included in this  table  are  esti-
 mated retention times and MDL that can be
 achieved under these conditions. An example
 of the separations achieved by Column 1 is
 shown in Figure 6. Other packed columns.
 chromatographic conditions,  or  detectors
 may be used if the requirements of Section
 8.2 are met.
   10.2  Calibrate  the  system  daily  as de-
 scribed in Section 7.
   10.3  Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or he-
 lium)  flow rate  to 40 mL/min. Attach the
 trap inlet to the purging device, and set the
 purge  and trap system to purge (Figure 3).
 Open the syringe valve located on the purg-
 ing device sample introduction needle.
   10.4  Allow the sample to come to ambient
 temperature prior to introducing it to the
 gyring*- Remove the plunger from a 5-mL sy-
 ringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open
 the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully
 pour the sample into the syringe barrel to
 Just short  of overflowing. Replace  the sy-
 ringe plunger and compress the sample. Open
 the  syringe valve and vent any residual air
 while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL.
  Since this process of taking an aliquot de-
  stroys the validity of the sample  for future
  analysis, the analyst  should fill a second sy-
  ringe at this time to protect against possible
  loss of  data. Add  10.0 pL of the surrogate
  spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 10.0  pL of
  the internal standard spiking solution (Sec-
  tion 7.4£). if applicable, through the  valve
  bore, then close the valve.
    10.5  Attach the syringe-syringe valve as-
  sembly to the syringe valve on the purging
  device.  Open the syringe valves  and-inject
  the sample into the purging chamber.
    10.6  Close both valves and purge the sam-
  ple for 12.010.1 min at ambient temperature.
    10.7  After the  12-xnin purge  time,  dis-
  connect the purging device from the trap.
  Dry the trap by maintaining a flow of 40 mL/
  min of dry.-purge gas through it for  6 min
  (Figure 4). If the purging device has no provi-
  sion for bypassing the purger for this step, a
  dry purger should be inserted into the device
  to m1niT"<"> moisture in the gas. Attach the
   trap to the chromatograph. adjust the purge
   and trap  system to the desorb mode (Figure
   5), and begin to temperature program the gas
   chromatograph. Introduce the .trapped mate-
   rials to the GC column by rapidly heating
   the trap to 180 *C while backflushing the trap
   with an inert gas between 20 and 60 tnT/ntln
666

-------
Envfronmonfd ftoteteflon Agency

for 4 min. If rapid heating of the trap cannot
be achieved, the GC column must be used as
a  secondary  trap by  cooling it to 30  *C
(snbambient temperature, if poor peak geom-
etry and random  retention time problems
persist) instead  of the initial program tem-
perature of 50 *C.
  10.8  While the trap is being desorbed into
the gas  chromatograph column, empty  the
purging chamber using the sample introduc-
tion syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-
mL flushes of reagent water.
  10.9  After desorblng the sample for 4 min.
recondition the  trap by returning the purge
and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15
a. then close the syringe valve on the purg-
ing  device to begin gas now through  the
trap. The trap temperature should be main-
tained at 180 "C. After approximately 7 mln.
turn off the trap heater and open the syringe
valve  to stop the gas flow through the trap.
When the trap is cool, the next sample can
be analysed.
   10.10 Identify the parameters in the sam-
 ple by comparing the retention times of the
 peaks in  the  sample chromatogram  with
 those   of   the   peaks   in   standard
 chromatograms. The width  of the retention
 time  window used to make identifications
 should be  based upon measurements of ac-
 tual retention time variations of standards
 over the course of a  day. Three times  the.
. standard deviation of a retention time for a
 compound can  be used  to calculate a sug-
 gested window size; however, the experience
 of the analyst  should weigh heavily, in  the
 interpretation of chromatograms.
   1001  If the response  for a peak exceeds
 the working range of the system, prepare a
 dilution of  the sample  with reagent water
 from  the aliquot in the second syringe  and
 reanalyze.


   11J. Determine the concentration of Indi-
 vidual fftMiip?***1*^* in the sample.
  11.1.1  If the external standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion of the parameter being measured from
the  peak response  using  the calibration
curve or calibration factor determined  in
Section 7.34.                   •
  11.1.2  If the Internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined in  Section 7.4.3 and Equa-
tion 2.
     Concentration .(|ig/L)
                             (A.MC..)
  Equation 2
 where:
  A.  = Response  for the parameter to be
    measured.                      .
                                                       Pt.
  A*. = Response for the internal standard.
  Cb = Concentration of the Internal stand-
    ard.                .
  11.2  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

           12. Method Performance

  12.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as the minimum concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 99% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1  The MDL  concentrations  listed in
 Table  1 were obtained using reagent water.*
•Similar  results were achieved  using rep-
 resentative wastewaters. The MDL actually
 achieved in a given analysis  will vary de-
 pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
 trix effects.
  12£  'This method has been demonstrated
 to be applicable for the concentration range
 from the MDL to 100 X MDL.* Direct aqueous
 injection techniques should be used to meas-
 ure concentration levels above 1000 x MDL.
  1X3  This method was tested by 20 labora-
 tories using reagent water, drinking water.
 surface   water,   and   three   Industrial
 wastewaters spiked  at  six  concentrations
 over the range 2J to 550 |ig/L.* Single opera-
 tor precision, overall precision, and method
 accuracy were found to be directly related to
 the concentration of the parameter and es-
 sentially Independent of the sample matrix.
 Lftmar equations to describe these relation-
 ships are presented in Table 3.

                 Reference*

   1. 40 CPR part 136. appendix B.
   2. Uchtenberg. J-J- "Determining Volatile
. Organics at Mlcrogram-per-Litre-Levels by
 Gas Chromatography." Journal  American
 Water Works Association. 66, 739 (1974).
   3.  Bellar,  TJL.  and  Uchtenberg.  J.J.
 "Semi-Automated  Headspsse Analysis  of  •
 Drinking  Waters and Industrial  Waters for
 Purgeable Volatile Organic  Compounds."
 Proceedings of Symposium on Measurement
 of  Organic  Pollutants   in Water  and
 Wastewater. American Society for Testing
 and Materials. STP 688. CJ3L Van Hall, edi-
 tor. 1978.
   4.  "Carcinogens— Working  with Carcino-
 gens." Department of Health. Education, and
 Welfare.  Public Health Service,  Center for
 Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
  pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
  77-206. August 1977.
    5  "O8HA Safety and Health  Standards.
  General Industry," (29 CPR part 1910), Occu- .
  pational  Safety and Health Administration,
  OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
    6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
  tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
  tion. Committee on Safety. 3rd Edition. 1979.
 .   7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. "Interpre-
  tation of Percent Recovery Data." American
                                         667

-------
                                                         40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 EdWon)

                                              TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPWC COWOTJONS AND
                                                       METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
                                                                 Rfllntlon HflM (fnin)
                                                                 Column 1
                                                                    Sl75
                                              CWorob.
IXXcNorobanzarw
1,3-OfcMorabaniana,
12-OtaMorebanxana
                                                                    9.17
                                                                   1&B
                                                                   182
                                                                   2&9
                                                                       Column 2
                                                                                   (WD
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 602

Laboratory. 25, 68-63. (1963). (The value 2.44
used. In the equation In Section 8.&S. is two
times the Value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  i."Methods  330.4 cntrimetric. DFD-FA8)
and 891X6  (Spectrophotometric,  DFD)  for
Chlorine.  Total  Residual,"   Methods  for
Chemical  Analysis  of Water  and Wastes.
BPA-flOW-TO-CSO. U.S.  Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, Office of Research and De-
velopment, Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory. Cincinnati. Ohio 45388.
March 1879.
  9. "EPA  Method  Study  25. Method 602.
Pnrreable Aromatics," EPA 600/4-44-042. Na-
tional  Technical Information Service, PB84-
190682. Springfield, Virginia 22161. May 1984.
                                             gaa si 30 mLftrtn tow rate. Column temparatum haU at 40
                                             £~fer2min than pmgrammad at 2 «C/min to 100 «C tar a
                                             Snal nOKL

            TABLES-CALIBRATION AND QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 602«
                                                                          2.75
                                                                          425
                                                                          628
                                                                          842
                                                                         182
                                                                         1&0
                                                                         1A4
                                        02
                                        02
                                        02
                                        02
                                        04
                                        IM
                                        IM
                                               Column 1 eonolttoni; Supateoport (100/120 mash) __„_
                                             W*^WMWB*toM*4 paekad to iel'x^SK
                                              -. -~~--
                                              MriipreonnMMdst8-CA* to90«C tor• final hold.
                                              Column 2 eonoWom: CnmmoMib W^-AW (8QIBO
^sWnfldr

Ct>*ofrt;Ojj?3
                                   0.18X40.71
 X'-Expaclad racovary for ana or
 •'•rirr^nt»1 rinnlj •n«ln«l	 •
  «
 C-Tru* VM
 X-Aw»o>
             itaanatyitatandanjdavteUonotf
                rsfary atandanl OavteSon of
                ^—	*--- ••  i_ .._•
'-~-t-m.*mj HWKwranry mBK^u UWMa
-Trua vaiua for tha ConoanMtan. to pa/L.
-*—~i raowary *ound fcr maaauramanta of aamptea eenMnbio a
at an avaraga oonoantratton
-atanavanoaoon—"-*•-
                                                                n o(C. in
                                                     mtnbondC.ini^L.

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                 Pt. 136, App. A, Mottk. 601
      OPTIONAL
      FOAM
      TRAP
EXIT tt IN.
    0. D.
                     -*-14MM 0. D.

                      INLETS IN.
                           0. D.
   % IN.
   0, D. EXIT
   SAMPLE INLET

   2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
   17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

   6MM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
                           ~10MM. 0. D.
                               INLET
                                IN. 0. D.
                    1/16 IN. O.D.
                   y STAINLESS STEEL
                                          13X MOLECULAR
                                          SIEVE PURGE
                                          GAS FILTER
     10MM GLASS FRIT
     MEDIUM POROSITY
                                             PURGE GAS
                                             FLOW
                                             CONTROL
                Figure 1. Purging device.
                             669

-------
Pi. 136, App. A. MMft. 602
            40 CFB Ch. I (7-1-9S EdMon)
       PACKING PROCSXIRE
     GLASS
      WOOL
    TBIAK 23CU
    3%OV-11CU
GLASS WOOL
CONSTRUCTION
       COMPRESSION FITTING
       NUT AND FERRULES
        14FT.7A/FOOT RESISTANCE
        WIRE WRAPPED SOLID

        THERMOCOUPLE/
        CONTROLLBt
        'SBISOR
           ELECTRONIC
           TEMPERATURE
           CONTROL
           AND
           PYROMETER
    C   / TUBING 25CM.
        0.105 IN. I.Do
        0.125 IN. O.D.
        STAINLESS STEEL
              TRAP INLET

 Figure 2. Trap packings and construction to include
          desorb capability.   .
                           670

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
     Carrier Gas Row Control  Liquid Injection Ports
 Pressure Regulator
           \
 Purge Gas
 Row Control \r—
13X Molecular
Sieve Filter
                             Vah/e-3
                             Optional 4-Port Column
                             Selection Valve
                                          lnlet
                                        Resistance
                                                Pt. 136. App. A. Meih. 602

                                                > Column Oven

                                              • ._ Confirmatory Column
                                                  To Detector
                                                  "***Analytical Column
                                                        . Heater Control
                                             Note:  All Lines Between
                                                    Trap and GC
                                                    Should be Heated
                                                    to 80°C
          Figure 3. Purge and trap/system - purge mode.
   Carrier Gas Row Control
 Pressure Regulator
                             Liquid Injection Ports
Purge Gas
Row Control
13X Molecular
Sieve Filter
                                                    Column Oven
                                                _^^"
                                                •  ___ Confirmatory Column
                                                    To Detector
                                                I  "*-—Analytical Column
                                       Valve-3
                                       Optional 4-Port Column
                                       Selection Valve
                                         Trap Inlet (Tenax End)
                                             Resistance Wire
                                             Trap
                                             22°C
                                                           Heater Control
                         Vah/e-2
                                                   Note:  All Lines Between
                                                         Trap and GC
                                                         Should be Heated
                                                         to 80°C
               Figure 4. Purge and trap system-dry mode.
                                   671

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 602

        Carrier Gas Flow Control   Liquid Injection Ports

     Pressure Regulator

               JK
   Purge Gas
   Flow Control \T~
    13X Molecular
    Steve Fitter
                  Vah/e-3
                  Optional 4-Port Column
                  Selection Valve
                               Inlet (Tenax End)
                             Resistance Wire
                                  40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)


                                       Column Oven

                                     —_ Confirmatory Column
                                      To Detector
                                      """^ Analytical Column
                                                           Heater Control
                                            Note:  All Lines Between
                                                  Trap and GC
                                                  Should be Heated
                                                  to80°C
               Valve-2

Figure 5. Purge and trap system-desorb mode.
                             Column: 5% SP 1200/1.75% Bantone - 34
                                    en Supeleoport
                             Program: SO°C for 2 min, 6°C/min to 90°C
                             .Detector: Photoionization, 10.2 V
                                                      §
   02   4   6   8   10  12  14 16  18  20  22  24 26   28

                           Retention Time. Min.


    _ Figure 6.   Gas chromatogram of purgeable aromaties.
                                    672

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

 METHOD 603—AcHOLEm AND ACBYLONTTWLE

•          1. Scope and Application
  1.1  This method covers the determination
of acrolein and acrylonitrlle. The following
parameters may be determined by this meth-
od:
Fp~r
Acreliln „ ,
Aciyterttrta 	 	 '. 	
STORET
No.
34210
34215
CAS No.
107-02-6
107-13-1
  1.2 This  is  a  purge   and  trap  gas
 chromatographic (GC) method applicable to
 the  determination of the compounds listed
 above in municipal and industrial discharges
 as provided under 40 CFB 138.1. When this
 method is used to analyse mifl""*H»J sam-
 ples  for either or both of the compounds
 above, compound identifications should be
 supported by  at least one additional quali-
 tative technique. This method describes ana-
 lytical  conditions   for  a   second  gas
 chromatographic column that can be used to
 confirm measurements made with the pri-
 mary column. Method 621 provides gas chro-
 matograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) con-
 ditions appropriate for the qualitative and
 quantitative confirmation of results for the
 parameters listed above, if used with the
 purge and trap conditions described in this
 method.
  1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, de-
 fined in Section 12.1)' for each parameter is
 listed in Table  1. The MDL for a specific
 wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
 pending upon the nature of interferences in
 the sample matrix.
   1.4  Any modification of this method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered as a  major modification subject to
 application and approval of alternate test
 procedures under 40 CPE 136.4 and 13&5.
   1.6  This method is restricted to use by or
 under the supervision  of  analysts  experi-
 enced in the operation of a purge and trap
 'system and a gas chromatograph and in the
 interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each
 analyst must demonstrate the ability to gen-
 erate acceptable results with  this -method
 using the procedure described in Section 8.2.

            2. Summary of Method

   2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL
 water sample contained in a heated purging
 chamber.  Acrolein  and  acrylonitrlle are
 transferred from the aqueous  phase  to the
 vapor .phase. The vapor is swept through a
 sorbent trap where the analytes are trapped.
 After the purge is  completed, the trap is
 heated and backflushed with the inert gas to
  desorb    the   compound    onto    2.   jas
  chromatographic  column.  The gas chro-
  matograph is  temperature programmed  to
             Pf. 136, App. A. M&th. 
-------
 Pt. 136, App. A, M9fo. 603
            40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-45 EdWon)
        .  5. Apparatu* and Material*

   6J  Sampling equipment, for discrete sam-
 pling.
   6.1.1  Vial—25-mL  capacity   or  larger,
 equipped with a screw cap with a bole In the
 center (Pierce #18075 or equivalent). Deter-
 rent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water.
 and dry at 106 *C before use.
   6.1.2  Septum—Tenon-faced       slUcone
 (Pierce  #12132 or  equivalent).  Detergent
 wash, rinse with tap and distilled water and
 dry at 106 "C for l h before use.
   &2 Purge and trap system—The purge and
 trap system consists of three separate pieces
 of equipment: a purging device, trap, and
 desorber. Several complete  systems are now
 commercially available.
   SA1  The purging device must be designed
 to accept 6-mL, samples with a water column
 at least S cm deep. The gaseous head space
 between the water  column and the trap must
 have a total volume  of less than 15 mL. The
 purge gas must pass through the water col-
 umn as finely divided bubbles with a diame-
 ter of less than 3 mm at the origin. .The
 purge gas must be introduced no more than
 5 mm from  the base of the water column.
 The purging device must be capable of being
 heated to 85 «C within 3.0 min after transfer
 of the sample  to  the purging  device and
 being held at 85 i2  *C during the purge cycle.
 The entire water column in the purging de-
 vice must be heated. Design of this modifica-
 tion to the  standard purging device is op-
 tional, however, use  of a water bath  is sug-
 gested.
 .  &2.1J  Heating mantle—To be used to heat
 water bath.
   &2.L2 Temperature  controller—Equipped
 with thermocouple/sensor to accurately con-
 trol water bath temperature to 12 "C. The
 purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets
 these design criteria.
   5^2  The trap must be at least 25 cm long
 and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105
 in. The trap must  be packed to contain 1.0
 cm of methyl silicons coated packing (Sec-
 tion 6.5.2) and 23 cm of 2.6-dlphenylene oxide
 polymer (Section 6.5.1). The m^Ttinm speci-
 fications for the trap are illustrated in Fig-
 ure 2.
   5.2.3  The desorber must be capable of rap-
 Idly heating the trap to 180 *C, The desorber
 Illustrated in Figure 2  meets these design
 criteria.
   5.2.4  The purge  and  trap  system may be
 assembled as a separate unit as illustrated in
 Figure  3  or be coupled to  a gas chro-
 matograph.
   5.3 pH paper—Narrow pH range, about 3.5
 to 5.5 (Fisher Scientific Short Range Alkacid
 No. 2, #14-837-2 or equivalent).
.  5.4 Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
 system complete  with a temperature pro-
 grammable gas chromatograph suitable for
 on-column Injection  and all required acces-
 sories including syringes,  analytical  col-
 umns, gases,  detector, and strip-chart re-
 corder. A data system is recommended for
 measuring peak areas.
   6.4.1 Column 1—10 ft long z 2 mm ID glass
 or stainless steel, packed with Porapak-Q8
 (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was
 used  to  develop-, .the  method  performance
 statements in Section  12. Guidelines for the
 use of alternate column packings are  pro-
 vided in Section  10.1.
   5.4.2 Column 2—6 ft  long z 0.1 in. ID glass
 or stainless steel, packed with Chromosorb
 101 (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
   6.4.3 Detector—Flame ionization detector.
 This type of detector has proven effective in
 the analysis of wastewaters for the  param-
 eters  listed in the scope (Section 1.1).  and
 was used to develop the method performance
 statements in Section  12. Guidelines for the
 use of alternate detectors are provided in
 Section 10.1.
   5.5  Syringes—6-mL,   glass   hypodermic
 with Luerlok tip (two each).
   5.6  Micro syringes—26-fiL. 0.006 in. ID nee-
 dle.
   5.7  Syringe valve—2-way. with Luer ends
 (three each).
   5.8  Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon
 cap liner.   •                      '
   5.9  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
 rately weighing 0.0001 g.

                 6. Reagent*

   6.1  Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
 fined  as a water in which an interferent is
 not observed at the MDL of the parameters
 of interest.
   6.1.1 Reagent  water  can be generated by
 passing tap water through a carbon filter bed
 containing about 1 Ib  of activated'carbon
 (Filtrasorb-aoo. Calgon  Corp.. or equivalent).
   6.1.2 A    water   purification    system
 (Millipore 8nper-Q or  equivalent) may be*
 used to generate  reagent water.
   6.1.3 Regent water may also be prepared
 by boiling, water for 15 min. Subsequently,
 while maintaining the temperature at 90 *C.
 bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through
. the water for 1  h. While still  hot, transfer
 the water to a narrow month screw-cap bot-
 tle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and
 cap.
   6.2  Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
   6.3  Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N>—
 Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
 and dilute to 100 mL.
   6.4  Hydrochloric acid  (1+1)—Slowly,  add
 50 mL of concentrated HC1 (ACS) to 50 mL of
 reagent water.
   6.5  Trap Materials:
   6.5.1 2,6-Diphenylene  oxide   polymer—
 Tenaz (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade
 or equivalent.
   &5£ Methyl silicons packing—3% OV-l on
 Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
                                         674

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                                                           PI. 13£, App. A, MeSh. 603
  . 6.6  Stock   standard   solutions—Stock
 standard solutions may be  prepared from
 pure standard materials or purchased as cer-
 tified solutions. Prepare stock standard solu-
 tions in reagent water using assayed liquids.
 Since   acrolein .  and   acrylonltrile  are
 lachrymatora, primary  dilutions of these
 compounds should be prepared in a hood. A
 NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator
 should be  used when the analyst handles
 high concentrations of such materials.
   6.6.1 Place about 9.8 mL of reagent water
 into a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volu-
 metric flask.. For acrolein standards the rea-
 gent water must be adjusted to pH 4 to 5.
 Weight the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.
   6.64 Using a 100-pL syringe, immediately
 add two or more drops of  assayed reference
 material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure
  that the drops fall directly  into the water
 without contacting the neck of the flask.
   6.6^  Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper.
  then mix  by inverting the flask  several
,  times. Calculate the concentration in |ig/|iL
  from the net gain In weight. When compound
  purity is assayed  to be 98% or  greater, the
  weight can be used without correction to cal-
  culate  the  concentration  of   the  stock
  staldard. Optionally, stock  standard solu-
  tions may be prepared using the pure stand-
  ard material by volnmetrically measuring
  the appropriate amounts  and  determining •
  the weight of the material using the density
  of  the  material.  Commercially prepared
  stock standards may be used at any con-
  centration  if  they  are • certified  by  the
  Tnani^faft^^iT^f or by an Independent source.
   6.6.4  Transfer the stock standard solution
  into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store
  at 4 *C and protect from light.
   6.M  Prepare fresh standards .daily;
   6.7 Secondary dilution standards—Using
  .stock standard solutions, prepare secondary
  dilution standards in reagent water that con-
  tain the compounds of interest, either singly
  or mixed together. The secondary dilution
  standards should be prepared at concentra-
  tions such  that  the  aqueous  calibration
  standards  prepared in  Section  7.3.1 or 7.4.1
  will bracket the working range of the ana-
 , lytical system. Secondary dilution standards
  should be prepared daily and stored at 4 *C.
    6.8. Quality  control  check  sample con-
  centrate-rSee Section 8.2.1.

                 7. Calibration
    7.1  Assemble a purge and trap system that
  meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Con-
  dition the  trap  overnight at 180  *C  by
  backflushing with an  inert gas flow  of at
  least 20 mlVmln. Condition the trap for 10
  min once daily prior to use.
    7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to
  a   gas  chromatograph.   The  gas  chro-
  matograph must be operated using tempera-
  ture and flow rate conditions equivalent to
  those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge
                                            and trap-gas chromatographic system using
                                            either the external standard technique (Sec-
                                            tion 7.3) or the Internal standard technique '
                                            (Section 7.4).
                                              7.3 External standard calibration proce-
                                            dure:        .     •
                                              7.3.1  Prepare ' calibration  standards at  a
                                            minimum of three concentration levels for
                                            each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 |iL of
                                            one or more secondary dilution standards to
                                            100. 500. or 1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-»iL
                                            syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be
                                            used for this operation.  One of the external
                                            standards should be at a concentration near, •
                                            but above, the MDL and the other concentra-
                                            tions  should  correspond  to  the  expected
                                            range of concentrations found in real sam-
                                            ples or should define the, working range 'of
                                            the detector. These standards must be pre-
                                            pared fresh daily.
                                              7.3J  Analyze  each .calibration  standard
                                            according to Section 10, and tabulate peak
                                            height or area responses versus  the  con-
                                            centration of the standard. The  results can
                                            be. used' to  prepare a calibration curve for
                                            each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of
                                            response to concentration (calibration fac-
                                            tor) is a constant over the working range (<
                                            10% relative standard deviation. BSD),  lin-
                                            earity through the origin can be assumed
                                            and the average ratio or calibration factor
                                            can be used in place of a calibration curve.
                                              7.4  Internal standard calibration proce-
                                            dure—To use this approach, the analyst must.
                                            select one or more internal  standards that
                                            are similar In analytical behavior  to the
                                            compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
                                            ther demonstrate that the measurement of
                                            the internal  standard  is not  affected by
                                            method or matrix Interferences. Because of
                                            these limitations, no internal standard can
                                            be  suggested that is applicable  to all sam-
                                            ples.
                                              7.4.1  Prepare calibration standards at a
                                                      of three concentration  levels for
                                             each parameter of interest as described in
                                             Section 7.3.1.
                                              7.4JI  Prepare a spiking solution contain-
                                             ing each of the Internal standards using the
                                             procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7.
                                             It is recommended that the secondary dilu-
                                             tion standard be prepared at a concentration
                                             of  15  iig/mL of  each  internal  standard
                                             compound. The  addition  of 10 |iL of this
                                             standard to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration
                                             standard would be equivalent to 30 |ig/L.
                                               7.4.3  Analyze  each  calibration  standard
                                             according to  Section 10. adding 10 pL of in-
                                             ternal  standard spiking solution directly to
                                             the syringe  (Section  10.4). Tabulate peak
                                             height or area responses against concentra-
                                             tion for each compound and internal  stand-
                                             ard. and calculate response factors (RF)'for
                                             each compound using Equation 1.
                                          675

-------
 fT.  loo, App. /%. m«m. owo
              V»TK
                       I \/— I— »
               BF*
                     (AtaXC.)
                                Equation 1
 where:
  A««Besponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Afc»Besponse for the Internal standard.
  Ck»Ccnoentration of the Internal standard.
  ^•Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured.
 If the BP value over the working range IB a
 constant <<10% BSD), the BF can be assumed
 to be invariant and the average  BF  can be
 used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
 sults can be used to plot a calibration curve
 of response ratios, AJA*. vs. BF.
  7.5  The working calibration curve, cali-
 bration factor,  or BF must be verified on
 eaoh working day by the measurement of a
 QC check sample.
  7.5.1 .Prepare the QC check sample aa de-
 scribed in Section BJU2.
• 7JL2 Analyse the QC check sample accord-
 ing to Section 10.
  7.&S For each parameter, compare the re-
 sponse (Q) with the corresponding calibra-
 tion acceptance criteria found  in Table 2. If
 the responses for all parameters of interest
 fall within the designated ranges, analyslB of
 actual samples can begin. If any individual Q
 falls outside  the range, a new  calibration
 curve, calibration factor, or BF must be pre-
 pared for that parameter according to  Sec-
 tion 7.3 or 7.4. .

              8. Quality Control

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
 is  required to operate a formal Quality con-
 trol program. The "M"1"mm reqnlremente of
     program consist of an <«<*t«i  demonstra-
 tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
 analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
 document data quality. The laboratory must
 maintain records to document the quality of
 data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
 checks are compared with established, per-
 formance criteria to determine if the results
 of analyses meet the performance character-
 istics of the method. When results of sample
 spikes indicate  atypical  method perform-
 ance, a quality control check standard must
 be analysed to  confirm that the measure-
 ments were performed in an in-control mode
 of operation.
   8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial.
 one-time, demonstration  of  the ability to
 generate acceptable accuracy and precision
 with this method. This ability is established
 as described in Section &2.
   8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are
 occurring in chromatography, the analyst Is
 permitted certain options (detailed in Sec-
tion UU) to improve the separations or lower
the dost of measurements. Bach time such a
modification is made to the method, the ana-
lyst is required to repeat the procedure in
Section 8JL
  8.1.3  Each day. the analyst must analyse a
reagent water blank to demonstrate  that
Interferences from the analytical system are
under control.
  8.1.4  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a tniHim^Tn  of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8£.
  8.1.6  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through  the analyses of
quallt/y control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This  procedure is described in Section
8.4. The frequency  of the  check standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6  The laboratory must maintain per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This  procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8U>.
  8.2 To establish the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the  ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing each pa-
rameter of interest at a concentration of 25
lig/mL in reagent water. The QC check sam-
ple concentrate must be obtained from the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. En-
vironmental Monitoring  and Support  Lab-
oratory in Cincinnati. Ohio, if available. If
not available from that source. tLe QC check
sample concentrate must be obtained from
another external source. If not available
from either source above, the QC check sam-
ple concentrate must be prepared by the lab-
oratory using stock standards prepared inde-
pendently from those used for calibration.
  8JL2  Prepare a QC check sample to con-
tain 50 |ig/L of eaoh parameter by adding 200
|il> of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL
of reagent water.
  8&3  Analyze  four  6-mLi  aliqnots  of the
well-mixed QC check  sample according to
Section 10.                           .
  8.2.4  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
pg/L, and the standard deviation of  the re-
covery (8) in pg/L. for each  parameter using
the four results.                          .
  8.2.5 For each parameter  compare  s and X
with .the  corresponding acceptance  criteria
for  precision  and  accuracy,  respectively.
found in Table 3. If s and X for all param-
eters of Interest meet the acceptance cri-
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
either s exceeds the precision limit or X falls
outside th? range for accuracy, the system
performance is unacceptable for that param-
                                         .676

-------
Environmental PiotedtonAgancy

eter. locate and correct the source of the
problem' and  repeat  the  test for  each
compound of interest.
  8.3  The laboratory mast, on  an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analysing one to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1  The concentration of the  spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If,  as  in compliance  monitoring,
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8^2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the concentration of a specific
parameter in  the  sample  Is  not  being
checked against a limit specific  to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at 50 |ig/L or 1
to 6 times higher than the background con-
centration  determined  in  Section  8.3.2,
whichever concentration would be larger.
  8.&2 Analyse one S-mL sample aliquot to
determine the background concentration (B)
of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a
new QC check  sample concentrate (Section
8JZ.1)  appropriate for the background con-
centrations in the sample. Spike a second 6-
mL sample  aliquot  with  10 pL of the QC
check sample concentrate and analyse it to
determine the  concentration after spiking
(A) of each  parameter. Calculate each per-
cent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T. where T is
the known true value of the spike.
  8A3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter with the  corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These
acceptance criteria were  calculated to In-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent that  the analyst's spike  to back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.'
  8.3.4  If any individual P falls  outside the
designated range for recovery, that param-
eter has failed the  acceptance  criteria. A
check  standard, containing each parameter
that failed the criteria must be  analyzed as
described in Section 8.4.
  8.4  If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria for recovery in  Section 8.3, a QC
check  standard containing each parameter
that failed must be. prepared and analyzed.
  NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
ysis of a QC  check standard will depend upon
the number  of parameters being simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the labora-
tory.
  8.4.1 Prepare the  QC check standard  by
adding 10 pL of QC check sample  concentrate
              PI. 136. App. A, MaSh. 603

(Section 8.2J  or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent
water. The QC cheek standard needs only to
contain the parameters that failed criteria
in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2 Analyze the  QC check  standard to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true
value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P.)
for-each parameter with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with thesa criteria. If
the recovery of any such pBrametgr falls out-
side  the designated  range,  the laboratory
performance for that parameter is judged to
be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified and corrected. The
analytical  result for that parameter in the
unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8J>  As port of the QC program for the lab-
oratory,  method  accuracy for wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be maintained. After the analysis of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3.
calculate the average percent recovery  (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (8,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from P-2s. to
P+28p. If P=90% and v=10%, for example, the
accuracy interval is expressed  as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
,  8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. Field duplicates may be ana-
lysed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental  measurements. When doubt exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram. confirmatory techniques such as
gas ohromatography with a dissteaUiiT col-
umn or'mass  spectrometer must be used.
Whenever  possible, .the laboratory  should
analyze standard reference materials and
participate in relevant performance evalua-
tion studies.

    9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                Handling

  9.1  All samples must be iced  or refrig-
erated from the time of collection until anal-
ysis. If the sample contains free or combined
chlorine, add  sodium thiosulfate preserva-
tive (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5
ppm Cla) to the empty sample bottle just
prior to shipping to the sampling site. EPA
Methods 330.4 and  330.5 may  be  used for
measurement of residual chlorine.* Field test
kits are available for this .purpose.  .
  9.2  If acrolein  is to be analyzed,  collect
about 500 mL of sample in a clean glass con-
                                         677

-------
H. 156, App. A, Mwm. ou*

tainer. Adjust the pH of the sample to 4_to6
using add or base, measuring with narrow
range pH paper. Samples for acroleln analy-
sis receiving no pH adjustment most be ana*
lysed within 3 days of sampling.  .  .
 . 8J  Grab  samples aunt  be collected  la
ft^tf containers having a total volume of at
least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle jost to
overflowing in  each a manner that no air
bobbles pass through the sample as the bot-
tle is h^tif filled. Seal the bottle so that no
air babbles are entrapped in It. If preserva-
tive has been added, shake vigorously for 1
min. u« parameters in the sam-
ple by comparing the retention times of the
peaks in the sample  chromatogranv with
those   of   the   peaks   in    standard
chromatograms. The width of the retention
time  window used to make  identifications
should be based upon measurements of ac-
tual retention time variations of standards
over the course of a day. Three times the
standard deviation of a retention time for a
compound can  be used to calculate a sug-
gested window size; however, the experience
of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
interpretation of chromatograms.

              H* QrffMffltfffTty

  11.1  Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample.
  11.1.1  If the external standard calibration
procedure Is  used, calculate the conoentra--
tton of the parameter being measured from
the  peak  response  using  the  calibration
curve or calibration factor determined In
Section 7^2.
  11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration
procedure is  used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined in Section 7.4:3 and Equa-
tion 2.
                                                    (A.XC,.)
                            Concentration. (pg/L)
                                                      Equation 2

                       where:
                         A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
                           ured..
                         AtrtResponse for the Internal standard.
                         CfcsConcentration of the internal standard.
                         11.2  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
                       tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
                       should be reported with the sample results.

                                 12. Method Performance

                         12,1  The method detection limit (HDL) is
                       defined as the TTt*tl
-------
with 99% oonfldenoe that the value is above
sero.' The  MDL  concentrations  listed in
Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.*
The MDL actually achieved in a given analy-
sis will vary depending* on instrument sen-
tltivity and matrix effects.
  12,8  This method is recommended for the
concentration  range  from  the  MDL  to
l.OOOxMDL.  Direct aqueous injection tech-
niques should be used to measure concentra-
tion levels above 1.000xMDL.
  123  In a single laboratory  (Battelle-Co-
lumbns). the average recoveries and standard
deviations presented in Table  2  were ob-
tained.* Seven replicate samples were ana-
lyzed at each spike level.

                References

   1.40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
   2.  Bellar. TJU and Llchtenberg. J.J. "De-
termining Volatile Organics at Microgram-
per-Litre-Levels  by Gas Chromatography."
Journal American Water Work* Association. 66,
79(1974).
   3. "Evaluate Test Procedures for Acrolein
and Acrylonitrlle." Special letter  report for
EPA  Project  4719-A,  U.S.  Environmental
Protection Agency. Environmental Monitor-
ing and Support Laboratory. Cincinnati.
Ohio 45268.27 June 1979.
   4. "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens,"  Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare.  Public Health Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
 pational  Safety and Health. Publication No.
 77-206. August 1977.
   6.  "OSHA Safety  and Health Standards.
 General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910). Occn-
                                                      Pt.l36.App.A.lliEti.40l

                                        national Safety and Health
                                        OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
                                          6. "Safety in Academic Chemlstey Labora-
                                        tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
                                        tion.  Committee on  Chemical Safety. 3rd
                                        Edition. 1979.
                                          7. Provost, LJP., and Elder. R.8. "Ihterpra-
                                        tation of Percent Recovery Data." American
                                        Laboratory. 15.56-63 (1963).
                                          8. "Methods 330.4 (Titdmetric. DPD-PAS)
                                        and   330^6  (Spectrophotometrie.  DPD) for
                                        Chlorine. Total Residual."  Methods for
                                        Chemical Analysis of  Water and Wastes.
                                        EPA-600/4-79-020. U.S. Environmental Pro-
                                        tection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
                                        and  Support  Laboratory. Cincinnati. Ohio
                                        45268. March 1979.
                                          9. "Evaluation of Method 603 (Modified)."
                                        EPA-800/4-84-ABC, National Technical Infor-
                                        mation Service. PB84-.  Springfield. Virginia
                                       •22161. Nov. 1984.

                                         TABLE 1—CHROMATOQBAPWC CONDITIONS AND
                                                  METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
                                                          . ID tfns or «^rJcu «te3l cotam
                                                         tt 40 rS/mii tow nts. Cokmn t-
                                                      miri * WC ta -4  n. ttwpBWBB
                                                   120% and Mid lor 12 mm.
            TABLE 2—SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY AND PRECISION—METHOD 603
,*— . /;. •

'i
Arnil/wwtrfln 	 -----
*uy***uwn 	 	 •!•••• 	 ... •••••!• 	
a?
RW
RW
POTW
POTW
IW
IW
RW
RW
POTW
POTW
IW
IW
Spto
cone.
(DOV
SJO
900
&0
SOJO
&0
100D
. &0
60JO
20.0
100A
10.0
100A
AMHO*
raoowy
(M»4
&2
6M
4J)
444
ai
94
42
51.4
20.1
1014
9.1
104.0
8ter«i^
dv^c^sn
(HOAJ
02
0.7
O2
04
0.1
1.1
02
14
04
14
04
32
pw^jl
moownr
104
103
80
89
2
9
64
103
100
101
91
104
APOTW-Prachtorination Mcondny afBuant from •
AMMnduttial oaHanratar eontainlno an urtidanaiad «
                                            •mnoa MXmant plant
                                           679

-------
 TABLE 3-CAuenATioN AND QCACCEPTANCE    Lx-A£n£M«^farfeur^^

          CRITERIA—METHOD 603*              p. p^.pwo«rt' memory iMMirad (SwUon 933. SacHon
                                   	   8A2).         •
AcroWn —
AaytonMhi.
             Rang* tor
             4&0-64.1
tor 8
V
                       9.9
                          Rngilar
     42^-60.1
     33.1-46LB
88-118
71-135
 •*CriMrta wm ealculiUfl aMutntag • QC ctaek aampto
conewMllon o( 60 O0fL.*
             nMMind In QC dwek swnpte. in
                                         680

-------
Envtranmontal Protection Agoney
                  Pfc 136. App. A, MoJJx
      OPTIONAL
      FOAM
      TRAP
   Vi IN.
   0. D. EXIT
EXIT '/« IN.
    0. D.
                     —14MM 0. D.

                      INLET % IN.
                           0. D.
   SAMPLE INLET

   2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
   17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

       . 0.  D. RUBBER SEPTUM
     ~10MM. 0. D.
         INLET
          IN. 0. D.
                                           1/16IN.O.D.
                                        \/ STAINLESS STEEL
                                           13X MOLECULAR
                                           SIEVE PURGE
                                           GAS FILTER
      10MM GLASS FRIT
      MEDIUM POROSITY
                                              PURGE GA§
                                              ROW
                                              CONTROL
                {Figure 1. Purging device
                              681

-------
it. too, App. A, Mem. ooo

       PACKING PROCEDURE
      GLASS
      WOOL
   TENAX 23CM
    Z% OV-1
GLASS WOOL
          1CM
              TRAP INLET
                         ...     . ~   4UUNtGn.il/-i-ydtaiiion)

                         CONSTRUCTION
                             .   COMPRESSION FITTING
                             ^ NUT AND FERRULES
                                 14FT.71/FOOT RESISTANCE
                                 'WIRE WRAPPED SOLID

                                 THERMOCOUPLE/
                                 CONTROLLER
                                 SENSOR
          aECTRONIC
          TEMPERATURE
          CONTROL
          AND
          I PYROMETER
CJ~C "•/ TUBING 25CM.
       0.105 IN. I.D.
       0.125 IN. O.D.
       STAINLESS STEEL
Figure 2. Trap packings and construction to include
        . desorb capability.
                          682

-------
tiivhumoentcri Proiectton Agency

     1SXMOUCUUM
                                           ft. 136, App. A. Mcfh. 403
                                   oe INJECTION
                                     roar
  .  KfftOI
    now
  CONTMOtLaN
        Figure 3. Purge and trap system-purge mode.
1W MOLECULAR
 MCVE MLTER •
                                          QC INJCCnOM
                                             MMT
                COUNTM-
                CLOCKWISE
                ROTATION
                                                            TRAP
                                           MATED
                                          WATCH BATH
         Figure 4. Purge and trap system-desorb mode.

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 603
40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 EdWon)
      Column: Porapak-QS
      .Program: T10°C for 1.5 min, rapidly
               heated to 150°C
      Detector: Fiame lohization
      1.5  .3.0    4.5   6.0    7.5   g.O  ^ 10.5  12.0  13.5  15.0
                      RETENTION TIME. MIN.       '
Figure 5. Gas chromatogram of acrolein and ecrylonitrile.
                               684

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                              Pt. 136, App. A, M&fh.
           METHOD 604—PHENOLS

          /. Scope and Application

 ' 1.1  This method covers the determination
of phenol and  certain substituted phenols.
The following  parameters  may  be  deter-
mined by this method:
2—CtiloraptMnol.
 2-MathyMfrdtoltTOphqool
 4+fOmatmnt*
 PMMMoroplMnol
 2.4.6-TriotUorophenol
                          STORE!
                           No.
34462
34586
34601
34606
34616
34657
34501
34646
39032
34684
34621
       CAS No.
 59-60-7
 95-67-8
120-83-2
105-67-8
 51-28-6
534-62-1
 88-76-6
100-02-7
 87-96-6
108-86-2
 BB-08-2
  1.2  This is a flame ionization detector gas
 chromatographic (FIDOC) method applicable
 to the determination of the compounds listed
 above in municipal and industrial discharges
 as  provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this
 method is used to analyze gtifcTrnnm* sam-
 ples for any or all of the compounds above.
 compound identifications should  be  sup-
 ported by at least one additional qualitative
 technique. This method describes analytical
 conditions for derivatization.  cleanup,  and
 electron  capture  detector  gas  chroma-
 tography (ECDQC) that can be used to con-
 firm  innMiii BinniiliH tntyfli* by FIDGC. Method
 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spec-
 trometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for
 the qualitative and quantitative confirma-
 tion of results for all of the parameters list-
 ed above, using the extract produced by this
 method.
  1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, de-
 fined in Section 14.1) * for each parameter is
 listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific
 wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
 pending upon the nature of interferences in
 the sample matrix. The MDL listed in Table
 1 for each parameter was achieved with a
 flame ionization detector (FID). The MDLs
 that were achieved  when the derivatization
 cleanup and electron capture detector (BCD)
 were employed are presented in Table 2.
  1.4 Any modification of this method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered  as a  major modification subject to
 application and approval of alternate  test
 procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
   1.5  This method is restricted to use by or
 under  the supervision  of analysts experi-
 enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
 in the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
 Bach analyst must demonstrate the ability
 to generate  acceptable results with  this
 method using the procedure described in Seo-
 tton&JL
            2. Summary of Method

   2.1  A measured  volume  of  sample, ap-  •
 •proximately 1-L, is acidified and extracted
 with methylene chloride using a separator?
 funnel..The methylene chloride extract is
 dried and  exchanged to 2-propanol during
 concentration to a volume of 10 roL or less.
 The  extract  is separated by gas  chroma-
 tography and the phenols are then measured
 with an FID.2  ,
   2.2  A • preliminary sample wash  under
 basic conditions can be employed for samples
 having high general organic and organic base
 interferences.
  • 2.3  The  method  also  provides for  a
 derivatization and  column chromatography
 cleanup procedure to aid in  the elimination
 of interferences." The derivatives are ana-
 lyzed by ECDGC.

               3. Interferences
   3.1  Method interferences  may be. caused
 by contaminants in  solvents, reagents, glass-
 ware, and other sample procegsisg hardware
 that lead  to  discrete artifacts and/or ele-
 vated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of
 these materials must  be  routinely  dem-
 onstrated to be free from interferences under
 the  conditions of the analysis by  running
 laboratory reagent blanks  as described in
 Section 8.1.3.
   3J.I Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
 cleaned.4 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
. sible after use by rinsing with the  last sol-
 vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
 lowed by detergent waaMtss with hot water.
 and  rinses with tap water  and  distilled
 water. The glassware should then be drained
 dry. and heated in a muffle furnace  at 400 *C
 for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
 terials, such as PCBs, may not be eliminated
 by this treatment.  Solvent  rinses with ace-
 tone and pesticide quality  hexane may be
 substituted for the muffle furnace heating.
 Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually
 ftHmiT^f.M PCB interference.  Volumetric
 ware should not be heated  in a muffle fur-
 nace. After  drying and cooling, glassware
 should be  sealed and stored in a clean envi-
 ronment  to prevent any  accumulation  of
 dust or other contaminants. Store inverted
 or capped with aluminum foil.
   3J..2  The use of  high purity reagents and
 solvents helps to minimiM interference prob-
  lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
  in all-glass systems may be required.
   3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by
  contaminants that are coextracted from the
  sample. The  extent of matrix interferences
  will vary considerably from source to source.
  depending upon the nature and diversity of
  the industrial complex or municipality being
  sampled. The derivatimtion cleanup  proce-
  dure in Section 12 can be used to  overcome
  many of these interferences, but unique sam-
  ples r"*y require additional cleanup ap-
                                          685

-------
 n. too, Mpp. M, mem. ou*»
 preaches to achieve the MDL listed In Tables
 land 2.
   3.3  The basic sample wash (Section 10.2)
 may cause significantly reduced recovery of
 phenol and 2,4-dimethylphenol.  The analyst
 must recognize that results obtained under
 these conditions are minimum • concentra-
 tions.

                  4. Safety

   4.1  The  tozicity  or carcinogenicity  of
 each reagent used in this  method has not
 been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
 cal compound should be treated as a poten-
 tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
 posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory is responsible for
 maintaining  a   current awareness  file  of
 OSHA regulations regarding the  safe han-
 dling1 of the chemicals specified in this meth-
 od. A reference file of material data
 sheet* should also, be made available to all
 personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional  references  to laboratory safety
 are available and have been identified*-7 for
 the Information of analyst.
   4*2  Special care should be taken  in han-
 dling pentaflnorobenzyl bromide, which is a
 lachrymator, and 18-crown-6-ether. which is
 hiffhly toxic.

          5. Apparatus and Materials

   6.1  Sampling equipment, for discrete or
 composite sampling.
   5.1.1  Grab sample  bottle— 1-L or 1-qt.
 amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
 lon if the sample  is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles are  not available, protect samples
 from light. The bottle and cap liner must be '
 washed, rinsed with acetone  or methylene
 chloride, and dried before use to minimim
 contamination.
   5.1.2  Automatic sampler (optional)— The
 sampler must Incorporate glass sample con-
 tainers for  the collection of a minimum of
 250 ml* of sample. Sample containers must be
 kept refrigerated at 4*C and protected from
 light during compositing. If the sampler uses
 a peristaltic pump, a minimum  length of
 compressible silicons rubber tubing  may be
 used. Before use. however, the compressible
 tubing should be  thoroughly rinsed with
 methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with
 distilled water to minimize the potential for
 contamination of the sample. An integrating
 flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
 tional composites.
   5.2  Glassware (All specifications, are sug-
 gested. Catalog numbers are included for 11-
•Instratlon only.):
   5.2.1  Separately funnel— 2-L, with Teflon
 stopcock.
  5.2.2 Drying   column—Chromatographic
 column.  400  mm  long  x 19 mm ID.  with
 coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3 Chromatographic  column—100  .mm
 long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock.
  5.2.4 Concentrator  tube.  Kpderna-Dan-
 ish—10-mL. graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025
 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
 at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
 glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
 of extracts.
  5.2.5 Evaporative flask. Kudema-Danish—
 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
 Attach to •concentrator tube with springs.
  5.2.6 Snyder column,  Kuderna-Danlsh—
 Three-ball macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121  or
 equivalent).
  5.2.7 Snyder column.  Kuderna-Danlsh—
 Two-ball  micro  (Kontes K-569001-0219  or
 equivalent). '        .        •.          '
  5.2.8 Vials—10 to 15-xnL. amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.2.9 Reaction flask—15 to 25-mL round
bottom flask, with standard tapered joint.
 fitted with a  water-cooled condenser and U-
shaped drying tube containing granular cal-
cium chloride.
  5.3  Boiling   chips—Approximately  10/40
mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
tract with methylene chloride.
  5.4  Water bath—Heated, with concentric
ring cover, capable of temperature control
(±2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.
  5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighting 0.0001 g.
  5.6  Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
system complete  with a  temperature pro-
grammable gas chromatograph suitable for
on-column injection and all required acces-
sories  including syringes, analytical  col-
umns,  gases,  detector,  and  strip-chart re-
corder. A data system is recommended for
measuring peak areas.
  5.6.1  Column for underlvatized phenols—
1.8 m long x 2 mm n> glass, packed with 1%
8P-1240DA on Supelcoport (80/100 mesh)  or
equivalent. This column  was used to develop
the method performance statements In Sec-
tion 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate
column packings are provided in  Section
11.1.
  5.6.2  Column for derivatized phenols—1.8
m long x 2 mm ID glass, packed with 5% OV-
17 on Chromosorb W-AW-DMCS (80/100 mesh)
or equivalent. This column has proven effec-
tive in  the  analysis  of wastewaters for
derlvatization products  of the parameters
listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used
to develop the method  performance state-
ments in  Section 14. Guidelines for the use of
alternate column packings are provided  in
 Section 11.1.
  5.6.3  Detectors—Flame  ionlzatipn  and
electron capture detectors. .The FID is used
when determining the parent phenols. The
BCD   is  used  when    determining  .the
 derivatized phenols. Guidelines for the use of
                                         686

-------
                                                        PI. 136. App. A. lfa$L 604
alternatve detectors are provided in Section
ILL  •     •'-.-.-    • -. -        '.-   '•

                t. Reagents
  64  Reagent water-Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in which an iaterferent is
not observed at the HDL of the parameters
of interest.
  62  8odi«™ hydroxide solution (10 N)—
Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
and dilute to 100 mL.
  6A  Sodium hydroxide solution (1 N)—Dis-
solve 4 g of MaOH (ACS) in reagent water and
dilute to 100 mL.
  6.4  Sodium snlfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
hydrous. Purify by heating at 400*C for 4 h in
a shallow tray.
  64  Sodium thlosnlfate--81owly, add 58 mL
of HaSO* (ACS. sp. gr. L84) to reagent water
and dilute to 1L.
  64 Potassium  carbonate—(ACS)  Pow-
 dered.
  &9 Pentafluorobensyl    bromide    (a-
 Bromopentafluorotolnene)-47%   minimum
 purity.
  NOTE This chemical is a laehrymator. (See
 Section 13.)°
  640  16-crown-€-ether        (1.4.740.1346-
          rolobctadeoane)—fl8%   Tnlnlmum
al
                                           Store at 4 *C 'and protect firam MeW. stock
                                           standard solutions  should  be ohssktd fre-
                                           quently for signs of degradftttem or evapo-
                                           ration.  especially just  prior  to preparing
                                           calibration standards from then. .
                                             644£  Stock standard soluttoas must  be
                                           replaced after six monthy. or *ooa«r if com-
                                           parison with  check 'standards indi@a.te* a
                                           problem.
                                             646 Quality control  chMk sample con-
                                           centrate— See Section 8.24.

                                                          7. CaUbmttm

                                             74  To calibrate the  FESOC   for  the
                                           anaylsls 'of underivatlsed phenoia, establish
                                           gas  chromatographic operating conditions
                                           equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas
                                           chromatographic system can  be calibrated
                                           n«i«y the external standard technique (Sec-
                                           tion 7.2) or the internal staMssd tec*w«iane
                                           (SeottonTJ).                ^_
                                             7^ External  standard caUbratiOB  proce-
                                           dure for FIDOC:
                                                   Prepare calibration staaStfds at a
                                                     of three concentrattoa levels  for
 parity.
   MOTBI Thi
   641 Derivatt
                             toxic.
                tion reagent-*-Add 1 mL of
.pentaflnorobensyl  bromide and 1 g of 18-
 crown-6-ether to a 50-mL volumetric flask
 and dilute to volume with 2-propanol. Pre-
 pare fresh weekly. This operation should be
 carried out in a hood. Store at 4 *C and pro-
 tect from light.
  642  Acetone, hexane. Tn^t3*"*"*, methyl-
 ene chloride. 2-propanol. toluene— Pesticide
 quality or equivalent.          .
  643  Silica  gel— 100/200 mesh.  Davlson.
 grade-flOS or equivalent. Activate at 130 *C
 overnight and store in a desiccator.
  644  Stock standard  solutions  (1.00  |tg/
 liL)— Stock standard solutions may be pre-
 pared from pure standard matmrlalH or pur-
 chased as certified solutions.
  6444  Prepare stock standard solutions -by
 accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
 material. Dissolve the material in 2-propanol
 and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
 flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
 venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
 rity is  assayed to be 96% or  greater,  the
 weight can be used without correction to cal-
 culate the concentration of the stock stand-
 ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
 can be used at any concentration if they are
 certified by tfr* TTi*iTii7fa"*T>1i'«>f' or by an inde-
 pendent source:
   644£  Transfer the stock  standard solu-
 tions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles,
each parameter of interest by adding- vol-
umes of one or more stock sta&AMds to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
2-propanol.  One of the extesaal standards
should be at a concentration near, but above.
the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentra-
tions should correspond  to the  expected
range of concentrations found in real sam-
ples or should define the working range of
^jfo«y QOtOOtOF*
  7JL2  Using injections of 2 to 6 |il. analyse
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 11 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mass injected. The re-
sults can be used to prepare a calibration
curve  for each compound. Alternatively, if
the ratio  of response to  amount injected
(calibration factor) is a oomstsst^ovp the
working range (<10% relative standard devi-
ation, BSD), linearity through the origin can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in plaee of a calibra-
tion curve.                         	
   7.3  Internal  standard  calibration  proce-
 dure for FIDOO—To use this approach, the
 analyst must select one or more internal
 standards that are similar in analytical be-
 havior to the compounds of interest. The an-
 alyst must further  demonstrate that the
 measurement of the internal standard is not
 affected by method or matrix interferences.
 Because of these limitations,  no internal
 standard can be suggested that is applicable
 to all samples.                - . _. ' -
   7.34  Prepare calibration standards at  a
            of three concentration levels for
                                              each parameter of interest by  adding vol-
                                              umes of one or more stock staa«asds to a
                                              volumetric flask. To «*ch calibration stand-
                                              ard. add a known constant amount of one or
                                              more internal Btisn^«»^«,  and dilute to vol-
                                              ume with 2-propanoL One of the steadsxdft
                                          687

-------
should be at a oonoentration near, but above,
the  MDL  and  the  other concentrations
should correspond to the expected range of
oonoentxations found  in  real samples  or
should define the working range of the detec-
tor.
  7A2 Using injections of 2 to 5 |ili. analyse
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 11 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses  against   concentration  for  each
compound and internal standard. Calculate
response factors  (BF)  for each  compound
using liquation 1.
              RF*
(A.XC».)

(A4.XC.)
                               Equation 1
where:
  A.*Besponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ak»Besponse for the Internal standard.
  d^Conoentration of the Internal standard
  (^•Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured (pg/L).
  If the BF value over the working range is
a constant (<10% BSD), the BF can be as-
sumed to be invariant and the average BF
can be used for calculations. Alternatively,
the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios. AJAb, vs. BF.
  7.4  The working calibration curve, cali-
bration factor, or .BF must be verified on
each working day by the measurement of one
or more  calibration  standards.  If  the re-
sponse for any parameter varies from  the
predicted response by more than ±15%. a new
calibration curve must be prepared for that
compound.
  7.6  To calibrate the ECDOC for the analy-
sis of  phenol  derivatives,  establish  gas
^iirpfti«f^7flT«p>i
-------
finvfconmgfdol Protection Agoncy

data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scrlbed'in Section 8.5.
  aa  To establish  the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
lyst most perform the following operations.
  &2.1 A Quality control (QO check sample
concentrate is required containing1 each pa-
rameter of interest at a concentration of 100
W/mL in 2-propanol. The QC  check sample
concentrate must be obtained  from the U.8.
Environmental Protection Agency. Environ-
mental Monitoring  and Support Laboratory
in Cincinnati. Ohio, if available. If not avail-
able from that source,  the QC check sample
concentrate must be obtained from another
external source. If not available from either
source above, the  QC check  sample con-
centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
using  stock standards prepared independ-
ently from those used for calibration.
  8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check sam- .
pies at a concentration of 100 |ig/L by adding
1.00 mL, of QC check sample concentrate to
each of four 1-L aliqnots of reagent water.
  8.2.3 Analyze  the well-mixed QC check
samples according to the method beginning
In Section 10.
  &2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in
lig/I« and the standard deviation of the re-
covery (s) in |ig/L. for  each parameter using
the four results.
  &2£ For each parameter compare s and 2
with  the corresponding acceptance criteria
for precision and   accuracy,  respectively.
found in Table 3. If s  and X for all param-
eters of interest meet the acceptance cri-
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual  samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or  any individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that p»»M»i«t!«i',
  Non: The large number of  parameters in
Talbe 3 present a  substantial probability
that one or more will fail at least one of the
acceptance criteria when all parameters are
analyzed.
  &2.6 When one or more of the parameters
tested fail at least one of the acceptance cri-
teria, the analyst must proceed according to
Section 8A.6J. or S.2.&2.
  &3.6.1  Locate and correct, the source of
the problem and repeat the test for. all pa-
rameters of interest t»«gt™rH"g' with Section
84L2.
  &2.&2  Beginning with Section 8JL2. repeat
the test only  for  those  parameters  that
failed to meet criteria. Repeated  failure.
however, will confirm  a  general problem
with the measurement system. If this occurs,
locate and correct the1 source of the problem
and repeat .the test for all compounds of in-
terest beginning with Section 842.
  &3  The laboratory  must, on an
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to •••••
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1  The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If, as  in  oomplMaet monitoring.
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher thsa
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the  concentration of a specific
parameter in  the  sample  is not  being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter. the spike should be at 100 pg/L or 1
to 5 times higher than the background con-
centration determined  in  Section   8A2.
whichever concentration would be large?.
  8.3.1.3  If it is impractical  to determine
background levels before spikiag (e.g.» maxi-
mum holding times will be exceeded), the
spike concentration should be (1) the regu-
latory concentration limit,  if any. or. if
none. (2) the  larger of either 5 times higher
than the expected background concentration
orlOO|ig/L.
  8^2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
mine the background concentration (B) of
each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section
appropriate for the background concentra-
tions in the sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the
concentration after spikimg (A) of each pa-
rameter. Calculate each pereeat recovery (P)
as 100(A-B)%/T. where T is  the knowa true
value of the spike.       ,.            ,
  8&S Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter with the oon^spoadlns QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 3.  These
acceptance criteria were calculated  to in-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions. afltnming a spike to background ratio
of 6:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent that the analyst's  spike  to  back-
ground ratio approaches ftl.» If spiking was
performed' at a concentration lower than 100
pg/L. the analyst must use either the QC .ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 3, or optional QC
acceptance  criteria calculated for  the  spe-
cific spike concentration. To calculate op-
tional acceptance criteria for the recover of
a parameter:  a)  Calculate accuracy  (XT)
using the equation in Table 4, snbstitntinr
the  spike concentration  (T) for C; (2) cal-
culate overall precision (8') using the equa-
tion in Table 4, substituting XT for i; (3) cal-
culate the range for recover At the spike
concentration as (100 XVT}±2.44aOO SVT)%.»
  8A4 If any individual P  faUs ontzid* the
designated range for reoowszy. that param-
eter has failed the aoc9pte™»-<*3£lt»ria, A
check standard oontsJmtav each parameter

-------
: _e\ a
 W. 136, App. A, Metn. 6O*~~«*•* a -

 that failed the criteria must be analyzed as
 described in Section 8.4.
  8.4 If any parameter falls the acceptance
 criteria for  recovery in Section 8.3; a QC
 check standard containing  each  parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTK The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the number of parameters being  simulta-
 neously tested, the  complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the labora-
 tory.                                _, .
  8.4.1  Prepare the QC  check standard by
 adding 1.0  mL of QC check  sample con-
 centrate (Section 85.1 or 8.35) to 1 L of rea-
 gent water. The QC check standard needs
 only to contain  the parameters that failed
 criteria in the test in Section 85.
   8.45 Analyze the QC check standard to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
 covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
   8.45 Compare the percent recovery (P.)
 for each parameter with the  corresponding
s QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. Only
• parameters that failed the test In Section 8.3
 need to be compared with these criteria. If
 the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
 side the designated range, the laboratory
 performance for that parameter Is Judged to
 be out of control,  and the problem must be
 Immediately identified and corrected. The
 analytical result for that parameter in the
 unsplked sample is suspect and may not be
 reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
   8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
 oratory, method accuracy for wastewater.
 samples must be assessed and records must
 be maintained.  After,  the analysis  of five
 spiked wastewater samples as in Section 85.
 calculate the average  percent recovery (P)
 and the standard deviation of the percent re-
 covery (a,). Express the accuracy assessment
 as a percent recovery interval from P-2% to
 P+2S,. If P*90% and s,=10%. for example, the
 accuracy Interval is expressed as 70-110%.
 Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
 rameter on a regular basis (e.g. after .each
  five to ten new accuracy measurements).
    8.6. It is recommended that the labora-
  tory  adopt additional  quality  assurance
  practices for use with this method. The spe-
  cific practices that are most productive de-
  pend upon the needs of the laboratory and
  the nature of the samples. Field duplicates
  may be analyzed  to assess the precision of
  the  environmental  measurements.  When
  doubt exists over the identification of a peak
  on  the chromatogram.  confirmatory tech-
  niques such as gas chromatography with a
  dissimilar column, specific element detector,
  or mass spectrometer must be used. When-
  ever possible, the laboratory should analyze
  standard reference materials and participate
  in relevant performance evaluation studies.
                                  r«» KWUIIWII/  •-  -  -
         9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                     Handling
      9.1  Grab samples must be  collected in
     glass  containers.  Conventional  sampling
     practices9 should be followed, except that
     the bottle must not be prerlnsed with sample
     before collection. Composite samples should
     be collected in refrigerated glass containers
     in accordance with the .requirements of the
     program.  Automatic  sampling  equipment
     must  be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
     and other potential sources of contamina-
     tion.
       95  All  samples must  be iced or refrig-
     erated at 4 *C from the  time of collection
     until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and.
     if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of
     sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and
     mix well. EPA Methods 330.4  and 330.5 may
     be  used for measurement of  residual  chlo-
     rine.10 Field test kits are available for this
     purpose.
       95  All samples must be extracted within 7
     days  of collection and completely  analysed
     within 40 days of extraction.2

                10. Sample Extraction
       10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
     of sample bottle for later determination of
     sample volume. Pour the entire sample into
     a 2-L separatory funnel.
       105 For samples high In organic content.
     the analyst may solvent wash the sample at
     basic pH as prescribed in Sections 105.1 and
     1055  to  remove potential method  Inter-
     ferences.  Prolonged  or exhaustive  contact
     with  solvent during the wash may result In
     low recovery of some of the phenols, notably
     phenol and  2,4-dimethylphenol.  For rel-
     atively clean samples, the wash should be
     omitted and the  extraction, beginning with
      Section 105, should be followed.
        105.1  Adjust the pH of the sample to 12.0
     or greater with sodium hydroxide solution.
        1055  Add 80 mL of methylene chloride to
      the sample by Bh***"g the funnel  for 1 rain
      with periodic venting to release excess pres-
      sure. Discard the solvent layer. The wash
      can be repeated up to two additional times if
      significant color is being removed.
        105 Adjust the sample to a pE of 1 to 2
      with sulfuric acid.        .      •..._,„•«.
        10 4 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to
      the  sample  bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to
      rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
      to the  separatory funnel and extract the
       sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
       periodic venting to release excess pressure.
       Allow the organic layer to separate from the
       water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
       emulsion interface between layers is more
       fl^Ti one-third  the  volume of the  solvent
       layer the analyst must employ mechanical
       techniques to complete the phase separation.
       The optimum  technique depends upon the
       sample, but may include stirring, filtration
    690

-------
 Environmental Protection. Agency

 of the emulsion through glass  wool,  cen-
            or other physical nMrtnoflr  Col*
 leot the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
   10.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
 ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
 peat the extraction procedure a second time,
 combining  the extracts in the Erlenmeyer
 flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
 manner.
   10.6 Assemble  a Knderna-Danlsh (K-D)
 concentrator by  attaching a  10-mL  con-
 centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
 Other concentration devices or techniques
 may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
 tor if the  requirements  of  Section  8.2 are
 met.
   10.7  Pour the combined extract through a
 solvent-rinsed  drying  column  containing
 about 10 cm of anhydrous  sodium  sulfate.
 and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
 tor. Rinse the Brlenmeyer flask and column
 with 20 to SO mL of methylene chloride to
 • complete the quantitative transfer.
   .10.8  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
 Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
 by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
 to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
 waiter bath (80 to  65 "Q so that the  con-
 centrator tube is partially immersed in the
 hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
 face of the flask is bathed  with hot vapor.
. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
 and  the water temperature as required to
 complete the concentration in IS to  20 min.
 At the proper rate of distillation the  balls of
 the  column will actively chatter but the
 chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
 vent. When the apparent volume of liquid
 reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and
 allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
    10.9  Increase the temperature of  the hot
 water. bath to 95  to  100 *C.  Remove the
 Synder column and rinse the flask  and its
 lower Joint into the concentrator tube with 1
 to 2 mL of 2-propanol. A 6-mL syringe is rec-
 ommended for this operation. Attach a two-
 ball micro-Snyder column to the concentra-
 tor  tube and prewet the column by adding
 about 0.5 mL of 2-prbpanol to the top.  Place
  the  micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath
 so that the concentrator tube is partially
 immersed in the hot water. Adjust the  verti-
 cal position of the apparatus and .the  water
  temperature as  required to complete con-
  centration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate
  of distillation the  balls of the column will
  actively chatter but the chambers will not
  flood.' When the apparent volume of  liquid
  reaches 2L5 mL,  remove the K-D apparatus
  and allow it to
-------
farenoes, an alternative gas chromatographic
procedure is required. Section 12 describes a
derivatixation and column chromatographic
procedure which has been tested and found
to be a practical means of analyzing .phenols
in complex extract*.

    22. Derivatifation and Electron Capture
        Detector Gas Chromatoffraphy '
  12.1  Pipet  a 1.0-mL aliquot of the 2-pro-
panol solution of standard or sample extract
into a glass  reaction vial.  Add 1.0  mL of
derlvatiiing  reagent  (Section 6.11). This
amount of reagent is sufficient to derivative
a solution whose total phenolic content does
not exceed 0.3 mg/mL.
  12£  Add about 8 mg of potasslnm carbon-
ate to the solution and shake gently.
  12£  Cap the mixture and heat it for 4 h at
WC In a hot water bath.
  12.4  Remove the solution from the  hot
water bath and allow it to cool.
  12£  Add 10 mL  of hexane to the reaction
flask *Ttrt ff>i«v<» vigorously for 1 min. Add 3.0
    of distilled, delonlsed water to the reac-
tion flask and shake for 2 THJTI. Decant a por-
tion of the organic layer into a concentrator
tube and cap with a glass stopper.
  124 Place 4.0 g  of silica  gel  into a
ohroxnatographio column. Tap the column to
settle the silica gel and add about 2 g of an-
hydrous sodium snliate to the top.  .
  12.7 Preelnte  the  column with 6  mL of
hexane. Discard the eluate and just prior to
exposure of the sodium snlfate layer to the
air. pipet onto the  column 2.0 mL  of the
hexane solution  (Section 12.5) that contains
the derivatised sample or standard. Elnte the
column with 10.0 mL of hexane and discard
the eluate. Elute the column, in order, with:
10.0 mL of 16% toluene in hexane (Fraction
1Y, 10.0 mL of 40% toluene in hexane (Frac-
tion 2); 10.0 mL of 75% toluene in hexane
(Fraction 3); and 10.0 mL of 15% 2-propanol
in toluene (Fraction 4). All elntion mixtures
are prepared on a  volume:  volume basis.
Elation patterns for the phenolic derivatives
are shown in Table 2. Fractions may be com-
bined as desired, depending upon the specific
phenols of interest or level of interferences.
  12J Analyse  the  fractions  by ECDGC.
Table 2 summarizes the recommended oper-
ating conditions for the gas chromatograph.
Included in this table are retention times
and MDL that can be  achieved under these
conditions.  An example of the separations
achieved by this column is shown in Figure
2.
       Calibrate the system daily with a
          of three allquots  of calibration
standards, containing each of the phenols of
interest  that are  derivatixed according to
Section 7.6.
  12.10  Inject 2  to 5 ML of the column frac-
tions into the gas chromatograph using the
solvent-flush technique. Smaller (1.0 fiL) vol-
umes can be injected  if automatic devices
are employed. Record the volume injected to
the nearest 0.05 |iL, and  the resulting peak
size in area or peak height units. If the peak
response exceeds the linear range of the sys-
tem, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

             13. Calculation*

  13.1 Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample analyzed by
FIDGC (without derivatication) as indicated
below.
  13.1.1  If the external standard calibration
procedure is used,  calculate the amount of
material injected  from the peak response
using -the calibration curve or  calibration
factor determined in Section 7.2JL The con-
centration in the sample can be calculated
from Equation 2.
     Concentration dig/
            L)
                            (AKVO
                            (V,XV.)
                              Equation 2
where:'
  AsAmount of material injected (ng).
  Vi*Volume of extract injected OiL).
  Vt*Volume of total extract ()iL).
  V,=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13J..2  If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample, using the response factor
(BF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tion 3.
     Concentration dig/
                            (A.XI.)
                         (AtXRFXV.)
                              Equations
where:
  A.sResponse for the parameter to be meas-
ured.
  AbsReBponse for the internal standard.
  L=Amount of Internal standard added to
each extract dig).
  V«=Volume of water extracted (L).
       Determine the concentration of Indi-
vidual compounds in the sample analyzed by
derlvatization and  ECDGC  according  to
Equation 4.
     Concentration (pg/
            .L)
                         (V,)(V.)(CXE)
                               Equation 4
where:
  A=MasB  of  underivatized  phenol  rep-
    resented by area of peak in sample chro-
    matogram.  determined from calibration
    curve in Section 7.5.3 (ng).
  Vj=Volume of eluate injected (|iL).
                                         692

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A. Math. 604
  Vt=Tptal volume of column eluate or com-
   bined fractions from which Vi was taken
  V,=Volume of water extracted In Section
   10.10 (mL).
  B=Total .volume of hexane added In Sec-
   tion 12.5 (mL).
  C= Volume of hezane sample solution added
   to cleanup column in Section 12.7 (mL).
  D=Total volume of 2-propanol extract prior
   to derivattzation (mL).
  E=Volume  of 2-propanol  extract  carried
   through derlvatizatlon  in  Section 12.1
   (mL).
  13.3  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

           14, Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as  the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.' The MDL concentrations listed in Ta-
bles 1 and 2 were obtained using reagent
water.12 Similar results were achieved using
representative wastewaten. The MDL  actu-
ally achieved in a  given analysis will vary
depending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  M.2  This method was tested by 20 labora-
tories  using reagent water, drinking water,
surface  water,    and  three    industrial
wastewaten  spiked as  six concentrations
over the range 12 to 460 |ig/L." Single opera-
tor precision, overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships for a flame lonixation detector are pre-
sented in Table 4.     .

                Reference*

  1. 40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2. "Determination of Phenols in Industrial
and Municipal Wastewatars." EPA 600/4-84-
ABC, National Technical Information  Serv-
ice. PBXYZ. Springfield, Virginia 22161. No-
vember 1984.
  3. Kawahara, F. Z. "Microdetermlnation of
Derivatives of Phenols and Mercaptans by
Means  of  Electron Capture  Gas, Chroma-
tography." Analytical  Chemistry. 40,  1009
(1988).
  4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31, D3894-78.  "Standard Practices  for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of  Organic  Constituents." American
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadel-
phia.     .                         .
  6. "Carcinogens— Working With Carcino-
gens." Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare. Public Health Service.  Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
77-206, August 1977.
  6.  "OSHA  Safety and Health Standards.
General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910)» Occu-
pational Safety and Health Administration.
OSHA 2206 (Revised. January 1976).       •
  7. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories." American Chemical Society Publica-
tion.  Committee on  Chemical  Safety. 3rd
Edition. 1979.
  8. Provost. L. P.. and Elder. R. S. "Inter-
pretation of Percent Recovery Data." Amer-
ican Laboratory, IS, 58-63 (1983). (The value
2.44 used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is
two times the value 1.22 derived in this re-
port.)'
  9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31. D3370-76.  "Standard Practices, for Sam-
pling Water." American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  10. "Methods 330.4 (Tltrtmetrlc, DFD-FA8)
and  330.5  (Spectrophotometric,  DPD) for
Chlorine. Total  Residual." Methmds for
Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes.
EPA-600/4-79-020.  U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
and  Support  Laboratory. Cincinnati, Ohio
45268. March 1979.
  11. Burke. J. A. "Gas Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
Aspects." Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists. 48. 1037 (1985).
  12.  "Development  of  Detection Limits.
EPA Method 604. Phenols." Special letter re-
port for EPA Contract 68-03=2^5, U.S. Envi-
ronmental  Protection   Agency.  Environ-
mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory.
Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
  13.  "EPA Method  Study 14  Method 604-
Phenols." EPA 600/4-84-044, National Tech-
nical  Information   Service,  PB84-196211.
Springfield. Virginia 22161. May 1984.

 TABLE 1— CHROMATOGRAPWC CONornoNS AND
          METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
Phenol,
2.4-OJnwmylph«nal
2AOfchtoreph«nol
2A6-Tffc
4-CMOID4H
          OptMMl
2*<
aphw
   attiytpnmol
            up*
 44arephanol
                            1.70
                            2JOO
                            3J01
                            4JB
                            4JO
                            7.50
                           10JOO
                           1O24
                           1Z42
                           2425
                                 taetenlmtt
                                   (HftD
OU31
045
0.14
022
O3B
O64
aae
13JO
164)
7A
  Column condHoni; Supaleopart (80/100 mt^t)      wdh
 1% 8P-1240DA peotadii • 1JJ m tong x 2_mm M> o)E3 oot-
 umn wtth ndregah cairtw OM ct 30 murin sow ate. Column
 tampmfem MM 80 -C at Modta. i
 •t i^CMn to ISO *C todtKiVi
 mined wWi «i FID.

-------
   PI. 130, App. A, Meth. 604
                                                                4flT«Flr<3!H* (7-1-95 Edition)
                                                                                ••    -  — •—• ^vB*B«^e*ej •£

    TABLE S-SIUCA GEL FRACTIONAL AND ELECTRON CAPTURE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY OF PFBB
                                             DERIVATIVES
                       Parent compound
  2-CMorophenoi
  Phenol.
  24-OW»taropheool _
  ParteeNcfophenol	
  4-KteDphenol..
i










Pare,
1

"••""
»»*»**
"»— «
**"""


7*5

ant race
tic
2

90




SO

~~*~
wwybj
m*
3

1

10




1
rfrac-
4

.__
90
~~~.
— ~
-.—.
~_
— ~
90
   •EJuertcompoiJdon:
       g««jon 1—16% toluene hi hettm.
       gMton 2-40% toluene in hexme.
                                                                      	144 	
                                                                 V-17 pecked in a 1.8 m long x 24 mm 10
                                                                 ™i temperature held feoihamial «r200 «ft
                                .
             4— 16%2-propendhitohJene,
                        TABLE 3— QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA— METHOD 604
 24«rophenol
                                                              Test
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
                                                               100
  NOTE These criteria are baaed
ary have been broadened to
  TABLE 4
                        •aoowary measurements, In upyL
                        	5!»!~™™|*.«n SviSartS 82:4"
                                                                   Limit tors
                                                                     (ne/i)
               274
               25.1
               334
               254
               364
               224
               194
               324
               14.1
               164
                                                                             Range torx
                                                                               (MOD
                                                                             56.7-1114
                                                                             54.1-1102
                                                                             59.7-1034
                                                                             5O4-1004
                                                                             42^-1234
31.7-125.1
564-1034
22.7-1004
56.7-1134
3Z4-1004
 49-122
 38-126
.44-119
 24-118
 30-136
 12-145
 43-117
 13-110
 38-134
 23-108
 53-119
            "METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATON^-METHOD 604
           '—^^^••••••^•••^•••i

^-Chtofo-a-methylpltertol —
2-Nitrophenol -
*T
2.4.6-Trichtorophenol
                                                    Accuracy,
                                                    omwy,X'
047C-147
043C-044
041C4a48
0.62C-1.64
044C-141
040C-1.SB
0.81C-0.76
0.46C40.18
043C+2.07
0.43C*ai1
0.86C-0.40
 iS^ffli^ 2S?2JS^^r^?^^
 ^v^rCr^tS SXiT^™1 winoira oovwon of fn«eUUfnme
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                                      Pt. 136, App, A, Moth. 604
       o
       §
   Oj s   COLUMN:  1% SP-1240DAJ3NI SUPELCpPORT
   si 5         ------	-   	-
            DETECTOR: FLAME IONIZATION
» i   PROGRAM: 80"°Cr AT'INJECTION, IMMEDIATE 8°C/MIN TO 150°C
 0      4      8     12     16     20     24
                   RETENTION TIME. MIN.
  Figure 1. Gas chroma tog ram of phenols.
                                          ?8
                               695

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 604
                       40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)
                    COLUMN: 5% OV-17 ON CHROMOSORB W-AW-DMCS
                    TBWPERATURE: 200*C.
                    DETECTOR: RECTRON CAPTURE
                                             ^H

                                             i
                                             o
                                             5
                                             ^^•i

                                           A_
8    12    16    20    24
    RETENTION TIME, MIN.
                                          28
32
 Figure 2.  Gas chromatogram of PFB derivatives of phenols.
                          696

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

      .   METHOD 605—BENZXDDRB

          1. Scope and Application
  1.1  This method covers the determination
of certain benzidines. The following param-
eters can be determined by this method:
                        StoratNo
                           30120
                           34631
CAS No.
 92-87-6
 91-94-1
  1.2  This is a high performance liquid chro-
matography (HPLC)  method -applicable to
the determination of the compounds listed
above in municipal and industrial discharges
as provided under 40 CFB 136.1. When this
method is used to analyse ""*""<"*»• sam-
ples for the compounds above, identifications
should  be supported  by at least one addi-
tional qualitative technique. This  method
describes  electrochemical conditions at a
second  potential which can be used to con-
firm  measurements made with this method.
Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass
spectrometer   (GC/MS)  conditions  appro-
priate for the qualitative and quantitative
confirmation  of results for  the  parameters
listed above, using the extract produced by
this method.
  1.3 The method detection  limit (MDL. de-
fined in Section 14.1)« for each parameter is .
listed in  Table 1. The  MDL for a specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
 pending upon the nature of the interferences
 in the sample matrix.     .
  1.4 Any modification of this method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered as-a major modification subject to
 application and approval of alternate test
 procedures under 40 CFR 138.4 and 13&5.
   1.5 This method is restricted to use by or
.under  the  supervision  of analysts experi-
 enced in the use of HPLC instrumentation
 and   in   the   Interpretation   of  liquid
 ohromatograms. Bach  analyst  must  dem-
 onstrate  the  ability to generate acceptable
 results with this method using the procedure
 described in Section 8.2.

          ,  2. Summary of Method

   2.1 A  measured  volume  of sample, ap-
 proximately  i-L, is extracted with chloro-
 form using  liquid-liquid extractions in a
 separatory funnel. The chloroform extract is
 extracted with acid. The acid extract is then
 neutralized and extracted with chloroform.
 The final chloroform extract is exchanged to
 methanol while being concentrated using a
 rotary evaporator. The extract is mixed with
 buffer and separated by HPLC. The benzidine
 .compounds are measured with an electro-
  chemical detector.2           .    .
   2£  The  acid back-extraction acts  as a
  general  purpose cleanup to  aid in the elimi-
  nation of interferences.
              ft. 136, App» A, Moth. 605

              3. Interferences
  3.1  Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-  .
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead to  discrete artifacts and/or ele-   .
vated baselines in chromatograms. All of
these materials 'must be  routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks  as  described in
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1 Glassware  must be  scrupulously
cleaned.3  Clean  all glassware  as  soon as
possible after use by rinsing with the last
solvent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be
followed  by  detergent  washing  with hot
water,  and .rinses with  tap  water  and
distilled water. The glassware should then be
drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace
at 400 *C for 15 to 30 min.  Some thermally
stable materials may  not be eliminated by
this treatment. Solvent rinses  with acetone
and pesticide quality hexane may be substi-
tuted for the muffle furnace heating. Vol-
umetric ware should not be heated in a muf-
fle furnace. After drying and cooling, glass-
ware should be sealed and stored in a clean
environment to prevent any accumulation of
dust or other contaminants. Store Inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to F^nimiM interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
  &2 Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from the
sample. The extent of matrix interferences
will vary considerably from source to source.
 depending upon the nature and diversity of
 the industrial complex or municipality being
 sampled. The cleanup procedures that are in-
 herent in the  extraction step are used to
 overcome many of these interferences, but
 unique  samples  may   require  additional
 cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL list-
 ed in Table 1.
   3.3  Some dye plant effluents contain large
 amounts of components with retention times
 closed to benzidine. In  these cases,  it has
 been found useful to reduce the electrode po-
 tential  in  order to eliminate  interferences
 and still detect benzidine. (See Section 12.7.)

                  4. Safety

   4.1  The  toxicity or carcinogenlcity  of
  each reagent used in this method has not
  been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
  cal compound should be treated as a poten-
  tial health harzard. Prom this viewpoint, ex-
  posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
  the lowest possible level by whatever means
  available. The laboratory is responsible for
  maintaining  a  current awareness  file  of
  OSHA regulations regarding the safe han-
  dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
  od. A reference file of material data handling
                                           697

-------
 Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 605
           40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edtttort)
 sheets aboold also be made available to mil
' personnel Involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional  references  to laboratory safety
 are available and have been identified *-* for
 the information of the analyst.
  4£ The following parameters -covered by
 this method have  been tentatively classified
 as known or suspected,  human or mamma-
 llan   carcinogens:  bensddlne   and  3&-
 dlchlorobenzldlne.  Primary  standards  of
 these toxic compounds should be prepared In
 a hood. A NIOBH/MESA approved toxic gas
 respirator should  be worn when the analyst
 handles high  concentrations of these toxic
 compounds.
  4.3 Exposure to  chloroform  should be
 minimised by performing all extractions and
 extract concentrations in a hood or other
 well-ventillated area.

         S. Apparatus and Materials
  6.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or
 composite sampling.
  6,1.1  Grab  sample  bottle— 1-L  or  1-qt.
 amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
 lon if the sample  is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles are not available, protect samples
 from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
 washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
 chloride, and dried before use to minimise
 contamination.
  &1.2  Automatic sampler (optional)— The
 sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
 tainers for the collection of a rn—Dissolve
5.8 mL of glacial acetic acid (ACS) and 13.6 g
of sodium acetate trihydrate (ACS)  in rea-
gent water which has been  purified by filtra-
tion through a RO-4  Mllllpore System or
equivalent and dilute to 1 L.
  6.9  Acetonltrile,   chloroform  (preserved
with 1% ethanol), methanol—Pesticide  qual-
ity or equivalent.
  6.10  Mobile phase—Place equal volumes of
filtered acetonitrile (Millipore type FH filter
or  equivalent) and  filtered acetate buffer
(Millipore type GS filter or equivalent) in a
narrow-mouth, glass container and mix thor-
oughly. Prepare fresh weekly. Degas dally by
sonicating under vacuum, by heating an stir-
ring, or by purging with helium.
  6.11  Stock  standard  solutions (1.00  tig/
ML)—Stock  standard solutions may.be pre-
pared from  pure standard  materials or pur-
chased as certified solutions.
                                          698

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, Mefe. 60S
  6.11:1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material. Dissolve the material in methanol
and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
rity  is  assayed to be 96%  or greater,  the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
can be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source.
  6.11.2  Transfer the  stock  standard solu-
tions ' into  Teflon-sealed screw-cap  bottles.
Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
standard solutions should be  checked fre-
quently for signs of degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially just prior  to preparing-
calibration standards from them.
  6.11.3  Stock  standard  solutions  must be
replaced after six months, or sooner if com- .
parison with  check  standards Indicates a
problem.
  6.12 Quality  control check  sample con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish  chromatographlc operating
conditions equivalent to those given in Table
1. The HPLC system can be calibrated using
the external standard technique (Section 7.2)
or the Internal standard technique (Section
7.3).
  7.2  External  standard calibration proce-
dure:
  7.2.1  Prepare calibration  standards at a
minimum  of three concentration levels  for
each parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes  of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
mobile phase. One of the external standards
should be at a concentration near, but above,
the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentra-
tions  should  correspond to  the  expected
range of concentrations  found in real sam-
ples or  should define the working  range of
the detector.
  7.2.2 Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 pL
or a constant volume Injection loop, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mass .injected.  The re-
sults  can  be used to  prepare  a calibration
curve for  each compound. Alternatively, if
the 'ratio of response to amount injected
(calibration factor) is a constant  over  the
working range (<10% relative standard devi-
ation, RSD). linearity through the origin  can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3  Internal  standard calibration proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select one or more internal standards that
are similar in analytical behavior  to  the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
 ther demonstrate that the measurement of
 the internal  standard is not  affected by
 method or matrix interferences. Because of
 these limitations, no Internal standard can
 be suggested  that is applicable to all  sam-
 ples.
  7.3.1  Prepare calibration standards  at  a
 minimum of  three concentration levels for
 each  parameter of Interest by  adding vol-
 umes of one  or more stock standards  to  a
 volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
 ard, add a known constant amount of one or
 more Internal standards,  and dilute to vol-
 ume with mobile phase. One of the standards
.should be at a concentration near, but above;
 the MDL  and the  other  concentrations
 should  correspond to the expected range of
 concentrations  found In  real  samples or
 should define  the working range of the detec-
 tor.
  7.3.2  Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 pL
 or a constant volume injection loop, analyze
 each calibration standard according to Sec-
 tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
 sponses  against  concentration   for  each
 compound and internal standard. Calculate
 response  factors (RF)  for  each compound
 using Equation 1.
               RF:
.                        '        Equation 1
where:
  A;=Response for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ai.=Response for the internal standard.
  d.=Concentration of the internal standard
    (Hg/L).
  C.=Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured (|ig/L).
  If the RF value over the working range is
a constant «10% RSD). the RF can be as-
sumed to be invariant and the average RF
can-be used for calculations. Alternatively.
the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios. A/At.. vs. RF.
  7.4. The working calibration curve,  cali-
bration factor, or RF  must be  verified on
.each working day by the measurement of one
or  more  calibration standards.  If  the re-
sponse for any parameter varies from the
predicted response by more than ±15%, a new
calibration curve must be prepared for that
compound. If serious loss of response occurs.
polish the electrode and recalibrate.
  7.5  Before  using any cleanup procedure,
the analyst must process a series of calibra-
tion standards through the procedure to vali-
date  elution patterns and  the  absence of
interferences from the reagents.

              8. Quality Control

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
                                         699

-------
txol program. The T" .  '
   8.2 To establish the  ability  to generate
 acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
 lyst must perform the following operations.
   8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample
 concentrate is required containing benzidlne
 and/or S.S'-dichlorobenzldine at a concentra-
 tion of 50  pg/mL each in methanol. The QC
 check sample concentrate must be obtained
  from  the  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
  Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
  port Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if avail-
able. If not available from that source, the
QC check, sample concentrate must be ob-
tained from another external source. If not
available  from either source above,  the QC
check sample concentrate must be prepared
by the laboratory using stock standards pre-
pared independently from those used for cali-
bration.      ,                       •
  8.22  Using a pipet. prepare QC check sam-  •
pies at a concentration of 50 |ig/L by adding
1.00 mL of QC check sample- concentrate to
each of four 1-L-L aliquots of reagent water.
  82.3  Analyze the  well-mixed  QC check
samples according to the method beginning
in Section 10.
  82.4  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
lig/L.  and the standard deviation of the re-
covery  (s) in ng/L, for each parameter using
the four results.
  82.5  For each parameter compare s and X
with  the  corresponding acceptance  criteria
for precision  and  accuracy,  respectively,
found in Table 2. If a and X for all param-
eters of Interest  meet the acceptance cri-
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that parameter.  Locate and
correct the source of the problem and repeat
the test for all parameters of interest begin-
ning with Section 822.
   82  The laboratory must, on an  ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
' sample per month is required.
   82.1  The concentration  of the spike in the
 sample should be determined as follows:
   82.1.1  If.  as in  compliance  monitoring.
 the concentration of a specific parameter in
 the sample is being checked against a regu-
 latory concentration limit, the spike should
 be at that limit or 1 to 5  times higher than
 the background concentration determined in
 Section 822. whichever concentration would
 be larger.                .
   82.12  If  the  concentration of a.specific
 parameter  in  the  sample  is not  being
 checked  against a limit specific to that pa-
 rameter, the spike should be at 50 pg/L or 1
 to 5 times higher than the background con-
 centration  determined   in  Section  82.2.
 whichever concentration would be larger.
   82.12  If it  is  impractical to determine
 background levels before spiking (e.g., maxi-
 mum  holding times will be exceeded), the
 spike  concentration should be (1) the regu-
 latory concentration limit, if any; or. if none
  (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
  the expected background concentration or 50
      .
    82.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
  mine  the background  concentration  (B) of
  each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new
                                          700

-------
                Protection Agency

QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
appropriate  for  the  background  concentra-
tions In.the sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0  mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it .to determine the
concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-
rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
as 1OKA-B)%/T.  where T is the known true
value of the spike.                   /»•>«•«..
  8 3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
acceptance  criteria  were calculated to in-
clude .an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-  •
ttons.  assuming a spike to background ratio
of 5:1.  This error will be accounted for to the
extent that the analyst's spike  to  back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.' If spiking was
performed at a  concentration lower than. 50
iia/L. the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 2. or optional QC
acceptance  criteria calculated for the spe-
cific spike  concentration. To  calculate op-
tional acceptance criteria for the recoverypf
a parameter: (1)  Calculate  accuracy (X')
 using  the equation  in Table 3, substituting
 the spike  concentration (T)  for C; (2) cal-
 culate overall precision (8*) using the equa-
 tion in Table 3. substituting X* for X; (3) cal-
 culate the  range for  recovery at the spike
 concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100 S'/T)%.*
   8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
 designated  range for  recovery, that param-
 eter has failed the acceptance criteria.  A
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed the  criteria must be analyzed  as
 described in Section 8.4.
   8.4  If any parameter fails  the acceptance
 criteria for recovery in Section 8.3.  a  QC
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
   NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the number of parameters  being simulta-
 neously tested, the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the labora-
 tory.
   8.4.1  Prepare the  QC check  standard  by
 adding 1.0 mL of QC  check  sample con-
 centrate (Sections 8.2.1 or 8.3.2)  to 1L. of rea-
 gent  water. The QC check  standard needs
 only  to contain the parameters that failed
 criteria in the  test in Section 8.3.'
   8.4.2  Analyze the  QC  check standard to
  determine the  concentration measured (A) of
  each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
  covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true,
  value of the standard concentration.
    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery  (Pi)
  for each parameter  with the corresponding
  QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
  parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
  need to be  compared with these criteria. If
  the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
   side the  designated range,  the laboratory
   performance for that parameter is Judged to
              Pt. 136. App. A. Molh. 605

be out of control, and the problem must be
Immediately identified and  corrected. The
analytical result for that parameter in the
unsplked sample Is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
oratory, method  accuracy  for wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be  maintained. After the analysis  of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3.
calculate the average percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (a,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from P-2% to
P+2V If P=90% and s,=10%. for example, the
accuracy interval is  expressed as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a regular basis  (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. Field duplicates may  be ana-
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental  measurements.  When  doubt  exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram.  confirmatory techniques such as
 HFLC with a fOOTl™""* column, gas ohroma-
 tography. or  mass  spectrometer must  be
 used.  Whenever possible,   the laboratory
 should analyze standard reference materials
 and  participate  in  relevant  performance
 evaluation studies.

     9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                  Handling

   9.1  Grab  samples  must  be collected in
 glass  containers.  Conventional  sampling
 practices* should be followed, except that the
 bottle must not be prerinsed with sample be-
 fore collection. Composite samples should be
 collected in refrigerated glass contataers in
 accordance with the requirements of the pro-
 gram. Automatic sampling  equipment must
 be as  free as possible of Tygon tubing and
  Other potential sources of contamination.
    9.2  All samples must be iced or refrig-
  erated at 4*C and stored in the dark from the
  time  of collection until  extraction. Both
  benzidine and S.y-dichlorobenzidine are eas-
  ily  oxidized. Fill the sample bottles and, if
  residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of so-
  dium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix
  well.  EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5  may be
  used for measurement of residual  chlorine.8
  Field test kits are available for this purpose.
  After mixing, adjust the pH of the sample to
  a range of 2 to 7 with sulfuric acid.
    9 3  If 1,2-diphenylhydrazine is likely to be.
  present, adjust the.pH of the sample to 4.0±
  0 2 to prevent rearrangement to benzidine.
    94  All samples must be  extracted within 7
   days of collection. Extracts may be held up
   to 7 days before analysis,  if stored under an
                                            701

-------
  Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 605            «

  inert (oxidant free) atmosphere.* The extract
  should be protected from light.

             10. Sample Extraction
" '•  10,1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
  of the sample bottle for later determination
  of sample volume. Pour the entire sample
  into a 3-L separatory funnel. Check the pH
  of the sample with wide-range pH paper and
  adjust to within the range of &6 to 7.5 with
  sodium hydroxide solution or sulfnric acid.
   10.2  Add 100 mL of chloroform to the sam-
  ple bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the
  inner surface.  (Caution: Handle chloroform
  in a well ventilated area.) Transfer the sol-
  vent to  the separatory funnel and extract
  the sample by «h«>ing the funnel for 2 min
  with periodic venting to release excess pres-
  sure. Allow  the organic layer to separate
  from the water phase for a minimalyp of JQ
  min. If the emulsion interface between lay-
  ers is more than one-third the volume of the
  solvent layer, the  analyst must employ me-
  chanical techniques  to complete the phase
  separation. The optimum technique depends
  upon 'the sample,  but may include stirring.
  filtration  of the  emulsion  through  glass!
  wool, centrlfugation, or other physical meth-
  ods. Collect the chloroform extract in a 250-
  mL separatory funnel.
   10.3  Add a 50-znL volume of chloroform to
  the sample bottle  and repeat the extraction
 procedure a second time, combining the ex-
 tracts  in  the separatory funnel. Perform a
 third extraction in the same manner.
   10.4  Separate and  discard any aqueous
 layer remaining in  the 250-mL separatory
 funnel  after combining the organic extracts.
 Add 25 mL of 1  M sulfnric acid and extract
 the sample by •fr«*
-------
Environmental Pioteclion Agency
             Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 605
mixed thoroughly immediately before injec-
tion into the instrument.
  12.4 Inject 5 to 25 nL of the sample extract
or standard into the  TLC. If constant vol-
ume injection loops **.a not used, record the
volume  injected to the nearest 0.05 pL, and
the  resulting  peak size in  area  or peak
height units.
  12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample
by  comparing the retention  times  of  the
peaks in the  sample  chromatogram with
those   of   the   peaks    in    standard
bhromatograms. The width, of the retention
time  window 'used to make identifications
should be based upon measurements of ac-
tual retention time variations of standards
over the course of a day. Three times  the
standard deviation of a retention time for a
compound can be used to calculate'  a  sug-
gested window size; however, the experience
of the analyst should weigh heavily  in  the
interpretation of chromatograms.
  124 If the response for a peak exceeds the
working range of the system, dilute the ex-
tract with mobile phase and reanalyze. .
  12,7 If the measurement of the  peak re-
sponse for benzidine is prevented by the pres-
ence of Interferences, reduce the electrode
potential to +0.6 V and reanalyze. If the ben-
zidine peak is still obscured by interferences.
farther cleanup is required.

     • *       23* CVifcii/fl tfOft ff

  l&l Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample.
  13J.1  If the external standard calibration
procedure is used,  calculate the amount of
material injected from the peak  response
using the calibration curve or calibration
factor determined in Section 7.23. The con-
centration in trhf* sample «^*n be calculated
from Equation 2.          ,     .
     Concentration (tig/ _
                       ~
            "'              (V.XV.)

                               Equation 2
where:
  AsAmount of material injected (ng).
  VieVolume of extract injected (|iL).
  V^Volume of total extract (pL).
  V,=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(HP) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tion 3.
     Concentration (jig/
             L)
  A.=Reaponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ait=Response for the internal standard.  *
  L=Amount of internal  standard added to
    each extract (|ig).               •     •
  V0= Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2  Report .results in |ig/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

          14. Method Performance
  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimum  concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.1  The MDL  concentrations  listed In
Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.10
Similar results were achieved using rep-
resentative wastewaters.  The MDL actually
achieved in  a  given  analysis will  vary  de-
pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  142  This method has been tested for lin-
earity of spike recovery from reagent water
and has been demonstrated to be applicable
over the concentration range from 7xMDL to
    x10
where:
                               Equation 3
      This method was tested by 17 labora-
tories using reagent water, drinking water.
surface   water,   and   three  industrial
wastewaters spiked at six concentrations
over the range 1.0 to 70 |ig/L." Single opera-
tor precision, overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these  relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.

               Reference*
  1. 40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2. "Determination of BenMdines .in Indus-
trial and Mnnoipal Wastewaters," EPA 600/4-
82-022, National Technical Information Serv-
ice. PB82-196320, Springfield. Virginia  22161,
April 1982.
  3. A8TM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31. D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of  Organic  Constituents," American
Society for Testing and Materials,  Philadel-
phia.
  4.  "Carcinogens— Working With  Carcino-
gens." Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare. Public Health Service, Center for
Disease Control, National Institute  for Occu-
pational Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-206, August 1977.
  5.  "OSHA Safety and  Health Standards.
General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910),  Occu-
pational Safety and Health Administration,
OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories." American Chemical Society Publica-
tion, Committee  on  Chemical Safety. 3rd
Edition, 1979.
                                        703

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 605
                                                          40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edmoo)
  7. Provost, LJP., arid-Elder. R.S. "Interpre-
tation of Percent Recovery Data," American
Laboratory, IS. 58-63 (1963). (The value 2.44
used In the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
times .the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31. D3370-76. "Standard Practices  for Sam-
pling Water." American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  9. "Methods 830.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS)
and  830.5 (Spectrophotometric,  DFD)  for
Chlorine   Total  Residual."   Methods  for
Chemical  Analysis  of Water  and  Wastes.
EPA-60CV4-TO-020,  U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
and  Support Laboratory. Cincinnati. Ohio
45268, March 1879.
  10.  "EPA  Method Study  15.  Method  60S
(Benzidines)."  EPA  600/4-84-062,  National
                                              Technical Information Service. PB84-2L1176.
                                              Springfield. Virginia 22161. June 1984.
                                                11. "EPA  Method  Validation  Study  15.
                                              Method 605 (Benzidines)," Report  for EPA
                                              Contract 68-03-2624 (In preparation).

                                               TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND
                                                        METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
3^-Otehlorobenzidine _
                                                                  Mention
                                                                    time
                                                                    (mh)
                                                                       6.1
                                                                      12.1
                           Column
                              1.44
                              3*4
                                                                                    Mathod
0.08
0.13
                                                HPLC .Column condttioni; Ucnroaorb RP-2, S micron parr
                                              tide size, in a* 25 cmx4.6 mm ID italnlaii ataei column. Mo-
                                              bile Phaaa: OJB aAJmn of 60% acatonttrile/SOK 0.1M pH 4.7
                                              acetate buffer. The MOL were determined uUng an
                                              chemical detector operated at +0.8 V.
                      TABLE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 605
__
BenzkSne .


X*Averac



m recovery for four raoo




Teat
cone.
SO
SO
Umttfora
(MXU
1&7
23.6
Range for
0.1-61J)
18.7-604
Range for
(percent)
D-140
6-128
wary measurements, in M/L fSocUon &2.4J.
varv meaauremenli. in uod. (SecOon &2.4).
  P. P^Percent recovery maaaurad (Section a32. Section 8.42).
  D^Mectad; raauft mat be greater than zero.
  Note; Theae criteria, an* beaad dradty upon Ihe
heW9beMfl t3TOBdeVMK} et>•MUTVe^lpeteemlMy OlHill URsltft IOC
                                     ethod perfo
M data In Table 3. Where neceaaary, the Hmtta for recovery
tiora betow thoae.uaad to develop table 3.
  TABLE 3— METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION— METHOD 605
• Parameter
P4nrv«nfi 	 ,,, ....,....,.„ ..-- ,
1TVJ^WMnmh«nTW-vf x ,
Accuracy, ea
recovery,
X'(ng/t)
0.70C+006
oflftC+07^
I'rtfT aif'jil
precM*an.a,'
(«W
O28X4O.19
osax-ojos

OveraMprecV-
alon.S'(MAJ
0.40X40.18
0^38X«OAZ
  X'«Eipeded racovery tor one or more maeauramanti of a «amp>e containing «<
                                                              ntratton of C, In
                                                               Mmtfon found of?, hi »oA-
  «,"»&qpectad alngta anafrat atanderd devtation of ineeeuiamenli at an even,	        - , •-.
  S'.Expected bHenatemory atandertf devMon of maaainmants at en average concentration tound o( X, m peA-
  C-True value for the concentration. In M/l.
                                             ta«^
                                            704

-------
EftvhofifTwntelftotedlOT               ,     K, 136. App. A, Mom. 605
      COLUMN: LICHROSORB RP-2
      MOBILE PHASE: 50% ACETONITRILE IN ACETATE BUFFER
      DETECTOR: ELECTROCHEMICAL AT + 0.8 V
                     tu
                     z
                     5
                     N
Ul
Z
5
S3
                            i
                            o
                       6      12
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.
       Figure  1,  Liquid chromatogram
                   of benzidines.
                           705

-------
 Pt. 136, App. A, M«ttu 606
                             40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edttton)
       McraoD «6— FBTHALAIX ESTTB

           1. Scope and Application
   1.1 This method coven the determination
• of certain phthalate esters. The following pa-
 rameters can be determined by this method:
          Paranwtar
 Butyl bttizyfpttttaisti
 DUvfcuV phttMtato ..
STORET
  Na
  30100
  34202
  30110
  34336
  34341
  34606
CAS No.
117-81-7
 85-68-7
 84-74-2
                                   131-11-3
                                   117-84-0
  1.2 This is  a gas chromatographic  (OC)
 method applicable to the determination of
 the compounds listed above in municipal and
 industrial discharges as provided  under 40
 CFR 19S.lv When this method is used to ana-
 lyse tinfarrHHur samples for any or all of the
 compounds above, compound identifications
 should be supported by at least one addi-
 tional  qualitative  technique.  This method
 describes analytical conditions for a second
 gas Qhromatographic column  that can  be
 used to confirm measurements  made  with
 the primary column. Method 625 provides gas
 chromatograph/mass  spectrometer (QC/MS)
 conditions appropriate  for the  qualitative
 and quantitative confirmation of results for
 all of the parameters listed above, using the
 extract produced by this method.
  1.3 The method detection limit (MDL. de-
 fined in Section 14.1)1 for each parameter is
 listed in Table 1.  The  MDL  fo? a specific
 wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
 pending- upon the nature of interferences in
 the sample matrix.
  1.4 The sample extraction and concentra-
 tion steps in this method are essentially the
 same as in Methods 608.  609; 611. and 612.
 Thus, a single sample may be extracted to
 measure the  parameters  included in  the
 scope of each of these methods. When clean-
 up is required, the concentration  levels must
 be  high enough to permit selecting aliquots.
 as  necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup
 procedures. The analyst is allowed the lati-
 tude,    under    Section  12,    to  select
 chromatographic conditions appropriate for
 the simultaneous measurement of  combina-
 tions of these parameters.
  1.5 Any modification of this method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered  as a major modification subject to
 application and approval  of alternate test
 procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
  1.6 This method is restricted to use by or
 under  the supervision  of analysts experi-
 enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
 in  the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
 Bach analyst must demonstrate  the ability
 to  generate  acceptable results with this
 method using the procedure described in Sec-
 tion 8.2.  •
           2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A measured volume  of sample,  ap-
proximately  1-L, is extracted with methyl-
ene chloride  using a separatory funnel. The
methylene chloride extract  is dried and ex-
changed to hexane during concentration to a
volume of 10  mL or less. The extract is sepa-
rated  by gas  chromatography  and   the
phthalate esters are then measured with an
electron capture detector.*
  22  Analysis for phthalates  is especially
complicated  by their ubiquitous occurrence
in the  environment.  The method provides.
Flozisll and alumina column cleanup proce-
dures to  aid in  the elimination of inter-
ferences that may be encountered.

              3. Interferences

  3.1  Method interferences  may  be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead to discrete artifacts and/or ele-
vated baselines in. gas chromatograms. All of
these materials must  be  routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of  the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks  as  described in
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1  Glassware   must  be   scrupulously
cleaned.9 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by  rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing  with hot water,
and  rinses with  tap water  and distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry. and heated in  a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 'IS to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
terials, such as PCBs. may not be eliminated
by this, treatment. Solvent rinses with ace-
tone and  pesticide quality  hexane may be
substituted for the muffle furnace heating.
Thorough rinsing with such  solvents usually
eliminates PCB  Interference. Volumetric
ware should  not be heated in a muffle fur-
nace. After  drying and  cooling,  glassware
should be sealed and stored  in a clean envi-
ronment  to  prevent  any accumulation  of
dust or other contaminants. Store inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2 The use of high purity  reagents and
solvents helps to minimize interference prob-
lems. Purification  of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
  3.2  Phthalate esters, are contaminants in
many products commonly found in the lab-
oratory. It is particularly important to avoid
the use of plastics because phthalates  are
commonly used as plasticizers and are easily
extracted from plastic  materials. Serious
phthalate contamination can result at any
time, if consistent quality  control is  not
practiced. Great care must be experienced to
prevent   such  contamination.  Exhaustive
cleanup of reagents and glassware may be re-
quired to eliminate  background phthalate
contamination.*-3
                                          706

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency

."  3.3  Matrix interferences may be caused by
 contaminants that are co-extracted from the
 sample. The extent of matrix interferences
 will vary considerably from source to source,
 depending upon the nature and diversity of
 the industrial complex or municipality being
 sampled. The cleanup procedures  in Section
 11 can be used to overcome many of these
 interferences, but unique samples may re-
 quire  additional  cleanup  approaches  to
 achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.

                 ^.4. Safety

   4.1  The  toxlcity  or carcinogenicity  of
 each reagent used in this  method has not
 been precisely denned; however, each chemi-
 cal compound should be treated as a  poten-
 tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
 posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory is responsible for
 maintaining  a .current  awareness -file  of
 OSHA  regulations regarding the safe han-
 dling of the chemicals specified in  this meth-
 od. A reference file of material data handling
 sheets should also be made  available to all
 personnel Involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional  references to laboratory  safety
 are available and have been identified ** for
 the information of the analyst.

          5. Apparatus and Materials

   5.1  Sampling equipment,  for discrete  or
 composite sampling.
   5.1.1  Grab  sample  bottle—1-L  or  1-qt.
 amber  glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
 lon If the sample is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles  are  not  available,  protect samples
 from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
 washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
 chloride, and dried before use to minimize
 contamination.
   5.1.2  Automatic sampler  (optional)—The
 sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
 tainers for  the collection of a minimum of
 250 mL of sample.  Sample containers must be
 kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
 light during compositing. If the sampler uses
 a peristaltic pump, a minimum  length  of
 compressible silicone rubber tubing may  be
 used. Before use,  however, the. compressible
 tubing should be thoroughly  rinsed with
 methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
 distilled water to  minimize the potential for
 contamination of the sample. An integrating
 flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
 tional composites.
   5.2 Glassware (All specifications are sug-
 gested. Catalog numbers are included for il-
 lustration only).
   5.2.1  Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon
 stopcock.
   5.2.2  Drying    column—Chromatographic
 column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm
 ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
              Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 606

  5.2.3 Chromatographic  column—300 mm
long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and
coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-
420540-0213 or equivalent).
  5.2.4 Concentrator   tube.   Kuderna-Dan-
ish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.5 Evaporative flask. Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
  5.2.6 Snyder  column.  Kuderna-Danish—
Three-ball  macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121  or
equivalent).
  5.2.7 Snyder  column.  Kuderna-Danish—
Two-ball  micro  (Kontes  K-569001-0219  or
equivalent).
  5.2.8 Vials—10 to 15-mL. amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.3  Boiling   chips—Approximately   10/40
mesh. Heat to 400 'C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
tract with methylene chloride.
  5.4  Water bath—Heated, with concentric
ring cover, capable of temperature control
(±2 *C). The bath should be used In a hood.
  5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.
  5.6  Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
system complete with  gas chromatograph
suitable for on-column injection and all re-
quired accessories  including syringes, ana-
lytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-
chart  recorder. A  data  system  is rec-'
ommended for measuring peak areas.
  5.6.1  Column 1—1.8 m  long x 4  mm ID
glass, packed  with 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-
2401 Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
This column was used to develop the method
performance statemelts in Section 14. Guide-
lines  for  the use  of  alternate  column
packings are provided in Section 12.1.
  5.6£  Column 2—1.8 m  long x 4  mm ID
glass, packed with 3% OV-1 on Supelcoport
(100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
  5.6.3  Detector—Electron capture detector.
This detector has proven effective in the
analysis of wastewaters for the  parameters
listed in the scope (Section 111), and was used
to develop the method performance  state-
ments in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of
alternate detectors are provided in Section
12.1.

                6, Reagents
  6.1  Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in which an interferent is
not observed at the MDL  of the  parameters
of interest.          '  ,
  6.2  Acetone, hexane, isooctane. methylene
chloride,,  methanol—Pesticide  quality  or
equivalent.
  6.3  Ethyl ether—nanograde, redistilled in
glass if necessary.
  6.3.1  Ethyl ether must be shown to be free
of peroxides before it is used as indicated by
                                          707

-------
EM Laboratories Quant test stripe. (Avail-
able from Scientific Products Co.. Cat. No.
P112S-8. and other suppliers.)
  6.3.2 Procedures   recommended  for  re-
moral of peroxides'are provided with the test
'•tripe. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol
preservative must be added to each liter, of
ether.
  €.4 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
hydrous. Several levels of purification may
be  required in order to reduce background
phthalate levels to an acceptable level: 1)
Heat 4 h at 400 *C in a shallow tray. 2) Heat
16 h at 450 to £00  *C  in  a shallow tray. 3)
Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride for
4Sh.
  6.5 Florisil—PR  grade  (60/100 mesh). Pur-
chase activated at 1250 *F  and store in the
dark in glass containers with ground glass
stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. To prepare
for use. place 100 e of Florisil into a 500-mL
beaker and heat for approximately 16 h at 40
•C. After heating transfer to a 500-mL rea-
gent bottle. Tightly seal and  cool to room
temperature. When cool add 3 mL of reagent
water. Mix thoroughly by shaking or rolling
for 10 min and let  it stand for at least 2 h.
Keep the bottle sealed tightly.  '
  6.6 Alumina—Neutral  activity  Super I.
W200 series (ICN Life  Sciences Group.  No.
401583). To prepare for use. place 100 g of alu-
mina into a 500-mL beaker and heat for ap-
proximately 16  h at 400 *C. After heating
transfer to a 500-mL reagent bottle. Tightly'
seal and cool to room temperature.  When
cool add 3 mL of reagent water. Mix thor-
oughly by shaking  or rolling for 10 min and
let it stand for at least 2 h. Keep the bottle
sealed tightly.
  6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 |ig/|iL>—
Stock standard solutions can be prepared
from pure standard materials or purchased
as certified solutions.
  6.7.1 Prepare  stock  standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material. Dissolve the material in isooctane
and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
rity is  assayed to be  96% or greater,  the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially  prepared stock standards
can be used at any  concentration if they are
certified by the  manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source.
  6.7.2 Transfer the  stock standard solu-
tions into Teflon-sealed  screw-cap bottles.'
Store at 4 *C and protect from light.  Stock
standard solutions should  be checked  fre-
quently for signs of degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially  just prior  to preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be re-
placed after six months, or sooner if com-
parison with  check  standards indicates  a
problem.
  6,8  Quality  control  check  sample  con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish gas chromatograph operat-
ing conditions equivalent to those given in
Table  1. The gas  chromatographic system
can be calibrated using the external standard
technique (Section  7.2) or the internal stand-
ard technique (Section 7.3). •,
  7.2  External standard  calibration proce-
dure:
  7.2.1  Prepared calibration standards at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
isooctane.  One  of the  external  standards
should be at a concentration near, but above.
the- MDL (Table 1)  and the other concentra-
tions should  correspond to  the  expected
range of concentrations found in real sam-
ples or should define the working range of
the detector.
  7.2.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 |iL, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mass injected. The re-
sults can be used  to prepare a  calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if
the ratio of  response  to amount. injected
(calibration factor) is a constant over the
working range (< 10% relative standard devi-
ation. BSD), linearity through the origin can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3 Internal standard calibration. proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select one or  more Internal standards that
are similar in analytical behavior to the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the  internal  standard is not affected  by
method or, matrix  interferences.  Because of
these limitations, no internal  standard can
be suggested- that  is  applicable to all sam-
ples.
  7.3.1  Prepare  calibration standards at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter of Interest by adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flash. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to vol-
ume with isooctane. One of  the standards
should be at a concentraton near, but above,
the  MDL  and  the  other  concentrations
should correspond  to the expected range of
concentrations  found in  real' samples  or
should define the working range of the detec-
tor.
  7.3.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 pL, analyze
each calibration  standard .according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area  re-
sponses  against   concentration  for  each
compound  and Internal  standard. Calculate
                                          708

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 606
response - factors (KF) for each  compound
using Equation 1.
              RF=
                    (AuXC.)
             ^                 Equation 1
where:
  A,=ReBponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  AtesResponse for the internal standard.
  Ct.=Concentration of the internal standard
    
-------
Pt. 136, App. A, M«th. 606
           40 CFR Cfi. I (7-1-95 EdHtoo)
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of .actual samples can begin. If
any individual a exceeds the precision limit
or any individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
mooeptable for that parameter.  Locate  and
correct the source of the problem and repeat
the test for all parameters of interest begin-
ning with Section BJL2.
  8.3  The laboratory must, on  an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month,  at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If. as  in  compliance  monitoring.
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample  is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8A2, whichever concentration would
be larger.  ' •
  8.3.1.2   If the concentration of  a  specific
parameter  in the sample   is not being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at the test con-
centration  in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to  5 times
higher Vhm the background concentration
determined in Section 8.3.2,  whichever  con-
centration would "be larger.
  8.3.1.3  If it is impractical to  determine
background levels before spiking (e.g.. maxi-
mum  holding times will be  exceeded),  the
spike concentration'should be (1) the regu- .
latory concentration limit, if any;  or. if none
 (2) the larger of either  5 times higher than
the expected background concentration or
 the test concentration in Section 8.23.
  8.3.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
 mine  the background concentration (6) of
 each parameter. If .necessary, prepare a new
 QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
 appropriate for the background  concentra-
 tions in the sample. Spike a second sample
 aliquot with 1.0 znL of the QC check sample
 concentrate and analyze it to determine the
 concentration after spiking  (A) of each pa-
 rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
 as 100(A-B)%/T. where T is the known true
 value of the spike.
   8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
 each parameter with the corresponding QC
 acceptance criteria found In Table 2. These
 acceptance criteria were calculated to in-
 clude an allowance for error in measurement
 of both the background and spike concentra-
 tions, assuming a  spike to background ratio
 of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
 extent  that  the  analyst's  spike to  back-
 • ground ratio approaches 5:1.* If spiking was
 performed at a concentration lower than the
 test concentration in Section 8.2.2, the ana-
 lyst must  use either the QC acceptance cri-
 teria in Table 2. or 'optional QC acceptance
criteria, calculated for the specific spike con-
centration. To calculate optional acceptance
criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1)
Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation in
Table 3. substituting the spike concentration
(T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (80
using the equation in Table 3. substituting X'
for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at
the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)42.44(100
SVT)%.«
  8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
designated range for recovery, that param-
eter has failed  the  acceptance criteria. A
check standard  containing each parameter
that failed the criteria .must be analyzed as
described in Section 8.4.
  8.4  If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria for recovery in Section 8.3. a QC
check standard  containing each parameter
that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTE: The frequency  for the required anal-
ysis of a  QC check standard will depend upon
the number of  parameters being  simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the labora-
tory.
    8.4.1  Prepare the QC check standard by
adding 1.0  mL  of QC check  sample con-
centrate (Section 8.2.1  or 8.3£) to 1 L of rea-
gent water. The QC check standard needs
only  to  contain the parameters that failed
criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
    8.4.2  Analyze the QC  check standard to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true
value'of the standard concentration.
    8.4.3  Compare the percent recovery (P.)
for each parameter with  the corresponding
QC'acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to  be compared with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side  the designated range,  the  laboratory
performance for that parameter is Judged to
be out of control, and the problem must be
 immediately  identified and  corrected. The
 analytical result for that parameter in the
 unspiked sample is suspect and may not be*
 reported for regulatory compliance  purposes.
    8.5  As part of the QC program for the
 laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater
 samples must be assessed and records must
 be maintained. After the  analysis of  five
'spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3,
 calculate' the average percent recovery *(P)
 and the standard deviation of the percent re-
 covery (Sp). Express, the accuracy assessment
 as a percent recovery  interval from P-28p to
 P+2sp. If P=90% and 8p=10%. for example, the
 accuracy  interval is  expressed as 70-110%.
 Update  the accuracy assessment for each pa-
 rameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each
 five to ten new accuracy measurements).
     8.6  It is recommended that the labora-
  tory adopt  additional  quality   assurance
  practices for use with this method. The spe-
                                          710

-------
EnvhonnHMitQl Protection
dflo practices that are most productive de-
pend upon the  needs of the laboratory and
the nature of the samples.. Field duplicates
may be analyzed to assess the precision of
the  environmental  measurements.  When
doubt exists over the Identification of a peak
on  the chromatogram.  confirmatory tech-
niques such as gas chromatography with a
dissimilar column, specific element detector.
or mass spectrometer must be used. When-
ever possible, the laboratory should analyze
standard reference materials and participate
in relevant performance evaluation studies.  ,

    9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                Handling
  9.1  Grab  samples must be  collected  in
glass  containers.  Conventional sampling
practices" should be  followed, except that
the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
before collection. Composite samples should
be  collected In refrigerated glass containers
in  accordance with the requirements of the
program. Automatic  sampling equipment
must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
and other potential sources of contamina-
tion.
  9.2  All samples must be Iced or refrig-
erated at 4 »C from the time of collection
until extraction.            ,
  9.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
days of collection and completely analyzed
within 40 days of extraction.2

            10. Sample Extraction

  10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
of  the sample bottle for later  determination
of  sample volume. Pour the  entire sample
.Into a 2-L separatory funnel.   •
  10.2 Add GO mL of methylene chloride to
the sample bottle, seal, and  shake 30 s to
rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
to  the separatory funnel and extract the
sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
periodic venting to release excess pressure.
Allow the organic layer to separate from the
water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion interface between layers is more
 than one-third the volume of the solvent
 layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
 techniques to  complete the phrase separa-
 tion. The optimum technique depends upon
 the sample, but may. include stirring, filtra-
 tion of the emulsion through glass wool, cen-
 trifugation, or other physical methods. Col-
 lect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
   10.3  Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
 ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
 peat the extraction procedure a second time.
 combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer
 flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
 manner.       .
   10.4  Assemble  a Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
 concentrator  by attaching  a 10-mL  con-
 centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
             PI. 136, App. A, Moth. 606

Other  concentrator  devices or  techniques
may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
tor if  the  requirements of Section 8.2 are
met.
  10.5  Pour the combined extract through a
solvent-rinsed  drying column  containing
about  10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate,
and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
tor. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column
with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
by adding, about 1 mL of methylene chloride
to the  top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
water  bath (60 to 65 *O  so that the  con-
centrator tube  is partially immersed in the
hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
face of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
and the water temperature as required to
complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min.
At the proper rate of distillation the balls of
the  column will actively  chatter but the
chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
vent. When the apparent volume  of liquid
reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and
allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
  10.7  Increase the temperature of the hot
water  bath to about 80 *C. Momentarily re-
move  the Snyder column, add SO mL of
hexane and a new boiling chip, .and reattach
the Snyder column. Concentrate the extract
as in  Section  10.6.  except use hexane to  '
prewet the column. The elapsed time of con-
centration should be 5 to 10 min.
  10.8  Remove the Snyder column and rinse
the flask and its lower Joint  into the con-
centrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-
mL syringe is recommended  for this  oper-
ation. Adjust the extract volume to 10 mL.
Stopper the concentrator tube and store re-
frigerated if further processing will not be
performed immediately. If the extract will
be stored longer than two days, it should be
 transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial.
 If the sample extract  requires no further
 cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic
 analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires
 further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
   10.9   Determine the original sample vol-
. ume by refilling the sample bottle to the
 mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-
 mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
 volume to the nearest 5 mL.

          11. Cleanup and Separation

   11.  Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
 essary for a relatively .clean sample matrix.
 If particular.circumstances demand the use
 of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
 either procedure below or any other appro-
 priate procedure. However, the analyst first
 must demonstrate that the requirements of
 Section 8.2 can be met using the method as
                                          711

-------
 I*).
 revised to Incorporate the  cleanup  proce-
 dure.
  11.2  If the entire extract IB to be cleaned
 up by one of the. following procedures,  it
.must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the con-
 centrator tube in Section 10.8. add a clean
 bdlllnff chip and  attach  a two-ball micro-
 Snyder column. Prewet the -column by add-
.iny about 0.5 xnL of hezane to the top. Place
 the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath
 (80 *C) BO that the concentrator tube  is par-
 tially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the
 vertical position of the apparatus and the
 water temperature as required to complete
 the concentration in 5 to 10 xnin. At the prop-
 er rate of distillation the balls of the column
 will actively chatter but the chambers will
 not flood. When the apparent volume of liq-
 uid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D
 apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for
 at least 10 rain. Remove the micro-Snyder
 column  and rinse its lower joint into the
 concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hezane. Ad-
 just the final volume to 2.0 mL and proceed
 with one of the following cleanup procedures.
  114 .Florisil column cleanup for phthalate
 esters:
  11.3,1  Place  10 B of  Florisil into  a
 chromatographlc column. Tap the column to
 settle the Florisil and add 1 cm of anhydrous
 sodium suUate to the top.
  11.S.2  Preelute the column with 40 mL of
 hezane. The rate for all  elutions should  be
 about 2 rnT^"*<", Discard the eluate and just
 prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
 to the air. quantitatively transfer the 2-mL
 sample extract onto the column using an ad-
 ditional 2 mL  of  hezane to complete  the
 transfer. Just prior to exposure of the so-
 dium  sulfate layer to the air. add 40 mL of
 hezane and continue the elution of the col-
 umn. Discard <$»<• hezane eluate.
   11.3.3  Next, elute the column with 100 mL
 of 20% ethyl ether in hezane (VAT) into a 500-
 mli K-D flask equipped with a 10-roL con-
 centrator tube.  Concentrate the collected
 fraction as in Section 10.6. No solvent. ex-
 change is necessary. Adjust  the volume of
 the cleaned up extract to 10 mL in the con-
 centrator tube and analyze by gas chroma-
 tography (Section 12).
   11.4  Alumina column cleanup for phthal-
 ate esters:
   11.4.1  Place  10  g of  alumina  into  a
 chromatographic column. Tap the column to
 settle the alumina and add  1 cm of anhy-
 drous sodium .sulfate to the top.
   11.4.2  Preelute the column with 40 mL 'of
 hexane. The  rate for all elutioris should be
 about 2 mL/mln. Discard the  eluate and just
 prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
 to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2-mL
 sample extract onto the column using an ad-
 ditional  2 mL of 'hezane  to complete the
 transfer. Just prior  to  exposure  of the so-
 dium sulfate layer to the air. add 35  mL  of
 hezane and continue the elution of the col-
 umn. Discard this hezane eluate.
  11.4.3  Next, elute the column with 140 mL
 of 20% ethyl ether in hezane (VAT) into a 500-
 mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL con-
 centrator type.  Concentrate the  collected
 fraction as in Section 10.6.  No solvent ex-
 change is necessary. Adjust the volume of
 the cleaned up extract to 10 mL in the con-
 centrator tube and analyze by gas chroma-
 tography (Section 12).

           12. Gas Chromatography

  • 12.1  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
 operating conditions for  the  gas  chro-
 matograph. Included in this table are reten-
 tion times and MDL  that can be  achieved
 under these conditions. Examples of the sep-
 arations achieved by Column 1 are  shown in
 Figures 1 and  2. Other packed or  capillary
 (open-tubular)   columns,  chromatographic
 conditions, or detectors may be used if the
 requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
  12.2  Calibrate the  system daily as  de-
 scribed in Section 71
  12.3  If the Internal standard  calibration
 procedure is being used, the Internal staldard
 must be added to the sample extract and
 mixed thoroughly immediately before injec-
 tion into the gas chromatograph.
  12.4  Inject 2 to 5 )iL of the sample extract
 or  standard  into  the  gas-chromatograph
 using the solvent-flush technique.11 Smaller
 (1.0 }iL) volumes may be injected if auto-
 matic devices are employed.  Record the vol-
 ume Injected to the nearest 0.05 pL. and the
 resulting peak size in area  or peak  height
'units.
   12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample
 by  comparing the retention times of  the
 peaks  in the  sample  chromatogram with
 those   of   the   peaks   in    standard
 chromatograms. The width of the  retention
 time window used to make identifications
 should be based upon measurements of ac-
 tual retention time variations of  standards
 over the course .of a day. Three times the
 standard deviation of a retention time for a
 compound can  be used  to calculate a sug-
 gested window size; however, the experience
 of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
 interpretation of chromatograms.
   12.6  If the response for a peak exceeds the
 working range of the system, dilute the ex-
. tract and reanalyze.
   12.7  If the measurement  of the peak  re-
 sponse is prevented by the presence of inter-
 ferences, further cleanup is required.

               13. Calculations.

   13.1  Determine the concentration of indi-
 vidual compounds in the sample.
   13.1.1 , If the external standard calibration
 procedure is used, calculate the amount of
 material injected- from  the peak response
 using  the calibration curve or calibration
                                          712

-------
Envtabnmanfal Protection Agency
              ft. 136. App. A. M@m. 606
factor determined in Section 1.12. The con-
centration In the sample can be calculated
from Equation 2,
      Concentration (ygl _
             .L)         ~
    •                            Equation 2
 where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  V|=Volume of extract injected (|iL).
  V,sVolume of total extract (uL).
  V.=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2  If the Internal standard calibration
 procedure Is used, calculate the concentra-
 tion in the sample using: the response factor
 (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
 tion 3.
      Concentration (jig/
             L)
                             (A.XU
                          (AbXRFXV.)
                                Equations
 where:
   A«=Response for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
   Au=Response for the internal standard.
   I,=Ainount  of internal standard added to
    each extract dig).
   V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
   13.2 Report results in jig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

           14. Method Performance

   14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as the minimum concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 99% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1 The MDL concentrations  listed in
 Table 1 were  obtained using: reagent water.13
 Similar results  were  achieved using rep-
 resentative wastewaters. The MDL actually
 achieved in a given analysis  will vary  de-
 pending on Instrument sensitivity and ma-
 trix effects.
   14.2 This method has been tested  for lin-
 earity of spike recovery from reagent water
 and has been demonstrated to be applicable
 over the concentration range from 5 x MDL
 to 1000 x MDL with the following exceptions:
 dimethyl and diethyl phthalate recoveries at
 1000 x MDL were low (70%); bis-2-ethylhexyl
, and  dl-n-octyl phthalate recoveries at  5 x
 MDL were low (60%)."
   14.3 This method was tested by 16 labora-
 tories using  reagent water, .drinking water,
 surface    water,   and   three  industrial
 wastewaters  spiked at  six concentrations
 over the range 0.7 to 106 |ig/L.u Single opera-
 tor precision, overall precision, and  method
 accuracy were found to be directly related to
 the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation- •
ships are presented in Table 3.     '     .

                References.

  1.40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2. "Determination of Phthalates in Indus-
trial and Muncipal Wastewaters." EPA 600/4-
81-063,  National Technical Information Serv-
ice. PB81-232167, Springfield. Virginia 22161.
July 1981.
  3: ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31. D3694-78. "Standard  Practices for Prepa-
ration  of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constituents," American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  4. Giam. C.S.,  Chan.  H.S., and Nef. G.S.
"Sensitive Method  for Determination  of
Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in  Open-Ocean
Biota Samples," Analytical Chemistry, 47, 2225
(1975).
  5. Giam, C.S.,  and Chan. H.S.  "Control of
Blanks in the Analysis  of Phthalates in Air
and  Ocean Biota Samples." U.S. National
Bureau of Standards.  Special  Publication
442. pp. 701-708.1976.
  6.  "Carcinogens—Working with Carcino-
gens."  Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare. Public  Health Service, Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
77-206.  August 1977.
  7.  "OSHA Safety  and Health  Standards.
General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910). Occu-
pational Safety  and  Health Administration.
OSHA 2206 (Revised. January1976).
  8. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion. Committee on  Chemical  Safety, 3rd
Edition. 1979.
  9. Provost L.P.. and Elder. R.S. "Interpre- .
tation  of Percent Recovery Data," American
Laboratory. IS, 58-63  (1983). (The value 2.44
used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  10. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31,  D3370-76.  "Standard Practices for  Sam-
pling Water." American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  11. Burke, J.A. "Gas  Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
Aspects." Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists. 48,1037 (1965).
  12. "Method Detection Limit  and Analyt-
ical Curve Studies.  EPA  Methods 606. 607.
and 608," Special letter report for EPA Con-
tract 68-03-2606. U.S. Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory, Cincinnati. Ohio 45268.
June 1980.
  13. "EPA  Method Study 16  Method 606
(Phthalate  Esters)." EPA 600/4-84-056. Na-
tional Technical Information  Service,  PB84-
211275, Springfield, Virginia 22161. June 1964.
                                          713

-------
f>t 136, App. A, M«th. 606                              40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

           TABLE 1—CHROMATOQRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
                                                                Ratanton tune (min)
                                                              Column 1
                                                                         Columns
                                                                                  Method de-
                                                                                  tection limit
                                                                                    (H0A)
Dtthyfpnthifcte
W-o-txitylpMhttai*,
                                                                   2.03
                                                                   2.82
                                                                   8.65
                                                                  •6.94
                                                                  •8*2
                                                                 •162
                                                                              0.95
                                                                              1.27
                                                                             •10.5
                                                                             •18.0
                                                                                        029
                                                                                        0.49
                                                                                        0.36
                                                                                        034
                                                                                        2JD
                                                                                        3.0
  Column
                      «P«« (100/120 mmb) coctod with 1 J% SP-2250/1 J6% SP-2401 pwkad in a 1^ m long x 4mm
                       mii (100/120 mwh) corted with 3% OV-1 packed in a_1.8 m long x 4 mm ID gUts column y«h
                     iTgMi
                      TABIE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 606
                                                             Twt
                                                            cone.
                                                                   Umttfers
                                                                           Rungs tor
         Range for
           PTP.
         (percent)
eutyibanzytpnlheM*
DN>4xjtytph1haMe
OMrylpMhi
Dimea^t phrihahtte
                                                                50
                                                                10
                                                                25
                                                                25
                                                                25
                                                                50
                                                                     38.4
                                                                      42
                                                                      ao
                                                                      9.0

                                                                     13.4
 12-65*
 5.7-11J)
103-29.6
 1.9-33X
                                                                               D-60.0
 D-16B
30-136
23-136
 D-149
 D-156
 D-114
  P. P^Paroant nigpvary riiiaauad (dacbon 8^2, Sacton
    bMn b
           ; raauK muat to
               d to
                                                     &Z.4 1.
                            thanzaro.

  TAB1E 3— METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION— METHOD 606

PunvMttr
Piitg etfiyttaryl) phthelale t ,,,.,. n 	
Putjl b*ni>1 ptilhaiiM i M , , -, 	 unuu i uj,ju,,ii---



DkKCtyt phthiM* 	 ; 	

Accunicy.gi
njcovefVf A
(WAJ
OS3C+?,0?
O82C*ai3
0.79C*ai7
0.70C+0.13
0.730*0.17
O35C-0.71

pracwon.*,'
OioA)
aaox-2^4
026X40J04
023X't020
027X4005
(L2BX*0.14
0.38X40.71

Ovaralpraei-
skm. S'.(|tgAJ
0.73X-ai7
02SX4OJI7
029X40M
0X5X40.11
0.44X4031
0.62X40^4
•r'-Expacttd
  S'-ExpwMd Wartibowlary ste
                  naiyit «*wxh«J deviation

  v** * ruv wuv vOi ^MP Mw«*wv«i%i*jHw«>y •• Bi*4^*BB
  XWkvanoa racovary found tor maaauracnanti of
                            J deviation of nwauniwieirtiaianwanixJBConceiAttoto^ol^inpgflU
                             ctovWfon o< tnetmuranwitt •! an wtniige eoncenftrton louwl ol X. In |ipA-
                                              nlilnlngi
                                                         mtmtton
                                              714

-------
Environmental Protecflon Agency
ft.136.App.A.M@JHi.i06
         COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
         TEMPERATURE: 180«C
         DETECTOR;  ELECTRON CAPTURE
                      UJ
      0    2   4   6   8   10  12
        RETENTION TIME, MIN.

      Figure 1. Gas chromatogram of phthalates
                             715

-------
Pf. 136,App.A,Me*h.606                   40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 EdHtort)

       COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
       TEMPERATURE: 2201C
       DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
             "4      8~  12     16

              ' RETENTION TIME. MIN.

        Figure 2.  Gas chromatogram of phthalates

                              716

-------
Ehvfcorifflfftfai Protection Agency

        METHOD 607—NITROBAMINES

          1. Scope and Application
  1.1  Tbis method coven the determination
of certain nitrosamines.  The following pa-
rameters can be determined by this method:
il HUutudimrttiytt
N MlrcaodiptKinyti
                        Store* No.
                            34438
                            34433
                            34428
                                  CAS No.
 62-75-0
 86-40-6
621-64-7
   1.2 This is  a gas chromatographic  (GC)
 method applicable to the determination of
 the parameters listed above in municipal and
 industrial discharges as provided under 40
 CFB 136.1. When this method is used to ana-
 lyse tmfi«THHar samples for any or all of the
 compmunds above, compound identifications
 should be. supported by at least one  addi-
 tional  qualitative technique. This method
 describes  analytical conditimns for a second
 gas chromatographic column that  can be
 used to  confirm measurements made with
 the primary column. Method 625 provides gas
 chromatograph/mass spectrometer  (GC/MS)
 conditions appropriate for the qualitative
 and quantitative confirmation of results for
 N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine. In order to con-
. firm      the     presence     of     N-
 nitrosodiphenylamine, the cleanup procedure
 specified  in Section 11.3 or 11.4 must be used.
 In order to  confirm  the  presence of N-
 nltrosodimethylamine by GC/MS. Column  1
 of this method must be substituted for the
 column recommended  in Method 625.  Con-
 firmation of these parameters using GC-high
 resolution mass speetrometry or a Thermal
 Energy Analyzer is also recommended. •*
    1.3  The method detection limit (MDL, de-
 fined in Section 14.1)» for each parameter is
 listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific
 wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
  pending upon the nature of interferences in
  t^tn sample matrix.
    1.4  Any modification of this method, be-
  yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
  sidered as a  major modification subject to
  application and approval-of alternate test
  procedures under 40 CFB 136.4 and 136.5.
    1.5  This method is restricted to use by or
 • under the supervision of analysts experi-
  enced in the  use of a gas chromatograph and
  In the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
  Each analyst must demonstrate the  ability
   to generate  acceptable  results with this
   method using the procedure described in Sec-
   tion 8.2.
            . 2,-Svmmarv of Method

     2.1. A measured volume  of  sample, ap-
   proximately 1-L. is extracted with methyl-
   ene chloride using a separatory funnel. The
   methyiene chloride extract is  washed with
   dilute  hydrochloric  acid to  remove free
   amines, dried, and concentrated to a volume
              Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 607

of 10 mL or less. After the extract has been
exchanged to  methanol, it is separated  by
gas chromatography and the parameters are
then measured with a  nitrogen-phosphorus
detector.4
  2.2  The method provides Florisll and alu-
mina column cleanup procedures to separate
diphenylamlae, from the nitrosamines and to
aid in the elimination of interferences that
may be encountered.

              3. Interferences
  3.1  Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that .lead to  discrete artifacts and/or  ele-
vated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of
these  materials must  be  routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of  the  analysis by running
laboratory  reagent- blanks as described in
Section 8.1.3.
   3.1.1  Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
cleaned.9 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing with hot water,
and  rinses with  tap  water and distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry. and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
 for 15 to 30 min. Solvent rinses with acetone
and pesticide quality  hexane may be sub-
 stituted for the muffle furnace heating. Vol-
 umetric ware should not be heated in a muf-
 fle furnace. After drying and cooling, glass-
 ware should be sealed and stored in a clean
 environment to prevent any accumulation of
 oust or other contaminants. Store inverted
 or capped with aluminum foil.
   3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
 solvents helps to itilnlf"*** interference prob-
 lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
 in all-glass systems may be required.
    3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
 contaminants that are co-extracted from the
 sample. The extent of matrix interferences
 will vary considerably from source to source.
  depending upon the nature ********* °J
  the industrial complex or municipality being
  sampled. The cleanup procedures in Section
  11 can be used to overcome many of these
  interferences, but unique samples may. re-
  quire  additional  cleanup  approaches  to
  achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
    3.3  N-Nitrosodiphenylamine is reported**
  to undergo transnitrosation reactions. Care
  must be exercised  in the heating or con-
  centrating  of  solutions  containing  this
  compound  in  the   presence  of  reactive
   amines.                '             	 .
    3.4 The sensitive and selective Thermal
   Energy Analyzer and the reductive Hall  de-
   tector may  be used in place of the nitrogen-
   Dhosphorus detector when interferences  are
   encountered. The Thermal Energy Analyzer
   offers the highest selectivity of the non-MS
   detectors.
                                            717

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, Mettl. 607    .

              /  4. Safety

  4.1  The  toxiclty  or  carcinogenlcity  of
each reagent used in this method has not
been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
cal compound should be treated as a poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The laboratory is responsible for
                current  awareness file  of
OSHA regulations regarding the safe  han-
dling of the Qhftml^l" specified in this meth-
od. A reference file of material data handling
sheets should also be made available to all
personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
Additional references  to  laboratory safety
are available and have been identified I0~n for
the information of the analyst.
  4.2  These  nitrosaminee are known car-
cinogens '*-", therefore, utmost care must be
exercised in the hwndHpg of these materials.
Nitrosamine reference standards and stand-
ard solutions should be handled and prepared
in a ventilated glove box within a properly
ventilated room.
     *
         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1  fl*mpMng equipment, for discrete or
composite sampling.
  5O.1  Grab  sample  bottle— 1-L or. 1-qt,
amber glass, fitted with a screw  cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles are not available,  protect samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed, rinsed with  acetone  or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to minimise
contamination.
  6.1.2  Automatic  sampler (optional)— The
sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
tainers for the collection of a minimum of
260 mt, of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses
a peristaltic pump, a Tnitiimntn  length of
compressible silicons rubber tubing may be
used. Before use, however, the compressible
tubing should be  thoroughly rinsed with
methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimim the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flowmeter is required to collect flow propor-
tional composites.
  6.2 Glassware (All specifications are sug-
gested. Catalog numbers are included for Il-
lustration only.):
  &2.1  Beparatory funnels— 2-L and 2SO-mL.
with Teflon stopcock.
  l>.8,fl  Drying   column— Chromatographic
 column, approximately 400 mm* long x 19  mm
 ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3  Concentrator   tube,  Kuderna-Dan-
 Ish—lO-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025
 or equivalent). Calibration must be  checked
 at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
           40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.4  Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.  .
  5.2.5  Snyder column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Three-ball  macro  (Kontea  K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).  •
  5.2.6  Snyder column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Two-ball * micro  (Kontes  K-669001-0219  or
equivalent).
  5.2.7  Vials—10 to 15-mL. amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.2.8  Chromatographic column—Approxi-
mately 400 mm long x 22 mm ID. with Teflon
stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom
(Kontes K-420540-0234 or equivalent), for use
in Florisil column cleanup procedure.
  5JL9  Chromatographic column—Approxi-
mately 300 TTIT" long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon
stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom
(Kontes K-420540-0213 or equivalent), for use
in alumina column cleanup procedure.
  5.3 Boiling  chips—Approximately   10/40
•mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
tract with methylene chloride.
  6.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric
ring cover, capable of temperature control
(12 *C). The bath should be used in a hood.
  5JS Balance—Analytical,  capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.
  5.6 Gas.  chromatograph—An   analytical
system complete  with gas chromatograph
suitable for on-columri injection and all re-
quired accessories  Including syringes, ana-
lytical  columns,  gases, detector, and strip-
chart  recorder.  A data  system is  rec-
ommended for measuring peak areas.
  6.6.1  Column  1—1.8 m long x 4 mm ID
glass,  packed with 10% Carbowax 20  M/2%
KOH on Chromosorb W-AW (80/100 mesh)  or.
equivalent. This column was used to develop
the  method performance statements in Sec-
tion 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate
column  packings  are .provided in Section
112.
   5.63  Column 2—1.8 m  long, x  4 mm  ID
 glass, packed with 10% SP-2250  on  Supel-
 coport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
   5.63  Detector—Nitrogen-phosphorus,  re-
 ductive Hall, or Thermal  Energy Analyser
 detector.1*3 These detectors have  proven  ef-
 fective in the analysis of waatewaters for the
 parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1).
 A nitrogen-phosphorus detector was used to
 develop the method performance statements.
 in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alter-
 nate detectors are provided in Section 12.2.

                 6. Reagents

   6.1  Reagent water—Reagent  water IB  de-
 fined as a water in which an interferent is
 not observed at the MDL of the parameters
 of Interest.
   6.2  Sodium hydroxide  solution (10 N)—
 Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
 and dilute .to 100 ml.
                                          718

-------
Envtaomn0i'ilul Protection Aooncy
             Pt. 135. App. A. Math. 607
  &8  Sodium thlosuliate—(ACS) Granular.
  6.4  Sulfuric Mid (l+l>-81owly. add SO mL
of HtSQ* (ACS. ep. gr. 1.84) to 80 mL of rea-
gent water.
  6.6  Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
hydrous. Purify by heating at 400 *C for 4 h
in a shallow tray.
  6.6  Hydrochloric acid (1+9)—Add one vol-
ume of concentrated HC1 (ACS) to nine vol-
umes of reagent water.               .  '
  6.7  Acetone,  methanol.  methylene  chlo-
ride,  pentane—Pesticide quality or equiva-
lent.
  6.8  Ethyl ether—Nanograde. redistilled in
glass if necessary.
  6.8.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free
of peroxides before it is used as indicated  by
EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Avail-
able from Scientific Products Co.. Cat No.
P1126-8. and other suppliers.)             .
  6.JL2 Procedures  recommended  for  re-
moval of peroxides are provided with the test
strips. After cleanup. 20 mL of ethyl alcohol
preservative must be added to each liter of
ether.
  6.9 Floriaii—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Pur-
chase activated at 1250 *F and store in the
dark in glass containers with ground glass
stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use.
activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 «C in
a foil-covered glass container and allow to
cool.
  6.ld Alumina—Basic  activity  Super  I.
W200 series  (ICN Life Sciences Group. No.
404571. or equivalent). To prepare for use.
place 100 g of alumina into a 500-mL reagent
bottle and add 2 mL of reagent water. Mix
the  alumina   preparation  thoroughly  by
shalring or rolling for 10 min and let it stand
for at least. 2 h. The preparation should be
homogeneous before  use.  Keep the bottle
sealed tightly to. ensure proper activity.
  6.11 Stock standard  solutions  (1.00  |ig/
liL)—Stock standard solutions  can be pre-
pared from pure standard materials or pur-
chased as certified solutions.
  6.11.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material. Dissolve the material in methanol
and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
venience of the analyst. When compound  pu-
rity  is assayed to be 96% or  greater, the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
can be used at any concentration if they  are
certified by  the manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source.
   6.11.2  Transfer the stock  standard  solu-
tions into  Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
standard solutions should be  checked  fre-
quently for signs of degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially  just prior to  preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.11.3  Stock standard  solutions must be
replaced after six months, or sooner if com-
parison with check standards indicates a
problem.   .
  6.12  Quality  control  check  sample con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish gas chromatographic operat-
ing conditions equivalent to  those given in
Table 1. The gas chromatographic system
can be calibrated using the external standard
technique (Section 7.2) or the internal stand-
ard technique (Section 7.3).
  7.2  External  standard calibration proce-
dure:
  7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a
minimum of  three concentration  levels  for
each  parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes of one  or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
methanol.  One of the  external  standards
should be  at a concentraton near, but above,
the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentra-
tions should correspond to  the expected
range of concentrations  found in  real sam-
ples or should define the working range of
the detector.
  7^2 Using injections of 2 to 5 pL. analyze
each  calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mass injected.  The  re-
sults can be used to prepare a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if
the  ratio  of response to  amount injected
(calibration factor) is a constant over  the
working range (<  10% relative standard devi-
ation, BSD), linearity through the origin  can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3 Internal  standard calibration proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select one or more internal  standards that
are  similar  in analytical behavior  to  the
compounds of Interest. The analyst must  fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the internal standard  is not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations, no internal standard  can
be suggested that is applicable to all sam-
ples.
   7.3.1  Prepare calibration standards at  a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter  of interest  by adding  vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to  vol-
 ume with, rnetbanol. One of the standards
 should be at  a concentration near, but above.
 the  MDL and  the  other  concentrations
 should correspond to, the expected  range of
' concentrations  found in real samples or
 should define the working range of the detec-
 tor.
                                          719

-------
Pt. 136, App. A, MOtn. 607

  7^2 Using injections of 2 to 5 pL, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponse*  against concentration  for  each
compound and internal standard. Calculate
response factors (BF)  for each  compound
using Equation 1.                      •

                     (A.)U)

                    (Ab)(C.)


                               Equation 1

where:
  A,*Beiponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ate'Beaponse for the internal standard.
  Cj.«Concentration of the internal standard
         .
  (^•Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured (jig/L).
  If the BF value over the working range is
 a constant (<10% BSD), the BF  can be as-
 sumed  to be invariant and the average BF
 can be used for calculations. Alternatively.
 the results can be used to plot a  calibration
 curve of response ratios, AJA*. vs. BF.
   1A The working calibration curve,  cali-
 bration factor,  or  BF  must be  verified on
 eaoh working day by the measurement of one
 or more  calibration standards.  If the re-
 sponse for any parameter  varies from the
 predicted response by more than ±15%. a new
 calibration curve must- be prepared for that
•compound.
   7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure.
 the analyst must process a series* of calibra-
 tion standards through the procedure to vali-
 date elution patterns and  the  absence of
 interferences from  the reagents. •

              R. Quality Control

   8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
 is required to operate a formal quality con-
 trol jHrogfE-™- The minimum requirements of
 this program consist of an Initial demonstra-
 tion of laboratory  capability and an ongoing
 analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
 document data quality. The laboratory must
 mMn**
-------
Environmental Protection Agency

found in .Table 2. If s and X for all param-
eters of interest meet the acceptance cri-
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that parameter. Locate and
correct the source of the problem and repeat
the test for all parameters of interest begin-
ning with Section 8.2.2.
  8.3  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one  to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If. as  in  compliance  monitoring,
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the  concentration  of a specific
parameter  in the  sample is  not being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike  should be at 20 |ig/L of 1
to 5 times higher than the background con-
centration  determined in Section  8.3.2,
whichever concentration would be larger.
  8.3.1.3  If it is impractical  to  determine
background levels before spiking (e.g., maxi-
mum holding times will be exceeded), the
spike concentration should be  (1) the regu-
latory concentration limit, if any; or, if none
(2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
the expected background concentration or 20
Mg/L.
  8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
mine the background concentration. (B)  of
each parameter. If  necessary, prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
Appropriate for the background concentra-
tions in the  sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the
concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-
rameter. Calculate  each percent recovery (P)
as 100(A-B)%/T, where  T is the known true
value of the spike.      ,
  8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter with the  corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found  in Table 2. These
acceptance  criteria were  caluclated to in-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent  that the analyst's spike  to back-
ground ratio approaches 5:l.u If spiking was
performed at a  concentration lower than 20
(tg/L, the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 2, or optional QC
              Pt. 136. App. A, Motn. 607

 acceptance criteria caluclated for the spe-
 cific spike concentration. To  calculate op-
 tional acceptance crtieria for the recovery of
 a parameter:  (1)  Calculate accuracy  (X')
 using the equation in Table 3, substituting
 the  spike concentration (T) for C; (2) cal-
 culate overall precision (S') using the equa-
 tion in Table 3, substituting X' for X; (3) cal-
 culate the range for recovery at the spike
 concentration as (100 X'/T) ± 2.44(100 S'/T)%.«
  8.3.4  If any individual P falls outside the
 designated range for recovery, that param-
 eter has failed  the acceptance criteria. A
 check standard  containing each parameter
 that failed the criteria must be analyzed as
 described In Section 8.4.
'  8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance
 criteria  for recovery  in Section  8.3, a QC
 check standard  containing each parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the  number of  parameters being simulta-
 neously tested; the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the  performance of the labora-
 tory.
  8.4.1  Prepare  the QC check standard by
 adding 1.0 mL  of  QC  check  sample  con-
 centrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
 gent water. The QC check standard needs
 only to  contain  the parameters that failed
 criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2  Analyze  the QC check standard to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter.  Calculate  each percent re-
 covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3  Compare  the percent  recovery  (P.)
 for  each parameter with the corresponding
 QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
 parameters that  failed the test in Section 8.3
 need to be compared with  these criteria. If
 the  recovery of any such parameter falls out-
 side the designated range, the laboratory
 performance for  that parameter is judged to
 be out of control, and the  problem must be
 immediately Identified  and corrected. The
 analytical  result for that parameter in the
 unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
 reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
 oratory,  method accuracy for wastewater
 samples must be assessed and records must
 be  maintained. .After  the  analysis  of  five
 spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3,
 calculate the average  percent recovery (P)
 and the standard deviation  of the percent re-
 covery (Sp). Express the accuracy assessment
 as a percent recovery interval from P-2Sp to
 P+2Sp. If P=90% and Sp=10%, for example, the
 accuracy  interval is  expressed as  70-110%.
 Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
 rameter  on a regular basis (e.g.  after each
 five to ten new accuracy measurements).
   8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
 adopt additional quality assurance practices
                                          721

-------
for use with this method. The sDeciflc prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the aamples. Field duplicates may  be  ana-
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental  measurements.  When doubt exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram, confirmatory techniques such as
gas  chromatography   with  a   dissimilar
column,  specific element detector,  or mass
spectrometer must be used.  Whenever pos-
sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
reference materials and participate in rel-
evant performance evaluation studies.

    9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                 Handling
  9.1 Grab samples  must be  collected in
glass  containers. Conventional  sampling
practices" should be followed,  except that
the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
before collection.  Composite  samples should
be collected in refrigerated glass containers
in accordance with the requirements of the
program.  Automatic  sampling equipment
must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
and other potential  sources of contamina-
tion.
   9.2 All  samples must be  iced or refrig-
erated at 4 *C from the time of collection
until extraction. Pill the sample bottles and.
If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of
sodium  thiosulfate per liter of sample and
mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may
 be used for measurement of residual chlo-
 rine.90 Field test  kits are available for this
 purpose. If N-nitrosodiphenylamine is to be
 determined, adjust the sample pH to 7 to 10
 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric
 acid.
   'fi.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
 days of collection and completely analyzed
 within 40 days of  extraction.4
   9.4  Nitrosamines  are known to  be light
 sensitive.7 Samples  should be  stored  in
 amber  or foil-wrapped bottles in  order to
 minimize photolytdc decomposition.

             10. Sample Extraction

   10.1  Mark the  water meniscus on the side
  of the sample bottle for later determination
  of  sample volume.  Pour  the entire sample
  into a 2-L separatory funnel. Check the pH
  of the sample with wide-range  pH paper and
  adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with so-
  dium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.
   10.2  Add 60 mL of  methylene chloride to
  the sample  bottle,  seal,  and shake 30 s to
  rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
  to the  separatory  funnel  and extract  the
  sample by snaking the funnel for 2 mln with
  periodic venting to release excess pressure.
  Allow the organic layer to separate from the
  water phase for  a minimum of 10 mln. If the
   eiriulsion interface between layers is more
   than  one-third  the volume of the  solvent
layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation.
The  optimum technique depends upon the
sample, but may include stirring, nitration
of the  emulsion through glass  wool, cen-
trifugation, or other physical methods. Col-
lect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
mL Erlenmeyer flask.
  10.3  Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
peat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer
flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
manner.                           .
  10.4  Assemble a  Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
concentrator   by   attaching   a   10-mL
concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative
flask.  Other concentration devices or tech-
niques may be used in place of the K-D con-
centrator if the requirements of Section 8.2
are met.
  10.5   Add 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to the
combined  extracts  and shake  for  2 mln.
Allow the layers to  separate. Pour the com-
bined  extract through a solvent-rinsed dry-
ing column containing about 10 cm of anhy-
drous  sodium sulfate. and collect the extract
in the K-D concentrator. Rinse  the Erlen-
meyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of
methylene chloride to complete  the  quan-
 titative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
 Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
 by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
 to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
 water bath (60 to 65»C) so that the concentra-
 tor tube is partially immersed  in the hot
 water, and the entire lower rounded surface
 of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust
 the vertical position of the apparatus and
 the water temperature as required to com-
 plete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At
 the proper rate of distillation the balls of the
 column will actively chatter but the cham-
 bers  will not flood with condensed solvent.
 When the apparent volume of liquid reaches
 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow It
 to drain and cool for at least 10 mln.
   10.7 Remove the Snyder column and rinse
  the flask  and  its lower joint into the con-
  centrator tube with 1  to 2 mL of methylene
  chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for
  this   operation.  Stopper the  concentrator
  tube and  store refrigerated  if further proc-
  essing will not be performed immediately. If
  the extract will be stored longer than two
  days it should be transferred to a Teflon-
  sealed  screw-cap  vial. If  N-nitrosodiphtf-
  nylamine is to be  measured by gas chroma-
  tography, the analyst must first use a clean-
  up column to eliminate diphenylamine Inter-
  ference     (Section      11).      If     N-
  nitrosodiphenylamine is of  no  interest, the
  analyst  may  proceed directly with gas
  chromatographlc analysis (Section 12).
                                           722

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
HI.
App. A.
                                     ou>
  IflJ Determine the original •ample vol-
ume by refilling the sample  bottle to the
mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.

         11. Cleanup and Separation

  11.1  Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
essary for a relatively clean sample matrix.
If particular circumstances demand the use
of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
either procedure below or any other appro-
priate procedure. However, the analyst first
must demonstrate that the requirements of
Section 8.2 can be met using the method as
revised to incorporate  the cleanup proce-
dure. Diphenylamine, if present in the origi-
nal sample extract, must  be separated from
the nitrosamines if N-nitrosodiphenylamine
is to be determined by this method.
  11.2  If the entire extract is to be cleaned
up  by one  of the following procedures, it
must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the con-
centrator tube in Section 10.7, add a clean
boiling chip and attach  a two-ball micro-
Snyder column. Prewet the column by add-
ing about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to
the top. Place the micr-K-D apparatus on a
hot water bath (80 to 65*C) so that the con-
centrator tube is partially Immersed in the
hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the
apparatus and the water temperature as re-
quired to complete the concentration in 5 to
10 mln. At the proper rate of distillation the
balls of the  column will actively chatter but
the chambers will not flood. When the appar-
ent volume of liquid reaches  about 0.5 mL,
remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove
the micro-Snyder column  and  rinse its lower
joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL
of methylene chloride. Adjust the final vol-
ume to 2.0 mL and proceed with one of the
following cleanup procedures.
  11.3 Florisil  column cleanup for nitro-
samines:
  11.3.1 Place 22 g of activated Florisil into
a 22-mm  ID chromatographic column. Tap
the  column to  settle  the Florisil and add
about 5 mm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to
the top.
  11.3.2 Preelute the column  with 40 mL of
ethyl ether/pentane (15+85XV/V). Discard the
eluate and  just prior to exposure of the so-
dium sulfate layer to the air.  quantitatively
transfer the 2-mL sample extract onto the
column using an additional 2  mL of pentane
to complete the transfer.
  11.3.3 Elute the column with 90 mL  of
ethyl ether/pentane (15+85)(V/V) and discard
the eluate. This fraction will contain the
diphenylamine, if it is present in the extract.
  11.3.4 Next, elute the column with 100 mL
of acetone/ethyl ether (5*95)(V/V) into a 500-
mL K-D  flask  equipped  with a 10-mL con-
 centrator tube.  This fraction will contain all
of the nitrosamines listed in the scope of the
method.
  11.3.5  Add 15 mL of methanol to the col-
lected fraction and concentrate as in Section
10.6. except use pentane to prewet the col-
umn and set the  water bath at 70 to 75 *C.
When the apparatus is cool, remove the Sny-
der column and rinse the flask and its lower
joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2
mL  of  pentane.  Analyze by gas chroma-
tography (Section 12).
  11.4 Alumina column cleanup for nitro-
samines:
  11.4.1  Place 12 g of the alumina prepara-
tion  (Section  6.10)  into   a   10-mm  ID
chromatographic column. Tap the column to
settle the alumina and add 1 to 2 cm of anhy-
drous sodium sulfate to the top.
  11.4.2  Preelute the column with 10 mL of
ethyl ether/pentane (3+7XV/V). Discard  the
eluate (about 2 mL) and just prior to expo-
sure of the sodium sulfate layer to the  air.
quantitatively transfer the 2 mL sample ex-
tract onto the column using an additional 2
mL of pentane to complete the transfer.
  11.4.3  Just prior to exposure of the sodium
sulfate layer to the air. add 70 mL of ethyl
ether/pentane (3+7XV/V). Discard the first 10
mL of eluate. Collect the remainder of the
eluate in a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with
a 10 mL  concentrator tube. This fraction
contains N-nitrosodiphenylamine and prob-
ably a small amount of N-nitrosodi-n-propyl-
amine.
  11.4.4  Next, elute the column  with 60 mL
of ethyl ether/pentane (1+1)(V/V). collecting
the eluate in  a second K-D  flask equipped
with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Add 15 mL
of methanol to the K-D flask. This fraction
will contain N-nitrosodlmethylamine, most
Of  the  N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine  and  any
diphenylamine that is present.
  11.4.5  Concentrate both fractions  as in
Section 10.6, except use. pentane to prewet
the column. When the apparatus is cool, re-
move the Snyder column and rinse the flask
and its lower  joint into the concentrator
tube with 1 to 2 mL of pentane. Analyze the
fractions  by gas  chromatography (Section
12).    :

           12. Gas Chromatography
  12.1  N-nitrosodiphenylamine  completely
reacts to form diphenylamine at the normal
operating  temperatures  of a GC injection
port (200  to  250 *C).  Thus,   N-nitrosodi-
phenylamine  is  chromatographed and  de-
tected  as diphenylamine. Accurate deter-
mination depends on removal of diphenyla-
mine that may be present in  the original ex-
tract prior to GC analysis (See Section 11).
  12.2  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
operating  conditions  for  the  gas  chro-
matograph. Included in this table are reten-
 tion times and MDL that can  be achieved
 under these conditions. Examples of the sep-
 arations achieved by Column 1 are shown in
                                          723

-------
 Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or capillary
 (open-tubular)  columns,  chromatographic
 conditions, or detectors may be used if the
 requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
  12.3  Calibrate the  system  daily as  de-
 scribed in Section 7.
  '22.4  If the extract has not been subjected
 to one of the cleanup  procedures in Section
 11, it is necessary to  exchange the solvent
 from methylene chloride to methanpl before
 the thermionic detector can be used. To a 1
 to 10-mL volume of methylene chloride ex-
 tract in a concentrator tube, add 2 mL of
 methanol and a clean  boiling chip. Attach a
 two-ball micro-Snyder column to  the  con-
 centrator tube. Prewet the column by adding
 about 0.6 mL of methylene  chloride to the
 top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus  on  a
•boiling (100*O) water bath so that the  con-
 centrator tube is partially immersed in the
 hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the
 apparatus and the water temperature as re-
 quired to complete the concentration in 5 to
 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the
 balls of the column will actively chatter but
 the .chambers will not flood. When the appar-
 ent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 ml>,
 remove the E-D apparatus and allow it to
 drain, and cool for at  least 10 min.  Remove
 the micro-Snyder column and rinse Its lower
 joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL
 of methanol. Adjust the final volume to 2.0
 mL.
  12.5  If the internal standard calibration
 procedure is being used, the internal stand-
 ard must be added to the sample extract and
 mixed thoroughly Immediately before injec-
 tion into the gas chromatograph.
  12.6  Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
 or  standard  into  the  gas  chromatograph
 using the solvent-flush technique.31 Smaller
 (1.0  uL) volumes may be injected  if auto-
 matic devices are employed. Record the vol-
 ume injected to the nearest 0.05 pL, and the
 resulting peak size in area or peak height
 units.
  12.7  Identify the parameters in the sample
 by comparing1 the retention  times of the
 peaks in the sample chromatogram  with
 those    of   the   peaks    in   standard
 ohromatograms. The width of the 'retention
 time window used to make identifications
 should be based upon measurements of ac-
 tual retention time variations of standards
 over the  course of a  day.  Three  times the
 standard deviation of  a retention time for a
 compound can be  used to calculate a sug-
 gested window size; however, the experience
 of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
 Interpretation of chromatograms.
  12.8  If the response for a peak exceeds the
 working range of the  system, dilute the ex-
 tract and reanalyze.
  12.9 If the measurement of the  peak re-
 sponse is prevented by the presence of inter-
 ferences, further cleanup is required.
              13. Calculations

  13.1  Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample.
  13.1.1  If the external standard calibration
procedure is  used, calculate the amount of
material Injected from  the  peak response
using the calibration  curve  or calibration
factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The con-
centration in the  sample can be calculated
from Equation 2.
                            (AXV.)
     Concentration (pg/
             L) *
                               Equation 2
where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  Vi=Volume of extract injected (pL).
  V,=Volume of total extract (pL).
  V»=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate  the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tions.
               RF=
(A.)(Cu)

(AuXC.)
                               Equation 3
where:
  A«-Response for the parameter to be meas-
   ured.
  Air=ReBponse for the internal standard.
  L=Amount of  internal standard added to
   each extract (pg).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

           14. Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as  the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported.
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.3  The  MDL concentrations  listed  in
Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.33
Similar  results  were achieved using  rep-
resentative wastewaters. The  MDL actually
achieved in a given analysis will vary de-
pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  14.2  This method has been  tested for lin-
earity of spike recovery from reagent water
and has been demonstrated to be  applicable
over the concentration range  from 4 x MDL
to 1000 x MDL.»
  14.3  This method was tested by 17 labora-
tories using reagent water, drinking water,
surface   water,   and   three    industrial
wastewaters  spiked  at six concentrations
over the range 0.8 to 55 pg/L.35 Single opera-
                                          724

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A. Moth. 607
tot precision, overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.

                References

  1. Fine. D.H.. Lieb. D.. and Rufeh. R. "Prin-
ciple of Operation  of  the  Thermal Energy
Analyzer for the Trace Analysis of Volatile
and  Non-volatile  N-nitroso  Compounds."
Journal of Chromatography, 107, 351 (1975).
  2.  Fine, D.H..  Hoffman,  F.,  Rounbehler,
D.P.. and Belcher. N.M. "Analysis of N-nitro-
so Compounds by Combined High Perform-
ance Liquid Chromatography and Thermal
Energy Analysis." Walker. E.A.. Bogovski.
P. and Oriciute. L.. Editors. N-nitroso Com-
pounds—Analysis  and  Formation,  Lyon,
International Agency for Research on Cancer
(IARC Scientific Publications No, 14). pp. 43-
50(1976).
  3. 40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  4.  "Determination of Nitrosamines in In-
dustrial and Municipal Wastewatera," EPA
600/4-82-016.  National Technical Information
Service.  PB82-199621. Springfield. Virginia
22161. April 1962.
  5. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31, D3694-78. "Standard  Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation  of Organic Constituents." American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  6. Bnglass. A.J., ChaUis. B.C.. and Osborn,
MJL "Transnltrosatlon and Decomposition
of Nitrosamines." Bogovski. P.  and Walker.
SLA.. Editors. N-nitroso Compounds  in  the
Environment, Lyon, International  Agency
for  Research on Cancer (IARC Scientific
Publication No. 9). pp. 94-100 (1974).
  7. Burgess. E.M.. and Lavanish, J.M. "Pho-
tochemical    Decomposition    of     N-
nitrosamines," Tetrahedon Letters, 1221 (1964)
  8.   Druckrey.   H.,    Preussmann,   R.,
Ivankovic. S.. and Schmahl, D. "Organotrope
Carcinogene Wirkungen bei  65 Verschledenen
N-NltrosoVerbindnngen an  BD-Ratten."  Z.
Krebsfonch.. 69,103 (1967).
  9. Fiddler. W. "The Occurrence and Deter-
mination of N-nitroso Compounds," Toxicol.
AppL PharmacoL, 31,332 (1975).
  10. "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens." Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare.  Public  Health Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
77-206. August 1877.
  11. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards.
General Industry." (29 CFR Part 1910). Occu-
pational  Safety and Health Administration.
OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  12. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion, Committee on Chemical  Safety.  3rd
Edition. 1979.
  13. Ldjinsky. W. "How Nftrosamines Cause
Cancer," New Scientist, 73,216 (1977).
  14. Mirvish. S.S.  "N-Nitroso compounds:
Their Chemical and in vivo Formation and
Possible Importance as  Environmental Car-
cinogens," /. Toxicol. Environ. Health, 3, 1267
(1977).
  15. "Reconnaissance of Environmental Lev-
els of  NltroBamines in  the  Central United
States." EPA-330/1-77-001, National Enforce-
ment Investigations  Center,  U.S.  Environ-
mental Protection Agency (1977).
  16. "Atmospheric Nitrosamine Assessment
Report," Office of Air Quality. Planning and
Standards,  U.S. Environmental  Protection
Agency.  Research  Triangle  Park.  North
Carolina (1976).
  17. "Scientific and Technical Assessment
Report  on  Nitrosamines."  EPA-660/6-7-001.
Office  of Research and Development. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (1976).
  18. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. "Inter-
pretation of Percent Recovery Data," Amer-
ican Laboratory, IS, 58-63 (1983).  (The value
2.44 used in  the equation in Section 8.3.3 is
two times the value of 1.22 derived in this re-
port.)
  19. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31. D3370-76.  "Standard  Practices for  Sam-
pling Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  20. "Methods 330.4 (Titrimetrtc. DPD-FAS)
and  330.5 (Spectrophotometxlc.  DPD)  for
Chlorine.  Total  Residual."  Methods  for
Chemical Analysis  of Water and Wastes,
EPA-600/4-79-020,  U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
and  Support Laboratory.  Cincinnati. Ohio
45268. March 1979.
  21. Burke,  J. A. "Gas Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
Aspects," Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists, 48,1037 (1985).
  22. "Method Detection Limit and Analyt-
ical Curve Studies EPA Methods 608, 607. and
608." Special letter report for EPA Contract
68-03-2606, U.S.  Environmental  Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
port Laboratory.  Cincinnati.  Ohio  45268.
June 1960.
  23. "EPA  Method Study  17 Method 607—
Nitrosamines,"  EPA  600/4-84-061.  National
Technical Information Service, PB84-207648.
Springfield. Virginia 22161. June 1984.

 TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHic CONDITIONS AND
         METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
^.;.
N*"*- 	 : 	 " 	 "l>I^I^M>
M-mroBafl-n-muo»
-------
r*I. l«X>,
                          . OU/
TABLE I--CHHOMATOQRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND
    METHOD DETECTION LIMITS— Continued
Parameter
M . 11 ^r* nrfkthwn rt^mfnjk A

Ratantion time
(mm)
Col-
umn
1
*12J
Col-
umn
2
"6.4
Method de-
tection kmn
(HOU
.81
                                                     Column 2 conditions: Supefcoport (100/120 mesh) coated
                                                   with 10% SP-2250 packed in a 1.8 m tang x 4 mm ID glass
                                                   column with helium earner gas at 40 mUmin flow rate. Col-
                                                   umn temperature held isothermal at 120 *C, except where
                                                   otherwise indicated.
                                                     •Measured as diphenylamine.
                                                     "220 *C column temperature.
                                                     ,» 210 *C column temperature.
  Column 1  condttfcnK Chromoaorb W-AW (80/100 mash)
coated wfcri 10% Carbowax 20 M/2* KOH packed In a 1.8 m
toog x 4mm IOjjlaae column wHh hefcum carriar QM it 40 rnU
mln tow rate. Column Mmparatu* held Isothermal «t 110 *C.
awapt whar» otharwiM InSciUd.
                        TABLE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 607
Parameter
M-Mtnuulmathvlamina
Mi,Marr*rr%ihWTvl 	 	 .........,,, 	

Test cone.
Cig/L)
20
20
20
'UmHfors
3.4
6.1
5.7
Range for X
4.6-20.0
2.1-243
113-26.8
'cam)
13-100
D-139
46-146
  	i for tour racovary measurements, in W/L (Section 8.2.4).
  X-Avaraoa racovary for tour recovery maamramanti. m tffi. (Secflon 82.4).
  P. P*.Paroant racovary maaaurad (Section 8A2, SactkjnT
   .
  D-Oatacled; raautt mutt be graaiar van zero.
                                             n5.4i).
                                                         data m Table 3. Where necessary, the limits for raoov-

  TAOJE 3— METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CXJNCEPTTRATION--METHOD 607
*_.
U_>Jtt»Mlkn^h>^««««
N, M»m«,rv1fc-ih^mrl^mkM> 	 	
r4-f»waodl-fhpropy*«rnlna 	 < 	 ~~~~. 	
Accuracy, as
recovery, X'
047C+0.06
0.86C-0.07
Single analyst
precision, s,'
02SX-OM
0.15X+0.13

ston. S' (ne/U
0.46X-o!47
021X40.15
      xpaetad racovary for one or more measurements ofa sample corttaJniiig a cora»ntra^ of C. btuo/L.
  a/«Bmactad ainota anaryst siandard deviation o« maaauraments at an average uumenliaUon found ofx. In |WL
  S^Bcpac*sd intafiaboralory standard devlalton of measurements at an average ot» icenlrailon found of X. m pq/L.
  CaTrua vaJua for the concentration, in uo/L.
  X-Average racovary tound tor maaauramants of aamptea ccntaJning • cc«»ntration of C, in |ig/L
                                                 726

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
1*1. too,
/\, wroth.
   COLUMN: 10% CARBOWAX 20M / 2% KOH ON CHRO.MDSOHB W-AW
   TEMPERATURE: 110°C
   DETECTOR:  PHOSPHORUS/NITROGEN
       2  4   6  8  10  12 14

      RETENTION TIME, MIN.
   Figure 1. Gas chromatogram of nitrosamines
                            727

-------
FT. 136, App. A, Mem. 607                  <»

   COLUMN: 10% CARBOWAX 20M/2% KOH ON CHROMOSORB W-AW
   TBI/JPERATURE: 220°C
   DETECTOR: PHOSPHORUS/NITROGEN
   0   2  4   6   8 10  12 14 16 18

            DETENTION TIME, MIN.

  Figure 2.  Gas chromatogram of N-nitrosodiphenylamine
             as diphenylamine.
                            728

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 608
  METHOD 608—OROANOCHUOBINE PESTICIDES
                AND PCBs

          1. Scope and Application

  1.1  This method covers the determination
of  certain  organochlorine  pesticides  and
PCBs. The following parameters can be de-
termined by this method:
Parameter
AMrin .....~«.-~_.»..™_.....__
a-BHC ........«.„._„......„.....
B-BHC !!!!l!!!i!!!!!IZ!!!!ZZ!™
&«fiHC
r-eHc !!! Z!! "
CMordane 	 . 	
4,4*"-ODD ..„.„„_.„.. ..„.__
M'-DOE 	
M'-ODT 	 	 	 .
DWdrln ..
EfltfoauHan 1 ...........
EndoauHan II 	 	 	 ..,.,„,„
EndoeuHan suKata .-.,.......„„„
Btfrfn ,„-- 	 -,-,•„,.,
Endrin aldehyde 	
Hfptichkx 	 	 „„
	 >'• ' ---• i •*•
T«wphtn«» -„„.,....,„„„.,.„....,
PCR-miM „ „.,„
PCft-1321 _.._: 	 ,.,.„
PCB-1232 .. _
PCB-1219
pea-1?^ 	 ; ,
PCB-19M
pca-i?to 	 „ 	 ;

STORETNa
38330
39337
38338
34259
38340
38350
38310
38320
38300
38380
34361
34356
34351
38380
34366
38410
OQ4MA
38400
34671
38488
38482
39486
39500
39504
39508

CAS No.
308-00-2
319-84-6
319-85-7
319-66-8
56-89-9
57-74-6
72-64-8
72-65-8
50-29-3
60-67-1
050 09 9
33212-65-9
1031-07-6
72-20-8
7421-93-4
76 44 8
1 fy>4_fiT_i
8001-35-2
12674-11-2
1104-28-2
11141-16-5
53469-21-9
12672-29-6
11097-69-1
11096-62-6

  1.2  This is a gas chromatographic  (GC)
method applicable to the determination of
the compounds listed, above in municipal and
industrial discharges as provided under 40
CFR 136.1. When this method is used to ana-
lyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the
compounds above, compound identifications
should be supported by at  least one addi-
tional qualitative technique.  This method
describes analytical  conditions for a second
gas chromatographic column that can be
used  to confirm measurements made  with
the primary column. Method 625 provides gas
chromatograph/masB spectrometer  (OC/MS)
conditions appropriate  for  the qualitative
and quantitative confirmation of results for
all of the parameters listed above, using the
extract produced by this method.
  1.3  The method detection limit (MDL, de-
fined  in Section 14.1)1for each parameter is
.listed in Table  1. The  MDL for a specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of interferences in
the sample matrix.
  1.4  The sample extraction and concentra-
tion steps in this method are essentially the
same as in Methods 606, 609, 611,  and 612.
Thus, a single sample may be extracted to
measure the parameters  included  in  the
scope of each of these methods. When clean-
up is  required, the concentration levels must
be high enough to permit selecting aliquots,
as necessary, to apply  appropriate cleanup
procedures. The analyst Is allowed the lati-
tude,   under   Section   12,   to   select
chromatographic conditions  appropriate for
the simultaneous measurement of combina-
tions of these parameters.
  1.5  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a  major modification subject to
application and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
  1.6  This method is restricted to use by or
under  the supervision of analysts experi-
enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
in the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
Each analyst must demonstrate the ability
to  generate  acceptable  results with  this
method using the procedure described in Sec-
tion 8.2.

           2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A measured  volume  of  sample,  ap-
proximately l-L, is extracted with  methyl-
ene chloride using .a separatory funnel. The
methylene chloride extract is dried and ex-
changed to hexane during concentration to a
volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is sepa-
rated by gas chromatography and the param-
eters are  then measured with  an electron
capture detector.9
  2.2  The method provides a Florisil column
cleanup procedure and an elemental sulfur
removal procedure to aid in  the elimination
of interferences that may be encountered.

              3. Interferences
  3.1  Method  interferences  may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead to discrete artifacts  and/or ele-
vated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of
these  materials  must  be   routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of the  analysis by  running
laboratory reagent blanks as described in
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1  Glassware   must  be  scrupulously
cleaned.8 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing  with hot water,
and rinses .with tap  water and  distilled
water. The glassware should  then be drained
dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
terials, such as PCBs, may not be eliminated
by  this treatment.  Solvent rinses with ace-
tone and  pesticide quality  hexane  may be
substituted for the muffle furnace  heating.
Thorough rinsing with such  solvents usually
eliminates PCB interference.*  Volumetric
ware should not be heated in a muffle fur-
nace.  After drying and  cooling, glassware
should be sealed and stored  in a clean  envi-
ronment  to  prevent  any accumulation- of
dust or other contaminants. Store  inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
                                         729

-------
nr. too, App. A, wviwnu ooo
  3.1.2 The use of high parity reagents and
solvent* helps to m<*» interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvent* by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
 ,8.2  InterferenoM by phthalate esters can
pose a major problem in pesticide analysis
when using the electron capture detector.
These compounds generally  appear  in the
chromatogram  as large late elnting peaks,
especially in the 15  and 50% fractions from
Florisil. Common flexible plastics contain
varying  amounts   of  phthalates.   These
phthalates are easily extracted or leached
from such materials during laboratory oper-
ations. Cross contamination  of clean glass-
ware routinely  occurs when plastics are han-
dled during extraction steps, especially when
solvent-wetted  surfaces are handled. Inter-
ferences from phthalates can best be mini-
mised by avoiding the use of plastics in the
laboratory. Exhaustive cleanup  of reagents
and glassware may be required to eliminate
background phthalate contamination.4*6 The
interferences from  phthalate esters  can be
avoided by using a microcoulometric or elec-
trolytic'conductivity detector..
  3.3  Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from the
sample. The extent of matrix interferences
will vary considerably from source to source.
depending  upon the nature and  diversity of
the industrial complex or municipality being
sampled. The cleanup procedures in Section
11 can be  used to overcome many of these
interferences, but unique samples may re-
quire  additional  cleanup  approaches  to
achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.

                 4. Safety

  4.1  The  toxicity  or carcinogenicity of
each  reagent used  in this method has not
been precisely defined; however,  each chemi-
cal compound ^should be treated as a poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The  laboratory is responsible for
maintaining a current awareness  file of
OSHA regulations  regarding the safe  han-
dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
od. A reference file of material data handling
sheets should also be made available to all
personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
Additional  references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified6-* for
the information of the analyst.
  4.2  The following parameters covered by
this method have been tentatively classified
as  known  or suspected, human or mamma-
lian  carcinogens:  4,4'-DDT, 4,4'-DDD. the
BHCs, and the PCBs. Primary  standards of
these toxic compounds should be prepared in
a hood.  A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas
respirator should be worn when the analyst
handles high concentrations of these toxto-
compounds.
5.1
         5. Apparatus and Material*
                equipment, for discrete or
composite sampling!
, 5.1.1 Grab sample bottle— 1-L  or 1-qt,
amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles  are not available/ protect samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed, rinsed with acetone  or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to minimise
contamination.
  5.1.2 Automatic  sampler  (optional)— The
sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
tainers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4*C and protected from
light during composting. If the sampler uses
a  peristaltic pump, a  minimum  length of
compressible silicone rubber tubing may be
'used. Before use, however, the compressible
tubing  should  be  thoroughly rinsed with
methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimise the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
tional composites.
  5.2. Glassware (All specifications are sug-
gested. Catalog numbers are included for il-
lustration only.):
  5.2.1 Separatory  funnel— 2-L, with Teflon
stopcock.
  5.2.2 Drying    column— Chromatographlc
column, approximately 400 mm long x 10 mm
ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3 Chromatographlc  column— 400  mm
long x 22 mm ID, with  Teflon stopcock and
coarse frit filter disc  (Kontes  K-42064 or
equivalent).
  5.2.4 Concentrator  tube,   Kuderna-Dan-
ish— 10-mL. graduated (Kontes K-670050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
glass stopper is used to prevent- evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.5  Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0600 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator  tube with springs.
  5.2.6  Snyder  column,  Kuderna/Danish—
Three-ball macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).
 . 5.2.7  Vials— 10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
   5.3 Boiling   chips— Approximately  10/40
mesh. Heat to 400*C for  30 min or Soxhlet ex-
 tract with methylene chloride.
   5.4 Water bath— Heated,  with  concentric
 ring cover, capable of temperature control
 (±2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.
   5.5 Balance— Analytical, capable of accu-
 rately weighing 0.0001 g.
   5.6 Gas  chromatograph— An   analytical
 system  complete  with gas  chromatograph
 suitable for on-column injection and all re-
 quired accessories including  syringes, ana-
 lytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-
                                          730

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 608
chart  recorder.  A  data system  is  rec-
ommended for measuring peak areas.
  5.6.1  Column 1—1.8 m long x 4  mm ID
glass,  packed with 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-
2401 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equiva-
lent. This column  was used to develop the
method performance statements in Section
14. Guidelines for the use of alternate, col-
umn packings are provided in Section 12.1.
  5.6.2  Column 2—1.8 m. long x 4  mm ID
glass,  packed with 3% OV-1  on Supelcoport
(100120 mesh) or equivalent.
  6.6.3  Detector—Electron capture detector.
This detector, has proven effective in the
analysis of wastewaters for the parameters
listed in the scope (Section 1.1). and was used
to develop the method performance state-
ments in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of
alternate detectors are provided Jn Section
12.1.

                6. Reagents

  6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in which an interferent is
not observed  at the MDL of the parameters
of interest.                     .
  6J Sodium hydroxide solution  (10  N)—
Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
and dilute to 100 mL.
  6.3 Sodium thlosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
  6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL
to H2&O4 (ACS. sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of rea-
gent water.
  6.5 Acetone, hexane, isooctane. methylene
chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
  6.6 Ethyl ether—Nanograde. redistilled in
, glass if necessary.
  6.6.1  Ethyl ether must be shown to be free
of peroxides before it is used as indicated by
EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Avail-
able from Scientific Products  Co.. Cat. No.
P1126-8. and other suppliers.)
  6.6J2  Procedures  recommended   for  re-
moval of peroxides are provided with the test
strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol
preservative must be added to each liter of
ether.
  6.7 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
hydrous. Purify by heating at 400*C for 4 h in
a shallow tray.
  6.8 Florlsil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Pur-
chase  activated at  1250 *P and store in the
dark in glass containers with ground  glass
stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use,
activate each batch at least  16 h at 130'C in
a foil-covered glass container and allow to
cool.
   6.9  Mercury—Triple distilled.
   6.10 Copper powder—Activated.
   6.11   Stock  standard  solutions  (1.00 ng/
 |iL>—Stock standard solutions can be pre-
 pared from pure standard materials or pur-
 chased as certified solutions.
   6.11.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
 accurately weighing about "0.0100 g of pure
 material. Dissolve the material in isoootane
 and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be uaad at tb» con-
venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
rity is  assayed  to be  96%  or  greater, the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
can be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source. .                '
  6.11.2  Transfer the stock standard  solu-
tions into Teflon-sealed  screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4*C and protect  from light. Stock
standard solutions should be checked fre-
quently for  signs of degradation or evapo-
rationi  especially just prior  to preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.11.3  Stock standard solutions must  be
replaced after six months, or sooner  if com-
parison with check  standards indicates  a
problem.
  6.12  Quality control check  sample con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

              7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish gas chromatographic operat-
ing conditions equivalent  to those given in
Table 1. The gas chromatographic  system
can be calibrated using the external standard
technique (Section 7.2) or the internal stand-
ard technique (Section 7.3).
  7.2  External  standard  calibration proce-
dure:
  7.2.1  Prepare  calibration standards at a
          of three concentration levels for
each parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
isoootane.  One  of the external standards
should be at a concentration near, but above.
the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentra-
tions should  correspond  to  the expected
range of concentrations found in real sam-
ples or should  define the working range of
the detector.
  7.2.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 |iL, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height  or area re-
sponses against the mass injected. The re-
sults can be used to prepare a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively,  if
the  ratio  of response to  amount injected
(calibration factor) is a constant over the
working range  (<10% relative standard devi-
ation. RSD), linearity through the origin can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3  Internal  standard calibration  proce-
dure— To use this approach, the analyst must
select  one or more internal  standards that
are  similar in  analytical behavior to the
compounds of Interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the  internal  standard  is not  affected by
method  or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations, no internal standard can
                                          731

-------
rt.
be suggested that la applicable to all sam-
ples.      ,             .      .
  7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at  a
          of three oonoentration levels for
each parameter of interest by adding vol-
ume* of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to vol-
ume with isooctane. One of the standards
should be at a oonoentration near, but above.
the  MDL  and the  other concentrations
should correspond  to the expected range of
concentrations  found  in  real  samples  or
should define the working' range of the detec-
tor.
  7.3.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 |iL, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses  against  concentration  for   each
compound and  internal standard. Calculate
response factors (RF)  for each compound
using Equation 1.
                            (A.XCi.)
            RF
                               Equation 1
where:
  A«*RetponBe for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  AtesResponse for the internal standard.
  Cte»Oonoentration of the internal standard
  Gr*Concentraton of the parameter  to  be
   measured Oig/L).
  If the RF value over the working range is
a constant (< 10% BSD), the RF can be as-
sumed to be invariant and the average RF
can be used for calculations. Alternatively.
the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios. AJA*, vs. RF.
  7.4  The working calibration curve, cali-
bration factor, or RF must be  verified  on
each working day by the measurement of one
or more calibration  standards. If the  re-
sponse for any parameter  varies  from the
predicted response by more than ±15%, the
test must be repeated using a fresh calibra-
tion standard. Alternatively, a new calibra-
tion  curve  must  be  prepared  for  that
compound.
  7.6  The cleanup  procedure in Section 11
utilizes  Ploriflil  column  chromatography.
Ploriall  from different batches or sources
may vary in adsorptive capacity. To  stand-
ardize the amount of Florisil which is used,
the use  of lauric acid value' is suggested.
The referenced procedure determines the  ad-
sorption from hexane solution of lauric acid
(mg) per g of Florisil. The amount of Florisil
to be used for each column is calculated by
dividing 110 by this ratio and multiplying by
30 ff.
  7.6  Before using any cleanup procedure,
the analyst must process a series of calibra-
tion standards through the procedure to vali-
date elution patterns and the absence of
Interferences from the reagents.

             8. Quality Control    _.

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The minimum requirements of
frfri* program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
nrnlnfaM" records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
of analyses meet the performance character-
istics of the method. When results of sample
spikes indicate  atypical  method  perform-
ance, a quality control check standard must
be analyzed  to  confirm  that the  measure-
ments were performed in an in-control mode
of operation.
  8.1.1  The analyst must make an initial.
one-time,  demonstration of  the ability to
generate acceptable accuracy and  precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2  In recognition  of advances that  are
occurring  in chromatography. the analyst is
permitted certain options. (detailed in Sec-
tions 10.4.11.1. and 12.1) to improve the sepa-
rations or lower the cost of measurements.
Each time such a modification is made to
the method, the  analyst is required to repeat
the procedure in Section 8.2.
  8.1.3 Before processing any samples,  the
analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
to demonstrate  that Interferences from  the
analytical system and glassware  are under
control. Each time a  set of samples is ex-
tracted or reagents are changed, a reagent
water blank must be processed as a safe-
guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a minimum of  10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate  lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.3.
  8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This procedure is described in Section
8.4.  The  frequency  of the check standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6  The  laboratory must maintain  per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
                                         732

-------
EnvsTOfwnonlol Protection Agwncy

  U TO establish the ability  to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
Ijit most perform the following operations.
  &2.1  A quality control (QC) oheok sample
concentrate IB required containing each sin-
gle-oomponent parameter of interest at the
following  concentrations  in acetone: 4,4'-
DDD.  10  MS/mL:   4.4'-DDT,  10   pg/mL;
endosulfan n. 10 |ig/mL; endoeulfan snlfate,
10 ygTt*1'', endrin. 10 pg/mL; any other single-
oomponent pesticide* 2 ng/mL. If this method
is only to be used to analyze  for  PCBs,
chlordane, or toxaphene. the QC check sam-
ple oonoentrate should contain the most rep-
resentative multtcomponent parameter at a
concentration of 80 pg/mL in acetone. The QC
check sample concentrate must be obtained
from the U.S.  Environmental  Protection
Agency. Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
port Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if avail-
able. If not available from, that source, the
QC check sample concentrate must be ob-
tained from another external source. If not
available from either source above, the QC
oheok sample oonoentrate must be prepared
by the laboratory using stock standards pre-
pared independently from those used for cali-
bration.                     •
   842 Using a pipet, prepare QC check sam-
ples at the  test  concentrations  shown in
Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sam-
ple oonoentrate to each of four 1-L aliqnots
of reagent water.
   843 Analyse the well-mixed  QC check
samples according to the method beginning
in Section 10.
   844  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
 pfjptaoL; and the standard deviation of the re-
 covery (s) in Mg/mL. for  each  parameter
 using the four results.
   84.5  For each parameter compare s and X
 with the corresponding  acceptance criteria
 for precision  and  accuracy,  respectively.
 found in Table 3. If a and X for all param-
 eters of Interest meet the acceptance cri-
 teria,  the system performance is acceptable
 and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
 any individual s  exceeds the precision limit
 or any individual X falls outside the range
 for accuracy, the system performance is un-
 acceptable for that parameter.
   None The large number of parameters in
 Table 3  present  a substantial  probability
 that one or more will fail at least one of the
 acceptance criteria when all parameters are
 analysed.
   846 When one or more of the parameters
  tested fail at least one of the acceptance cri-
  teria, the analyst must proceed according to
  Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
   8.2.&1  Locate and  correct the  source of
  the problem and repeat the test for all pa-
  rameters of interest beginning with Section
  3,2.2.
    846J  Beginning with Section 8.2.2. repeat
  the test  only for those parameters that
             PI. 136. App. A, Mcttl. 608

failed to  meet  criteria. Repeated  /kiltuv.
however,  will confirm  a general  problem
with the measurement system. If this occurs,
locate and correct the source of the problem
and repeat the test for all compmunds of in-
terest beginning with Section 842.
  8.3  The laboratory must, on an  ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If,  as  in  compliance monitoring.
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the  concentration of a specific
parameter in  the  sample  is  not  being
checked against a. limit specific to  that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at the test con-
centration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times
higher  than  the background concentration
determined in Section 8.34 whichever con-
centration would be larger.
  8.3.1.3 If it is Impractical  to determine
background levels before spiking (e.g.. maxi-
mum holding times will be  exceeded), the
spike concentration should be (1) the regu-
latory concentration limit, if any; or. if none
(2) the  larger of either S times higher than
the expected background  concentration or
the test concentration in Section 8.24
  842  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
mine the background concentration (B) of
each parameter. If neeesiMy,  prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
appropriate for  the background concentra-
 tions in the sample.  Spike a second sample
 aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
 concentrate and analyze it to determine the
 concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-
 rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
 as 100(A-B)%/T.  where T is the known true
 value of the spike.
   8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
 each parameter with the  corresponding QC
 acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These
 acceptance criteria were  calculated to in-
 clude an allowance for error in measurement
 Of both the background and spike concentra-
 tions, Bftfmr"<"g a spike to background ratio
 of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
 extent  that  the analyst's spike  to back-
 ground ratio approaches 5:l.w If spiking was
 performed at a concentration lower than the
 test concentration in Section 842, the ana-
 lyst must use either the QC acceptance cri-
 teria in Table 3. or optional QC acceptance
  criteria  calculated for the specific spike con-
  centration. To calculate optional acceptance
  criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1)
                                          733

-------
 Pt. 136, App. A, Mem. cue

 Calculate accuracy (X') using: the 'equation in
 Table 4, substituting the spike concentration
 (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (80
 using the equation in Table 4, substituting X'
 forX; (3) calculate the range for recovery at
''the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100
 SVT)%.16
   8.3.4  If any Individual P falls outside the
 designated range  for recovery, that param-
 eter  has failed the acceptance criteria. A
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed the criteria most be analyzed as
 described in Section 8.4.
   8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance
 criteria for recovery  in  Section  8.3,  a QC
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
   NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the  number of parameters  being simulta-
 neously tested, the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the labora-
 tory. If the entire list of parameters in Table
 8 must be measured in the sample in Section
 8.3. the probability that the analysis of a QC
 check- standard will be required is high. In
 this case the QC check standard should be
 routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
   8.4.1 Prepare the QC check  standard  by
 adding  1.0  mL  of  QC  check sample con-
 centrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
 gent water. The QC  check standard needs
 only to contain the parameters that failed
 criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
   8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standards to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
 covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
   8.4.3 Compare  the  percent recovery (P.)
 for each parameter with the. corresponding
 QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. Only
 parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
 need to be  compared with these criteria. If
 the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
 side the  designated  range,  the  laboratory
 performance for that parameter is Judged to
 be out of control, and the problem must be
 immediately identified and corrected. The,
 analytical result for that parameter in, the
  unsplked sample is suspect and may not be
 reported for regulatory compliance purposes'.
   8.6 As part of the QC program for the lab-
  oratory,  method accuracy  for wastewater
  samples must be assessed and records must
  be maintained.  After the  analysis  of  five
  spiked wastewater samples  as in Section 8.3,
  calculate the average percent recovery (P)
  and the standard deviation of the percent re-
  covery (Bp). Express the accuracy assessment
  as a percent recovery interval from  P-2 Bp
  to P+2 Bp. If P=90% and Bp=10%, for example,
  the  accuracy interval is  expressed as 70-
  110%. Update the accuracy assessment for
  each parameter on a regular basis (e.g. after
each  five to  ten new  accuracy measure-
ments).
  8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples.  Field duplicates may  be  ana-  •
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements.  When  doubt exists
over the identification of a peak on the ohro-
matogram, confirmatory techniques such as
gas chromatography with a dissimilar col-
umn,  specific element detector, or mass
spectrometer must be used. Whenever pos-
sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
reference materials and participate in rel-
evant performance evaluation studies.

    9. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
                 Handling

  9.1  Grab samples must be collected  in
glass  containers.  Conventional sampling
practices» should be followed, except that
the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
before collection. Composite samples should
be collected in refrigerated glass containers
in accordance with the requirements of the
program. Automatic sampling   equipment
must be as free  as possible of Tygon tubing
and other potential sources of  contamina-
tion.
   9.2  All samples must be iced or refrig-
erated at 4 *C from the time of collection
until extraction. If the samples will not be
extracted within 72 h of collection, the sam-
ple should be adjusted to a pH range of S.O to
9.0 with sodium hydroxide solution or sul-
furic add. Record the volume of acid or base
used.  If aldrin is to be determined, add  so-
dium thiosulfate  when residual chlorine is
present. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be
used for measurement of residual chlorine.11
Field test kits are available for this purpose.
   9.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
 days of collection and completely  analyzed
 within 40 days of extraction.9

            10. Sample Extraction

   10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side  •
 of the sample bottle for later determination
 of sample volume. Pour the entire sample
 into a 2-L separatory funnel.
   10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to
 the  sample  bottle, seal,  and shake 30 s to
 rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
 to  the  separatory funnel and  extract  the
 .sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
 periodic venting to release excess pressure.
 Allow the organic layer to separate from the
 water phase for a »mt»immn of 10 min. If the
  emulsion interface between layers is more
  tftiPT1 one-third the  volume of  the solvent
  layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
  techniques to complete the phase separation.
  The optium technique depends upon the sam-
                                           734

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
             Pt. 136, App. A, Mctti. £08
pie, feat may include starring. filtration of
the emulsion through glass wool, centrifuga-
tion, or other physical methods. Collect the
methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Er-
lenmeyer flask.
  10.3  Add a second  60-mL volume of meth-
ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
peat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the  extracts in the Brlenmeyer
flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
manner.
  10.4  Assemble  a  Kuderna-Danlsh  (K-D)
concentrator by  attaching  a  10-mL  con-
centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
Other  concentration devices or techniques
may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
tor if the requirements  of Section  8.2 are
met.                               .
  10.5  Pour the combined extract through a
solvent-rinsed  drying column  containing
about 10  cm of anhydrous  sodium sulfate.
and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
tor. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column
with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
water bath (60 to 65 «C) ao that the con-
centrator tube is partially immersed in the
hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
face of the flask is  bathed with hot vapor.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
and the  water temperature as required to
complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min.
At the proper rate of distillation the balls of
the column will  actively chatter but the
chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
vent.  When the  apparent  volume of liquid
reaches 1 1*1 •, remove the K— D apparatus and
allow It to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
   10.7 Increase the  temperature of  the hot
water bath to about 80 *C. Momeltarlly re-
 move the  Snyder  column,  add 50 mL  of
 hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach
 the Snyder column. Concentrate the extract
 as in  Section  10.6, except use hexane  to
 prewet the column.  The elapsed time of con-
 centration should be 5 to 10 min.
   10.8  Remove the  Snyder column and rinse
 the flask and its lower Joint into the con-
 centrator tube with 1 to  2 mL of hexane. A 6-
 mL syringe is recommended for  this oper-
 ation. Stopper the concentrator tube and
 store refrigerated if further processing will
 not be performed Immediately. If the extract
 will be stored longer than two days, it should
 be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap
 vial.  If the sample extract requires no fur-
 ther  cleanup,  proceed  with   gas  chroma-
 tographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample
 requires further cleanup, proceed to Section
 11.
   10.9 Determine the  original sample vol-
 ume  by refilling the sample  bottle to the
mark and transferring- tne liquid to a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.

         11. Cleanup and Separation

  11.1  Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
essary for a relatively clean sample "matrix.
If. particular circumstances demand the use
of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
either procedure below or any other appro-
priate procedure. However, the analyst first
must demonstrate that the requirements of
Section 8.2 can be met using the method as
revised to incorporate the cleanup proce-
dure. The Florisil column allows for a select
fractionation  of the  compounds and will
eliminate polar interferences. Elemental sul-
fur, which interferes with the electron cap-
ture  gas chromatography of certain pes-
ticides. can be removed by the technique de-
scribed in Section 11.3.
  11.2 Florisil column cleanup:
  11.2.1  Place a weight of Florisil (nomi-
nally 20 g) predetermined by  calibration
(Section 7.5). into* a chromatographic col-
umn. Tap the column to settle the Florisil
and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sul-
fate to the top.
  11JL2  Add 60 mL of hexane to wet and
rinse the sodium  sulfate and Florisil. Just
prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
to the air. stop the elution of the hexsse by
closing the stopcock on the chromatographic
column. Discard the eluate.
   11.2.3  Adjust  the sample extract volume
to 10 mL with hexane and transfer It from
the K-D concentrator tube onto the column.
Rinse the tube twice with  1 to 2 mL of
hexane. adding each rinse to the column.
   11.2.4  Place a 500-mL K-D flask and clean
 concentrator  tube  under   the  chroma-
 tographic column. Drain the column into the
 flask until the sodium sulfate layer is nearly
 exposed. Elute the column with 200 mL of 6%
 ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 1) at a
 rate of about 5 F**-*"*"- Remove  the K-D
 flask and set it aside for later concentration.
 Elute the column again, using 200 mL of 15%
 ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 2). into
 a  second  K-D  flask.  Perform the  third
. elution using 200 mL of 50%  ethyl ether in
 hexane  (V/V) (Fraction  3). The  elution pat-
 terns for the pesticides and PCBs are shown
 in Table 2.
   11.2.5 Concentrate the fractions as in Sec-
 tion 10.6. except  use hexane to prewet  the
 column and set the water bath at about 85
 •C. When the apparatus is cool, remove the
 Snyder column and rinse the flask and its
 lower joint into the concentrator tube with
 hexane. Adjust the volume of each fraction
 to 10 mL  with hexane  and analyze by gas
 chromatography (Section 12).
    11.3 Elemental sulfur will usually elute
 entirely in Fraction 1 of the Florisil column
  cleanup. To remove sulfur Interference from
      fraction or  the original extract, pipet
                                          736

-------
n«
1.00 rpT' of the concentrated extract Into a
clean concentrator tube  or Tenon-sealed
vial. Add one to three drops of mercury and
seal." Agitate the' contents of the vial for 15
to 90 •. Prolonged shaking (2 h) may be re-
paired. If so. this may be accomplished with
a reciprocal shaker. Alternatively, activated
copper powder may be  used  for sulfur re-
moval.1* Analyse by gas ohromatography.

          12. Go* Chromatography

  12.1 Table 1 summarises the recommended
operating   conditions for  the  gas chro-
matograph. Included in this table are reten-
tion times and MDL that can be  achieved
under theoe conditions. Examples of the sep-
arations achieved by Column 1 are shown in
Figures 1  to 10. Other packed or capillary
(open-tubular)  columns,  ohromatographic
conditions, 'or detectors may  be used if the
requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
  12J Calibrate  the-  system daily as  de-
scribed in Section 7.
  12£ If the internal standard  calibration
procedure Is being used, the internal stand-
ard must be added to the sample extract and
mixed thoroughly immediately before injec-
tion into the gas ohromatograph.
  13.4 Inject 2 to 6 |iL of the sample extract
or  standard  into the  gas  chromatograph
using the  solvent-flush technique." Smaller
(1.0  uL) volumes may be injected if auto-
matic .devices are employed. Record the vol-
ume injected to the nearest 0.06 pL, the total
extract volume, and the resulting peak slse
in area or peak height units.
  i^s Identify tfr* parameters in the sample
by comparing the retention times of  the
peaks in  the sample ohromatogram with
those   of   the   peaks   in    standard
ohromatograms. The width of the retention
time window used to make  identifications
should be based upon measurements of ac-
tual retention time variations of standards
over the course of a day. Three times the
standard deviation of a  retention time for a
compound can be used to calculate a sug-
gested window sise; however, the experience
of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
interpretation of chromatograms.
  12.6  If the response for a peak exceeds the
working range of the system, dilute the ex-
tract and reanalyze.
  12.7  If the measurement of the peak re-
sponse is prevented by the presence of inter-
ferences, further cleanup is required.

              13. Calculations

   13.1 Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample.
   15.1.1 If the external standard calibration
 procedure is used, calculate the amount  of
 mM^T***  injected from the peak response
 using the calibration curve or calibration
 factor determined in Section 7A2. The con-
centration in the sample can be calculated
from Equation 2..
    .Concentration (|ig/
            L)
                            (AXV.)
                           (V.KV.)
                              Equation 2
where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  Vt=Volume of extract injected (|iL).
  V,=Volume of total extract OiL).
  V.=Volume of water extracted (mil).
  13.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(KF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tion 3.
                            (A.XW
     Concentration dig/
            L)
                               Equations
where:
  A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
              for the internal standard.
  L=Amount of internal standard added to
    each extract (|ig).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2  When it is apparent that two or more
PCS  (Aroclor) mixtures are  present, the
Webb and McCall procedure1* may be used to
identify and quantify the Aroclors.
  13.3  For    multicomponent   mixtures
(chlordane. toxaphene. and PCBs) match re-
tention times of peaks in the standards with
peaks in the sample. Quantitate  every iden-
tifiable peak unless interference with indi-
vidual peaks persist after cleanup. Add peak
height or peak area of each identified peak
in the chromatogram.  Calculate  as total re-
sponse in the sample versus total response in
the standard.
  13.4  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

           14. Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimnm concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 88% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1 The MDL concentrations  listed in
 Table 1 were obtained using reagent water."
 Similar results  were achieved using  rep-
 resentative wastewaters. The MDL actually
 achieved in a given analysis will vary de-
 pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
 trix effects.
   14.2 This method has been tested for lin-
. earity of spike recovery from reagent water
 and has been demonstrated to  be applicable
 over the concentration range from 4xMDL to
                                         736

-------
EnvhofurwHitol ProtocHon
              PI. 136, App. A. Msih. 608
lOOOxMDL with  the  following  exceptions:
Chlordane recovery at 4xMDL was low (60%);
Toz&phene recovery was demonstrated linear
over the range of IQxMDL to lOOOxMDL.17
  14.3 This method was tested by 20 labora-
tories using reagent  water, drinking water,
surface    water,   and   three   industrial
wastewaters spiked at six concentrations.1*
Concentrations used  in the study  ranged
from 0.6 to 30 pg/L for single-component pes-
ticides  and   from  8.5  to  400 pg/L for
mnlticomponent parameters. Single operator
precision, overall precision, and method ac-
curacy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter  and es-
sentially independent-of the sample matrix.
Linear equations  to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 4.

               REFERENCES

  1.40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
  2. "Determination of Pesticides and PCBs
in Industrial and Municipal  Wastewaters,"
EPA 600/4-83-023.  National  Technical Infor-
mation   Service,   PB82-214222,   Springfield,
Virginia 22161. April 1962.
  3. A8TM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31. D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample  Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constituents." American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S.. and Nef.  G.S.,
"Sensitive Method  for Determination  of
Phthalate Ester Plasticlzers in  Open-Ocean
Biota Samples." Analytical Chemistry, 47, 2225
(1875).
  5.  Giam,  C.S.,  Chan. H.S.  "Control  of
Blanks in the Analysis of Phthalates in Air
and  Ocean Biota Samples," U.S. National
Bureau  of Standards.  Special  Publication
442. pp. 701-708,1976.
  6.  "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens." Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare,  Public Health Service. Center for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-208, August 1977.
  7.  "OSHA Safety  and Health Standards.
General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
pational Safety and  Health Administration.
OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  8. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories." American Chemical Society Publica-
tion, Committee on Chemical  Safety. 3rd
Edition, 1979.
  9. Mills, P.A. "Variation  of Florisil Activ-
ity: Simple Method for Measuring Absorbent
Capacity and Its  Use  in  Standardizing
Florisil Columns," Journal  of the Association
of Official Analytical Chemists, 51, 29. (1968).
  10. Provost, L.P.,  and Elder.  R.S. "Inter-
pretation of Percent Recovery Data," Amer-
ican Laboratory, 15,  58-63 (1983). (The value
2.44  used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is
two times the value 1.22 derived in this re-
port.)
  11. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31,  D3370-76.  "Standard Practices for Sam-
pling Water." American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  12. "Methods 330.4 (Titrimetrlc. DPD-FAS)
and 330.5  (Spectrophotometrlc, DPD) for
Chlorine.   Total  Residual,"   Methods  for
Chemical  Analysis of Water and  Wastes,
EPA-600/4-79-020,  U.S. Environmental  Pro-
tection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati.  Ohio
45268. March 1979.
  13. Goerlitz. D.F., and Law, L.M. Bulletin
for  Environmental  Contamination and  Toxi-
cology. 6, 9 (1971).
  14. "Manual of Analytical Methods for the
Analysis of Pesticides in Human and Envi-
ronmental  Samples," EPA-600/8-80-038. U.8.
Environmental Protection Agency, Health
Effects Research Laboratory, Research Tri-
angle Park, North Carolina.
  15. Burke, J.A.  "Gas Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
Aspects," Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists. 48.1037 (1965).
  16. Webb, R.G., and McCall. A.C. "Quan-
titative PCB  Standards for Election Capture
Gas    Chromatography,"    Journal    of
Chromatographic Science, 11,366 (1973).
  17. "Method Detection Limit and Analyt-
ical Curve Studies. EPA  Methods 606. 607.
and 608." Special letter report for EPA Con-
tract 68-03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protecr
tion Agency,  Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268,
June 1980.
  18.  "EPA Method Study 18 Method  606—
Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs." EPA
600/4-84-061. National Technical Information
Service, PB84-211358, Springfield.  Virginia
22161, June 1984.

TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND
         METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
Parameter

a-BHC ...™~.. 	 	 	 .~~
"H3HC
84HC 	
S-fiHC
Heplachlor epoxide .........
EndoauMan I ._.........; 	 ...
4,4'-ODE 	 ..........
Endrin 	 	 	
4,4'-ODD ................~............
EndosuKan II 	 .. 	 ....
4,4'-ODT 	 ..... 	 ...
Endrin aldehyde 	 .... 	
Toxaphene ...........................
PCB-1016 ._ 	 ...............
PC8-1221 	 ~ ' —
(m
Col. 1
135
1.70
1.90
2X0
2.15
2.40
3£0
4.50
5.13
5.45
6.55
7.83
8X0
9.40
11X2
1499
mr
mr
mr
mr
jfltfcna
n)
Col. 2
1X2
2.13
1.97
335
220
4.10
5X0
620
7.15
723
8.10
9.08
11.75
930
in7n
mr
mr
mr
mr ,
Malted
detec-
tion Ikrit
(POAJ
0X03
0X04
0X06
0.003
0.008
0X04
0X83
0.014
0X04
0X02
0.006
0.011
0.004
0X12
0.023
DMA
0X14
024
nd
nd
                                         737

-------
TABLE 1—CHROMATOORAP«C CONDITIONS AND
    METHOD DETECTION UMTS—Continued
*— , ••
PC8-1232 ,mi .,,„ „„ ,-n, -„
PC9-1SM? 	 , 	 „ 	 ,,
PC£_124£ ,.„-,,-,--, -, 	
PCtM2*»,,,r , „„,,„,„,,,,,,--.
POMSW. 	 , 	
Retention Mme
(min)
CoL1
mt
mr
mr
mr
mr
COL2
mr
mr
mr
mr
mr
Method
ttonlimtt
(w/U
nd
0465
nd
nd
nd
                                                TABLE 2—OCSTRBUTION OF CHLORINATE) PES-
                                                   TICIDES AND FOBS  INTO FLORtSi.  COLUMN
                                                   FRACTIONS2—Continued
*_
PCB-1260 	 	 	
Pwponft flMQwy by IHBCDOH*
i
96
2
	
3
	 _
  ACctumn 1 ecndMona; Supateoport (100/120 mean) coated
w*h 14* 8f»-22SO/1.JW»iriP-aioi pecked to a 14 m tang x
4 mm ID glaat column vtti 5% memane/96% argon canter
oat at eOmUn*) low rate. Coium lemperaajrehjkl leo-
fcermal at 200 «C. eaceot for PC8-1016 through PCB-1248,
abound be mteeurtd atTeo *C.       	
  ACdumn 2 condteant: Supetaopcrt (1IXV120 meeh) coated
                                                  •Quint cofnpceMoK
                                                     Fraction 1^% ctnyt C
                                                     Fraction 2-16% «tnyl «lh«r hi hmm.
                                                     Fractal »-60% attiyl cthar In haxan*.

                                                 TABLE 3—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD
                                                                     608
                                                    Parameter
umn «W) 6% roatiana«e% argon camar gat at
        '              Ttaki iaotharmal at 200 «C tor
  	, Column tamparalura
  » paaBcidai; at 140 *Ctor PC
•C lor PC8-1018 and 1242 *D12«.
t>aj
          at140^foFPC_IM221and1232;andat170   Aldrin
                        8aaFlgunw2thniia
TABLE 2—OismiBimoN OF CHLORINATED PES-
  TICIDES  AND  RGBs  INTO FLORISIL  COLUMN
  FRACTIONS2
AkWo
4/C-OOO
4,4'-O0T	
Dtektti	
gndoauNant.
ErxJoeuttenH,
EnttoKtia
Endrtn
 HaptaeM
 HaptacMorapcBdda
 Toxaphana _—
 PC8-1016	
 PC&-1221	
 PCS-1222	
 PC&-1242	
 PCB-1248	
 PC8-1254	
                      Parcant raoovary by fraction*
                        1
                         100
                         100
                          67
                          06
                         100
                         100
                          80
                          OB
                         100
                           0
                          37
                           0
                           0
                           4
                           0
                         100
                         100
                          96
                          97
                          97
                          95
                          97
                         103
                          90
                                  100
                                   64
                                    7
                                    0
                                   96
                                   68
                                                 4.4'-DDT
                                                 DWdrtn
                                                 Endowlfenl .........
                                                 EndoeuKanll ,„„.„
                                                 EndoeuKan SuKato
                                                 HepteeMor	
                                                 Hepteehtor epox-
                                                Toxapnana
                                                PCB-1016
                                                PCB-1221
                                                PCB-1232
                                           91
                                          106
                                         >«•»••••
                                           26
PC8*1260
                                                                Tett
                                                               lOOflIC*
                                                               (MO/U
                 24
                 24

                 24
                 24
                 SO
                 10

                 10
                 24

                 10
                 10
                 10
                 24
604
50
50
60
50
50
50
50
                      Unr*
                      fora
                                                                        042
                                                                        048
                                                                        044
                                                                        0.72
                                                                        046
                                                                       24
                                                                       045

                                                                       0.76
                                                                       049
                                                                       6.1
                                                                       2.7
                                                                       3.7
                                                                       040
                       12.7
                       104
                       244
                       174
                       122
                       154
                       134
                                                                              Range for
                                                                              X(U01)
            148-224
            048-244
            0.78-240
            141-237
274-643
 44-124
148-240
 44-13.7
1.15-249
1.14-242
 22-17.1
 34-132
 5.1-124
046-240

1.13-243
274-654
304-614
22.1-762
144-984
244-894
294-702
222-674
18.7-644
42-122
37-134
17-147
19-140
32-127
46-119
31-141
30-145
25-160
38-148
45-163
 5>-202
28-144
30-147
34-111

37-142
41-126
50-114
15-178
10-216
39-150
38-158
29-131
 8-127
  	of four recovery meeturemenli. In ttpt
L (Section 824).
  X^M>araoa leowery far four recovery iiieeeu amartli. In fQl

  P. Pi-Peroent' raoovery metaurad (Section 832, Section
842).
  D.DeHrted; remit mutt be grealer than zero.
  NOTE: Theet criteria era taeaed oTrectty upon the method
performence date In TaUe 4. Where neceeuiy. the antta for
Scovwy have been broadened to enure eppticabmy o( the
         4—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 608
                                                Accuracy,
                                                  ery.X'
                                                        n raccv-
                                                        OigAJ
                                                               Single analyst ore
               Single
                tSSan.
                                                                     tr'
                                                                                Overal predeton.
                                                                                      (K/L)
                                                                                   S'
CWordeno
                                                      041C+044
                                                      O84C*0.03
                                                      041&»047
                                                      041C*047
                                                      042C-046
                                                      042C-0.04
                                                      044C*030
                                                      045C*0.14
                                                      043C-0.13
                                                                     Q.16X-044
                                                                      0.1.&4044
                                                                     02ZX-042
                                                                      0.18X40.09
                                                                                    020X-041
                                                                                    Oi?33C •* 0x00
                                                                                    O33X-04S
                                                                                     (X25X+0.03
                                                                                     022Z4044
                                                                      0.13X+0.13
                                                                     020X-0.18
                                                                                    027X-ai4
                                                                                    028X-049
                                                                                    O31X-021
 EndowMenl,
                                                      OJi7C*044
                                                                      0-12X*0.19
                                                                      0.10K4047
                                              738

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                             136, App. A, Moth. 608
TABLE 4—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—Memoo GQQ—
                                           Continued
                                                 Accuracy, as recov-
                                                   ery. X' («H4
                         SJnglB anaJyst pre-
             OvoraM
Haptachlor .-..„„.-.
HeptachJpr apoidde.
Toxapnene
PCB-1016..
PC8-1221 „
               0.93C+0.34
              0.89C-0.37
              0.89C-0.04
               0.69C+0.04
                                                                      0.41X— 0.65
 020X4025
. 0.06X40.13
 0.18X-0.11
PCB-1242..
PCB-1248 „
Pftft— 19M)
               0.81C+OJO
               0.96C40.65
              0.91 C+10.79
               0.93C40.70
               0.87C41.06
               0.76C+2.07
               0.66C*3.76
 0.13X40.15
 029X-0.76
 021X-1.93
 0.11X41.40
 0.17X40.41
 0.15X41.66
 022X-2J7
0.47X-020
 024X40^5
 024X4025
 0.16X40.08
025X-0.08
 0.15X40.45
a35X-0.62
 (U1X43J50
 021X41.52
                                                                                       0.17X*3.62
                                                                                       039X-4.86
nt» of a sample containing a i
                                                                        of 0. in HgfL.
  Sp'-BDaeted •tngte'anaJysnSBndard devlaUon of meaViiramnrits at an avenge concentratton found of "2, m
  -• -   •  • • • ^^'   •  r sumdeid deviation of meaturemenU at an average concentration found of X. in iigfl-.
  C-Truevah^tortheconeerrtretJon. IniigA-                    ___^^_^-t   ,
  X-Average fecovery found for nteaiuremnnti of samples containing a coocantiaUon of C. In pg/L.
                                                739

-------
   COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
   TEMPERATURE: 200*C.
   DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
        ui
        Q
0.       4-8       12       16
               ">
          RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure 1. Gas chromatogram of pesticides
                       740

-------
Envtronrnontcri Protection Ajjoncy
Pt.
App. A,
         COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
         TEMPERATURE: 2008C.
         DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
      0        A        8       12      16
               RETENTION TIME, MIN.
      Figure 2. Gas chromatogram of chlordane
                               741

-------
Pi. ido, App. A, Mom.
                             I •""»»»
                        COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401
                        ON SUPELCOPORT
                        TEMPERATURE: 200*C.
                        DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
          I    1	L-	L
                                 •
                                                '    '
10      14      18
RETENTION TIME,  MIN.
                                            22
   Figure 3. Gas chromatogram of toxaphene.
26
                             742

-------
EnvironfTwtiul Protection Agency
Pt. 136, App. A,
. 6C8
       COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SI/PELCOPORT
       TEMPERATURE:  160'C.
       DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
         26       10      14      18       22
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.

      Figure 4. Gas chromatogram of PCB-1016.
                             743

-------
    COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
    TEMPERATURE:  160*C.
    DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
           6      10      14      18

             RETENTION TIME, MIN.
22
Figure 5. Gas chromatogram of PCB-1221.
                     744

-------
Environmental Protection Agency               Kt. JOA, App. A, iwsoin. oo*>

    COLUMN:  1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPOHT
    TEMPERATURE:  160*C.
    DETECTOR:  ELECTRON CAPTURE
                      10       1.4  . .- * 18
                   RETENTION TIME, MIN.
22
24
 Figure 6. Gas chromatogram of PCB-1232.
                             745

-------
ri.
     COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401  ON SUPELCOPORT
     TEMPERATURE:  160°C.
     DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
     26       10       14      18
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.

  Figure 7. Gas chromatogram of PCB-1242.
22
                           746

-------
Environmental Piutocllon Agoncy               PI. I36t App. A,

     COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1 .95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPOR?
     TBIIIPERATURE:  160*C.
     DETECTOR: aECTROM CAPTURE
                                                       6Qfs
    2        6      10      14      18

                   RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure 8. Gas chromatogram of PCB-1248.
                                             22
26
                           747

-------
    COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPORT
    TBWPERATURE:  200°C.
    DETECTOR:  ELECTRON  CAPTURE
             6        10       14

             RETENTION TIME, MIN.
18
22
Figure 9.  Gas chromatogram of PCB-1254.
                        748

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
           Pt. 136. App. A, MOtn. 60*
     COLUMN: 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 ON SUPELCOPOflT
     TEMPERATURE: 200eC.
     DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE

                         J.
J.
J.
              6       10      14      18
                    RETENTION TIME, MIN.
               22
                   25
  Figure 1O.  Gas chromatogram of PCB-1260
                             749

-------
      METHOD eoe—NITROABOMATICS AND
                ISOPHOEONE

           1. Scope and Application
  1.1  This method covers the determination
of, certain  nitroaromatics and isophorone.
The   following-  parameters  may be  deter-
mined by this method:
                         STOflET
                           No.
                            34811
                            34626
                            34406
                            34447
CAS No.
 121-14-2
 606-20-2
 78-69-1
 96-95-3
  1.2  This is a  gas  ohromatographio (QC)
method applicable to the  determination  of
the compounds listed above in municipal and
industrial  discharges as provided under  40
CPR 196.1. When this method is used to ana-
lyse unfamiliar samples for any or all of the
compounds above, compound identifications
should be supported by at least  one addi-
tional qualitative  technique. This  method
describes analytical conditions for a second
gas chromatographic  column that  can  be
used  to  confirm measurements made with
the primary column. Method 625 provides gas
chromatograph/mass  spectrometer (GC/MS)
conditions appropriate for the qualitative
and quantitative confirmation of results for
all of the parameters listed above, using the
extract produced by this method.
  1.3  The method detection limit (MDL, de-
fined  in Section H.I)1 for each parameter is
listed in  Table 1.  The MDL for a  specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of Interferences  In
the sample matrix.
  1.4  The sample extraction and concentra-
tion steps in this method are essentially the
same  as in Methods 606, 606, 611, and 612.
Thus, a single sample may be extracted  to
measure the parameters  included  in the
scope of each of these methods. When clean-
up is required, the concentration levels must
be high enough to permit selecting allquots,
as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup
procedural. The analyst is allowed the lati-
tude,    under   Section   12,   to   select
chromatographic conditions appropriate for
the simultaneous measurement of combina-
tions of these parameters.
  1.6  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered  as a major modification subject  to
application and approval  of alternate test
procedures under 40 CPR 136.4 and 136.5.
  1.6  This method is restricted to use by  or
under the supervision of analysts experi-
enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
in the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
Each  analyst must 'demonstrate the ability
to generate  acceptable results  with this
method using the procedure described in Sec-
tion 8.2.
           2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A  measured volume of sample, ap-
proximately  1-L. is extracted with methyl-
ene chloride  using a separatory funnel. The
methylene chloride extract is dried and ex-
changed to hexane during concentration to a
volume of 10 mL  or  less. Isophorone and
nitrobenzene are measured by flame ionlza-
tion detector gas chromatography (FIDOC).
The  dinltrotoluenes are measured by elec-
tron capture detector gas chromatography
(ECDOC).a
  2.2  The method provides a Florisil column
cleanup procedure  to aid in the elimination
of interferences that may be encountered.

              3. Interferences

  3.1  Method interferences may be  caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead to discrete  artifacts and/or ele-
vated baseliles in gas chromatograms. All of
these  materials must  be routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of  the  analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as  described In
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1  Glassware   must  be   scrupulously
cleaned.9 Clean all  glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing with hot water,
and  rinses  with  tap  water  and distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry, and heated in  a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 15 to  30 min. Some  thermally stable ma-
terials, such as PCBs, may not be eliminated
by this treatment.  Solvent rinses with ace-
tone and pesticide quality hexane may be
substituted for the muffle furnace heating.
Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually
eliminates PCS interference. Volumetric
ware should not be heated in a muffle fur-
nace. After drying and cooling, glassware
should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
ronment   to  prevent any  accumulation of
dust or other contaminants.  Store Inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to minimize Interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
  3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from the
sample. The  extent of matrix interferences
will vary considerably from source to source,
depending upon  the nature and diversity of
the industrial complex or municipality being
sampled. The cleanup  procedure in Section
11 can be used to  overcome  many of these
interferences, but  unique samples .may re-
quire  additional   cleanup  approaches  to
achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
                                         750

-------
Envfeonrnontol Protection Agoncy
              PI. 136, App. A, Msitl. 609
                 4. Safety

  4.1  The  toxicity  or  carcinogenicity  of
each reagent used in this method has not
been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
cal compound should be treated as a poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The laboratory is responsible for
             a /current  awareness file  of
O8HA regulations regarding the safe han-
dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
od. A reference file of material data handling
sheets should also be made available to all
personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
Additional references  to  laboratory  safety
are available .and have been identified44 for
the information of the analyst.

         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1  Sampling  equipment, for  discrete  or
composite sampling.
  5.1.1 Grab  sample  bottle— 1-L  or 1-qt,
amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles are not available, protect  samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed,  rinsed with acetone or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to minimise
contamination.
  5.1.2 Automatic  sampler (optional)— The
sampler must incorporate glass  sample con-
tainers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4*C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses
a peristaltic  pump, a  minimum length of
compressible silicone rubber tubing may be
used. Before use,, however, the compressible
tubing should be  thoroughly   rinsed with
methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimize the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect  flow propor-
tional composites.
.  5.2 Glassware (All specifications are sug-
gested. Catalog numbers are included for il-
lustration only.):
  5.2.1  Separatory funnel— 2-L,  with Teflon
stopcock.
  5.2.2 Drying   column— Chromatographic
column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm
ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3  Chromatographic   column — 100 mm
long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock.
  5.2.4  Concentrator   tube,  Kuderna-Dan-
ish— 10-iriL. graduated  (Kontes K-570050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the  test. Ground
glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.5  Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-670001-0600 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
  5.2.6  Snyder  column,  Kudern&-Danl«h—
 Three-ball macro (Kontes K-603GQO-0121 or
 equivalent).
  5.2.7  Snyder  column.  Kuderna-Danish—
 Two-ball micro (Kontes  K-689001-0219 or
 equivalent).
  5.2.8  Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with
.Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.3 Boiling   chips—Approximately   10/40
 mesh. Heat to 400*C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
 tract with methylene chloride.
  5.4 Water  bath—Heated, with concentric
 ring cover, capable of temperature control (±
 2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.   -
  5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
 rately weighing 0.0001 g.
  5.6 Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
 system  complete with gas chromatograph
 suitable for on-column injection and all re-
 quired  accessories including syringes,  ana-
 lytical  columns, gases, detector, and strip-
 chart  recorder. A  data  system   is  rec-
 ommended for measuring peak areas.
  5.6.1  Column 1—1.2 m long x 2 or 4 mm ID
 glass, packed with 1.95% QF-1/1.5% OV-17 on
 Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh)  or equivalent.
 This column was used to develop the method
 performance statements given in Section 14.
 Guidelines for the use of alternate column
 packings are provided in Section 12.1.
  5.6.2  Column 2—3.0 m long x 2 or 4 mm ID
 glass, packed with 3% OV-101  on Gas-Chrom
 Q (80/100 mesh) or equivalent.
  5.6.3  Detectors—Flame  ionization   and
 electron capture detectors. The flame ioniza-
 tion detector (FID) is used when determining
 isophorone and nitrobenzene. The  electron
 capture detector (BCD) is used when deter-
 mining the dinitrotoluenes. Both detectors
 have proven effective  in the  analysis of
 wastewaters and were used in  develop the
 method performance statements in Section
 14. Guidelines for the use to alternate detec-
 tors are provided in Section 12.1.

                6. Reagents

  6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
 fined as a water in which an interferent is
 not observed at the MDL of the parameters
 of interest.
  6.2  Sodium hydroxide solution   (10  N)—
 Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
 and dilute to 100 mL.
  6.3  Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL
 of HaSOv, (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of rea-
 gent water.
  6.4  Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene
 chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
   8.5  Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
 hydrous. Purify by heating at 400 *C for 4 h
 in a shallow tray.
   6.6  Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh).  Pur-
 chase activated at 1250 *F and store in dark
 in glass containers with ground glass  stop-
 pers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, acti-
 vate each batch -at least 16 h at 200 *C in a
                                         751

-------
  foll-oovored -glass  container  and allow  to
  oool.
    8.7  Stock standard solutions (1.00 |ig/|iL>—
  Stock  standard notations can be  prepared
  from pore standard materials or purchased
  as certified solutions.
   '•6.7.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
  accurately  weighing about 0.0100-g of pure
  material. Dissolve the material in hexane
  and dilate to volume in a 10-niL volumetric
  flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
  venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
  rity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the
  weight can be used without correction to cal-
  culate the concentration of the stock stand-
  ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
  can be used at any concentration if they are
  certified by the manufacturer  or by an inde-
 •pendent source.
   6.7.2  Transfer the  stock standard  solu-
  tions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
  Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
 standard  solutions should be checked fre-
 quently for signs of degradation or evapo-
 ration,  especially just prior  to preparing
 calibration standards from them.
   8.7.3  Stock standard solutions must be re-
 placed after six months, or sooner if  com-
 parison with check standards indicates  a
 problem.
   8,8  Quality  control  check  sample  con-
 centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

                7. Calibration
   7.1  Establish gas chromatographio operat-
 ing conditions equivalent to those given in
 Table 1. The gas  chromatographic system
 can be calibrated using the external standard
 technique (Section 7.2) or the internal stand-
 ard technique (Section 7.3).
   7.2  External standard calibration proce-
 dure:
   7.2.1  Prepare calibration  standards  at  a
 minimum of three concentration levels for
 each parameter of interest by adding vol-
 umes of one or more stock standards  to  a
 volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
 hexane. One of the external standards Should
 be at a concentration near, but above, the
 MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations
 should correspond to the expected range of
. concentrations found in  real samples or
 should define the working range of the detec-
 tor.
   7.2.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 ML. analyze
 each calibration standard according to  Sec-
 tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
 sponses against the mass injected.  The re-
 sults can be used to prepare  a calibration
 curve for each compound. Alternatively, if
 the ratio of response  to amount injected
 (calibration  factor)  is a  constant over the
 working range (< 10% relative standard devi-
 ation, BSD) linearity through the origin can
 be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
 tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
 tion curve.
   7.3 Internal standard  calibration  proce-
 dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
 select one or more Internal standards  that
 are similar  in  analytical behavior to the
 compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
 ther demonstrate that the measurement  of
 the internal  standard is not  affected by
 method or matrix interferences. Because  of
 these limitations, no internal standard can
 be suggested that is applicable to all sam-
 ples.                    ' *
   7.3.1 Prepare  calibration standards at  a
 minimum of three concentration  levels for
 each parameter of interest by  adding  vol-
 umes of one or more stock standards to a
 volumetric flash. To each calibration stand-
 ard, add a known constant amount of one or
 more Internal standards,  and dilute to  vol-
 ume  with hexane.  One  of  the  standards
 should be at a concentration near, but above,
 the MDL  and .the  other concentrations
 should correspond to the  expected range of
 concentrations found in  real   samples or
 should define the working range of the detec-
 tor.
  7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 |iL. analyse
 each calibration standard according to Sec-
 tion 12 and tabulate peak  height or area re-
 sponses  against concentration  for  each
 compound and internal standard.  Calculate
 response  factors  (RF) for each compound
 using Equation 1.
  Equation 1.
               RP=
(A«KCj.)

(AuXC.)
where:
  A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
   ured.
  Au=Response for the internal standard.
  Ci«sConcentration of the internal standard
   (pg/L).
  C.=Concentration  of the parameter to be
   measured (jig/L).
  If the RF value over the working range is
a constant (< 10% RSD). the RF can be as-
sumed to  be Invariant and the average RF
can be used for calculations. Alternatively,
the results can be used to plot a calibration
curve of response ratios, A*/Au. vs. RF.
  7.4  The working  calibration curve,  cali-
bration factor, or RF must  be verified on
each working day by the measurement of one
or more calibration  standards.  If the re-
sponse for any parameter varies from the
predicted  response by more  than ±  15%. a
new  calibration curve must  be prepared for
that compound.
  7.6  Before using  any cleanup procedure.
the analyst must process a series of calibra-
tion standards through the procedure to  vali-
date elution  patterns and  the absence of
interferences from the reagents.
                                         752

-------
EnvhonfiMntal Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, MeSft. 609
            8. Quality Control
  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The wrinimnm requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
of analyses meet the performance character-
istics of the method. When  results of sample
spikes indicate  atypical  method  perform-
ance, a quality control check standard must
be analyzed to confirm  that the  measure-
ments were performed in an in-control mode
of operation.
  8.1.1 The analyst must  make an initial.
one-time, demonstration of  the ability to
generate acceptable accuracy and  precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2 In recognition  of advances that are
occurring1 in chromatography, the analyst is
permitted certain  options  (detailed in Sec-
tions 10.4,11.1, and 12.1) to improve the sepa-
rations or lower the cost of measurements.
Each time such a modification  is made to
the method, the analyst is required to repeat
the procedure in Section 8.2.
  8.1.3 Before processing' any samples, the
analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
to demonstrate that Interferences from the
analytical system and glassware are under
control. Each time a set of samples is  ex-
tracted or reagents are changed, a reagent
water blank must be  processed as a safe-
guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a  minimum  of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is  de-
scribed in Section 8.3.
  8.1,5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing-
basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol.  This procedure is described in Section
8.4. The  frequency  of the check  standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
  8.2 To establish the ability  to .generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing each pa-
rameter  of interest in  acetone at  a con-
centration of 20 fig/mL for each dlnitrotoln-
 ene  and  100  ns/ml> for
 nitrobenzene. The QC check  sample  con-
 centrate must be obtained from the U.S. En-
 vironmental Protection  Agency.  Environ-
 mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
 in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not avail-
 able from that source, the QC check sample
 concentrate must be obtained from another
 external source. If not available from either
 source above,  the QC check  sample  con-
 centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
 using stock standards prepared independ-
 ently from those used for calibration.
   8A3  Using a pipet. prepare QC check sam-
 ples  at the test concentrations shown  in
 Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sam-
 ple concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots
 of reagent water.
   8.2.3  Analyze the  well-mixed QC check
 samples according to the method beginning
 in Section10.
   8.2.4  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
 lig/L, and the standard deviation of the re-
 covery (s) in |ig/L, for each parameter using
 the four results.
   8.2.5  For each parameter compare s and X
 with the corresponding acceptance criteria
 for  precision  and  accuracy,  respectively.
• found in  Table 2. If  s and X for all param-
 eters  of  interest  meet the  acceptance cri-
 teria, the system performance is acceptable
 and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
 any individual s exceeds the precision limit
 or any individual X  falls outside the range
 for accuracy, the system performance is un-
 acceptable for that  parameter. Locate and
 correct the source of the problem and repeat
 the test for all parameters of interest begin-
 ning with Section 8.2.2.
   8.3  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
 basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
 each sample site  being monitored  to assess
 accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
 ten samples per month, at least one spiked
 sample per month is required.
   8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
 sample should be determined as follows:
   8,3.1.1  If. as in compliance monitoring.
 the concentration of a specific parameter in
 the sample is being checked against a regu-
 latory concentration limit, the spike should
 be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
 the background concentration determined in
 Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
 be larger.
   8.3.1.2  If the concentration of a specific
 parameter in  the  sample is  not being
 checked  against a limit specific to that  pa-
 rameter, the spike should be at the test con-
 centration in Section 8.2.2  or 1 to 5 times
 higher than-the  background  concentration
 determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever con-
 centration would be larger.
   8.3.1.3  If it is impractical to  determile
 background levels before spiking (e.g., maxi-
 mum holding times will be exceeded),  the
 spike concentration should be (1)  the regu-
                                         753

-------
 latory concentration limit, if any; or. If none
 (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
 the expected background concentration  or
 the teat concentration in Section 8.2.2.
  8.3.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
 mine  the  background concentration (B)  of
'each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new
 QC check sample concentrate (Section' 8.2.1)
 appropriate for the background concentra-
 tions in the sample. Spike  a  second sample
 aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
 concentrate and analyze It to determine the
 concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-
 rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
 as 100 (A-B)%vT, where T is the known true
 value of the spike.
  8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
 each parameter with the corresponding QC
 acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
 acceptance criteria were calculated to in-
 clude an allowance for error in measurement
 of both the background and spike concentra-
 tions, fymmling a spike to background ratio
 of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
 extent that the  analyst's spike to  back-
 ground ratio approaches 5:1.7  If spiking was
 performed at a concentration lower than the
 test concentration In Section BJ2J2, the ana-
 lyst must use either the QC acceptance cri-
 teria in Table 2, or optional QC acceptance
 criteria calculated for the specific spike con-
 centration. To calculate optional acceptance
 criteria for the recovery of a parameter:  (1)
 Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation In
 Table 3, substituting the spike concentration
 (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S')
 using: the equation in Table 3, substituting X'
 for X8; (3) calculate the range for recovery at
 the spike  concentration as (100 X'/T)  ± 2.44
 (100 8VT)%.*
  8.3.4  If any individual P falls outside the
 designated range for recovery,  that param-
 eter has failed the acceptance criteria.  A
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed the criteria must be analyzed  as
 described in Section 8.4.
  8.4.  If any parameter fails the acceptance
 criteria for  recovery  in  Section 8.3,  a QC
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed .must be prepared and analyzed.
  Nora: The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the number of parameters being  simulta-
 neously tested, the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the labora-
 tory.
  8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard  by
 adding 1.0 mL  of QC  check  sample con-
 centrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
 gent  water. The  QC  check standard needs
 only to contain the parameters that failed
 criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
   8.4.2 Analyze the QC  check standard  to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each  parameter. Calculate each percent  re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true
value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3  Compare the  percent  recovery (P.)
for each parameter with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side the designated range,  the laboratory
performance for that parameter Is judged to
be put of control,  and the problem must be
immediately  Identified  and corrected. The
analytical result for that parameter in the
unsplked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance  purposes.
  8.5 As part of QC program for the labora-
tory, method accuracy for wastewater sam-
ples must be assessed and records must be
maintained. After the analysis of five spiked
wastewater samples as  in Section 8.3. cal-
culate  the average percent recovery (P) and
the standard deviation of the percent recov-
ery (Sp). Express the accuracy assessment as
a percent recovery interval from  P-2&, to
P+2B,.  If P=90% and 8p = 10%. for  example.
the accuracy  Interval is expressed  as 70-
110%. Update  the  accuracy  assessment for
each parameter on a regular basis (e.g. after
each five to  ten  new  accuracy  measure-
ments).
  8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance  practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the  nature of
the samples.  Field duplicates may be ana-
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements.  When doubt  exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram. confirmatory techniques such as
gas ohromatography with a dissimilar col-
umn,   specific  element detector,  or mass
spectrometer must be used. Whenever •pos-
sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
reference materials  and participate  in rel-
evant performance evaluation studies.

    S. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
                Handling

  9.1  Grab samples must be collected in
glass  containers.   Conventional  sampling
practices1 should  be followed, except that
the bottle must not be prerlnsed with sample
before collection. Composite samples should
be collected in refrigerated glass containers
in accordance with the requirements  of the
program. Automatic sampling equipment
must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
and other potential  sources of contamina-
tion.
  9.2  All samples must be iced  or  refrig-
erated at 4 *C  from the time of  collection
until extraction.
  9.3   All samples  must be extracted within 7
days  of  collection and  completely analyzed
within 40 days of extraction.*
                                          754

-------
Envtonnwntal Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, NfeiSi. 609
           10. Sample Extraction

  10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
of the sample bottle for later determination
of sample volume.  Pour the entire sample
into a 2-L separatory funnel. Check the pH
of the sample with wide-range pH paper and
adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with so-
dium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.
  10.2  Add 60 mli of methylene chloride to
the sample bottle,  seal, and shake 30 s to
rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
to the  separatory  funnel  and extract the
sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
periodic venting to release excess pressure.
Allow the organic layer to separate from the
water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion  interlace  between layers is more
tfr^n one-third  the volume of  the solvent
layer,  the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation.
The optimum  technique depends  upon the
sample, but may include stirring, filtration
of the emulsion through  glass wool, cen-
trifugation. or other physical methods. Col-
lect the methylene  chloride extract in a 250-
mL Brlenmeyer flask.
   10.3  Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
ylene chloride  to the sample bottle and re-
peat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the  extracts in the  Erlenmeyer
flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
manner.
   10.4  Assemble a Kuderna-Panish  (K-D)
concentrator  by attaching  a  10-mL con-
centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
Other concentration devices  or techniques
may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
 tor if the requirements of Section 8.2  are
met.
   10.5  Pour the combined extract through a
 solvent-rinsed   drying  column  containing
 about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium  suUate,
 and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
 tor. Rinse the Brlenmeyer flask and column
 with 20 to 30 mL  of methylene chloride to
 complete the quantitative transfer.
   10.6  Sections 10.7 and 10.8 describe a pro-
 cedure for exchanging the methylene chlo-
 ride solvent to hexane while concentrating
 the extract volume to1.0. mL. When it is not
 necessary to achieve the MDL in Table 2, the
 solvent exchange may  be made by the addi-
 tion of 50 mT'' of hexane and concentration to
 10 mL as described in Method  606. Sections
 10.7 and 10.8.
   10.7  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
 Snyder column. Prewet the  Snyder  column
 by adding about 1  mL  of methylene chloride
 to the top. Place the K-D  apparatus on a hot
 water bath (60 to 65*C) so that the concentra-
 tor tube is partially  immersed  in the  hot
 water, and the entire lower rounded surface
  of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust
  the vertical position  of  the apparatus  and
  the water temperature as required to com-
plete the concentration In 16 to 30 mfti. AC
the proper rate of distillation the balls of the
column will actively chatter but the cham-
bers will not flood with condensed solvent.
When the apparent volume of liquid reaohM
1 mL. remove the K-D apparatus and allow it
to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
  10.8  Remove the Snyder column and rinse
the flask and its lower joint  into the con-
centrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene
chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for
this operation. Add 1 to 2 mL of hexane and
a clean boiling chip to the concentrator tube
and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column.
Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of
hexane to the top. Place the micro-K-D ap-
paratus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 *C) so
that the concentrator tube  is partially Im-
mersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical
position of the apparatus and the water tem-
perature as required to complete the con-
centration in 5 to  10 min. At the proper rate
of distillation the balls of the column will
actively chatter but the chambers will not
flood.  When the apparent volume of liquid
reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus
and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10
min.
  10.9  Remove  the  micro-Snyder  column
and rinse its lower joint into the concentra-
tor tube with a minimum amount of hexane.
Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL. Stopper
the concentrator tube and store refrigerated
if further  processing will not be performed
Immediately. If the  extract will be stored
longer than two  days, it should be trans-
ferred  to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If
the sample extract requires no further clean-
up, proceed with gas chromatographic analy-
 sis (Section 12). If. the sample requires fur-
 ther cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
   10.10 Determine the original sample vol-
 ume by refilling  the sample bottle to  the
 mark and transferring the  liquid to a 1000-
 mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
 volume to the nearest 5 mL.

          11. Cleanup and Separation
   11.1  Cleanup procedures  may not be nec-
 essary for a relatively clean sample matrix.
 If particular circumstances demand the use
 of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
 the procedure below or any other appropriate
 procedure. However, the analyst first must
 demonstrate that the requirements of Sec-
 tion 8.2 can be  met using the method as re-
 vised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
   11.2  Florisil  column cleanup:
   11.2.1 Prepare a slurry of 10 g of activated
 Florisil   in   methylene   chloride/hexane
 (1+9XV/V) and place the Florisil  into  a
 chromatographic column. Tap the column  to
 settle the Florisil and add 1 cm of anhydrous
 sodium sulfate to the top. Adjust the elution
  rate to about 2 mLtaiin.
    11.2.2  Just prior to exposure of the sodium
  sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively trans-
                                          755

-------
for the sample extract onto the column using
an additional 2 mL of hexane to complete the
transfer. Just prior to exposure of the so-
dium sulfate layer to the air, add 30 mL of
methyleno chloride/hexane (1 + 9)(V/V) and
continue the elation  of the column. Discard
theeluate.
  11.2,3  Next, elute the column with 30 mL
of aoetone/methylene chloride (1 + 9)(V/V)
into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-
mL concentrator tube. Concentrate  the col-
lected fraction as in Sections 10.6,10.7,10.8,
and 104) including' the solvent exchange to 1
mL of hexane. This fraction should contain
the nitroaromatica and isophorone. Analyze
by gas chromatography (Section 12).

          12. Gas Chromatography
  12.1 Isophorone and nitrobenzene are ana-
lyzed by injection of a portion of the extract
into an FIDGC. The dlnltrotoluenes are ana-
lyzed by a separate Injection into an ECDOC.
Table 1 summarises the recommended oper-
ating conditions for the gas chromatograph.
Included in this table  are retention  times
and MDL that can be achieved under these
conditions.  Examples  of the   separations
achieved by Column 1 are shown In Figures 1
and 2. Other packed or capillary  (open-tubu-
lar)  columns, chromatographic  conditions.
or detectors may be used If the requirements
of Section 8.2 are met.
  12.2 Calibrate the system daily as  de-
scribed in Section 7.
  12.3 If the internal standard  calibration
procedure is being used, the internal stand-
ard must be added to the  same extract and
mixed thoroughly immediately before injec-
tion Into the gas chromatograph.
  12.4 Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
or standard into  the  gas  chromatograph
using the solvent-flush technique.8  Smaller
(1.0 |ili)  volumes  may  be injected  If auto-
matic devices are employed. Record the vol-
ume injected to the nearest 0.05 pL, the total
extract volume, and  the resulting peak size
in area or peak height units.
  12.6  Identify the parameters in the sample
by  comparing the retention times of the
peaks in the sample  chromatogram  with
those    of   the    peaks   in    standard
chromatograms. The width of the retention
time window used to make identifications
should be based upon measurements  of ac-
tual retention time variations of standards
over  the course of a day. Three times the
standard deviation of a retention time for a
compound can be used to calculate a 'sug-
gested window size; however, the experience
of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
interpretation of chromatograms.
  12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the
working range of the system, dilute the ex-
tract and reanalyze.
  12.7 If the measurement of the peak re-
sponse is prevented by the presence of inter-
ferences, further cleanup is required.
              13. Calculations

  13.1  Determine the concentration of indi-
vidual compounds in the sample.
  13.1.1 If the external standard calibration
.procedure is used, calculate the amount of
'material Injected from  the peak response
using  the calibration curve  or calibration
factor determined in  Section 7.2.2. The con-
centration in the  sample can  be  calculated
from Equation 2.
     Concentration (pg/  _
             L)
                               Equations
where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  Vi=Volume of extract Injected (pL).
  V,=Volume of total extract (pL).
  V,=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate  the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(HP) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tion 3.
     Concentration
             L)
                          (Ata)(RF)(V0)
                               Equation 3
 where:
  A.=ReBponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  AkFResponse for the internal standard.
  Ir=Amount of internal standard added to
    each extract (pg).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

           14. Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as the minimum concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 99% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1 'The MDL 'concentrations  listed in
 Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.10
 Similar results  were achieved using  rep-
 resentative wastewaters. The  MDL actually
 achieved  in a given analysis will vary de-
 pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
 trix effects.
  14.2  This .method has been  tested for lin-
 earity of spike recovery from reagent water
 and has been demonstrated to be  applicable
 ovar the concentration range from 7xMDL to
 lOOOxMDL."
  14.3  This method was tested by 18  labora-
 tories using reagent water, drinking water,
 surface    water,   and   three   industrial
 wastewaters  spiked  at six concentrations
 over the range 1.0 to 515 pg/L." Single bpera-
                                         756

-------
Envhonmontol PiotocHon Agoncy
                                             Pt. 136. App. A. Moth. 609
tor precision, overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.

               REFEBENCKS

  1.40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2.  "Determination of Nitroaromatic Com-
pounds and Isophorone in Industrial and Mu-
nicipal Wastewatera/' EPA 6MV 4-82-4)24. Na-
tional Technical Information Service. PB82-
208396. Springfield, Virginia 22161. May 1982.
  3.  ASTM Annual  Book of Standards. Part
31. D3694-78. "Standard Practices for  Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constituents," American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  4. "Carcinogens—Working With  Carcino-
gens." Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare. Public Health Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
77-206. August 1977.
  5. "OSHA  Safety and Health Standards.
General Industry," (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
pational Safety and Health Administration,
OSHA 2208 (Revised. January 1976).
                                 6. "Safety In Academic Cbemtotry labora-
                               tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
                               tion.  Committee on Chemical  Safety,  3rd
                               Edition. 1979.                            •
                                 7. Provost, L.P.. and Elder, R.8. "Interpre-
                               tation of Percent Recovery Data," American
                               Laboratory. 15, 68-63 (1983). (The value  2.44
                               used In the equation in Section 8.3.3 is  two
                               times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
                                 8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
                               31. D3370-76. "Standard Practices for Sam-
                               pling Water." American Society for Testing
                               and Materials, Philadelphia.
                                 9.  Burke, J.A. "Gas Chromatography for
                               Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
                               Aspects." Journal of the Association of Official
                               Analytical Chemists. 48,1037 (1985).
                                 10.  "Determination of Method  Detection
                               Limit and Analytical Curve for EPA Method
                               609—Nitroaromatics  and Isophorone," Spe-
                               cial letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-
                               2624, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
                               Environmental Monitoring and Support Lab-
                               oratory. Cincinnati. Ohio 45268. June 1980.
                                 11.  "EPA Method Study  19, Method 609
                               (Nitroaromatics and Isophorone)." EPA 600/
                               4-34-018,  National  Technical  Information
                               Service.  PB84-176903. Springfield, Virginia
                               22161, March 1984.
           TABLE 1—CHROIIATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND METHOD DETECTION UMTTS
p~-
WiriWMIlaMMl ' - 	 ' iniin-Trr — -
9 ft-nkiMfrtfsfrfcf^sa 	 -- . i. ..

%4-OMIretokMm 	 	 -
Retention time (min)
Cd.1
331
3JS2
4.48
&3S
COL2
4*1
4,75
5.72
&S4
MeSad octistioil In* (ppA)
ECOQC
13.7
001
15.7
O02
RDQC
3J8
6.7
   AColumnl
 4mm K)
dWc
,	column. A 2 mm ID - _
end rttrobenene by ROOC.
  •oon earner gac at 44 mL
Q (SOnOO «**»&**«£}**.ttSfiS&tZEtSSZ ilf 2*Sa«ta4SS
L column and nttngan earner gas at 44 mUnto flow)Me ^ _««1*SL*S^SS
                                                 haU iaomamiai * 86 -C. A 4 mm JO coMno
 nMrobenzana by RDQC.	
 argon earner gas at 44 mUrmr
 wttheld iaothermal at 150 -C.
                               d whan date
                                  maah) coated with 3% OV-101 ,^_
                                         . .. 	lowntowereut«*
                                                         :ai^.sr-.~h.i:.-vi^:'
                                                         tha mossiess&mA. by
                         n n ^4 munim imw t«ww w»»w «^-a ^"*": —•«—•••-—•
                         i Md taottiermal at 100 *C. A 4 mm ID column and 1-~..
                         t^oatam^trwdnttratob^
                     TABLE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 609





Ntoobenzeno 	 : 	 . 	 i— . 	
TaatCone.
(WXU
20
20
100
100
UmMfora
(H0L)
5.1
4A
32J
33J
Rer^ferX
(wot)
3.6-22J
3A-23JO
&0-100.0
25.7-10OO
Ranmfor
P.PT(%)
6-125
8-128
O-11T
6-118
   %-8tandardde
   an of four recovery measurement*. In |ioA (Secton O2.4)
   JUAvenge recovery for tour recovery measurement*, in pgrt. (Section a2.4).
   P. P^Pereert racoyaiy maeaurad (Section 8A2. Sacbon Mi).
   D DafcKted; remit muctba ye alir than MTO.

                                                         r mow
                                           757

-------
TABLE 3—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 609
Parameter
2.4-OWH>-
•jc*m»..., 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 .„-,--—
2,6-Otnteo-
WKno* 	 	 	 	 ..........,.,„;
Jtophcrooe ....,.,,, 	 i 	 ......
Nfecbanzane

Accuracy, as re-
covery. X' (no/i.)
0.65C+O22
0.66C+O20
0.49C+2.93
060C+200

Single analyst
pracWon. s,'(»i8/
o^ox+o.oe
0.19X*0.06
0^8X^77
O^SX+2.53

Overall precision,
S'(no/U
OJ7X-0.07
o^ex-o.oo
0.48X+0.31
naTX OTB

X'-Expea*d recovery fix one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C. in ud/L.
Sr'-Expeded aiogie analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in jig/L
S'aExpactad MarUborakxy standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X. In ug/L.
Q**True value tor the concenmtion, In  ug/L.
XMvacage recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C. in ug/L.
                                               758

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Ft. 136, App. A, Mem. ouv
            COLUMN: 1.5% OV-17/1.95% QF-1 ON GAS CHROM Q
            TEMPERATURE: 85°C.
            DETECTOR: FLAME IONIZATION
                UJ
                JM
                2
                CO
                O
                    IU
            2   4   6   8   10  12
               RETENTION TIME, MIN.
      Figure  1.  Gas chromatogram
                  of nitrobenzene
                  and isdphorone.
                            759

-------
   COLUMN: 1.5% 0V-1771.95% QF-1 ON GAS CHROM Q
   TEMPERATURE: 145°C.
   DETECTOR: ELECTRON CAPTURE
      tu
      tz
      9
      to
          u
          UI
z
Q
 >

01
    2468
 RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure  2.  Gas chromatogram
            of dinitrotoluenes.
                     760

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

    METHOD 610—POLYNUCLEAR AROMATIC
              HYDROCARBONS

          1. Scope and Application

 •1.1'  This method covers the determination
of  certain  polynuclear  aromatic   hydro-
carbons  (PAH). The  following parameters
can be determined by this method:
Parameter
jk<« mm ihlhnmt ...,,.,...,,,,-- 	
Acanaphthytem 	 ....
Benzo(i)anttiracene ..............
B«uo(a)pyrane 	 : 	
BenxofbHhJomnthane 	
Benzo(ghi)porytene 	
B0nzo(k)fluoranthene 	 '
Dtoenzo(fch)anthracene ......
Fkjomnthane 	
RUOIWW 	 . 	
lndeno(1.2.3-cd)pyrerw ........
Ptwnanthrm* 	 . 	
Pyfjne ...............
STORE! No.
34205
34200
34220
34526
34247
34230
34521
34242
34320
34556
34376
34381
34403
04AOR
O^vOw
34461
34469
CAS No.
83-32-9
20vB9&av
120-12-7
56-65-3
50-32-6
205-00-2
191-24-2
207-08-9
218-01-9
53-70-3
206-44-0
86-73-7
193-39-5
91-20-3
85-01-8
129-00-0
   1.2 This is a chromatographic method ap-
 plicable to the determination  of the  com-
 pounds listed above in municipal and indus-
 trial discharges  as provided under 40 CFR
 136.1. When this method is used to analyze
 unfamiliar samples for any or all of the com-
 pounds  above,  compound   identifications
 should be supported by  at  least one  addi-
 tional qualitative technique. Method 625 pro-
 vides gas  chromatograph/mass spectrometer
 (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qual-
 itative and quantitative  confirmation  of re-
 sults  for  many  of  the parameters  listed
 above, using the  extract1 produced by this
 method.
   1.3  This method provides for both high
 performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC)
 and gas  chromatographic  (GC) approaches
 for the determination  of  PAHs.  The  gas
 chromatographic  procedure  does not ade-
 quately resolve the following  four pairs of
 compounds: Anthracene' and phenahthrene;
 chrysene      and      benzo(a)antbracene;
 benzo(b)fluoranthene                   and
 benzo(k)fluoranthene; and  dibenzo(a,h)  an-
 thracene  and indeno (l,2,3-cd)pyrene. Unless
 the purpose for the analysis can be served by
 reporting the sum of an unresolved pair, the
 liquid  chromatographic approach  must be
 used  for  these  compounds.  The  liquid
 chromatographic  method does resolve all 16
  of the PAHs listed.
    1.4  The method detection limit (MDL. de-
  nned in Section 15.1) * for each parameter is
  listed  in Table  1. The  MDL  for a specific
  wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
  pending upon the nature of interferences in
  the sample matrix.
    1.5  The sample extraction and concentra-
  tion steps in this method are essentially the
  same as  in Methods 606, 606, 609, 611, and 612.
             Pt. 136. App. A. Moth. 610

Thus, a single sample may be extracted to
measure  the parameters  included  in  the
scope of each of these methods. When clean-
up is required, the concentration levels must
be high enough to permit selecting aliquots,
as necessary, to  apply appropriate cleanup
procedures. Selection of the aliquots must be
made prior to the solvent exchange steps of
this method. The analyst is allowed the lati-
tude, under  Sections  12 and 13,  to select
chromatographic conditions appropriate for
the simultaneous measurement of combina-
tions of these parameters.
  1.6  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a major modification subject to
application  and  approval  of alternate  test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
  1.7  This method>is restricted to use by or
under the  supervision of analysts experi-
enced in  the use of HPLC and GC systems
and in the  interpretation  of liquid and gas
chromatograms.  Each analyst must  dem-
onstrate the ability to generate acceptable
results with this method using the procedure
described in Section 8.2.

            2. Summary of Method

  . 2.1  A measured volume of sample, ap-
 proximately 1-L, is extracted with  methyl-
 ene chloride using a separatory funnel. The
 methylene chloride extract is dried and .con-
 centrated to a volume of 10 mL or less. The
 extract is then separated by HPLC or GC. Ul-
 traviolet (UV) and fluorescence detectors are
 used with HPLC to identify and measure the
 PAHs. A flame  ionization.detector is used
 withGC.2                    .       ,    .
   2.2  The method provides a silica gel col-
 umn cleanup procedure to aid in the  elimi-
 nation of interferences that may be encoun-
 tered.

               3. Interferences

   3.1 Method  interferences may be caused
 by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
 ware, and other sample processing hardward
  that lead  to  discrete artifacts and/or ele-
  vated baselines in the chromatograms. All of
  these materials must be  routinely  dem-
  onstrated to be free from interferences under
  the conditions  of the analysis by running
  laboratory reagent  blanks as described  in
  Section 8.1.3.               •        ,   ,
    311  Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
  cleaned.* Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
  sible after use  by rinsing with  the last sol-
  vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should bi fol-
  lowed by detergent washing with hot water,
  and rinses with  tap water  and distilled
  water. The glassware should then be drained
  dry and heated in a muffle furnace at 400«C
  for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
  terials, such as PCBs, may not be eliminated
  by this treatment. Solvent rinses with ace-
  tone and pesticide  quality hexane may be
                                           761

-------
substituted for the muffle furnace heating.
Thorough rinsing- with each solvents usually
eliminates,  PCB  interference.  Volumetric
ware should not.be heated in a muffle fur-
n«ce. After drying and cooling,  glassware
should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
ronment to prevent  any  accumulation of
dust or other contaminants. Store inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to minimize interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required;
  3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from the
sample. The extent of matrix interferences
will vary considerably from source to source,
depending upon the nature and diversity of
the industrial complex or municipality being
sampled. The  cleanup procedure  in Section
11 can be used to overcome many of these
interferences,  but unique  samples may re-
quire  additional  cleanup  approaches  to
achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
  3.3 The extent of interferences that may
be encountered using liquid chromatographic
techniques has not been fully assessed. Al-
though the HPLC conditions described allow
for a unique resolution of  the specific PAH
compounds  covered by this method, other
PAH compounds may interfere.

                 4. Safety

  4.1 The  toxicity  or carcinogeniclty  of
each reagent used in this method have not
been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
cal compound should be treated as a poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The laboratory is responsible for
maintaining a current awareness  file of
OSHA  regulations regarding the  safe han-
dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
od. A reference file of material data handling
sheets  should  also be made available to all
personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
Additional references  to laboratory  safety
are available and have been identified «•• for
the information of the analyst.
  4.2 The- following parameters covered by
this method have been tentatively classified
as known or suspected, human or mamma-
lian    carcinogens:    benzo(a)anthracene,
benzo(a)pyrene, and dibenzo(a,h)-anthracene.
Primary standards of these toxic compounds
should  be prepared in a  hood.  A  NIOSH/.
MESA approved toxic gas  respirator should
be worn when the analyst handles high con-
centrations of these toxic compounds.

         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1  Sampling  equipment,  for discrete or
composite sampling.
  5.1.1   Grab  sample  bottle—1-L  or 1-qt,
amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
with Tenon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles are not available, protect samples
from  light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed,  rinsed with acetone  or methylene
chloride, and dried  before use to  minimize
contamination.
  5.1.2 Automatic  sampler (optional)—The
sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
tainers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mli of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4*C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses
a  peristaltic pump, a minimum length of
compressible silicons rubber tubing may be
used.  Before  use. however, the compressible
tubing should be  thoroughly rinsed  with
methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimize the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
tional composites.
  5.2  Glassware (All specifications are sug-
gested. Catalog numbers are included for il-
lustration only.):
  5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon
stopcock.
  5.2.2 Drying   column—Chromatographic
column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm
ID. with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3 Concentrator  tube,   Kuderna-Dan-
ish—10-mL. graduated  (Kontes K-570050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
glass  stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—
500-niL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
  5.2.5 Snyder  column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Three-ball  macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).
  5.2.6 Snyder  column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Two-ball  micro  (Kontes  K-669001-0219  or
equivalent).
  5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.2.8 Chromatographic  column—250  mm
long x 10 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc
at bottom and Teflon stopcock.
  5.3  Boiling  chips—Approximately  10/40
mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 mm or Soxhlet ex-
tract with methylene chloride.
  5.4  Water  bath—Heated,  with concentric
ring cover, capable  of temperature control.
(±2 *C). The bath should be used in a hood.
  5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.
  5.6  High   performance   liquid   chro-
matograph  (HPLC>—An analytical system
complete with column supplies, high pres-
sure  syringes,  detectors,   and compatible
strip-chart recorder. A data system is rec-
ommended for measuring peak areas and re-
tention times.
  5.6.1 Gradient pumping system—Constant
flow.
                                         762

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  5.6.2  Reverse phase column—HC-ODS Sil-
X. 5 micron particle diameter, in a 25 cm x
2.6  mm ID  stainless steel column (Perkin
Elmer  No. 069-0716 or equivalent). This col-
umn was  used to develop the method  per-
formance  statements in  Section  15. Guide-
lines  for  the  use  of  alternate column
packings are provided in Section 12.2.
  5.6.3  Detectors—Fluorescence  and/or UV
detectors. The fluorescence detector is used :
for excitation at 280 nm and emission greater
t-.hftn 389 nm cutoff (Corning 3-75 or equiva-
lent).  Fluorometers should have dispersive
optics  for excitation and can utilize either
filter or dispersive optics at the emission de-
tector. The UV detector is used at 254 nm
and should be coupled to the fluorescence de-
tector. These detectors were used to develop
the method performance  statements in Sec-
tion 15. Guidelines for the use of alternate
detectors are provided in Section 12.2.
  5.7 Gas  chromatograph—An   analytical
system complete with temperature program-
mable gas chromatograph suitable for on-
column or splitless injection and all required
accessories  including syringes,  analytical
columns,  gases, detector, and strip-chart re-
corder. A data  system is recommended for
measuring peak areas.
  5.7.1  Column—1.8 m long x 2 mm ID glass.
packed with  3% OV-17 on Chromosorb W-
AW-DCMS (100020 mesh) or equivalent. This
column was used to develop the retention
time data in Table 2. Guidelines  for the use
of alternate column packings are provided in
Section 13.3.
  5.7.2  Detector—Flame ionization detector.
This detector has proven effective in  the
analysis  of waste-waters  for the  parameters
listed in the scope (Section 1.1), excluding
the four pairs of unresolved compounds list-
ed in Section 1.3. Guidelines for the use of al-
ternate  detectors  are provided  in Section
13.3:

                 6. Reagents

  6.1  Reagent water—Reagent water  is de-
fined  as  a water in which an interferent is
 not observed at the MDL of the parameters
 of interest.
   6.2  Sodium thiosulfate——
  Stock standard solutions can  be prepared
  from pure standard materials or purchased
  as certified solutions.
             Pt. 136, App. A. Mettl. 610

  6.7.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material.  Dissolve the material in acetoni-
trile and dilute to volume in a lO-mL volu-
metric flask. Larger volumes can be used at
the convenience of the analyst. When com-
pound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater,
the weight can be used without correction to
calculate  the concentration  of  the  stock
standard.   Commercially   prepared   stock
standards can be used at any concentration
if they are certified by the manufacturer or
by an independent source.
  6.7.2  Transfer  the  stock standard solu-
tions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
standard  solutions should  be checked  fre-
quently for signs of  degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially Just prior  to preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.7.3  Stock standard solutions must be re-
placed after six months, or sooner if com-
parison with check  standards indicates a
problem.
  6.8  Quality control check   sample  con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish  liquid or gas  chromatogra-
phic  operating  conditions equivalent  to
those   given  in  Table   1   or  2.   The
chromatographic system can  be calibrated
using the external standard technique (Sec-
tion 7.2) or the  internal  standard technique
(Section 7.3).
  7.2 External  standard calibration  proce-
dure:
  7.2.1  Prepare calibration standards at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter  of interest by adding vol-
umes of one or  more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
acetonitrile. One of  the external standards
should be at a concentration near, but above,
 the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentra-
 tions  should correspond  to   the  expected
 range of concentrations found in real sam-
 ples or should define the  working range of
 the detector.                        '    ' -
   7.2.2  Using injections of 5 to 25 nL for
 HPLC and 2 to 5 |iL for GC, analyze each cali-
 bration standard according to Section 12 or
 13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or
 area responses against  the  mass injected.
 The results can be used to prepare a calibra-
 tion curve for each compound. Alternatively,
 if the ratio of  response to amount injected
 (calibration factor)  is a constant over the
 working range  (<10% relative standard devi-
 ation, RSD), linearity through the origin can
 be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
 tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
 tion curve.
    7.3  .Internal  standard calibration  proce-
  dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
  select one or more  internal  standards that
  are similar in analytical behavior to the
                                          763

-------
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the  internal standard  is  not affected  by
method or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations, no internal standard can
be suggested that is applicable to all  sam-
ples.                                     •
  7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards  at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each  parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to vol-
ume with acetonitrile. One of the standards
should be at a concentration near, but above,
the  MDL  and  the  other concentrations
should correspond to the expected range of
concentrations  found in  real  samples  or
should define the working range of the detec-
tor.
  7.&S Using injections of 5 to 25 uL for
HPLC and 2 to 5 fiL for GC, analyze each cali-
bration standard according to Section 12 or
13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or
area  responses against concentration for
each  compound and  internal standard. Cal-
culate  response  factors   (RF)  for   each
compound using Equation 1.

                   (A.XCi.)
where?
  Aas
   ured.
                               Equation 1

              for the parameter to be meas-
              for the internal standard.
  d*=Conoentration of *ft** internal standard.
   OJ«/L>.
  C,=Conoentratlon  of the parameter to be
   measured
If the RF value over the working range is a
constant (<10% BSD), the RF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average RF can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults can be, used to plot a calibration curve
of response ratios, A*/Au. vs. RF.
  7.4  The working calibration curve, cali-
bration factor, or RF must be verified  on
each working day by the measurement of one
or more calibration  «tATi'*aTdB If the re-
sponse for any parameter varies  from the
predicted response by more than ±15%. the
test must be  repeated using a fresh calibra-
tion standard. Alternatively, a new .calibra-
tion  curve   must  be  prepared  for  that
compound.
  7.5 Before  using .any cleanup procedure.
the analyst must process a series of calibra-
tion standards through the procedure to vali-
date  elation patterns and the absence of
interferences from the reagents.
             8. Quality Control
  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The minimum requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
of analyses meet the performance character-
istics of the method. When results of sample
spikes indicate  atypical method  perform-
ance,  a quality control check standard must
be analyzed to confirm that the measure-
ments were performed in an in-contix>l mode
of operation.              .
  8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial,
one-time, demonstration of the ability  to
generate acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are
occurring in chromatography. the analyst is
permitted certain options (detailed in Sec-
tions  10.4,11.1, 12J2, and 13.3) to improve the
separations or lower the  cost of measure-
ments.  Each time  such a modification  is
made to the method, the analyst is required
to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
  8.1.3 Before processing  any samples the
analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
to demonstrate that interferences from the
analytical system and glassware are under
control. Each time a set of samples is ex-
tracted or reagents are changed a reagent
water blank  must  be  processed as a safer
guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4 The laboratory must, on  an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.3.
  8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis,  demonstrate  through the  analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This procedure is described in Section
8.4. The frequency of the check standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries  from samples (Section 8.3)  meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6 The laboratory  must maintain per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
  62.  To establish  the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing each pa-
rameter of interest at the  following con-
centrations in acetonitrile: 100 iig/mL of any
                                         764

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

of the six early-eluting PAHs (naphthalene,
acenaphthylene,   acenaphthene.  nuorene,
phenanthrene. and anthracene); 5 jig/mL of
benzo(k)fluoranthene; and 10 |ig/mL of any of
the other PAHs. The QC check sample con-
centrate must be obtained from the U.S. En-
vironmental Protection  Agency, Environ-
mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
in Cincinnati. Ohio, if available. If not avail-
able from that source, the QC check sample
concentrate must  be obtained from another
external source. If not available from either
source above,  the QC check  sample  con-
centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
using stock standards prepared  Independ-
ently from those used for calibration.
  8.2.2  Using a pipet, prepare QC check sam-
ples  at the test  concentrations  shown in
Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sam-
ple concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots
of reagent water.
   8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed  QC check
samples according to the method beginning
In Section 10.                         .
   8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in
IHf/r., and the standard deviation of the  re-
covery (a) in |ig/L, for each parameter using
the four results.
   8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
with the corresponding acceptance criteria
 for   precision  and accuracy,   respectively.
 found in Table 3. If s and X for  all  param-
 eters of Interest  meet the acceptance cri-
 teria, the system performance is acceptable
 and  analysis of actual samples can begin. If
 any  individual s exceeds the precision limit
 or any individual X falls outside the range
 for accuracy, the system performance is un-
 acceptable for that parameter.
   NOTE: The large number of parameters in
 Table 3 present  a  substantial probability
 that one or more will fail at least one of the
 acceptance criteria when all parameters are
 analyzed.
   8.2.6  When one or more of the parameters
 tested fall at least one of the acceptance cri-
 teria, the analyst must proceed according to
 Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
   8.2.6.1  Locate  and correct  the source of
 the  problem and repeat the test for all pa-
 rameters of interest beginning with Section
 8.2.2.                       •
   8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat
 the   test only for  those parameters that
 failed to  meet  criteria.  Repeated failure.
 however, will confirm  a general problem
 with the measurement system. If this occurs,
  locate and correct the source of the problem
  and repeat the test for all compounds of In-
  terest beginning  with Section 8.2.2.
    8.3  The  laboratory must, on  an ongoing
  basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
  each sample site being  monitored to assess
  accuracy. For laboratories analyzing  one to
  ten samples per month, at least one  spiked
  sample per month is required.
             m. too, /Hipp, /s mom.

  8.3.1  The concentration o! the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1 If.  as in compliance monitoring,
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2. whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific
parameter  in  the  sample  is not  being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at the test con-
centration  in Section 8.2.2 or  1 to 5 times
higher  than  the background  concentration
determined in Section 8.3.2. whichever con-
centration would be larger.
  8.3.1.3 If it is impractical  to determine
background levels before spiking (e.g., maxi-
mum holding times will be exceeded), the
spike concentration should be (1) the regu-
latory  concentration  limit, if any;  or,  if
none. (2) the larger of either 5 times higher
than the expected background concentration
or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
  8.3.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
mine the background concentration  (B)  of
each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
appropriate  for the background concentra-
tions in the sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
concentrate  and analyze it to determine the
concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-'
rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
as 100 (A-B)%/T, where T is the known true
value of the spike.
   8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
 each parameter with the  corresponding QC
 acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These
 acceptance criteria were  calculated to in-
 clude an allowance for error in measurement
 of both the background and spike concentra-
 tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
 of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
 extent that the  analyst's spike to back-
 ground ratio approaches 5:1.7 If spiking was
 performed at a concentration lower than the
 test concentration in Section 8A2, the ana-
 lyst must use either the QC acceptance cri-
 teria  in Table 3.  or optional QC  acceptance
 criteria calculated for the specific spike con-
 centration. To calculate optional acceptance
 criteria for the recovery of a parameter. (1)
  Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation in
 Table 4, substituting the spike concentration
  (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision  (S')
  using the equation in Table 4, substituting X'
  'or X- (3) calculate the range for recovery at
  the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100
  SVT)%.7
    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
  designated  range for recovery,  that param-
  eter  has  failed  the  acceptance criteria. A
  check standard  containing each parameter
                                           765

-------
that foiled the critiera. most be analyzed as
described in Section 8.4.
  8 A  If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC
check standard containing each parameter
that failed moat be prepared and analyzed.
  KOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
the number of parameters being simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the  labora-
tory. If the entire list of parameters in Table
3 must be measured in the sample in Section
8.3. the probability that the analysis of a QC
check standard will be required is high.  In
this case  the QC check standard should  be
routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
, 8.4.1 Prepare the  QC check standard  by
adding 1.0 mL of  QC  check sample  con-
centrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
gent water. The  QC check standard needs
only to contain the parameters that failed
criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard  to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
each parameter. Calculate  each percent re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/D%, where T is the true
value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3 Compare the percent  recovery (P.)
for each parameter  with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with  these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side the  designated range, the laboratory
performance for that parameter is judged to
be out of control, and the problem must  be
immediately identified and corrected. The
analytical result  for that parameter in the
unspiked sample is suspect and may not  be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
oratory,  method  accuracy  for wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be maintained. After the  analysis  of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3.
calculate  the average percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (a,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from. P-2Sp to
P+2v I* P=90% &nd 8p=10%, for example, the
accuracy  interval is expressed as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a  regular basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most  productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. Field duplicates may be ana-
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements. When doubt exists
over the identification of a peak on the chro-
matogram, confirmatory techniques such as
gas chromatography with  a itimriTtinar col-
 umn,  specific element  detector, or  mass
 spectrometer must be used. Whenever pos-
 sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
 reference materials and participate in rel-
 evant performance evaluation studies.

     S. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
                 Handling

  9.1 Grab samples  must  be  collected in
 glass  containers.  Conventional  sampling
 practices* should be followed, except that
 the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
 before collection. Composite samples should
 be  collected in refrigerated  glass containers
 in  accordance with the requirements of the
 program.  Automatic  sampling  equipment
 must be as free as possible  of Tygon tubing
 and other potential sources of contamina-
 tion.
  9.2 All samples must be iced or refrig-
 erated at 4*C from the time of collection
 until extraction. PAHs are known to be light
 sensitive; therefore, samples, extracts, and
 standards should be stored in amber or foil-
 wrapped bottles in order to.  minimize photo-
 lytic decomposition. Fill the sample bottles
 and. if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg
 of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and
 mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may
 be  used for measurement of residual  chlo-
 rine." Field test kits are available for this
 purpose.
  9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7
 days of collection and completely analyzed
 within 40 days of extraction.9

            10. Sample Extraction

  10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
 of  the sample bottle for later determination
 of  sample volume. Pour the entire  sample
 into a 2-L separatory funnel.
  10.2  Add GO mL of methylene chloride to
'the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to
 rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
 to  the separatory  funnel and extract the.
 sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
 periodic venting to release  excess pressure.
 Allow the organic layer to separate from the
 water phase for a minimum  of 10 min. If the
 emulsion interface between layers is  more
 than one-third  the  volume of the  solvent
 layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
 techniques to complete the phase separation.
 The optimum technique depends upon the
 sample, but may include stirring, filtration
 of  the emulsion through glass  wool, cen-
 trlfugation, or other physical methods. Col-
 lect the methylene chloride  extract in a 250-
 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
  10.3 Add a second 60-mL  volume of meth-
 ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
 peat the extraction procedure a second time,
 combining the  extracts in  the Erlenmeyer
 flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
 manner.
                                         766

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
             Pt. 136, App. A, Motti. 610
  10.4  Assemble  a  Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
concentrator by attaching a  10-mL con-
centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
Other  concentration devices or techniques
may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
tor if  the  requirements of Section  8.2 are
met.
  10.5  Pour the combined extract through a
solvent-rinsed  drying   column  containing
about  10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate,
and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
tor. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column
with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column, Prewet the Snyder column
by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
to the  top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
water  bath (60  to 65 *C) so that the con-
centrator tube  is partially immersed in the
hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
face of the flank is  bathed with hot vapor.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
and  the water temperature as required to
complete the concentration in 15 to  20 min.
At the, proper rate of distillation the  balls of
the  column  will actively chatter but the
chambers will not Hood with condensed sol-
vent. When  the apparent volume of liquid
reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and
allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
  10.7  Remove the Snyder column and rinse
the flask and its lower joint into the con-
centrator tube  with  1 to 2 mL of methylene
chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for
this operation. Stopper  the concentrator
tube and store refrigerated if further proc-
essing will not be performed Immediately. If
the  extract will be  stored longer than two
days,  it should be transferred to  a  Teflon-
sealed  screw-cap vial  and protected from
light.  If the sample  extract requires no fur-
ther cleanup,  proceed  with' gas  or liquid
chromatographic analysis (Section 12 or 13).
If the sample requires further cleanup, pro-
ceed to Section 11.
  10.8  Determine  the original sample vol-
ume by refilling the sample bottle to  the
mark  and transferring  the liquid  to a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.

         11. Cleanup and Separation

  11.1  Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
essary for a relatively clean sample matrix.
If particular circumstances demand the use
of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
the procedure below or any other appropriate
 procedure.  However, the  analyst  first must
 demonstrate that the requirements of Sec-
 tion 8.2 can be met  using the methods as re-
 vised  to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
   11.2  Before  the  silica gel cleanup tech-
 nique can  be  utilized, the extract solvent
 must  be exchanged  to cyclohexane. Add 1 to
 10 mL of the sample extract (in  methylene
chloride) and a boiling chip to A cle&a
concentrator tube. Add 4 mL of cyclohexane
and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column.
Prewet  the column  by adding  0.5  mL of
methylene chloride to  the  top. Place  the
micro-K-D apparatus  on a boiling (100 *C)
water bath so that the concentrator  tube is
partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust
the vertical position  of the apparatus  and
the water temperature as required to com-
plete  concentration in 5 to  10 min.  At the
proper rate of distillation the balls of the
column will actively chatter but the cham-
bers will not flood. When the apparent  vol-
ume of the liquid reaches 0.5, mL, remove the
K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and  cool
for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Sny-
der column and rinse its lower joint into the
concentrator tube with a minimum amount
of cyclohexane. Adjust the extract volume to
about 2 mL.
  11.3  Silica gel column cleanup for PAHs:
  11.3.1  Prepare a slurry of 10 g of activiated
silica gel in methylene chloride and place
this into  a  10-mm ID chromatographic  col-
umn.  Tap the column to settle the  silica gel
and elute the methylene chloride. Add 1  to 2
cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top of
the silica gel.
  11.3.2  Preelute the column with  40 mL of
pentane. The rate for all elutions should be
about 2 mLftnin. Discard the eluate and just
prior  to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
to  the  air. transfer  the 2-mL cyclohexane
sample extract onto the column using an ad-
ditional 2 mL cyclohexane to complete the
transfer. Just prior .to exposure of  the so-
dium sulfate layer to the air, add 25 mL of
pentane and continue the elution of the col-
umn. Discard this pentane eluate.
  11.3.3 Next, elute the column with 25 mL
of  methylene  chloride/pentane   (4+6)(V/V)
into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-
mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the col-
lected fraction to less than 10 mL as in Sec-
tion 10.6. When the apparatus is cool, remove
the Snyder column and rinse the  flask and
its lower joint with pentane. Proceed  with
HPLC or OC analysis.

  12. High Performance Liquid Chromatography

   12.1  To the extract  in the concentrator
tube, add 4 mL of acetonitrile and a new
.boiling chip, then attach a two-ball micro-
Snyder column. Concentrate the solvent as
in Section 10.6, except set the water bath at
95 to 100  °C. When the apparatus is cool, re-
move the micro-Snyder column and rinse its
lower joint into the concentrator  tube with
about 0.2 mL of acetonitrile. Adjust the ex-
tract volume to 1.0 mL.
   12.2  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
operating conditions for the HPLC. Included
in this table are retention times, capacity
 factors, and MDL that can be achieved under
 these conditions. The UV  detector is rec-
 ommended for  the determination of naph-
                                          767

-------
thaleno,  acenaphthylene, acenapthene, and
flaorene and the fluorescence detector is rec-
ommended for the remaining PAHs. Exam-
ples of the  separations achieved  by this
KPLO column are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
Other HFLC columns, chromatographic con-
ditions, or detectors may be used if the re-
quirements of Section 8.2 are met.
  12.3  Calibrate  the system daily as  de-
scribed in Section 7.'
  12.4  If  the internal  standard calibration
procedure is being used, the internal stand-
ard must be added to the sample extract and
mixed thoroughly immediately  before  injec-
tion into the instrument.
  12.6  Inject 6 to 25 |iL of the sample extract
or standard into the HPLC using a high pres-
sure syringe or a constant volume sample in-
jection loop. Record the volume injected to
the nearest 0.1 pL, and the resulting peak
size in area or peak height units. Re-equili-
brate the HPLC column at the initial gra-
dient conditions for at least 10 ™
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
             Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 610
     Concentration (ng/ •_
             L)
                               Equation 2
where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  Vi=Volume of extract Injected (jiL).
  Vt=Volume of total extract (»iL).
  V.=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2  If the Internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined  in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tions.               ,
     Concentration (tig/
             L)
                            (A.XL)
                          (Ai.)(RF)(V0)
                               Equations
where:
  A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ak^Respohse for the internal standard.
  1.=Amount of internal standard added to
    each extract ()ig).
  Ve-Volume of water extracted (L).
  14.2  Report results in pg/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

           IS. Method Performance
  15.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
aero.1  The MDL concentrations  listed in ,
Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.11
Similar results  were achieved using, rep-
resentative wastewaters. MDL for the OC ap-
proach were not determined. The MDL actu-
ally achieved in a given analysis will vary
depending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  15.2  This method has been tested for lin-
earity of spike recovery from reagent water
and has been demonstrated to be applicable
over the concentration range from 8 x MDL
to  800 x MDL11 with the following exception:
benzo(ghl)perylene  recovery at 80 x and 800 x
MDL were low (35% and 45%, respectively).
  15.3   This method was tested by 16 labora-
 tories using reagent water, drinking water,
 surface   water,   and   three   industrial
 wastewaters  spiked  at six  concentrations
 over the range 6.1 to 425 pg/L.12 Single opera-
 tor precision, overall precision, and method
 accuracy were found to be directly related to
 the concentration: of the parameter and es-
 sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 4.

               REFERENCES           •

  1.40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
  2.  "Determination  of Polynuclear  Aro-
matic Hydrocarbons In Industrial and Munic-
ipal Wastewaters,"  EPA 600/4-82-025.  Na-
tional Technical Information Service,  PB82-
258799, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1982.
  3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constituents," American
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadel-
phia.
  4.  "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens," Department,of Health, Education, and
Welfare. Public Health Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health. Publication No.
77-206, August 1977.
  5.  "OSHA Safety and Health Standards,
General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
pational Safety and Health Administration,
OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories." American Chemical Society Publica-
tion. Committee on  Chemical  Safety, 3rd
Edition, 1979.
  7. Provost, L.P., and Elder. R.S. "Interpre-
tation of Percent Recovery Data," American
Laboratory,  15,  58-63 (1983).  (The value 2.44
used in the equation  in Section 8.3.3 is two
times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31,  D3370-76. "Standard Practices for  Sam-
pling Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials. Philadelphia.
  9. "Methods 330.4  (Titrimetric. DPD-FAS)
and 330.5  (Spectrophotometric,  DPD) for
Chlorine.  Total  Residual,"  Methods for
Chemical Analysis  of  Water  and Wastes,
EPA-600/4-79-020.  U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency. Environmental Monitoring .
and Support Laboratory. Cincinnati, Ohio '
45268, March 1979.
  10. Burke, J.A. "Gas Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis;  Some Practical
Aspects," Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists, 48,1037 (1965).
  11. Cole,  T., Riggin,  R.,  and Glaser,  J.
"Evaluation of Method Detection Limits and
Analytical  Curve  for  EPA  Method 610—
PNAs,"    International  Symposium    on
Polynuclear Aromatic  Hydrocarbons, 5th,
Battelle's  Columbus Laboratories, Colum-
bus. Ohio (1980).
  12. "EPA  Method  Study 20, Method 610
 (PNA's),"  EPA 600/4-84-063. National  Tech-
 nical   Information   Service,   PB84-211614,
 Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
                                         769

-------
TABLE 1—HKSH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMA-
  TOGRAPHY CONDmONS AND METHOD DETEC-
  TION LIMITS
       Parameter
Huorantheoe,
Pyrsoe.
Baruo(s)a/Tmracen«
Chrysana,
Benzo(b}fiuoranthefle
Dtotnn>(tCn)antriracena
Benzo{gnl)perylena
 Reten-
tion fme
 (min)
                            16J6
                            ias
                            2O5
                            212
                            22.1
                            23.4
                            24.5
                            25.4
                            2&S
                            2A3
                            31.6
                            3S.7
                            3&3
                            37A
                                  Cokinn

                                  "
            122
            117
            152
            1&8
            I&B
            17.6
            ias
            19.1
            999
            24JO
            25.1
            2&9
            ZTA
            2B.7
Method
 detoc-
tioo Hnvt
                                                      • YfctA lUm tnj •! ••itilei •!•« • • <-•n^ait^hi J*n»  «*^M«^Ma%Ma^tfkA
                                                      * i no 0MJ&. ior napnmaMno. acanapiwiyioim* •oorapnoiano,
                                                    and fluorane were determined using a UV detector. 75 others
                                                    were determined using a fluorescence detector.

                                                     TABLE 2—GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS
                                                                 AND RETENTION TIMES
                                                                    Parameter
  23

  021
  0.64
  0.66
  021
  027
  0.013
  0.15
  0.018
  0.017
  0.023
  OJ03O
  OJ076
  0.043
Naphthalene
Acenaphthytene —
Acenaprrthono..»«.
Fknrene.
Phananthi
Anthracene
Fiuoranthene.
Pyrene
Benzo(a)anmracene
Chrysene
BerizcXb)fluorarrthene
Banzo(k)fluoranthane ....
  AAHPLC column concWcnst Reverse phase HC-ODS SB-
X, 5 micron parties size, ina2Scmx2jBmmlO staMaes
stMl cotornnriaocrafic eiutScn far 5 min. using acetonilriW
water (44«), than hewer gnxSant etuton to 100% acatonHrte
over 25 rota, at OJS mUmn low rate. If columns having other
Internal diameters are used, the tow rate ahouU be adjusted
to maintain a linear velocity of 2 mm/sec.
                            lndeno(12>cd)pyrene _..
                            BenzcXghQperylene	
                                                                     Retention
                                                                    time (min)
                                                                                                  10J
15.9
204
24.7
24.7
28.0
28.0
29.4
362
382
38.6
                              GC Cokmh conditions: Chramosorb W-AW-OCMS (100/
                            120 mesh) coated with 3% OV-17 packed in a 1.8 x 2 mm ID
                            glass column with nitrogen carrier gas at 40 mL/min. flow rate.
                            Column temperature was held at 100*C for 4 min., then pro-
                            grammed at 8*C/min. to a final hold at 280*C.
                        TABLE 3—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 610
Parameter
A«tf>»ph«w~*
Af*nar>htnvf*i*
Arrtoncerw^^
B*rvr{}{s}antriraeen* 	
8#rttQ(«)pyrtr»fl 	 	 	 ,,,,„, MI-. , ,---, 	 	 .„„.,„„

BtniP{ooi)f>BryttfH» 	 ,._.. ,,, , ,,., , ,,, ,,,-, ........

Chrvaflne
OibtinnKa h)vHhrarsnfi
Fjuorarrthtne 	 	 ,.„,,,, 	 „„,„-

forttood 3 'WrOpyrenfl
ftenhlhalnnn
Ph«nsnt)rsne
Pyrane 	 	 	 •. ,, ..., 	

XoAverape recovery for tatr rscx>vBy meeauremerte. in tim. (Sectio
P. P^.Percant recovery measured (section a32. Section 8.42).
Test cone.
(MIL)
100
100
100
. 10
10
10
10
5
10
10
10
100
10
100
100
10
S82.4).
82.4).
Unit tors
(UFA)
40.3
45.1
28.7
4.0
4.0
3.1
23
2J5
42
2.0
3.0
43.0
3.0
40.7
37.7
3.4

Range tor X
(MO/U
D-105.7
22.1-112.1
112-1124
3.1-11.6
02-11.0
1.8-13.8
0-10.7
D-7.0
0-17.5
04-10.0
2.7-11.1
D-119
12-10.0
213-100.0
8.4-133.7
1.4-12.1

Range tar
P, P. (%)
D-124
0-139
D-126
12-135
D-128
6-150
D-116
D-159
0-199
D-110
14-123
D-142
D-116
D-122
D-155
D-140

  D-D«tect8d; resutt must be pi eater man zero.
  NCTIE: These criteria are based drecty upon the method performance data in Table 4. Where necessary, the limits for recov-
ery have been broadened to assure appteabaty of the limits to cmicentraUons below those used to develop Table 4.

  TABLE 4—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 610
                                                                  Accuracy, as
                                                                   recovery. X'
                                                                     (M0A.)
                                                     Single analyst
                                                      precision, ST'
                                                         Oig/U
                                                                                           Overall preci-
                                                                                             sion. S'
                                                                                              (not)
Aceniphth«na
                                                                    0.52C+0.54
                                                                   0.69C-1.89
                                                                   0.63C - 126
                                                                    0.73C+0.05
 Bocuto(l<)ftoccanttwne.
 Dfconzo(i^))anmraoane
                                                                    0.78C+0.01
                                                                    0.44C+0.30
                                                                    0.59C+0.00
                                                                   0.77C - 0.18
                                                                    0.410*0.11
                                                       0.39X+0.76
                                                       0.36X+029
                                                       023X + 1.16
                                                       028X1-0.04
                                                       038X - 0.01
                                                       021X+0.01
                                                       025X-f0.04
                                                       0.44X - 0.00
                                                       0.32X-0.18
                                                       024X +0.02
                                                  0.53X+1.32

                                                  oUlX+0.45
                                                                                            0.53X - OJ)1
                                                                                            0.38X - OJOO
                                                  0.69X4-0.01
                                                  0.66X - 022
                                                  0.45X4-0.03
                                                  770

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
   Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 610
       4—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 61O—
                                             Continued
                            Parameter
Accuracy, as
recovery, X'
Single analyst
precision, sV
Overall preci-
  sion,^'
Ruorantheoe
Ruorene	
 Pyrene...
 0.68C+0.07
0.56C-0.52
 0.54C+0.06
0.57C - 0.70
0.72C - 0.95
0.69C - 0.12
  022X+0.06
 0.44X - 1.12
  0.29X +0.02
 0.39X - 0.18
  0.32X+0.03
 0.63X - 0.65
  0.42X+0.01
  6.41 Xf 0.74
 0.47X - 025
 0.42X - 0.00
  X'-Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C. in „ _
  •/-Expected single analyst standard deviatkxi of measurements at an average concentration found of X. in ug/l_
  S'-Expected Meriaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in ug/L.
  OTrue value for the concentration, in jig/L-
  X-Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in jig/U
                                                 771

-------
n. too, /%pp. A, mem. oiu
 COLUMN: HC-ODS S1L-X
 MOBILE PHASE: 40% TO 100X ACETONITRILE IN WATER
 DETECTOR: ULTRAVIOLET AT 2S4fw
CTK en. i u-
botnon)
                         12
                                     20
                                            24
                                                        32
                             RETENTION TIME. MIN.

      Figure  1.   Liquid chromatogram of polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons.
                                     772

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
  COLUMN: HC-ODS SIL-X
  MOBILE PHASE: 40XTO 100X ACETONITRILE
             IN WATER
  DETECTOR: FLUORESCENCE
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 610
                        12
                               16
                                       20
                                              24
                                                     28
                                                             32
                                                                    36-
                             RETENTION TIME. MIN.
  Figure 2.   Liquid chromatogram of polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons.
                                      773

-------
   COLUMN: 3X OV-17ON CHHOHOSOR8 W-Aff-DCMS
   PROGRAM: 100»C FOB 4 MINI 8°C/MIN TO 280°C
   DETECTOR: FLAME IONIZATION
                     S
                     8
      5


      X
 V.K.
                                      ii
                                      O Zl
                                      •3-
                                      c 7
                                      5S
                                      Sg
                                      Z o
                                   Ul
                                   Z
I
e
S
                      16     20    24    28
                      RETENTION TIME. MIN.
                                             32
                                                   36
     40
Figure 3.  Gas chromatogram of polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons.
                                774

-------
Environmental Protection A^oncy
             Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 611
  -.     METHOD 611—HALOETHERS

          1. Scope and Application ,

  1.1 This method covers the determination
of certain haloethers. The following param-
eters can be determined by this method:
PraiMtBT
BI«<2-chloroemyO after 	
Bto(2-cMoroeftoxy) mahane __.
Dll(g f hlnroiiopmopyO flftar __*.


SlUHbl
No.
34273
34278
34283
34638
34641
CAS No.
111 44 4
111-91-1
108-60-1
101-65-3
7005-72-3
  1.2  This is a gas chromatographic  (GC)
method applicable to the determination of
the compounds listed above in municipal and
Industrial discharges as provided under 40
CFR 136.1. When this method is used to ana-
lyze nnfawitnoy samples for any or all of the
compounds above, compound identifications
should be supported by at  least one addi-
tional qualitative technique.  This method
describes analytical conditions for a second
gas chromatographic column that can  be
used  to confirm measurements made  with
the primary column. Method 625 provides gas
chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GO/MS)
conditions appropriate  for .the qualitative
and quantitative confirmation of results for
all of the parameters listed above, using the
extract produced by this method.
  1.3  The method detection limit (MDL, de-
fined in Section 14.1)' for each parameter is
listed in  Table 1. The MDL  for a specific
wastewater may differ from  those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of Interferences in
the sample matrix.
  1.4  The sample extraction and concentra-
tion steps, in this method are essentially the
same as in Methods 606, 606,  609, and 612.
Thus, a single  sample may  be extracted to
measure  the  parameters included in the
scope of each of these methods. When clean-
up is required, the concentration levels must
be high enough to permit selecting aliquots,
as necessary,  to apply appropriate cleanup
procedures. The analyst is allowed the lati-
tude,   .under    Section   12,    to   select
chromatographic conditions appropriate for
the simultaneous measurement of combina-
tions of these parameters.
   1.5  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a major modification subject to
 application and approval of  alternate test
 procedur.es under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
   1.6  This method is restricted to use by or
 under the  supervision  of  analysts experi-
 enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
 in the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
 Each analyst must demonstrate the  ability
 to generate acceptable results with this
 method using the procedure described in Sec-
 tion 8.2.
           2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A  measured volume of sample, ap-
proximately 1-L, is extracted with methyl-
ene chloride using a separatory funnel. The
methylene chloride extract is dried and ex-
changed to hexane during concentration to a
volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is sepa-
rated by gas- chromatography and the param-
eters are then measured with a  halide spe- '
cific detector.2
  2.2  The method provides a Florisil column
cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination
of interferences that may be encountered.

              3. Interferences

  3.1  Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
tha't  lead to discrete artifacts  and/or ele-
vated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of
these  materials must  be routinely  dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the  conditions of  the analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks as described  in
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1 Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
cleaned.3 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use  by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed be detergent washing with hot water,
and  rinses  with  tap water and  distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry. and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
terials, such  a PCBs. may not be eliminated
by this treatment. Solvent rinses with ace-
tone and pesticide quality hexane may  be
substituted for the muffle furnace heating.
Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually
eliminates  PCB   interference.   Volumetric
ware should  not be heated in a muffle fur-
nace. After  drying  and cooling, glassware
should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
ronment  to  prevent any  accumulation of
dust or other contaminants.  Store inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to minimize interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
   3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from  the
sample.  The extent of  matrix interferences
 will vary considerably from source  to source,
 depending upon the nature and diversity of
 the industrial complex or municipality being
 sampled. The cleanup procedure in Section
 11 can be used to overcome many of these
 interferences,  but unique samples may  re-
. quire  additional  cleanup approaches   to
 achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
   3.3 Dichlorobenzenes  are   known   to
 cbelute  with haloethers  under  some  gas
 chromatographic  conditions. If these mate-
 rials are present together in a sample, It
 may be necessary  to analyze  the  extract
                                         775

-------
 with two different column packings to com-
 pletely resolve all of the compounds.

                   4. Safety

   4.1  The toxlclty or  carcinogrenlcity  of
. each reagent used in  this method has not
'been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
 cal compound should be treated as a poten-
 tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
 posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory is  responsible for
 maintaining  a  current awareness  file  of
 OSHA  regulations regarding the safe han-
 dling of the chemicals specified in this meth-
 od. A reference file of material data handling
 sheets  should also be made available to all
 personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional references  to  laboratory  safety
 are available and have  been identified «•• for
 the information of the analyst.

          5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1 Sampling  equipment, for  discrete or
composite sampling.
  54.1  Grab  sample  bottle—1-L  or  1-qt,
amber  glass,  fitted with a screw cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon If the sample Is not corrosive. If amber
bottles are not  available,  protect  samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed, rinsed with acetone  or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to minimize
contamination.
  6.1.2  Automatic sampler (optional)—The
sampler must Incorporate glass sample con-
tainers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mL  of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses
a  peristaltic  pump, a  minimum length of
compressible  silicons rubber tubing may be
used. Before use, however, the compressible
tubing  should be  thoroughly rinsed with
methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimize the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
tional composites.
  5.2  Glassware  (All specifications are sug-
gested.  Catalog numbers are Included for il-
lustration only.):
  5.2.1   Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon •
stopcock.
  5.2.2  Drying/  column—Chromatographic
column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm
ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3  Chromatographic  column—400  mm
long x 19 mm ID, with  Teflon stopcock and
coarse frit filter  disc at bottom (Kontes K-
420540-0224 or equivalent).
  5.2.4   Concentrator tube,   Kuderna-Dan-
IsbA-lO-mL, graduated (Kontes K-670050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at tne volumes employed in the test. Ground
 glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
 of extracts.
   5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderaa-Danish—
 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
 Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
   5.2.6 Snyder column,  Kuderna-Danish—
 Three-ball macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
 equivalent).                          •
   5;2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with
 Teflon-lined screw cap.
   5.3  Boiling  chips—Approximately  10/40
 mesh. Heat to 400 "C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
 tract with methylene chloride.
   5.4  Water bath—Heated, with concentric
 ring cover, capable of .temperature  control
 (±2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.
   5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
 rately weighing 0.0001 g.
   5.6  Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
 system complete with temperature program-
 mable  gas chromatograph  suitable  for on-
 column injection and all required accessories
 including  syringes,   analytical columns,
 gases, detector, and strip-chart  recorder. A
 data system is recommended for measuring
 peak areas.
   5.6.1  Column 1—1.8 m long x 2 mm ID
 glass, packed with 3% SP-1000  on Supelco-
 port (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This col-
 umn was used to develop the method per-
 formance statements in Section 14.  Guide-
 lines  for  the  use  of  alternate  column
 packings are provided in Section 12.1.
  5.6.2  Column ,2—1.8 m long x 2 mm ID
 glass, packed  with  2,6-dlphenylene  oxide
 polymer (60/80 mesh), Tenax, or equivalent.
  5.6.3  Detector—Halide  Specific detector:
 electrolytic  conductivity  or  mlcrocoulo-
 metric. These detectors have proven effec-
 tive in the analysis of wastewaters for the
 parameters listed In the scope (Section 1.1).
 The  Hall conductivity detector was used to
 develop the method performance statements
 in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alter-
 nate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
 Although less selective, an electron capture
 detector is an acceptable alternative.

               6. Reagents

  6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
 fined as a  water in which an interferent Is
 not  observed at the MDL of the  parameters
 of interest.
  6.2 Sodium thipsulfate—
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pf.
.  6.6  Ethyl ether—Nanograde. redistilled In
glass If necessary.
  6.6.1  Ethyl ether must be shown to be free
of peroxides before it is used as indicated by
EM Laboratories Quant  test strips. (Avail-
able from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No.
P1126-8, and other suppliers.)
  6.6.2  Procedures   recommended  for  re-
moval of peroxides are provided with the test
stripe. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol
preservative must be added to each liter of
ether.
  6.7  Stock standard solutions (1.00 jig/nL)—
Stock  standard solutions can be prepared
from pure  standard  materials or purchased
as certified solutions.
  6.7.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material. Dissolve the material in acetone
and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
rity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the
weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
can be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source.
  6.7.2 Transfer  the stock  standard  solu-
tions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
standard  solutions should be checked fre-
quently for signs of degradation or evapo-
ration, especially just  prior to preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.7.3  Stock standard solutions must be re-
placed after six months, or  sooner if com-
parison with  check standards  indicates a
problem.
  6.8 Quality .control  check  sample con>-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration
  7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operat-
ing conditions equivalent to those given in
Table  1. The gas chromatographic system
can be calibrated using the. external standard
technique (Section 7.2) or the internal stand-
ard technique (Section 7.3).
   7.2 External standard calibration proce-
dure:                             -     .
   7.2.1  Prepare calibration  standards at a
minimum  of three concentration levels for
each parameter  of  interest  by adding vol-
umes  of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
hexane. One of the external standards should
be at a concentration near, but above, the
 MDL ,Table 1) and tlie ottisr concentrations
 should correspond to the expected range of
 concentrations  found in  real  samples or
 should define the working range of the detec-
 tor.
   7.2.2  Using injections of 2  to 5 nL, analyze
 each calibration standard according to Sec-
 tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mats injected. The re-
sults  can be used to prepare  a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if
the ratio of response to amount  injected
(calibration factor) is a constant over the
working range (<10% relative standard devi-
ation. RSD), linearity through the origin can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3  Internal  standard  calibration proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select one or more internal standards that
are similar in analytical behavior  to the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the internal standard is not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations,  no internal  standard can
be suggested that is applicable to all sam-
ples.
  7.3.1  Prepare  calibration  standards  at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each  parameter of interest by adding  vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to vol-
ume  with hexane. One of the standards
should be at a concentration near, but above.
the  MDL and  the  other  concentrations
should correspond to the expected range of
concentrations found in real samples or
should define the working range of the detec-
tor.
  7.3.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 ML, analyze
each  calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses   against  concentration  for  each
compound and internal standard. Calculate
response  factors (RF) for  each compound
using Equation 1.
              RP=
                     (A.XC..)
                               Equation 1
where:
  A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Afc=Response for the internal standard.
  d.=Concentration of the internal standard
  C,=Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured (pg/L).
 If the RF value over the working range is a
 constant (<  10% RSD), the RF  can be as-
 sumed to be invariant and the average RF
 can be used for calculations.  Alternatively.
 the results can be used to plot a calibration
 curve of response ratios, AJA«, vs. RF.
  7.4  The working calibration curve,  cali-
 bration factor, or RF must  be  verified on
 each working day by the measurement of one
 or more calibration  standards. If the re-
                                         777

-------
 sponse for any parameter varies from the
 predicted response by more than ±15%. a new
 calibration curve must be prepared for that
 compound.
   7.5  The cleanup procedure in  Section  11
 utilizes Florlsll  column chromatography.
 Florisil from  different  batches or sources
 may vary  in adaorptive capacity. To stand-
 ardize the amount of Florisil which is used.
 the use of lauric acid value7 is  suggested.
 The referenced procedure determines the ad-
 sorption from  hexane solution of lauric acid
 (mg) per g of Florisil. The amount of Florisil
 to be used for each column is calculated by
 dividing1110 by this ratio and multiplying by
 20 g.
   7.6 Before using any cleanup  procedure,
 the analyst must process a series  of calibra-
 tion standards through the procedure to vali-
 date elution  patterns  and the absence of
 interferences from the reagents.

             8. Quality Control

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
 is required to operate a formal quality con-
 trol program. The minimum requirements of
 this program consist of an initial demonstra-
 tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
 analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
 document data quality. The laboratory must
 maintain records to document the  quality 'of
 data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
 checks are compared with established per-
 formance criteria to determine if the results
 of analyses meet the performance character-
 istics of the method. When results of sample
 spikes indicate atypical method  perform-
 ance, a'quality control check standard must
 be  analyzed to confirm that the measure-
 ments were performed in an in-control mode
 of operation.
  8.1.1 The analyst  must make an initial.
 one-time, demonstration of  the ability  to
 generate acceptable accuracy and precision
 with this method. This ability is established
 as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are
occurring in chromatography,  the  analyst is
permitted certain  options (detailed in Sec-
 tions 10.4,11.1, and 12.1) to improve the sepa-
rations or  lower the  cost of measurements.
Each time  such a modification is made  to
 the method, the analyst is required to repeat
 the procedure in Section 8.2.
  8.1.3 Before processing any samples; the
analyst must analyze a reagent .water blank
to demonstrate that interferences from the
analytical  system and glassware are under
control. Each  time a set of samples is  ex-
 tracted or  reagents are  changed,  a reagent
water  blank must be processed as a safe-
 guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basier spike and analyze a minimum of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.3.
   8.1.5  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
 basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
 quality control check standards tnat the op-
 eration of the measurement system is in con-
 trol. This procedure  is described in Section
 8.4.  The  frequency of the  check -standard
 analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
 analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
 eries from  samples  (Section 8.3)  meet all
 specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6  The laboratory must maintain per-
 formance records to document the quality of
 data that is generated. This procedure is de-
 scribed in Section 8.5.
  8.2 To  establish the  ability  to generate
 acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
 lyst must perform the following  operations.
  8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample
 concentrate is required containing each pa-
 rameter of interest at a concentration of 100
 jtg/mL in acetone. The QC check sample con-
 centrate must be obtained from  the U.S. En-
 vironmental  Protection  Agency,  Environ-
 mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
 in Cincinnati,  Ohio, if available. If not avail-
 able from that source, the QC check sample
 concentrate must be  obtained from another
 external source. If not available from either
 source above,  the  QC check  sample  con-
 centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
 using stock  standards  prepared Independ-
 ently from those used for calibration.
  8.2.2  Using a pipet, prepare QC check sam-
ples  at a concentration of 100 |ig/L by adding
1.00 mL of QC check  sample concentrate to
each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
  8.2.3  Analyze the  well-mixed QC  check
samples according to the method beginning
in Section 10.
  8.2.4  Calculate the average recovery (X) in
|ig/L, and  the  standard deviation of the re-
covery (s) in jig/L, for each parameter using
the four results.
  8.2.5  For each parameter compare s and X
with the corresponding acceptance criteria
for  precision  and  accuracy, respectively,
found in Table 2. If s and X for all param-
eters of interest  meet the acceptance cri-
teria, the  system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any individual X falls .outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for  that parameter.  Locate and
correct the source of the problem and repeat
the test for all parameters of interest begin-
ning with Section 8.2.2.
  8.3 The laboratory must,  on  an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For  laboratories analyzing  one to
ten samples  per month, at least one  spiked
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1. The concentration  of the  spike in
the sample should be  determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If.  as in  compliance  monitoring,
the concentration of a specific parameter in
                                         778

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 611
the. sample is 1)61119 checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2. whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific
parameter  in  the  sample  is not  being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at 100 |ig/L or 1
to 5,times higher than the background con-
centration   determined  in  Section   8.3.2,
whichever concentration would be larger.
  8.3.1.3 If it is  impractical to determine
background levels before spiking (e.g., maxi-
mum holding times will be  exceeded), the
spike concentration  should be  (1)  the regu-
latory concentration limit, if any; or. if none
(2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
the  expected background  concentration or
100 Mg/L.
  8.3,2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
mine, the  background concentration  (B) of
each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
appropriate for the  background concentra-
tions in the sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0 mL. of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the
concentration after spiking (A) of each  pa-
rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true
value of the spike.
  8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery  (P) for
each parameter with the corresponding  QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
acceptance  criteria  were calculated  to  in-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent that the analyst's spike to back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.* If spiking was
performed at a concentration lower than 100
|ig/L, the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 2. or optional QC
acceptance criteria  calculated for the spe-
cific spike  concentration. To  calculate  op-
tional acceptance criteria for the recovery of
a  parameter:  (1) Calculate  accuracy  (X')
using the equation in Table .3, substituting
the spike  concentration (T) for C; (2) cal-
culate overall  precision (SO  using the equa-
tion in Table 3, substituting X' for X; (3)  cal-
culate the  range for recovery at the spike
 concentration as (100 XVT)±2.44(100 SVT)V..«
   8.3.4  If any  individual P falls outside the
 designated range for recovery, that  param-
 eter has  failed  the  acceptance criteria. A
 check standard  containing  each  parameter
 that failed the criteria must be analyzed as
 described in Section 8.4.
   8.4  If any parameter fails the acceptance
.criteria for recovery in Section 8.3. a QC
 check standard  containing .each  parameter
 that failed must  be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTK: The frequency for the required anal-
ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
the number  of  parameters  being simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the labora-
tory.
  8.4.1  Prepare  the  QC check standard by
adding 1.0 m/L  of QC  check sample  con-
centrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3J!) to 1 L of rea-
gent water. The QC check  standard needs
only to contain the parameters  that failed
criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2  Analyze  the  QC  check standard  to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
each parameter. Calculate each  percent re-
covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true
value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3  Compare  the percent recovery (P.)
for each parameter  with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side  the  designated range,  the  laboratory
performance for that parameter is judged to
be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified  and corrected. The
analytical result for that parameter in the
unspiked  sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
oratory,   method accuracy  for  wastewater
samples must be asss^ssd and records  must
be maintained.  After  the analysis  of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3,
calculate  the average  percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (8p). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from P-2Bp to
P+2Sp.  If P=90% and s,=10%, for example, the
accuracy  interval is expressed  as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
rameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. Field  duplicates may  be ana-
lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements.  When doubt  exists
over  the  identification of a peak on  the
chromatogram,   confirmatory   techniques
such as gas chromatography with a dissimi-
lar  column,  specific element detector,  or
mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever
possible,   the  laboratory  should  analyze
standard  reference materials and participate
in relevant performance evaluation studies.

     9. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
                 Handling

   9.1  Grab  samples must  be  collected in
 glass  containers.   Conventional' sampling
 practices9 should be followed, except that the
                                          779

-------
  Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 611

  bottle must not be prerinsed with sample.be-
  fore collection. Composite samples should be
  collected In refrigerated glass containers In
  accordance with the requirements of the pro-
  gram. Automatic sampling equipment must
  bd as free as possible of Tygon tubing and
  other potential sources of contamination.
   9.2  All samples must be iced or refrig-
 erated at 4*C from the time of collection
 until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and,
 if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of
 sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and
 mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may
 be used for measurement of residual  chlo-
 rine." Field test kits are  available for this
 purpose.
   9.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
 days of collection and completely analyzed
 within 40 days of extraction.3

            10. Sample Extraction

   10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
 of the sample bottle for later determination
 of sample volume. Pour the  entire sample
 into a 2-L separatory funnel.
   10.2 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the
 sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse
 the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the
 separatory funnel and extract the sample by
 shaking the  funnel for 2 min with periodic
 venting: to release excess pressure. Allow the
 organic layer to  separate from the water
 phase for a tninirnym of 10 min. If the emul-
 sion interface between layers is more  than
 one-third the volume  of the solvent layer.
 the analyst must employ mechanical tech-
 niques to complete the phase separation. The
 optimum technique depends upon the sam-
 ple, but may Include  stirring, filtration of
 the emulsion through glass wool, centrlfuga-
 tlon,  or other physical methods. Collect the
 methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Er-
 lenmeyer flask.
  10.3  Add a second 604nL volume of meth-
 ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
 peat the extraction procedure a second time.
 combining' the extracts In the  Erlenmeyer
 flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
 manner.
  10.4  Assemble  a  Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
 concentrator  by attaching a  10-mL  con-
 centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
 Other concentration devices or techniques
 may be used  in place of the K-D concentra-
 tor If the requirements of Section 8.2 are
met.
  10.5  Pour the combined extract through a
solvent-rinsed  drying  column  containing
about  10 cm  of anhydrous sodium sulfate,
and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
 tor. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column
with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
 complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
            40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

 to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
 water bath (60 to ,65 "C) so  that the  con-
 centrator tube is partially immersed in the
 hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
 face of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.
 Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
 and the water temperature as  required  to
 complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min.
 At the proper rate of distillation the balls of
 the column will  actively' chatter but the
 chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
 vent. When the  apparent volume of liquid
 reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and
 allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
  NOTE:  Some  of the haloethers are very
 volatile and significant losses will occur  in
 concentration steps if care is  not exercised.
 It  is  Important  to  maintain  a constant
 gentle evaporation rate and not to allow the
 liquid volume to-fall below 1 to 2 mL before
 removing the K-D apparatus  from the hot
 water bath.
  10.7  Momentarily remove the  Snyder col-
 umn, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling
 chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise
 the temperature of the water bath to 85 to 90
 •C. Concentrate the extract as in Section
 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column.
 The elapsed time of concentration should be
 5 to 10 min.
  10.8  Remove the Snyder column and rinse
 the flask and its lower joint into the con-
 centrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 6-
 mL  syringe is recommended for  this oper-
 ation.  Stopper  the concentrator tube and
 store refrigerated if further processing will
 not be performed Immediately. If the extract
 will be stored longer than two days, it should
 be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap
 vial. If  the sample  extract requires no
 further    cleanup,   proceed   with    gas
 chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the
 sample requires further cleanup, proceed to
 Section 11.
  10.9 Determine  the original sample vol-
 ume by refilling  the sample bottle to  the
mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
 volume to the nearest 5 mL.

        11. Cleanup and Separation

  11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
 essary for a relatively clean sample matrix.
If particular circumstances demand the  use -
 of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
 the procedure below or any other appropriate
 procedure. However, the  analyst first must
 demonstrate that the requirements of Sec-
 tion 8.2 can be met using the method as re-
vised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
  11.2 Florlsil    column   cleanup    for
haloethers:
  11.2.1  Adjust  the sample extract volume
to 10 mL.  .
  11.2.2' Place a  weight  of  Florisil  (nomi-
nally 20 g) predetermined  by  calibration
                                         780

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency
 •(Section 7.5),  into a chromatographic col-
 umn. Tap the column to settle the Floriail
 and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sul-
 fate to the top.
   11.2.3 Preelnte the column with 50 to 60
•' mL of petroleum ether. Discard the eluate
 and Just prior to exposure of the sodium sol-
 late  layer to the air, quantitatively transfer
 the sample extract onto the column by de-
 cantation and  subsequent  petroleum ether
 .washings. Discard'the eluate. Just prior to
 exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the
 air, begin elnting the column with 300 mL of
 ethyl ether/petroleum ether (6+94) (VAT). Ad-
 just  the elutlon rate  to approximately 5 mlV
 min  and collect the  eluate in a 500-mL K-D
 flask equipped with a  10-mL concentrator
 tube. This fraction should contain all of the
 haloethers.                             .
   11.2,4 Concentrate the fraction as in Sec-
 tion 10.6, except use hexane to  prewet the
 column. When the apparatus is cool, remove
 the Snyder column and rinse the flask and
 its lower joint into the concentrator tube
 with .hexane.  Adjust  the  volume  of  the
 cleaned up extract to 10 mL with hexane and
 analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).

           12. Gas Chromatography

   12.1  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
 operating  conditions  for  the  gas  chro-
 matograph. Included in this table are reten-
 tion times and MDL that can be achieved
 under these conditions. Examples of the sep-
 arations achieved by Columns 1 and 2 are
 shown in Figures 1 and 2, respectively. Other
 packed or capillary  (open-tubular) columns,
 chromatographic conditions,  or  detectors
 may be used if the requirements of Section
 8.2 are met.
   12.2  Calibrate  the system  daily  as de-
 scribed in Section 7.
   12.3  If the internal standard calibration
 procedure is being used, the internal stand-
 ard must be added to the sample extract and
 mixed thoroughly immediately before injec-
 tion into the gas chromatrograph.
   12.4  Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
 or standard  into the gas chromatograph
 using the solvent-flush technique." Smaller
 (1.0  |iL) volumes may  be  injected if  auto-
 matic devices are employed. Record the vol-
 ume injected to the nearest 0.05 pL, the total
 extract volume, and the resulting peak size
 in area or peak height units.
    12.5  Identify the parameters in the sample
 by  comparing the  retention, times of the
 peaks  in  the sample  chromatograni with
  those   of   the   peaks  in    standard
  chromatograms. The width of the retention
  time  window  used  to make identifications
  should be based upon measurements of ac-
  tual retention time variations of standards
  over the course of  a day. Three  times the
  standard deviation of a retention time for a
  compound can be used to calculate a sug-
  gested window size; however, the experience
 of-the analyst should weight heavily in the
 interpretation of chromatograms.
   12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the
 working range of the system, dilute the ex-
 tract and reanalyze.
   12.7 If the measurement of the peak re-
 sponse is prevented by the presence of inter-
 ferences', farther cleanup is required.

              13. Calculations

   13.1 Determine the concentration of indi-
 vidual compounds in the sample.
   13.1.1  If the external standard calibration
 procedure  is used,  calculate the amount of
 material injected. from  the peak  response
 using the  calibration curve or calibration
 factor determined in Section 7.2J2. The con-
. centration in the sample can be calculated
 from Equation 2. •
      Concentration (|ig/  _
             L)         -
                               Equation 2
 where:
   A=Amount of material injected (ng).
   V|-Volume of extract injected (|iL).
   V^Volume of total extract (|iL).
   V.=Volume of water extracted (mL).
   13.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
 procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
 tion in the sample using the response factor
 (KF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
 tion 3.
      Concentration (jig/
             L)
                          (Ak)(RF)(V0)
                                Equation 3
 where:
   A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
  .   ured."
   Ai.=Re8ponse for the internal standard.
   L=Amount of internal standard  added to
     each extract (|ig).
   V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
   13.2  Report results in |ig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data.  All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

            14. Method Performance

   14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as  the minimum concentration- of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 99% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1  The  MDL  concentrations  listed in
 Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.12
  Similar  results were  achieved  using rep-
  resentative wastewaters. The MDL actually
  achieved in  a given analysis will vary  de-
  pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
  trix effects.
                                          7B1

-------
ri.
              . f\, mum. 01
  14.2 Tbls method has been tested for lin-
 earity of spike recovery from reagent water
 and has been demonstrated to be, applicable
 over the concentration range from 4 x MDL
' * 14.3 This method was tested by 20 labora-
tories using reagent water, drinking water,
surface    water,   and   three   industrial
wastewaters  spiked at six concentrations
over the range 1.0 to 626 ji/L.12 Single opera-
tor precision, overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.

                REFERENCES
4
  1. 40 CFR part 196, appendix B.
  2. "Determination of Haloethers in Indus-
trial and  Municipal Wastewaters," EPA 6007
4-81-«3,  National Technical  Information
Service, PB81-232290,  Springfield,  Virginia
22161, July 1961.
  3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards,  Part
31, D3694-78.  "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constitutents," American
 Society for Testing and Materials, Philadel-
phia.
  4.  "Carcinogens— Working Carcinogens,  "
Department of Health, Education, and  Wel-
fare, Public Health Services, Center for Dis-
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa-
tional Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-
906, August 1977.
  5.  "OSHA  Safety and Health • Standards,
 General Industry." (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
 pational Safety and Health Administration,
 OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  6. "Safely in Academic Chemistry Labora-
 tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
 tion, Committee  on  Chemical  Safety, 3rd
 Edition, 1979.
  7. Mills., P.A. "Variation of Florisil Activ-
 ity: Simple Method for Measuring Absorbent
 Capacity  and  Its  Use  in   Standardizing
 Plorisil Columns," Journal of the Association
 of Official Analytical Chemists, 51, 29 (1968).
                                               8. Provost. L.P.. and Elder. R.S. "Interpre-
                                              tation of Percent Recovery Data." American
                                              Laboratory, 15, 58-63  (1983). (The value 2.44
                                              used In  the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
                                              times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
                                               9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
                                              31, D3370-76.  "Standard Practices  for  Sam-
                                              pling Water," American Society for  Testing
                                              and Materials, Philadelphia.
                                               10. "Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-PAS)
                                              and  330.5  (Spectrophotometric.  DPD)  for
                                              Chlorine.   Total  Residual."   Methods  for
                                              Chemical  Analysis  of Water  and  Wastes,
                                              EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S.  Environmental Pro-
                                              tection  Agency,  Environmental Monitoring
                                              and  Support  Laboratory, Cincinnati,  Ohio
                                              45268, March 1979.
                                               11. Burke, J.A. "Gas Chromatography for
                                              Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
                                              Aspects." Journal of the Association of Official
                                              Analytical Chemists, 48,1037 (1965).
                                               12. "EPA Method  Study 21, Method 611,
                                              Haloethers,"   EPA  600/4-84-052,  National
                                              Technical Information Service, PB84-205939.
                                              Springfield. Virginia 22161, June 1964.

                                              TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND
                                                      METHODS DETECTION LIMITS
Parameters
Bis(2-chkxDi90prepy() ether 	
Bis(2-critoroethy1) ether 	 .'.
Ba(2-chloroethoxy) methane —
4-Chlofophenvl ether 	 . 	
4-8ramephenyt pheny) ether .....
Retention time
(min)
Co^
umn 1
8.4
9.3
13.1
19.4
21.2
Col-
umn2
9J
9.1
10.0
15.0
1&2
Moftod
detec-
tion
limit (jj/
0.8
03
0.5
3.9
24
                                                ACokMitn 1 conditions: Supelooport (100/120 mesh coated
                                              with 3% SP-1000 packed in a 1.8 m long x 2 mm ID otsss
                                              column with helium carrier gas at 40 mUmin. flow rate. Col-
                                              umn temperature held at 60 "C for 2 min. after injection then
                                              programmed at 8 • C/min. to230-Candheldfor4min.
                                              min.
                                                   these conditions the retention time for Akfctn is 22.8
                                                ACotumn 2 conditions: Tenax-GC (60/80 mesh) packed in
                                              a 1.8 m long x 2mm ID glass column with helium carrier gas
                                              at 40 mUmin. flow rate. Column temperature held at 150 *C
                                              for 4 min. after injection then programmed at 16 "C/m«i. to
                                              310 *C. Under these conditions the retention time for AWrin is
                                              18.4 min.
                       TABLE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 611
PjM-anieter
Olx (2-chkxoothvOothdr 	 ......««

Bb (2
-------
Environmental Protection Agency                         Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 611

 TABLE a—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 611
                                                              Accuracy, as
                                                              recovery, X'
                                                                         Single analyst
                                                                         precision.*/
                                                                                       Overall*
BtaC-chtoroethyO ether	
Bb(2-chloroethoxy) methane.
Bto(2-«hloroiaopropyt) ether _
4-eremophenyl phenyl ether.
4-Chtorophenyl phenyl ether.
                                                                0.81C+0.54
                                                                0.71C+0.13
                                                                           O^OX+0.15
                                                                            0.2SX+0.21
                                                                            0.18X+2.13
                                          of a sample containing a i
                                                                          ofC, J
  X'- Expected recovery for one or more i                                                 _
  i/ - Expected single anatyat stanUBnJ deviation of nmnOBmnoti at an average concentratisn found oTJL in |ig/l_
  S' •Expected kiteriaboratary atandaid deviation of maeturements at an average concenMon found of X, in pg/l_
C -True value for the conuetHiaUon. in pgA.
X • Average recovery found for maiMmimnli of sample
                                                 DtB
                                                     nga<
                                                             mtrBxion of C, in
                                               783

-------
 COLUMN: 3% SP-1000 ON SUPELCQPORT
 PROGRAM 60°C FOR 2 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 230°C
 DETECTOR: .HALL ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY
  in
  
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
    COLUMN: TBIAX GC
    PROGRAM: 150°C FOR 4 MIN, 16°C/MIN TO 310°C
    DETECTOR:  HALL ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY
Pt. 136, App. A, Melh. 611
                       UJ
                       U4
                   UJ
 0        4       8        12        16       20

                  RETENTION TIME. MIN.

 Figure 2. Gas chromatogram of haloethers.
             24
                            785

-------
  METHOD 612—CHLORINATED HYDROCARBONS

          1. Scope and Application
  1.1  This method covers the determination
of certain chlorinated hydrocarbons. The fol-
lowing: parameters can be determined by this
method:
Parameter
2-Chloronaprithaiom 	
1,2-DichtorotMnzartft ........_.......,.....
1,3-Otehtorobwuerve 	
1,4-Otehkxobanzenfl 	 , 	 ».
H«c»cWorobenzene „.......,....,.,..._..
H*xsGiifort>toutifJi$rH& ^— —
H*xachk>rocytiopentadfeo« .....-.—
1,2,4-Triciiloroberizerta 	
STORET,
No.
34581
34536
34566
34571
39700
34391
34386
34396
34551
CAS No.
91-68-7
95-60-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
118-74-1
87-68-3
77-47-4
67-72-1
120-82-1
  1.2  This is a gas  chromatographic (GC)
method applicable to the  determination of
the compounds listed above in municipal and
industrial  discharges as provided under 40
CPB 136.1. When this method is used to ana-
lyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the
compounds above, compound identifications
should be supported  by at least one addi-
tional qualitative technique. This  method
describes a second gaa chromatographic col-
umn  that can  be used to  confirm measure-
ments made with the primary column. Meth-
od 625  provides  gas  chromatograph/mass
spectrometer  (GC/MS)  conditions  appro-
priate for the  qualitative  and quantitative
confirmation of results for all of the param-
eters  listed  above, using  the extract pro-
duced by this method.
   1.3  The method detection limit (MDL. de-
fined in Section 14.1)« for each parameter is
listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of Interferences in
the sample matrix.
   1.4  The sample extraction and concentra-
tion steps in this method are essentially the
same  as in  Methods 606,  608. 609, and  611.
Thus, a single sample may be extracted to
measure the  parameters  included  in  the
scope of each of these methods. When clean-
up is required, the concentration levels must
be high enough to permit  selecting aliquots,
 as necessary,  to apply appropriate cleanup
 procedures.  The analyst is allowed the lati-
 tude,   under   Section   12,   to   select
 chromatographic conditions appropriate for
 the simultaneous measurement  of combina-
 tions of these parameters.
   1.5  Any modification of this  method, be-
 yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
 sidered as a major modification subject to
 application  and approval of alternate  test
 procedures under 40 CPR 136.4 and 136.5.
   1.6  This method Is resected  to use by or
 under the  supervision of analysts experi-
 enced in the use of a gas chromatograph and
 in the interpretation of gas chromatograms.
Each analyst must demonstrate the ability
to generate  acceptable results  with this
method using the procedure described in Sec-
tion 8.2.

          , 2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A  measured  volume  of sample,  ap-
proximately 1-Li, is extracted with methyl-
ene chloride using a separately funnel. The
methylene chloride extract  is dried and ex-
changed to hexane during concentration to a
volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is sepa-
rated by gas chromatography and the param-
eters  are then measured with an electron
capture detector.2
  2.2  The method provides a Plorisil column
cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination
of interferences that may be encountered.

              3. Interferences

  3.1  Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead  to  discrete artifacts and/or  ele-
vated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of
these  materials  must be  routinely dem-
onstrated to be free from interferences under
the conditions of the  analysis by running
laboratory reagent blanks  as described in
Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1 Glassware  must  be   scrupulously
cleaned.3 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing with hot water.
and  rinses with  tap  water  and distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry. and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
terials, such as PCBs, may not be eliminated
by this treatment. Solvent rinses with ace-
tone  and  pesticide quality hexane  may be
substituted for the muffle  furnace heating.
Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually
eliminates PCB  interference. Volumetric
ware should not be heated in a muffle fur-
nace.  After  drying and  cooling, glassware
should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
ronment to  prevent  any  accumulation of
 dust or  other contaminants.  Store inverted
 or capped with aluminum foil.
   3.1.2 The  use of high purity reagents and
 solvents helps to minimize interference prob-
 lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
 in all-glass systems may be required.
   3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
 contaminants that are co-extracted from the
 sample. The extent  of matrix interferences
 will vary considerably from source to source,
 depending upon the nature and diversity  of
 the industrial complex or municipality being
 sampled.  The cleanup procedure in Section
 11 can be used to overcome many of  these
 interferences, but unique  samples may re-
 quire  additional   cleanup  approaches  to
 achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
                                          786

-------
 Envfronf.tentol Protection Agency

                 4. Safetu
  4.1 The  tozicity  or carcinogenlcity of
 each reagent used in this method has not
 been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
 cal compound should be treated as a poten-
 tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
 posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory  Is responsible for
 maintaining:  a  current awareness file of
 OSHA regulations  regarding:  the safe han-
 dling- of the chemicals specified in this meth-
 od. A reference file of material data handling
 sheets should also  be made available  to all
 personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional references to laboratory safety
 are available and have been Identified*-* for
 the information of the analyst.

         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1  Sampling equipment, for  discrete or
 composite sampling.
  5.1.1 Grab  sample  bottle—IcL  or  1-qt,
 amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
 lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles  are  not available, protect samples
 from light. The bottle and  cap liner must be
 washed, rinsed with  acetone  or methylene
 chloride, and  dried before use to minimize
 contamination.
  5.1.2 Automatic  sampler (optional)—The
 sampler must Incorporate glass sample con-
 tainers for the collection of a minimum of
 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
 kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
 light during compositing. If the sampler uses
 a peristaltic pump, a  minimum length of
 compressible silicons rubber tubing may be
 used. Before use. however, the compressible
 tubing should be  thoroughly rinsed with
 methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
 distilled water to minimize the potential for
 contamination of the sample. An integrating
 flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
 tional composites.
  5.2  Glassware (All specifications are sug-
 gested. Catalog numbers are included for il-
 lustration only.):
  5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L,  with Teflon
stopcock.                 .  .
  5.2.2 Drying   column—Chromatographic
 column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm
ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
  5.2.3 Chromatographic column—300 long x
10 mm ID, with Teflon  stopcock and coarse
frit filter disc at bottom.        •
  5.2.4 Concentrator   tube.   Kuderna-Dan-
ish—10-mL. graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.5 Evaporative flask. Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
               Pt. 136. App. A, Meth. 612

   5.2.6  Sayder  column,  Kaderna-Deuileh—
 Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
 equivalent).
   5.2.7  Vials—10 to 15-mL. amber glass, with
 Teflon-lined screw cap.
   5.3  Boiling  chips—Approximately  10/40
 mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 min or Soxhlet ex-
 tract with methylene chloride.
   5.4  Water  bath—Heated, with concentric
 ring cover, capable of temperature control (±
 2 *C).  The bath should be used in a hood.
   5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
 rately weighing 0.0001 g.
   5.6  Gas  chromatograph—An  analytical
 system  complete with gas chromatograph
 suitable for cm-column injection and all re-
 quired accessories including syringes, ana-
 lytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-
 chart  recorder.  A  data  system  is  rec-
' ommended for measuring peak areas.
   5.6.1 Column  1—1.8  m  long x 2  mm ID
 glass,   packed   with  . 1%   SP-1000  on
 Supelcoport  (100/120 mesh) or  equivalent.
 Guidelines for the use of alternate column
 packings are provide in Section 12.1.
   5.6.2 Column 2—1.8  m  long x 2  mm ID
 glass, packed with 1.5% OV-1^.4% OV-225 on
 Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This
 column  was used to develop the method per-
 formance statements in Section 14.
   5.6.3 Detector—  Electron capture detec- •
 tor. This detector has proven effective in the
 analysis of wastewaters for the parameters
 listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used
 to develop the method performance state-
 ments in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of
 alternate detectors  are provided in Section
 12.1.

                 6. Reagents

   6.1  Reagent water— Reagent water is de-
 fined  as a water in which an interferent is
 not observed  at the MDL  of the parameters
 of interest.
   6.2  Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methanol.
 methylene chloride, petroleum ether (boiling
 range 30 to 60 °C)—Pesticide quality or equiv-
 alent.
   6.3  Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, an-
 hydrous. Purify heating at 400 *C for 4 h in a
 shallow tray.
   6.4  Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Pur-
 chase  activated at 1250 °F and store In the
 dark in glass containers with ground glass
 stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use.
 activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 • C in
 a foil-covered glass container and allow to
 cool.
   6.5  Stock standard solution (1.00 tig/pL)—
 Stock standard solutions can  be  prepared
 from pure standard materials or purchased
 as certified solutions.
   6.5.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
 accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
 material. Dissolve the material in isooctane
 and dilute to volume in a 120-mL volumetric
 flask. Larger volumes can be used at the con-
                                         787

-------
venlence of the analyst. When compound pu-.
rity Is  assayed to be 96%  or  greater, the
•weight can be used without correction to cal-
culate the concentration of the stock stand-
ard. Commercially prepared stock standards
can be used at any concentration If they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an inde-
pendent source.
  6.6.2  Transfer  the  stock  standard  solu-
tions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4 *C and protect from light. Stock
standard solutions should be checked fre-
quently for signs of  degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially Just prior to preparing
calibration standards from them.
  6.6.3  Stock standard solutions must be re-
placed  after six  months,  or  sooner  If
compariBion  with check standards indicates
a problem.
  6.6  Quality control check sample  con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Establish gas chromatographic operat-
ing: conditions equivalent to those  given in
Table 1. The gas chromatographic system
can be calibrated using the external  standard
technique-(Section 7.2) or the internal stand-
ard technique (Section 7.3).
  7.2  External standard calibration proce-
dure:
  7.2.1  Prepare  calibration  standards  at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each  parameter  of interest  by  adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask and diluting to volume with
Isooctane.  One  of the  external standards
should be at a concentration near, but above,
the MDL. (Table 1) and the other concentra-
tions should correspond to the  expected
range of concentrations  found  in real sam-
ples or should define the working  range of
the detector.
  7.2,2  Using Injections of 2 to 5 (iL, analyze
each calibration  standard according to Sec-
tion 12  and tabulate peak height or area re-
sponses against the mass injected. The re-
sults can be used to prepare a calibration
curve for each compound. Alternatively, if
the ratio  of response to  amount injected
(calibration  factor) is a constant  over the
working range (<10%  relative standard devi-
ation. BSD), linearity through the origin can
be assumed and the average ratio or calibra-
tion factor can be used in place of a calibra-
tion curve.
  7.3  Internal  standard calibration proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select one or more internal standards that
are similar  in  analytical behavior to  the
compounds of interest. The analyst  must fur-
ther  demonstrate that the  measurement of
the Internal standard is  not  affected  by
method or matrix interferences. Because of
these limitations, no Internal  standard can
be  suggested that is applicable  to all sam-
ples.
  7.3.1  Prepare  calibration  standards  at a
minimum of three  concentration levels  for
each parameter of interest by adding vol-
umes of one or more stock standards to a
volumetric flask. To each calibration stand-
ard, add a known constant amount of one or
more internal standards, and dilute to vol-
ume with isooctane. One of the standards
should be at a concentration near, but above.
the  MDL  and  the  other concentrations
should correspond to the  expected range of
concentrations   found  in  real  samples  or
should define the working range of the detec-
tor.
  7.3.2  Using injections of 2 to 5 jiL, analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 12 and tabulate peak, height or area re-
sponses  against  concentration  for  each
compound and  internal standard. Calculate
response factors (RF)  for  each  compound
using Equation 1.
              RF=
                     (Ab)(C.)
                               Equation 1
where:  ,
  A.=Re8ponse for the parameter to be meas-
    ured.
  Ata=Respon8e for the internal standard.
  Ci.=Concentration of the internal standard
    (Ug/L).
  C.=Concentration of the  parameter to be
    measured (|ig/L).
If the RF value over the working range is a
constant (<10% RSD). the RF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average RF can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults can be used to plot a calibration curve
of response ratios, A/Ai., vs. RF.
  7.4  The  working calibration curve, cali-
bration factor,  or RF must be verified on
each working day by the measurement of one
or  more  calibration standards. If the  re-
sponse  for any parameter varies  from the
predicted response by more than ±15%. a new
calibration curve must be  prepared for that
compound.
  7.5  Before using any cleanup procedure,
the analyst must process a series of calibra-
tion standards through the procedure to vali-
date  elution  patterns  and the absence  of
interferences from the reagents.

             S. Quality Control

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The minimum requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established per-
                                          788

-------
 Environmental ProtocNon Agency

 fqrmance criteria to determine if the results
 of analyses meet the performance character-
 istics  of  the  method. When the results of
 sample spikes indicate atypical method per-
 formance. a quality control check standard
 must be analyzed to confirm that the meas-
 urements were  performed in an in-control
 mode of operation.
  8.1.1  The analyst must make an initial,
 one-time,  demonstration of the ability to
 generate acceptable accuracy and  precision
 with this  method. This ability is established
 as described In Section 8.2.
  8.1.2  In recognition of advances that are
 occurring in chromatography, the analyst is
 permitted certain options (detailed in  Sec-
 tions 10.4. 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the sepa-
 rations or lower the cost of measurements.
 Each time such modification is made to the
 method, the analyst is required to repeat the
 procedure in Section 8.2.
  8.1.3  Before processing any  samples,  the
 analyst must analyse a reagent water blank
 to demonstrate  that interferences  from  the
 analytical system and glassware are under
 control. Each time a set of samples is ex-
 tracted or reagents are  changed, a reagent
 water  blank must  be processed as a safe-
 guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
 basis, spike and analyse a TniTiimmn of 10%
of all samples to monitor and evaluate lab-
oratory data quality. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.3.
  8.1.5  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol. This procedure is described in Section
8.4. The frequency of the  check standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from  samples. (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6  The laboratory must Tnainr^Ti  per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
  8.2 To  establish the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the  ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate, is required containing each pa-
rameter  of interest at the  following  con-
centrations  in  acetone:   Hexachloro-sub-
stituted  parameters, 10 itg/mL;  any other
chlorinated hydrocarbon. 100 iigftnL. The QC
check sample concentrate must be obtained
from  the  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and  Sup-
port Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if avail-
able. If not available from that source, the
QC check sample concentrate  must  be ob-
tained  from another external source. If not
available  from either source above,  the QC
check sample concentrate must be prepared
by the laboratory using stock standards pre-
              Pt. 136, App. A, Math. 612

pored independently from those used for cali-
bration.
  8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check sam-
ples at the test concentrations shown in
Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sam-
ple concentrate to each of four 1-L aliqupts
of reagent water.
  8.2.3 Analyze  the well-mixed  QC  check
samples according to the method beginning
in Section 10.
  8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in
lig/L,  and the  standard deviation of the  re-
covery (s) in |ig/L. for each parameter using
the four results.
  8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
with the corresponding acceptance criteria
for  precision  and  accuracy,  respectively,
found in Table 2. If s and X for all param-
eters  of  interest meet the  acceptance cri-
teria, the system performance is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any Individual X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that parameter.
  NOTE: The large number of parameters in
Table 2 presents a substantial  probability
that one or more will fall at least one of the
acceptance criteria when all parameters are
analyzed.                          ,
  8.2.6  When one or more of the parameters
tested fall at least one of the acceptance cri-
teria, the analyst must proceed according to
Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
  8.2.6.1 Locate  and correct the source of
the problem and repeat the test for all pa-
rameters of Interest beginning with Section
8.2.2.
  8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat
the test only  for  those  parameters  that
failed  to  meet  criteria. Repeated failure,
however, will  confirm  a general problem
with the measurement system. If this occurs,
locate and correct the source of the problem
and repeat the test for all compounds of In-
terest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
  8.3  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For  laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month, at  least one spike
sample per month is required.
  8.3.1  The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1 If. as in  compliance monitoring.
the concentration of a specific parameter in
the sample is being checked against a regu-
latory concentration limit, the spike should
be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than
the background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the concentration of a specific
parameter  in  the  sample  is  not  being
checked against a limit specific to that  pa-
rameter, the spike should be at the test con-
                                         789

-------
 Generation in Section 8.2.2  or  1 to 5 times
 higher than  the  background concentration
 determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever con-
 centration would be larger.
   8.3.1.3  If it is  impractical  to determine
 background levels before spiking (e.g.. maxi-
 mum holding times will be exceeded), the
 spike concentration should  be  (1)  the regu-
 latory concentration limit, if any; or, if none
 by (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
 the  expected background concentration or
 the teit concentration in Section 8.2.2.
   8.3.2 Analyze  one  sample aliquot to deter-
 mine the background concentration (B) of
 each parameter. In necessary, prepare a new
 QC check sample  concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
 appropriate for the background concentra-
 tions in  the sample. Spike a second-sample
 aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
 concentrate and analyze it to determine the
 concentration after spiking  (A) of each pa-
 rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
 as 100 (A-B)%/T, where T is  the known true
 value of the spike.
   8.3.3 Compare the  percent recovery (P) for
 each parameter with  the corresponding QC
 acceptance criteria  found in Table 2. These
 acceptance criteria were calculated to in-
 clude an allowance for error in measurement
 of both the background and spike concentra-
 tions, assuming a spike to background ratio
 of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
 extent that  the  analyst's  spike  to  back-
 ground ratio  approaches 5:1.7 If spiking was
 performed at a concentration lower than the
 test concentration in  Section 8.2.2, the ana-
 lyst must use either the QC acceptance cri-
 teria in Table 2. or optional QC acceptance
 criteria calculated for the specific spike con-
 centration. To calculate optional acceptance
 criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1)
 Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation in
 Table 3, substituting the spike concentration
 (T) for C; (2)  calculate overall precision (S')
 using the equation in Table 3, substituting X'
 for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at
 the spike concentration as (100 XVT) ± 2.44
 (100 SVT)%.7
   8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
 designated range  for recovery,  that param-
 eter has failed the acceptance criteria. A
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed the criteria must be analyzed as
 described in Section 8.4.
   8.4. If any parameter fails the acceptance
 criteria for recovery  in Section 8.3, a QC
 check standard containing each parameter
 that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
   NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
 ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
 the  number  of parameters  being simulta-
 neously tested, the complexity of the sample
 matrix, and the performance of the  labora-
' tory.
   8.4.1 Prepare  the  QC  check  standard by
 adding 1.0 mL of  QC  check  sample  con-
 centrate (Sections 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
 gent water.  The QG check standard needs
 only to contain the parameters that failed
 criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
  8.4.2  Analyze the QC check standard to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter. Calculate each percent re-
 covery (P.) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
  8.4.3  Compare  the percent recovery (P.)
 for each parameter with the  corresponding
 QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. Only
 parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
 need to be compared with these criteria. If
 the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
 side  the  designated range, the laboratory
 performance for that parameter is judged to
 be out of control,  and the problem must be
 immediately identified and corrected.  The
 analytical result for that parameter in the
 unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
 reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
 oratory, method accuracy for wastewater
 samples must be assessed and records must
 be maintained.  After  the analysis  of  five
 spiked wastewater samples as  in Section 8.3.
 calculate  the average  percent recovery (P)
 and the standard deviation of the percent re-
 covery (8p). Express the accuracy assessment
 as a percent recovery Interval  from P-2%, to
 P+2Sp. If P=90% and Sp=10%, for example, the
 accuracy  interval  is expressed as 70-110%.
Update the accuracy assessment for each pa-
 rameter on  a regular  basis (e.g. after each
 five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6  It is recommended that the laboratory
 adopt additional quality assurance practices
 for use with  this method. The specific prac-
 tices that are most productive depend upon
 the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
 the samples. Field duplicates may be ana-
 lyzed to assess the precision of the environ-
 mental  measurements. When doubt  exists
 over the identification  of a peak on the chro-
 matogram. confirmatory techniques such as
 gas chromatography with a dissimilar col-
 umn, specific  element detector,  or mass
 spectrometer must be used. Whenever  pos-
 sible, the laboratory should analyze standard
 reference  materials  and  participate  in
 relevent performance evaluation studies.

    9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                Handling

  9.1  Grab  samples must be collected in
 glass  containers;   Conventional  sampling
 practices* should  be followed, except that
 the bottle must not be  prerinsed with sample
 before collection. Composite samples should
 be collected in refrigerated glass containers
 in accordance with the requirements of the
 program.  Automatic  sampling equipment
 must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
 and  other potential sources of contamina-
 tion.
                                          790

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, Mettl. 612
  9.2  All  samples must be iced or  refrig-
erated at 4*C from the time of collection
until extraction.
  9.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
days of collection and completely analyzed
within 40 days of extraction.2

            10. Sample Extraction

  10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
of the.  sample  bottle for later determination
of sample volume.  Pour the entire sample
into a 2-L separatory funnel.
  10.2  .Add 60 mL of methylele chloride  to
the sample  bottle,  seal, and shake 30  s  to
rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
to the separatory  funnel  and extract the
sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with
periodic venting to release excess pressure.
Allow the organic layer to separate from the
water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion  interface  between layers is more
than one-third the  volume of the solvent
layer,  the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation.
The  optimum technique depends  upon the
sample, but may include stirring, filtration
of the  emulsion through  glass wool,  cen-
trifugation,  or other physical methods. Col-
lect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
mL Erlenmeyer flask.
  10.3  Add a second 60rmL volume of meth-
ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
peat the extraction procedure a second time,
combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer
flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
manner.
  10.4  Assemble  a  Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
concentrator  by attaching a 10-mL  con-
centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
Other  concentration  devices or techniques
may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
tor if  the requirements of Section 8.2 are
met.
  10.5.  Pour the combined extract through a
solvent-rinsed  drying  column  containing
about  10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
and collect the extract in the K-D concentra-
tor. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column
with 20 to 30  mL of methylene chloride  to
complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.6  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
to the  top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
water  bath  (60 to  65  °C)  so that the  con-
centrator tube is partially immersed in the
hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
face of the  flask is bathed with hot vapor.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
and  the water temperature as  required  to
complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min.
At the proper  rate of distillation the balls of
the  column will actively chatter but the
chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
vent.  When the apparent  volume of liquid
reaches 1 to 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus
and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10
min.
  NOTE: The  dichloribenzenes have a suffi-
ciently high volatility that significant losses
may occur in concentration steps if care is
not exercised. It is Important to .maintain a
constant gentle evaporation rate-and not to
allow 'the liquid volume to fall below 1 to 2
mL before removing the K-D apparatus from
the hot water bath.
  10.7  Momentarily remove the Snyder col-
umn, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling
chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise
the tempeature of the water bath  to 85 to 90
°C.  Concentrate the extract as in Section
10.6.  except use hexane to prewet the column.
The elapsed time of concentration should be
5 to 10 min.
  10.8  Remove the Snyder column and rinse
the flask and its  lower joint into the con-
centrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-
mL syringe is recommended for  this oper-
ation.  Stopper the concentrator tube and
store refrigerated if further processing will
not be performed immediately. If the extract
will be stored longer than two days, it should
be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap
vial. If the sample extract requires no fur-
ther    cleanup,    proceed    with   gas
chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the
sample requires further cleanup, proceed to
Section 11.
  10.9  Determine  the  original  sample vol-
ume by  refilling the  sample bottle to  the
mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.

         11. Cleanup and Separation

  11.1  Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
essary  for a relatively  clean sample matrix.
If particular .circumstances demand the use
of a  cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
the procedure below or any other appropriate
procedure. However, the analyst  first must
demonstrate  that the  requirements of Sec-
tion 8.2 can be met using the method as  re-
vised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
  11.2  Florisil    column    cleanup    for
chlorinated hydrocarbons:
  11.2.1  Adjust the sample extract to 10 mL
with hexane.
  11.2.2 Place  12  g  of  Florisil  into  a
chromatographic column. Tap the column to
settle the Florisil and add 1 to 2 cm of anhy-
drous sodium sulfate to the top.
  11.2.3  Preelute the column with 100 mL of
petroleum ether.  Discard the eluate and just
prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
to the air, quantitatively transfer the sam-
ple extract onto  the column by decantation
and  subsequent petroleum  ether washings.
Discard the eluate. Just prior to exposure of
the  sodium  sulfate layer to the air, begin
eluting the column with 200 mL of petroleum
ether and collect the eluate in a 500-mL K-D
                                         791

-------
 flask equipped with  a 10-mL concentrator
 tube. This fraction should contain all of the
 chlorinated hydrocarbons.
  11.2.4 Concentrate the fraction as In Sec-
 tion 10.6, except use hezane to prewet the
.column. When the apparatus Is cool, remove
 'the Snyder column and rinse  the flask and
 its lower joint into the concentrator tube
 with   hexane.  Analyze  by  gas   chroma-
 tography (Section 12).

          22. Gas Chromatography
  12.1  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
 operating  conditions  for  the  gas chro-
 matograph. Included in this table are reten-
 tion times and MDL that can be achieved
 under these conditions. Examples of the sep-
 arations achieved by Columl 2 are shown in
 Figures 1 and 2.  Other packed or capillary
 (open-tubular)  columns,   chromatographic
 conditions, or detectors may be used if the
 requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
  1242  Calibrate  the system  daily  as de-
 scribed in Section 7.
  12.3  If  the, internal standard calibration
 procedure is  being used, the Internal stand-
 ard must be added to the sample extract and
 mixed throughly immediately before injec-
 tion into the  gas chromatograph.
  12.4  Inject 2 to 5 |iL of the sample extract
 or  standard  into the gas chromatograph
 using the solvent-flush techlique.9  Smaller
 (1.0 uL) volumes may be injected  if auto-
 matic devices are employed. Record the vol-
 ume injected to the nearest 0.05 |iL, the total
 extract volume, and the resulting peak size
 in area or peak height units.
  22.5  Identify the parameters in the sample
 by  comparing  the retention  times of the
 peaks in the sample chroxnatogram with
 those   of   the   peaks   in   standard
 ohromatograms. The width of the retention
 time  window used to make identifications
 should be based  upon measurements of ac-
 tual retention time  variations of standards
 over the course of a day. Three times the
 standard deviation of a retention time for a
 compound can  be used to calculate a sug-
 gested window size; however, the experience
 of the analyst should weigh heavily in the
 interpretation of ohroinatograms.
  12.6  If the response for a peak exceeds the
 working range of the system, dilute the ex-
 tract and reanalyze.
  12.7  If  the measurement of the peak re-
 sponse is prevented by the presence  of inter-
 ferences, further cleanup is required.

              13. Calculations
  13.1  Determine the  concentration of indi-
 vidual compounds in the sample.
  13.1.1 If the external standard calibration
 procedure is used, calculate the amount  of
 material  injected from the peak  response
 nging the calibration curve or calibration
 factor determined in Section 7.241. The con-
centration in the sample can be calculated
from Equation 2.


     Concentration (»ig/ _    (A)(Vt)

            L)              (V,XV.)
                               Equation 2
where:
  A=Amount of material injected (ng).
  Vi=Volume of extract injected (|iL).
  V,=Volume of total extract (|iL).
  V,=Volume of water extracted (mL).
  13.1.2  If the internal standard calibration
procedure is used, calculate the concentra-
tion in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equa-
tion 3.
     Concentration (|ig/
            L)
                         (Ab)(RP)(V0)
                               Equation 3
where:
  A.=Response for the parameter to be meas-
   ured.
  Ak^Response for the internal standard.
  Ie=Amount of internal standard  added to
   each extract (jig).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  1342 Report results in |ig/L without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

          14. Method Performance

  14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined  as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.' The MDL concentrations listed in
Table 1  were obtained using reagent water.10
Similar results  were  achieved  using rep-
resentative wastewaters. The MDL actually
achieved in a given analysis will vary de-
pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  1442 This method has been tested for lin-
earity of spike, recovery from reagent water
and has been demonstrated to be applicable
over the concentration range from 4xMDL to
lOOOxMDL.'0
  14.3 This method was tested by 20 labora-
tories using reagent water,  drinking water.
surface   water,   and    three   industrial
wastewaters  spiked at six concentrations
over the range 1.0 to 356 pg/L.11 Single opera-
tor precision,  overall precision, and method
accuracy were found to be directly related to
the concentration of the parameter and es-
sentially independent of the sample matrix.
Linear  equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.
                                         792

-------
Envbonmental Protection Agency
                                                       Pt. 136. App. A. Mom. 612
               REFERENCES
  1.40 CFR part 138, appendix B.
  2. "Determination  of Chlorinated Hydro-
carbons   In  Industrial  and   Municipal
Waatewaters, "EPA 6090/4-84-ABC, National
Technical  Information  Service.  PBXYZ,
Springfield, Virginia. 22161 November 1984.
  3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices  for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic -Constituents." American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  4. "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens." Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare, Public Health. Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health.  Publication No.
77-206. August 1977.
  5. "OSHA  Safety  and Health  Standards,
General Industry," (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
pational Safety and  Health  Administration,
OSHA 2208 (Revised, January 1976).
  6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion,  Committee on Chemical Safety. 3rd
Edition, 1979.
  7. Provost. L.P., and Elder. R.S. "Interpre-
tation of Percent Recovery Data."American
                                          Laboratory, 15, 58-63  (1963). (The value 2.44
                                          used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
                                          times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
                                            8. ASTM Ann""-* Book of Standards, Part
                                          31, D3370-76. "Standard Practices for Sam-
                                          pling Water,'! American Society for Testing
                                          and Materials. Philadelphia.
                                            9.  Burke. J.A. "Gas Chromatography for
                                          Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
                                          Aspects," Journal of the Association of Official
                                          Analytical Chemists, 48,1037 (1965).
                                            10.  "Development  of Detection  Limits,
                                          EPA 'Method  612.  Chlorinated  Hydro-
                                          carbons." Special letter report for EPA Con-
                                          tract 68-03-2625, U.S. Environmental Protec-
                                          tion Agency, Environmental Monitoring and
                                          Support Laboratory, Cincinnati. Ohio 45268.
                                            11. "EPA  Method  Study  Method 612—
                                          Chlorinated Hydrocarbons."  EPA 600/4-84-
                                          039.  National Technical Information Service.
                                          PB84-187772. Springfield, Virginia 22161. May
                                          1964.
                                            12.    "Method     Performance     for
                                          Hexachlorocyclopentadiene by Method 612."
                                          Memorandum from R. Slater, U.S. Environ-
                                          mental Protection Agency. Environmental
                                          Monitoring  and  Support  Laboratory, Cin-
                                          cinnati, Ohio 45268. December 7,1983.
           TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS AND METHOD DETECTION UMITS
, - I '
Parameter
1 1_nirtiirwr*MUiTMUi _LJ_LUU... 	 ...FTTT 	 ——.««
** 	 *~* 	 **~flM^>i ' I ••••••• ••mil ITT —
1_A*OtaHlAmtMniflfM) 	 	 «.......».«....«««-««««-"«-i 	 — — — — -
1 jg-DtehtefofaflfizfrfHE • 	 ......T— 	 	 .....,«,«— • 	 	



O •^tllMVMtBllhttlBllMUft ii •••• 11 m«i«« •••••« tt —

Retar.tion time (mln)
Column 1
4.5
4.9
52
6.6
7.7
1&5
nd
•2.7
•6.8
Column 2
as
aa
7.6
9.3
20.0
22J
•16.6
»3.6
»104
Method de-
tooUon Hdnt
(WU
1.19
1X03
1J4
1.14
0.34
0.05
0.40
0*4
0^5
wtare qtt
            Indicatad.

   Kl-NotdeU
   •ISO *C column temperature.
   >185 *C column temperature.
   «100 *C column temperature.
                     TABLE 2—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 612
Parameter ,

1,2-Dichlorebenzene. ......;.-........-.~...™..~....~..~.«— .•••«•— •———.•""••~"~"'~
I^Otchtorobenzene 	 . 	 ••• — — —
1 J PlrhtnrrtumTMiii ' ..............„..................—•—•——•— —•"—••-


t to»»-Jih¥i^y himn 	 — ,m 	 	 —•
Test
cone. '
(HOAJ
r 100
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
Limit tor 3
Oi«^)
37.3
aaa
26.4
20.8
2.4
22.
2£
33
Ranee torX
(upA)
29.5-126.9
23^-145.1
7^-138.6
22.7-126.9
2.6-14.8
D-12.7
D-10.4
2.4-12J
Ranaafor
P7P.
(per-
cent)
9-148
9-160
0-150
13-137
15-159
0-139
D-111
8-139
                                          793

-------
              TABIE 2-rQC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 612—Continued
                                                           T«t
                                                           cone.
                                                           (vet)
                                                                   Umtttora
                                                                    OKA')
Rang* tor*
                                                                                         FTP.
                                                                                         (per-
                                                                                         oont)
     chto

                                                              100
                                                                       31.6  20.2-133.7
                                                                                         5-149
    ndard
P,

                 of tour iwowtry rnaaauramentt. In ucA ,-___-_—-
                 i—*—-.	,...,.......I'M^t. in iigft. (Section 8JL4
                                          (1B.4
          raeuKimMt be cjreaaar than zero.

                                            iA2).
                                  UM, ,,~u»d performance data in Table 3. Where neeeesary,, the!Imlta tor recow
                                  of the Hmttt^conoentmttont below thcee uaad to davetop Table 3.

TABLE 3—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF (X3NC^TTWTK>*--METHOD 612
                                                         Aooourwy.v
                                                                » x
                                                                       Singto analyst
                                                                        pracWon.a,'
                                                                          (WC/L)
        Ovaralpract-
2-Chioron«prrthaHo«
I^OkNorcbenzene
I^DIchtorobenzane
                                                        0.75C+331
                                                        085C-0.70
                                                                       O28X-1.17
                                                                       022X-2J6
                                                                       O21X-1JO
       038X-1JO
       041X-3J2
I^OtcWorabemane
Hexachlorobara*ne .
                                                                                  036X-O.S7
                                                                                  036X-0.19
rkBOKfrtorocydopeniatlane*
HcKaohtoroethana >_>_>
                                                        0.61CU0.03
                                                        0.47C
                                                        0.74C-OJJ2
                                                        0.76O0.98
                                                                       ai8X*aoe
                                                                       (X24X
                                                                       O23X-0.44
       OJ60X
       OMX-OJOO
 X/«Eu>aciadraccweryfwoneorinonirneaiuremanimofeMmplecori^^                         .
 l^SM^SZS^S^MtifMtan of meaaurementsat an averageuaneiiUaUoni found ojX In ijjBflL
 S'^Sa^SSalboMl^SKtardcWattooT7uev^fortrwcorcenlratfon.in|ig/L   	   	      	^xit^^r in.»»ii
 '  '     ioKX»eryfcundfarmaae»jrarfMnttofaamp«eacontaWng«cuicenualion«
          Mad upon the performance In a. aing)* laboratory."
                                              794

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 612
 COLUMN: 1.S% OV-1/2.4% OV-225 ON SUPELCOPORT
 TEMPERATURE:  75^C
 DETECTOR:  aECTRON CAPTURE
                                     LU
                                     s
    048     12    16     20    24

                   RETENTION TIME. MIN.


    Figure 1. Gas chromatogram of chlorinated hydrocarbons.
                              795

-------
COLUMN: 1.5% OV-1/2.4% OV-225 ON SUPELCOPORT
TB1PERATURE:  165*C
DETECTOR: H£CTRON CAPTURE
                   UJ
                   i
                   <

                   £
                   o
                    I
                   CM
01
s
o

o
<
UJ
               0    4    8    12

               RETENTION TIME, MIN.


   Figure 2. Gas chromatogram of chlorinated hydrocarbons.
                          796

-------
fcnvtfonmeracR protection /\ge»ncy
              ft.
 METHOD eiS-2,3.7,8-TETRACHLORODIBENZO-P-
                  DlOXIN

          I. Scope and Application

  1.1  This method covers the determination
of 2,3.7.8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (2,3.7.8-
TCDD). The following parameter may be de-
termined by this method:
Parameter
2&7.8-TCOD 	 . 	

STORET
No.
34675

GAS No.
1746-01-6

  1.2  This  is a gas chromatographic/mass
spectrometer (GC/MS) method applicable to
the determination of 2.3.7,8-TCDD in munici-
pal and industrial  discharges as  provided
under 40 CFR 136.1. Method 625 may be used
to screen samples for 2,3,7,8-TCDD. When the
screening test is positive, the  final quali-
tative confirmation and quantification must
be made using Method 613.
  1.3  The method detection limit (MDL, de-
fined in Section 14.1)» for 2,3,7,8-TCDD is
listed in  Table 1. The MDL for a specific
wastewater may be different from that list-
ed, depending  upon the  nature of inter-
ferences in the sample matrix.
  1.4  Because of the extreme toziclty of this
compound,  the  analyst must prevent expo-
sure  to himself, of  to  others, by materials
knows  or believed to contain 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
Section 4 of this method contains guidelines
and protocols that serve as minimum  safe-
handling standards in a limited-access lab-
oratory.         .
  1.5  Any modification of this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a major modification subject to
application  and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
  1.6 .This method is restricted to use by or
under  the  supervision of analysts  experi-
enced  in the use of a gas chromatograph/
mass spectrometer and in the interpretation
of  mass  spectra. Each analyst must  dem-
onstrate  the ability to generate acceptable
results with this method using the procedure
 described in Section 8.2.

            2. Summary of Method

  2.1  A  measured  volume of  sample, ap-
 proximately l-Ii, is spiked with an internal
 standard of labeled  2,3,7,8-TCDD and  ex-
 tracted with  methylene  chloride using  a
 separatory  funnel.  The methylene chloride
 extract is exchanged to hexane during con-
 centration to a volume of 1.0 mL or less. The
 extract is then analyzed by capillary column
 GC/MS to  separate  and measure  2,3,7,8-
 TCDD."
   2.2  The  method provides selected column
 chromatographic cleanup proceudres to aid
 in the elimination of interferences that may
 be encountered.
               3. /nter/erencej
  3.1 Method interferences may be caused
 by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
 ware, and other sample processing hardware
 that lead to discrete artifacts and/or ele-
 vated backgrounds at the masses (m/t) mon-
 itored.  All of these materials must be rou-
 tinely demonstrated to  be free from inter-
 ferences under the conditions of the analysis
 by running laboratory reagent blanks as de-
 scribed in Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1  Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
 cleaned.4 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
 sible after use by rinsing: with the last sol-
 vent used in  it. Solvent rinsing: should be fol-
 lowed by detergent washing with hot water.
' and  rinses  with tap water and  distilled
 water. The glassware should then be drained
 dry. and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
 for 15 to  30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
 terials, such as PCBs. may not be eliminated
 by the treatment. Solvent rinses with ace-
 tone and pesticide quality  hexane  may  be
 substituted for the  muffle furnace heating.
 Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually
 eliminates   PCB  interference.  Volumetric
 ware should not be heated in a muffle fur-
 nace. After  drying and cooling,  glassware
 should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
 ronment to prevent  any accumulation  of
 dust or other  contaminants. Store inverted
 or capped with aluminum foil.
   3.1.2  The  use of high  purity reagents and
 solvents  helps to  mininmize  interference
 problems. Purification  of solvents by dis-
 tillation in all-glass  systems may be  re-
 quired.
   3.2 Matrix Interferences may be caused by
 contaminants that are coextracted from the
 sample. The extent of matrix interferences
 will vary considerably from source to source,
 depending upon  the nature  and diversity of
 the industrial complex or municipality being
 sampled. 2,3,7,8-TCDD  is  often  associated
 with other Interfering  chlorinated  com-
 pounds which are at concentrations several
 magnitudes  higher than that of 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
 The cleanup producers in Section 11 can be
 used to overcome many, of these  inter-
 ferences, but unique samples may require ad-
 ditional  cleanup approaches '•*-7 to eliminate
 false positives and achieve the MDL listed in
 Table 1.
   3.3 The primary column, SP-2330 or equiv-
 alent,  resolves 2,3,7,8-TCDD from  the other
 21  TCDD insomers. Positive results  using
 any other gas chromatographic column must
 be confirmed using the primary column.

                  4. Safety

    4.1 The  toxicity  or carcinogenicity of
  each reagent used in this method has  not
  been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
  cal compound should be treated as a poten-
  tial health  hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
  posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
                                           797

-------
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory is responsible for
 maintaining a  current awareness  file  of
 QSHA regulations. regarding the  safe han-
 dling: of the chemicals specified in this meth-
 od A reference file of material data handling
 sheets should also be made available to all
 personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional references  to laboratory  safety
 are available and have been identified*-10 for
 the information of the analyst. Benzene and
 2.3,7,B-TCDD have been identified as  sus-
 pected human or mMmnElfan carcinogens.
  4.2  Each laboratory must develop a strict
safety program for handling 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
The following laboratory practices are rec-
ommended:
  4.2.1 Contamination of the laboratory will
be  minimized by conducting all manipula-
tions in a hood.
  4.2.2 The  effluents of sample splitters for
the gas chromatograph and roughing pumps
on  the QC/M8 should pass through either a
column of activated charcoal or be bubbled
through a trap containing oil or high-boiling
alcohols.
  4,2.3 Liquid waste should be. dissolved in
methanol or ethanol and irradiated with ul-
traviolet light with a  wavelength greater
than  290 nm for several days. (Use F 40 BL
lamps or equivalent), Analyze liquid wastes
and dispose of the solutions when 2,3,7.8-
TCDD can no longer be detected.
  4.3  Dow Chemical U.S.A. has Issued the
following precautimns  (revised  November
1978) for safe handling of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the
laboratory:
  4.3.1 The  following  statements  on  safe
handling are as complete as possible on the
basis of available tozicologlcal information.
The precautions for safe handling and use
are necessarily general  in nature  since de-
tailed,  specific  recommendations  can  be
made only for the particular exposure and
circumstances of each individual use. Inquir-
ies  about specific operations or uses may be
addressed to the Dow Chemical Company.
Assistance in evaluating the health hazards
of particular plant conditions may be ob-
tained from certain consulting laboratories
and from State Departments of Health or of
Labor, many of which  have an industrial
health service.  2,3,7,8-TCDD  is  extremely
toxic to laboratory animals. However, it has
been handled for years without injury in an-
alytical and biological  laboratories.  Tech-
niques used  in handling radioactive and in-
fectious materials are applicable to 2,3,7,8,-
TCDD.
  4.3.1.1  Protective     equipment— Throw-
away plastic gloves, apron or lab coat, safety
glasses, and a lab hood adequate for radio-
active work.
  4.3.1.2  Training— Workers must be trained
in the proper method of removing contami-
nated. gloves and clothing without contact-
ing the exterior surfaces.
  4.3.1.3  Personal hygiene— Thorough wash-
 ing of hands and forearms after each manipu-
 lation and before breaks (coffee, lunch, and
 shift),
 .4.3.1.4  Confinement— Isolated  work  area.
 posted with signs, segregated glassware and
 tools,  plastic-backed  absorbent  paper  on
 benchtops.
  4.3.1.5  Waste— Good   technique  includes
 minimising contaminated -waste. .Plastic bag
 liners should be used in waste cans. Janitors
 must be  trained in  the safe handling of
 waste.
  4.3.1.6  Disposal of  wastes— 2,3.7.8-TCDD
 decomposes above 800 *C.  Low-level waste
 such as absorbent paper, tissues, «.ti10 fig)
2,3,7,8-TCDD level indicates that  unaooept-
                                        798

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 613
able work practices nave been employed in
the past.
  4.3.1.10 Inhalation—Any procedure  that
may produce airborne contamination must
be done with good ventilation. Gross losses
to a ventilation system must hot be allowed.
Handling of the  dilute solutions  normally
used in analytical and animal work presents
no inhalation hazards except in the case of
an accident.
  4.3.1.11 Accidents—Remove  contaminated
clothing immediately,  taking precautions
not to contaminate  skin or other articles.
Wash exposed skin vigorously and repeatedly
until medical attention is obtained.

         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1  Sampling  equipment, for discrete or
composite sampling.
  5.1.1  Grab  sample bottle—1-L   or  1-qt,
amber glass,  fitted with  a screw  cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles  are not available, protect samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed, rinsed with  acetone  or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to  minimize
contamination.
  5.1.2  Automatic sampler (optional)—The
sampler must incorporate glass sample con-
tainers for the collection of a TT»ITI
-------
  63  Sodium hydroxide solution (10  N)—
Dissolve 40 gr of NaOH (ACS} in reagent water
and dilute to 100 mL. Wash the solution with
methylene chloride and hexane before use.
  6.3  Sodium thioaullate— 
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136. App. A, Moth. 613
O&te elution patterns and  the absence of
interferences from the reagents.

             8. Quality Control *

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
Is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The minimum requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples  to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks  are compared with  established per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
of analyses meet the performance character-
istics of the method.. When results of sample
spikes  indicate  atypical method .perform-
ance, a quality control check standard must
be  analyzed  to  confirm that the measure-
ments were performed in an in-control mode
of operation.
  8.1.1  The analyst must make an initial,
one-time, demonstration of the  ability to
generate acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
  8.1.2  In recognition  of advances that are
occurring in chromatography, the analyst is
permitted certain options (detailed in Sec-
tions 10.5,11.1, and 12.1) to improve the sepa-
rations or lower the cost of measurements.
Each time such  a modification is made to
the method, the analyst is required to repeat
the procedure in Section 8.2
  8.1.3  Before processing any  samples, the
analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
to  demonstrate  that interferences from the
analytical system and  glassware are under
control. Each time  a set of samples is  ex-
tracted  or reagents are changed, a reagent
water blank must be processed as a safe-
guard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and  analyze a minimum  of 10%
of  all samples with native 2,3,7,8-TCDD to
monitor and evaluate laboratory data qual-
ity. This procedure is described in Section
8.3.
  8.1.5  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
quality control check standards that the op-
eration of the measurement system is in con-
trol.  This procedure is described in Section
8.4. The frequency  of the check  standard
analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples
analyzed but may be reduced if spike recov-
eries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.6  The  laboratory must maintain per-
formance records to document the quality of
data that is generated. This procedure is de-
scribed in Section 8.5.
  8.2 To establish  the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the ana-
lyst must perform the following operations.
  8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing 2,3,7,8-
TCDD at a concentration of 0.100 pg/naLi in
acetone. The QC check sample concentrate
must be  obtained from the U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency,  Environmental
.Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cin-
cinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available
from that'source, the QC check sample con-
centrate must be obtained from another ex-
ternal source. If not available from either
source above,  the QC  check sample  con-
centrate must be prepared by the laboratory
using  stock standards  prepared  independ-
ently from those used for calibration.
  8.2.2 Using a pipet. prepare QC check sam-
ples at a concentration  of 0.100 |ig/L (100 ng/
L) by adding  1.00 mL of QC check sample
concentrate to each of  four 1-L aliquots of
reagent water.
  8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed  QC  check
samples according to the.method beginning
in Section 10.
  8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in
pg/L, and the  standard  deviation of the re-
covery (s) In »ig/L, for 2,3,7,8-TCDD using the
four results.
  8.2.5 Compare  s and (X)  with the cor-
responding acceptance criteria for precision
and accuracy,  respectively, found In Table 2.
If s and X meet the  acceptance criteria, the
system performance  is acceptable and analy-
sis of actual samples can begin. If s exceeds
the  precision  limit  or  X falls outside the
range for accuracy, the system performance
is unacceptable for 2,3,7,8-TCDD. Locate and
correct the source of the problem and repeat
the test beginning with Section 8.2.2.
  8.3 The laboratory must,  on an ongoing
basis, spike at least  10% of the samples from
each sample site being  monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten  samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is  required.
  8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1.1  If, as  in compliance  monitoring,
the  concentration  of  2,3,7,8-TCDD  In  the
sample is being checked against a regulatory
concentration limit, the spike should.be at
that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the
background concentration  determined  in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD
in the sample is not being checked against a
limit specific to that parameter, the spike
should be at 0.100 jig/L or 1 to 5 times higher
than  the  background  concentration deter-
mined in Section 8.3.2. whichever concentra-
 tion would be larger.
  8.3.1.3  If it is impractical to determine
 background levels before spiking (e.g.. max!-.
 mum holding  times will be exceeded), the
 spike concentration should be (1) the regu-
 latory concentration limit, if any; or, if none
 (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
                                          801

-------
the expected background concentration or
0.100 MC/L.
  8.3J2 Analyse one sample aliquot to deter-
mine the background  concentration  (B) of
2,3,7,8-TCDD. If necessary, prepare a new QC
check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) ap-
propriate for the background concentration
in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot
with  1.0 mL of the QC check sample con-
centrate and analyse  it  to determine the
concentration after spiking  (A) of 2,3.7.8-
TCDD.  Calculate  percent recovery  (P) as
10£KA-B)%T, where T is the known true value
of the spike.
  8.8.3 Compare the percent recovery  (P) for
2,3,7,i-TCDD with the corresponding QC ac-
ceptance criteria found in Table 2. These ac-
ceptance criteria were calculated to include
an allowance for error in measurement of
both the background and spike  concentra-
tions, aimmlng a spike to background ratio
of 6:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent  that the analyst's spike to back-
ground ratio approaches 6:1." If spiking was
performed at a concentration lower than
0.100 jig/Is the  analyst must use either the
QC acceptance  criteria in Table 2,  or op-
tional QC acceptance criteria calculated for
the specific spike  concentration.  To cal-
culate optional acceptance criteria for the
recovery of 2,8,7,8-TCDD:  
-------
 Environmental Protection Agency   -

  10.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side
 of the sample bottle for later determination
 of sample volume. Pour  the entire sample
 into a 2-L separatory funnel.
  10.2  Add 1.00  mli of  Internal Standard
 splicing  solution  to  the sample  in  the
 separatory funnel. If the final extract will be
 concentrated  to a fixed volume  below 1.00
 mL (Section 12.3), only that volume of spik-
 ing solution should be added to the sample so
 that the final extract will contain 25 ng/mL
 of Internal standard at the time of analysis.
  10.3  Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to
 the sample bottle, seal, and shake  30 s to
 rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
 to the separatory funnel and extract the
 sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
 periodic venting to release excess pressure.
 Allow the organic layer to separate from the
 water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
 emulsion interface between  layers is more
 than  one-third the vmlume  of the  solvent
 layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
 techniques to complete the phase separation.
 The optimum technique  depends  upon the
 sample, but may include stirring, filtration
 of the emulsion through glass wool, cen-
 trifngation, or other physical methods. Col-
 lect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
  10.4  Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
 ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
 peat the extraction procedure a second time,
 combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer
 flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
 manner.
  10.5  Assemble  a. Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)
 concentrator  by attaching  a 10-mL  con-
 centrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.
 Other  concentration devices or techniques
 may be used in place of the K-D concentra-
 tor If the requirements  of Section  8.2 are
 met.  *
  10.6  Pour the combined extract into the
K-D concentrator. Rinse  the Erlenmeyer
 flask with 20 to 30 mL of methylele chloride
 to complete the quantitative transfer.
  10.7  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
 Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column
 by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride
 to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
 water  bath (60 to 65 *C) so that the con-
 centrator tube is partially immersed in the
 hot water, and the entire lower rounded sur-
 face  of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.
 Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
 and the  water temperature  as required to
 complete* the concentration in 15  to 20 min.
 At the proper rate of distillation the balls of
 the column will actively chatter but the
 chambers will hot flood with condensed sol-
vent.  When the apparent volume of liquid
reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and
allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
  10.8  .Momentarily remove the Snyder col-
umn, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling
              Pt.  136, App. A, Moth. 613

 chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise
 the temperature of the water bath to 85 to
 90*C. Concentrate  the extract as in Section
 10.7. except use hexane to prewet the column.
 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the
 flask and ijbs lower joint into the concentra-
 tor tube with 1-to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL sy-
 ringe is recommended for this operation. Set
 aside the K-D glassware for reuse in Section
 10.14.
  10.9  Pour  the hexane extract  from  the
 concentrator tube  into a 125-mL separatory
 funnel. Rinse  the concentrator Cube four
 times  with 10-mL  aliquots of hexane. Com-
 bine all rinses in the 125-mL separatory fun-
 nel.            .
  10.10  Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide solu-
 tion to the funnel and shake for 30 to 60 s.
 Discard the aqueous phase.
, 10.11  Perform a second  wash of the or-
 ganic layer with 50 mL of reagent water. Dis-
 card the aqueous phase.
  10.12  Wash the hexane layer with a least
 two 60-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric
 acid. Continue  washing the  hexane  layer
 with 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric
 acid until the acid layer remains colorless.
 Discard all acid fractions.
  10.13  Wash the hexane layer with two 50-
 mL aliquots  of reagent water. Discard  the
 aqueous phases.
  10.14  Transfer the hexane extract into a
 125-mL Erlenmeyer flask containing 1  to 2 g
 of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Swirl the flask
 for 30 s and decant the hexane extract into
 the  reassembled K-D apparatus.  Complete
 the  quantitative transfer  with two 10-mL
 hexane rinses of the Erlenmeyer flask.
  10.15  Replace the one or two clean boiling
 chips and concentrate the extract to 6 to 10
 mL as in Section 10.8.
  10.16  Add a clean boiling chip to the con-
 centrator tube and attach a two-ball micro-
 Snyder column. Prewet the column by .add-
 ing about 1 mL of hexane to  the top.  Place
 the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath
 so  that the concentrator tube is partially
 immersed in the hot water.  Adjust the verti-
 cal position of the apparatus and' the  water
 temperature as required to complete the con-
 centration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate
 of distillation the  balls of the column will
 actively chatter but the chambers will  not
 flood. When the apparent volume of  liquid
 reaches about 0.5 mL,  remove the K-D appa-
 ratus and allow it to drain and cool for at
 least 10 min.  Remove  the inioro-Snyder col-
 umn and rinse its  lower joint into the con-
 centrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane.
  Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL with
 hexane. Stopper the concentrator tube and
 store refrigerated and protected from light if
 further processing  will not be performed Im-
 mediately. If the extract will  be  stored
 longer than two days, it should be trans-
 ferred  to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If
 the sample extract requires no further clean-
                                        803

-------
up. proceed with  GC/HS analysis (Section
13). If the sample requires farther cleanup,
proceed to Section 11.
  10.17  Determine the original sample vol-
ume by refilling 'the sample bottle  to the
mark and transferring the liquid to  a 1000-
mL graduated cylinder. Record the  sample
volume  to the nearest 5 mL.

         11. Cleanup and Separation
  11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be nec-
estary for a relatively clean sample matrix.
If particular circumstances demand the use
of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use
either procedure below or any other appro-
priate procedure.1-5-7 However,  the  analyst
first  must  demonstrate  that the require-
ments of Section  8.2 can be met using the
method as revised to incorporate the cleanup
procedure. Two cleanup column options are
offered  to the analyst In this section. The
alumina column should be used first to over-
come interferences. If background problems
are still encountered, the silica gel column
may be  helpful.
  11.2 Ai^Ty^fia. column cleanup for  2,3,7,8-
TCDD:
  11.2.1  Fill a 300 mm  long z 10  mm ID
chromatographlc column with activated alu-
mina to the 150 mm level. Tap the column
gently to settle the alumina and add 10 mm
of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
  11.2,2  Preelute the column with 50 mL of
hezane. Adjust the elution rate to 1 mL/min.
Discard the  eluate and Just prior to exposure
of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quan-
titatively transfer the 1.0-mL sample extract
onto the column using two 2-mL portions of
hexane  to complete the transfer.
  11.2.3  Just prior to exposure of the sodium
sulfate  layer to the air, add 50 mL of 3%
methylene  chloride/95%  hexane  (V/V)  and
continue the elution of the column. Discard
the eluate.
  11.2.4  Next, elnte the column with 50 mL
of 20% methylene chloride/80% hexane (V/V)
into a 500-mL K-D flask  equipped with a 10-
mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the col-
lected fraction to 1.0 mL as in  Section 10.16
and analyze by GC/MB (Section 12).
  11.3 Silica gel column  cleanup for 2,3,7,8-
TCDD:
  11.3.1   Pill a 400 mm  long x 11 mm ID
chromatmgrapMc column with silica gel to
the 300 mm level. Tap the column gently to
settle the silica gel and add 10 mm of anhy-
drous sodium sulfate to the top.
  11.3.2  Preelute  the column with 50 mL of
20%  benzene/80%  hexane (V/V). Adjust the
elution rate to 1 mL/mln. Discard the eluate
and just prior to exposure of the sodium sul-
fate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer
the 1.0-mL  sample extract onto the column
using two 2-mL portions of 20% benzene/80%
•hexane to complete the transfer.
  11.3.3 Just' prior to exposure of the sodium
BuUate layer to  the air, add 40 mL of 20%
benzene/90% hezane to the column. Collect
the eluate  in  a clean 500-mL  K-D flask
equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube.
Concentrate the collected fraction to 1.0 mL
as in Section 10.16 and analyze by QC/MS.

            12. GCMS Analysis

  12.1  Table 1 summarizes the recommended
operating  conditions  for  the  gas  ohro-
matograph. Included in this table are reten-
tion times and  MDL that  can  be achieved
under these conditions. Other capillary col-
umns or chromatographic conditions may be
used if the requirements of .Sections 5.5.2 and
8.2 are met.
  12.2  Analyze standards and samples with
the mass  spectrometer operating in the se-
lected  ion monitoring (SIM) mode using a
dwell time to give at least seven points per
peak. For LRMS, use masses at m/t 320, 822,
and 257 for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and either m/z 328
for "CU 2,3,7,8-TCDD  or  m/z 332 for "Cu
2,3,7,8-TCDD. For HUMS, use masses at m/z
319.8965 and 321.8936 for 2,3.7.8-TCDD and ei-
ther m/z 327.8847 for "CL. 2,3,7,8-TCDD or m/
z 331.9367 for »C,2 2.3.7.8-TCDD.
  12.3  If lower detection limits are required,
the extract may be carefully evaporated to
dryness under a gentle stream of nitrogen
with the concentrator tube in a water bath
at about 40 *C. Conduct this operation imme-
diately before  QC/MS analysis. Redissolve
the extract in the desired final  volume of
ortho-xylene or tetradecane.
  12.4  Calibrate  the system dally  as de-
scribed in Section 7.
  12.5  Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
into the gas chromatograph. The volume of
calibration standard injected must be meas-
ured, or be the same as all sample injection
volumes.
  12.6  The presence of 2,3.7.8-TCDD is quali-
tatively confirmed if all of the following cri-
teria are achieved:
  12.6:1 The gas  chromatographic  column
must resolve 2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other 21
TCDD isomers.
  12.6.2 The masses for native  2,3,7,8-TCDD
(LRMS-m/z 320. 322.  and 257 and HRMS-m/i
320 and 322) and labeled 2.3,7.8-TCDD (m/fe 328
or 332) must exhibit a simultaneous maxi-
mum at a retention time that matches that
of  native 2,3,7,8-TCDD in  the calibration
standard,  with  the performance  specifica-
tions of the analytical system.
  12.6.3 The chlorine isotope ratio at m/z 320
and m/z 322 must agree to withln±10% of that
in the calibration standard.
  12.6.4 The signal of all peaks must be
greater than 2.5 times the noise level.
  12.7   For quantitation,   measure  the  re-
sponse of the m/Z 320 peak for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
and the m/z 332 peak for «C« 2,3.7.8-TCDD or
the m* 328 peak for «CU 2,3.7,8-TCDD.
   12.8   Co-eluting impurities are suspected if
all criteria are achieved except those in Sec-
 tion 12.6.3. In this case, another SIM analysis
                                         804

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, M®iti. 613
using masses at m/z 257. 250. 320 and either ml
a 328 or m/E 322 can be performed. The masses
at in/Z 257 and m/z 259 are indicative of the
loss of one chlorine and  one carbonyl group
from 2,3,7.8-TCDD. If masses m/z 257 and m/z
259 give a chlorine isotope ratio that agrees
to within ±10%  of the same cluster in  the
calibration standards, then the presence of
TCDD  can be confirmed. Co-elnting DDD,
DDE, and PCB  residues  can  be  confirmed,
but will require another injection using the
appropriate SIM masses or full repetitive
mass scans. If the response for "CL* 2,3,7,8-
TCDD at m/z 328 is too large,  PCB contami-
nation is suspected and can be confirmed by
examining the response at both m/z  328 and
m/z  328.  The "CU .2,3,7,8-TCDD  internal
standard gives negligible response at m/z 326.
These  pesticide residues  can be - removed
using the  alumina column cleanup  proce-
dure.
  12.9  If broad background interference re-
stricts the sensitivity of the GC/MS analysis,
the analyst should employ additional clean-
up procedures and reanalyze by GC/MS.
  12.10 In those circumstances where these
procedures do not yield a definitive  conclu-
sion, the  use  of high resolution mass spec-
trometry is suggested.9

              13. Calculations
  13.1  Calculate the concentration of 2,3,7.8-
TCDD in the sample using the response fac-
tor (RF)  determined in  Section 7.1.2  and
Equation 2.
     Concentration (|ig/
             L)
      ,                          Equation 2
where:'
  A.=SBi response for 2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z
    320.
  Ai.=SIM response fpr the Internal standard
    at m/E 328 or 332.
  1.=Amount of internal standard added  to
    each extract (|ig).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2  For each  sample,  calculate the per-
cent recovery  of the  internal standard by
comparing the area of the m/z peak measured
in the sample to the area cf the same peak
in the calibration standard. If the recovery is
below 60%, the analyst should review all as-
pects of his analytical technique.
  13.3  Report results in |jg/L without correc-
tion for recovery data.  All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

          14. Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the  minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.1 The MDL concentration listed in Table
1 was obtained  using- reagent water.'-* The
MDL actually achieved in a given analysis
will vary depending on instrument sensitiv-
ity and matrix effects.
  14.2  This method was tested by 11 labora-
tories using reagent water, drinking water,
surface water, and three industrial waste-
waters spiked at six concentrations over the
range 0.02 to 0.20 pg/L.|S Single operator pre-
cision, overall precision, and method accu-
racy were found to be directly related to the
concentration of the parameter and essen-
tially  independent  of  the  sample matrix.
Linear equations to describe these relation-
ships are presented in Table 3.

'              REFERENCES

  1.40 CFR pan 136, appendix B.
  2. "Determination  of TCDD in Industrial
and Municipal Wastewaters." EPA 600/4-82-
028. National Technical Information Service,
PBB2-196882. Springfield, Virginia 22161, April
1982.
  3. Buser, H.R., and Rappe, C. "High Resolu-
tion  Gas  Chromatography  of   the  22
Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers,"  Ana-
lytical Chemistry, 52, 2257 (1980).
  4. ASTM Annual Book  of Standards. Part
31,  D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic Constituents," American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  5. Earless.  R. L., Oswald.  E.  O..  and
Wilkinson. M. K. "Sample Preparation and
Gas Chromatography/Mass Speotrometry De-
termination of 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-
dioxin." Analytical Chemistry. 52.1239 (1980).
  6. Lamparski.  L.  L., and Nestrick, T. J.
"Determination   of  Tetra-,  Hepta-,   and
Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers in Par-
ticulate Samples at Parts per Trillion Lev-
els." Analytical Chemistry, 52,2045 (1980).
  7. Longhorst,  M. L., and Shadoff, L. A.
"Determination  of Parte-per-Trillion  Con-
centrations of Tetra-. Hexa-. and Octachloro-
dibenzo-p-dioxins in  Human Milk," Analyt-
ical Chemistry, 52, 2037 (1980).
  8. "Carcinogens—Working with  Carcino-
gens." Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare, Public  Health Service, Center for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-206, August 1977.
  9. "OSHA Safety  and  Health Standards,
General  Industry,"  (29  CFR  part  1910),
Occuptional Safety and*Health Administra-
tion, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
  10. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion, Committee on  Chemical  Safety.  3rd
Edition, 1979.
  11. Provost, L. P., and Elder, R. S., "In-
 terpretation  of  Percent Recovery Data."
 American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983).  (The
 value 2.44 used  in the equation in Section
                                         805

-------
8.3.3 is two time* the value 1.22 derived in
this report.)
  12. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
SI, D33TO-76.  "Standard  Practices for Sam-
pling Water." American  Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia.
  13. "Methods, 330.4 (Tltrimetric, DPD-FAS)
and  330.5  (Spectxophotometric  DPD)  for
Chlorine,   Total  Residual,"   Methods  for
Chemical  Analysis of Water and Wastes,
EPA-eOO/4-79-020,  U.S. Environmental  Pro-
tection Agency,  Environmental Monitoring
and Support  Laboratory.  Cincinnati, Ohio
45288, March 1979.
  14. Won?, A.S. et al. "The Determination
of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in Industrial and Municipal
Waatewaters,  Method 613,  Part  1—Develop-
ment and Detection Limits,"  O. Choudhay,
L.  Keith,  and C.  Ruppe,  ed..  Butterworth
Inc.. (1963).
  16.  "EPA Method  Study 26. Method  613:
2,3,7,&-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-diozin,"    EPA
600/4-84-037, National Technical Information
Service,  PB84-188879.  Springfield.  Virginia
22161. May 1964.'
                                                 TABLE 1—Chromatographte Conations and
                                                           Method Detection Umtt
                                               • 2.3,7,8-TCDD	„..
                                                                              time
                                                                                13.1

                                                  0.002
                                                 Column conations; SP-2330 coaled on a 60 m long x 025
                                                mm 10 glass column with hydrogen canter gas at 40 cm/vac
                                                linear velocity. spHess injection using tetradecane. Column
                                                temperature Held isothermal at 2OO*C for 1  irtn, then pro-
                                                grammed at yc/min to 250 -C and held. Uea of helium ear-
                                                ner gas win approximately double the retention time.
                                                 TABLE 2—QC Acceptance Criteria—Method
                                                                    613
                                                             Test
                                                             cone.
                                                             (M0AJ
                                                                    UmH
                                                                    tors
                                                                    (MO/U
                                                2&7.8-TCDD    0.100  0.0276 0.0523-0.1226  45-129
                                      Range Expected recovery for one or more measurements, of a sample containing a concentration of C. in ug/L.
  s/«Expedad single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of XT in pgfl.
  S'oExpectad intariaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in
  CXTrua value for tiie concentration, in }ig/l_
  X-Avorag* recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C. hi |ig/L.
          METHOD 624—PURGEABLES

           /. Scope and Application
  1.1  This method covers the determination
of a number of purgeable organics. The fol-
lowing parameters  may  be determined by
this method:
          Parameter
Bromodichloromethane
Bromomethana.
Carbon Wrachtoride.
Chtorobenzene .
Chtoroethana	
2-CMoroethytvinyi et«r
ChJoromathana _>___,
DtxonxjcWoromathane
                            STORET
                              No.
                              34030
                              32101
                              32104
                              •34413
                              32102
                              34301
                              34311
                              34576
                              32106
                              34418
                              32105
                              34536
                              34586
                              34571
                              34496
                              34531
                                     CAS No.
 71-43-2
 75-27-4
 75-25-2
 74-83-9
 56-23-6
108-00-7
 75-OO-3
110-75-8
 67-66-3
 74-67-3
124-48-1
 95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
 75-34-3
107-06-2
Parameter
1.1-Oichloroethane 	
trans-1 ,2-Oictiloroethentt .................
1,2-DichloropfOpane ....................
trans-1,3-Dichloroprapene 	
Ethyl benzene .................................
Methytene chloride . — ~..~. — .... —
1 1 .2.2-TetrachtoroeUiane _.. 	 ...«..'

Toluene 	 	
1,1.1-Trichtoroethene 	 .... 	
, i ^-Tncmoroemene ......._...... ..~...
Trichloreethane .............................
Trichloroftuoromemane 	
Vinyl chloride ~. 	 .......
*
STORET
No.
34501
34541
34704
34699
34371
34423
34516
•UJ7C
34010
34506
n^g«
39180
34488
39175

CAS No.
75-35-4
78-67-6
10061-01-6
10061-02-6
100-41-4
75-09-2
79-34-6
137_1fL_l
108-68-3
71-65-6
79-01-6
75 60 4
75-O1-4

                                                  1.2  The method may be extended to screen
                                                samples for acrolein (STORET No. 34210, CAS
                                                No. 107-02-8) and acrylonitrile (STORET No.
                                                34215.  CAS No.  107-13-1). however,  the pre-
                                                ferred method for these two compounds in
                                                Method 603.
                                             806

-------
EnvkonfiMntal Protection AQoncy
Pt. 136. App. A,
                                     624
  1.3 This la a parse and trap gas chromato-
graphlc/mass spectrometer (GO/MS) method
applicable to the determination of the com-
pounds listed above in municipal and Indus-
trial discharges as provided under 40 CFR
138.1.
  1.4 The method detection limit (MDL, de-
fined In Section 14.1)1 for each parameter is
listed In Table  1.  The MDL  for a specific
wastewater may differ from those listed, de-
pending upon the nature of interferences  in
the sample matrix.
  1.5 Any modification to this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a major modification subject  to
application  and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5. De-
pending upon the nature of the modification
and the extent of intended use, the-applicant
may be required to  demonstrate that the
modifications will produce equivalent results
when applied to relevant wastewaters.
  1.6 This method is restricted to use by  or
under  the  supervision of analysts  experi-
enced in the operation of a purge and trap
system and  a gas chromatograph/mass spec-
trometer and in the interpretation of mass
spectra. Each analyst must  demonstrate the
ability to generate acceptable results with
this method using the procedure described in
Section 8.2.

           2. Summary of Method
  2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL
water sample contained  in a specially-de-
signed purging chamber at ambient .tempera-
ture. The purgeables  are efficiently trans-
ferred from  the aqueous phase to the vapor
phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent
trap where the  purgeables are trapped. After
purging is completed, the trap is heated and
backfiushed with- the inert gas to desorb the
purgeables onto a  gas chromatographic col-
umn. The gas chrpmatograph is temperature
programmed to separate  the  purgeables
which are then detected  with a mass spec-
trometer."

               3. Interferences

  3.1  Impurities in the purge gas.  organic
compounds  outgassing from  the plumbing
ahead of the trap, and solvent, vapors in the
laboratory account for the  majority  of con-
tamination  problems. The analytical  system
must be demonstated to be free  from con-
tamination  under the conditions of the anal-
ysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as
described in Section 8.1.3.  The use of non-
Tenon  plastic  tubing,  non-Teflon  thread
sealants,  or flow- controllers with,  rubber
components in the  purge and trap  system
should be avoided.
  3.2  Samples can be contaminated by diffu-
sion of volatile organics (particularly fluoro-
carbcns and methylene chloride) through the
septum seal into the sample during shipment
and storage. A field reagent blank prepared
from reagent water and carried through the
sampling and handling protocol can serve as
a check on such contamination.
  3.3  Contamination   by  carry-over  can
occur whenever high level and low level sam-
ples  are  sequentially  analyzed. To  reduce
carry-over, the purging  device and  sample
syringe must be rinsed with reagent water
between sample analyses. Whenever  an un-
usually concentrated sample is encountered,
it should be followed by an analysis  of rea-
gent water to check for cross contamination.
For samples containing large amounts of
water-soluble  materials,  suspended  solids,
high boiling compounds or high pureeable
levels, it may be necessary to wash the purg-
ing device with a detergent .solution, rinse, it
with distilled water, and then dry it in a 105
0 C oven  between  analyses.  The trap and
other parts of the system are also subject to
contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout.
and purging of the entire system may be re-
quired.

                 4.Safety

  4.1  The  toxiclty  or  carcinogenicity of
each reagent used  in this method has not
been precisely defined; however, each chemi-
cal compound should be  treated as a poten-
tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
the lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The  laboratory is responsible for
maintaining  a  current  awareness  file of
OSHA regulations regarding the safe han-
dling  of  the  chemicals  specified  in  this
methmd. A reference file  of material data
handling sheets should also be made avail-
able to all personnel involved in the chemi-
cal analysis. Additional references to labora-
tory safety are available and have been iden-
tified*-* for the information of the analyst.
  4.2.  The following parameters covered by
this method have been tentatively classified
as known or suspected, human or mamma-
lian  carcinogens:  benzene,  carbon  tetra-
chloride,  chloroform,   1,4-dichlorobenzene,
and  vinyl chloride. Primary standards of
these toxic compounds should be prepared in
a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas
respirator should be worn when the  analyst
handles high concentrations of these toxic
compounds.

         5. Apparatus and Materials

  5.1   Sampling equipment, for discrete sam-
 pling.
  5.1.1 Vial—25-mL  capacity  or   larger,
 equipped with a screw  cap with a hole in the
 center (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Deter-
 gent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water,
 and dry at 105 °C before use.
  5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced       ailicane
 (Pierce  #12722 or  equivalent). Detergent
                                         807

-------
wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and
dry at 106 *C for 1 Ix before nae.
  5,2  Purge and trap system—The purge and
trap system consists of three separate pieces
of equipment:  A purging device, trap,  and
doBorber. Several complete systems are now
commercially available.
  6.2.1 The purging device must be designed
to accept 5-mL samples with a water column
at least S cm deep. The gaseous head space
between the water column and the trap must
have a total volume of less than 15 mL. The
purge gas must pass though the water col-
umn as finely divided bubbles with a diame-
ter of less than 3 mm at  the  origin.  The
purge gas must be introduced no more than
5 mm from the base of the water column.
The purging device illustrated in Figure 1
meats theee design criteria.
 • 6.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long
and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105
in. The trap must be packed to contain the
following1 minimum lengths of adsorbents: 1.0
cm of methyl  silicone coated packing (Sec-
tion 6.3.2). 15  cm of 2,6-dyphenylene oxide
polymer (Section 6.3.1), and 8 cm of silica gel
(Section 6.3.3). The minimum specifications
for the trap are illustrated in Figure 2.
  5.2.3 The  desorber should be capable  of
rapidly heating the trap to 180 *C. The poly-
mer section of the trap should not be heated
higher than 180 *C and the remaining sec-
tions should not exceed 200 *C. The desorber
illustrated in  Figure 2 meets  these  design
criteria.
  6.2.4 The purge and  trap system may be
assembled as a separate unit or be coupled to
a gas chromatograph as  illustrated in Fig-
ures 3 and 4.
  6.3  GC/MS system:
  5.3.1  Gas  ohromatograph—An analytical
system  complete with a temperature pro-
 grammable gas chromatograph suitable for
 on-oolumn injection and  all required acces-
 sories including  syringes,  analytical col-
 umns, and gases.
   6.3.2 Column—6 ft long x 0.1 in  ID stain-
 less steel or glass, packed with 1% SP-1000
 on Carbopack B  (60/80  mesh) or equivalent.
 This column was used to develop the method
 performance   statements  in   Section  14.
 Guidelines  for the use of alternate, column
 packings are provided in Section 11.1.
   6.3.3 Mass spectrometer—Capable of scan-
 ning from 20 to 260 amu every 7 B or less, uti-
 lizing 70 V (nominal) electron  energy in the
 electron impact  lonization mode, and pro-
 ducing a mass spectrum which meets all the
 criteria in Table 2 when 50 ng of 4-bromofluo-
 robenzene (BFB) is injected through the  GC
 inlet.
   6.3.4  GC/MS interface—Any GC  to MS
 interface that gives  acceptable .calibration
 points at 50 ng or less per injection for each
 of the parameters of interest and achieves all
 acceptable performance criteria (Section 10)
 may be used.  GC to MS interfaces con-
structed of all glass or glass-lined materials
are recommended. Glass can be deactivated
by silanizing with dichlorodimethylsilane.
  5.3.5 Data system—A  computer system
must be interfaced to'the mass spectrometer
that allows the continuous acquisition and
storage on  machine-readable  media of all
mass spectra obtained throughout  the dura-
tion of -the chromatographic program.  The
computer must have software that allows
searching any GC/MS data file for specific m/
z (masses) and plotting suCh'm/z abundances
versus time or  scan number. This type of
plot is defined  as an Extracted Ion Current
Profile (EICP).  Software must also be avail-
able that allows integrating the abundance
in any EICP between specified time or scan
number limits.
  5.4  SyringeB-J-5-mL,  glass   hypodermic
with Luerlok tip (two each), if applicable to
the purging device.
  5.5  Micro syringes—25-jiL. 0.006 in. ID nee-
dle.
  5.6  Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer  ends
(three each).
  5.7  Syringe—5-mL, gas-tight with shut-off
valve.
  5.8  Bottle—15-mL. screw-cap,  with Teflon
cap liner.
  5.9  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.

                6. Reagents

  6.1  Reagent  water—Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in  which an interferent is
not observed at the  MDL of the parameters
of interest.
  6.1.1  Reagent water can be generated by
passing tap water through a carbon filter bed
containing about 1  Ib of activated carbon
(Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
  6.1.2  A    water   purification   system
(Millipore Super-Q  or equivalent) may  be
used 'to generate reagent water.
  6.1.3  Reagent water may also be prepared
by boiling water for 15 min. Subsequently,
while maintaining the temperature at 90 *C,
 bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through
 the water for  1 h. While still hot. transfer
 the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bot-
 tle, and seal with a  Teflon-lined septum and
 cap.
   6.2  Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
   6.3  Trap materials:
   6.3.1  2.6-Diphenylene   oxide   polymer—
 Tenax. (60/80 mesh), chromatographic  grade
 or equivalent.
   6.3.2 Methyl silicone packing—3% OV-1 on
 Chrbmosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
   6.3.3 Silica   gel—35/60  mesh,  Davison.
 grade-15 or equivalent.
   6.4 Methanol—Pesticide quality or equiv-
 alent.
   6.5 Stock    standard   solutions—Stock
  standard  solutions  may be  prepared from
  pure standard materials or purchased  as
  certified  solutions.  Prepare  stock standard
                                          808

-------
fcnvwonmenrai Hotecn
                 ido. App. A, main.
         to metfianol usisg aastysd liquids
or gaaes aa appropriate. Because of the tox-
ioity of some of the compounds, primary di-
lutlonB of these materials should be prepared
in a hood. A  NIOSH/MESA approved toxic
gms respirator should be used when the ana-
lyst handles high concentrations of such ma-
terials.
  6.5.1  Place about 9.8 mL of, methanol into
a 10-mli ground glass stoppered volumetric
flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered,
for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted
surfaces have  dried. Weigh the flask to the
nearest 0.1 mg.
  6.6.2  Add the assayed reference material:
  6.6.2.1 Liquids— Using  a  100-|iL syringe,
immediately add  two or more drops of as-
sayed reference material to the flask,  then
reweigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly
into the alcohol without contacting the neck
of the flask.
  6.5.2.2 Oases— To prepare  standards  for
any of the four halpcarbons that boil below
30   *C    (bromomethane,    chloroethane,
chloromethane. and vinyl chloride), fill a 5-
mL valved  gas-tight syringe with the  ref-
erence standard to the 5.0-mL mark. Lower
the needle to 6 mm above the methanol me-
niscus. Slowly introduce the reference stand-
ard above the surface of the liquid (the heavy
gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol). .
  6.5.3   Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper,
then  mix  by inverting the  flask  several
times. Calculate the concentration in |ig/|iL
from the net gain in weight. When compound
purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the
weight  may be used without correction to
calculate  the concentration  of the stock
standard.   Commercially  prepared   stock
standards may be used at any concentration
if they  are certified by the manufacturer or
by an Independent source.
  6.5.4  Transfer" the stock standard solution
into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store,
with minimal headspace,  at -10 to  ,-20 *C
and protect from light.
  6.5.5  Prepare fresh standards weekly for
the four gases and 2-chloroethylvinyl ether.
All other standards must be replaced after
one month, or sooner if  comparison with
check standards Indicates a problem.
  6.6  Secondary  dilution  standards— Using
stock solutions, prepare secondary dilution
standards in methanol that contain the com-
pounds of interest, either singly or mixed to-
gether. The  secondary  dilution  standards
should  be  prepared at  concentrations such
that the aqueous calibration standards pre-
pared in Section 7.3 will bracket the working
range  of the  analytical system. Secondary
dilution standards should  be stored with
minimal headspace and should be checked
frequently for signs of degradation or evapo-
ration, especially  just prior  to  preparing
calibration standards from them.
   6.7 Surrogate standard spiking  solution-
Select  a minimum of three surrogate com-
pounds from Table 3. Prepare stock standard
solutions  for each  surrogate standard  in
methanol as described in Section 6.5. Prepare
a surrogate standard spiking solution from
these stock standards at a concentration of
15 |ig/mL in water. Store the solutions at 4 *C
in Teflon-sealed glass containers with a min-
imum of headspace. The solutions should be
checked frequently for stability. The addi-
tion of 10 (ill of this solution of 5 mL of sam-
ple or standard is equivalent to a concentra-
tion of SO'iig/L of each surrogate standard.
  6.8  BFB Standard— Prepare a 25 pg/mL so-
lution of BFB in methanol.
  6.9  Quality  control  check  sample  con-
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration

  7.1  Assemble a purge and trap system that
meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Con-
dition the trap  overnight at 180  *C by
backflushing  with an inert gas flow of at
least 20 mlVmin. Condition  the trap for 10
min once daily prior to use.
  7.2  Connect the purge and trap system to
a   gas  chromatograph.  The gas  chro-
matograph must be operated using tempera-
ture and flow rate conditions equivalent to
those given in Table 1.
  7.3  Internal  standard  calibration proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select three or  more internal standards that
are  similar in analytical behavior to  the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the  internal standard is not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Some rec-
ommended internal  standards are listed in
Tables.
  7.3.1 Prepare calibration  standards  at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 |iL of
one or more secondary dilution standards to
50,  250. or 500 mL of reagent water. A 25-pL
syringe with a 0.008 in. ID needle should be
used for this operation. One of the calibra-
tion standards  should be at a  concentration
near, but above, the MDL (Table  1) and the
other concentrations should correspond to
the expected range of concentrations found
in real samples or should define the working
range of the GC/M8 system. These aqueous
standards n^" be stored up to 24 h, if held in
sealed vials with zero headspace as described
in Section 9.2. If not so stored, they must be
discarded after 1 h.
  7.3.2  Prepare a spiking solution  contain-
ing each of the internal standards using the
procedures described in Sections 6.5 and 6.6.
It is recommended that  the secondary dilu-
tion standard be prepared at a concentration
of  15  |ig/mL  of  each   internal  standard
compound. The addition of 10 |iL of this
standard  to 5.0 mL  of sample or calibration
standard would be equivalent to 30 pg/L.
  7.3.3  Analyze  each calibration  standard
according to Section 11, adding 10 |iL of in-
                                         809

-------
ternal standard spiking: solution directly to
the syringe (Section 11.4). Tabulate the area
response of the characteristic m/z against
concentration for each compound and inter-
nal standard, and calculate response  factors
(RF) for each compound using Equation 1.

                    (A.)(Ch)
                    (Ak)(C.)


                               Equation 1
where:
  AjsArea of the characteristic m/z for the
    parameter to be measured. *
  Ata3Area of the characteristic m/z for the
    inernal standard.
  (^Concentration of the internal standard.
  Ci«Conoentratton of the parameter to be
    measured.
If the RF value over the working range is a
constant (<35% RSD), the RF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average RF  can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults can be used to plot a calibration -curve
of response ratios. Aw'Aj., vs. RF.
  7.4  The working calibration curve or RF
must be verified on each working day by the
measurement of a QC check sample.
  7.4.1   Prepare the QC check sample as de-
scribed in Section 8.2.2.
  7.4.2   Analyze the QC check sample accord-
ing to the method beginning in Section 10.
  7.4.3   For each parameter, compare  the re-
sponse  (Q) with the corresponding calibra-
tion acceptance criteria found in Table 5. If
the responses for all parameters of interest
fall within the designated ranges, analysis of
actual samples can begin. If any individual Q
falls outside the range, proceed according to
Section 7.4.4.
  Nome The large number of parameters in
Table  6 present  a substantial probability
that one or more will not meet the calibra- •
tion acceptance criteria when all parameters
are analyzed.
  7.4.4  Repeat the test only for those pa-
rameters that failed to meet the calibration
acceptance criteria. If the response for a pa-
rameter does not fall  within the range in
this second test, a new calibration curve or
RF must be prepared for that parameter ac-
cording to Section 7.3.

             8. Quality Control

  8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality con-
trol program. The minimum requirements of
this program consist of an initial demonstra-
tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data  quality
checks are compared with established  per-
formance criteria to determine if the results
   of analyses meet the performance character-
   istics of the method. When results of sample
   spikes indicate  atypical  method  perform-
   ance, a quality control check standard must
   be analyzed to confirm that the  measure-
   ments were performed In an in-control mode
   of operation.                              •
     8.1.1  The analyst must make an initial,
   one-time,  demonstration  of  the ability  to
   generate acceptable accuracy and  precision
   with this method. This ability is established
   as described in Section 8.2.
     8.1.2  In  recognition of advances that are
   occurring in chromatography, the analyst is
   permitted  certain options (detailed in Sec-
   tion 11.1) to improve the separations or lower
   the cost of measurements. Each time such a
   modification is matte to the method, the ana-
   lyst  is required to repeat the procedure  in
   Section 8.2.
     8.1.3  Each day, the analyst must analyze a
   reagent water blank  to demonstrate  that
   interferences from the analytical system are
   under control.
     8.1.4  The laboratory must,  on an ongoing
   basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 5% of
   all samples to  monitor and evaluate labora-
   tory  data quality.  This  procedure  is de-
   scribed in Section 8.3.
     8.1.5  The laboratory must,  on an ongoing
   basis, demonstrate through the analyses  of
   quality control check standards that the op-
   eration of the measurement system is in con-
   trol.  This  procedure is described in Section
   8.4.  The frequency  of the check  standard
   analyses is equivalent to 5%  of all samples
   analyzed but may be reduced  if spike recov-
   eries  from samples (Section  8.3) meet all
   specified quality control criteria.
     8.1.6  The laboratory must  spike all sam-
   ples  with  surrogate standards to monitor
   continuing laboratory  performance.  This
   procedure is described in Section 8.6.
     8.1.7  The laboratory must  maintain per-
   formance records to document the quality of
   data that is generated. This procedure is de-
   scribed in Section 8.6.
     8.2  To establish the ability to  generate
   acceptable accuracy and precision,'the ana-
   lyst must perform the following operations.
     8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check'sample
   concentrate is required containing each pa-
   rameter of Interest at a concentration of 10
   Mg/mL in  methanol. The  QC  check sample
   concentrate must be obtained from the U.S.
   Environmental Protection Agency. Environ-
   mental Monitoring and Support Laboratory
   in Cincinnati. Ohio, if available. If not avail-
   able  from  that source, the QC check sample
   concentrate must be obtained from another
   external source. If not available from either
   source above,  the  QC  check sample con-
   centrate must  be prepared by the laboratory
   using stock standards prepared independ-
   ently from those used for calibration.
     8.2.2 Prepare a QC  check sample to con-
   tain 20 pg/L of each parameter by adding 200
810

-------
EnvfeowiMfital Piulndluui
              Pt. 136, App. A. McSl. 624
pL> of QC ch«ok cunpto oonoaatrate to 100 TnT.
of reagent water.
  8.2.3 Analyse  four 5-mL  aliquots of the
well-mixed QC check sample according to
the method h«g
-------
  8.4.3  Compare the percent recovery (Fs)
for each parameter with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 5. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side 'the designated range,' the laboratory
performance for that parameter is judged to
be out of control,  and the problem must be
immediately  Identified  and corrected. The
analytical result for that parameter in the
unsplked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.6  As a quality control check, the labora-
tory must .spike all samples with the surro-
gate standard spiking solutions as described
in Section 11.4, and calculate the percent re-
covery of each surrogate compound.
  8.6  As part of the QC program for the lab-
oratory, method  accuracy  for wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be  maintained. After  the  analysis of five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3,
calculate the average  percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (a,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent recovery interval from P— 28p to
P •»• 2v If .Pjft90% and s,sio%, for example,
the accuracy interval  is expressed as 70-
110%. Update the accuracy assessment for
each parameter a regular basis  (e.g. after
each  five  to ten  new  accuracy  measure-
ments).
  8.7  It is recommended that the laboratory
adopt additional quality assurance practices
for use with  this method. The specific prac-
tices that are most productive depend upon
the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
the samples. Field duplicates may be 'ana-
lysed to assess the precision of the environ-
mental measurements.  Whenever  possible,
the laboratory should analyze standard ref-
erence materials and participate in relevant
performance  evaluation studies.

    9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                 Handling

  9.1  All samples must be iced or refrig-
erated from the time of collection until anal-
ysis. If the  sample contains residual chlo-
rine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10
mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5 ppm C12) to
the empty sample bottle Just prior to ship-
ping to the sampling site. EPA Methods 330.4
and 390.5 may be used for measurement of re-
sidual chlorine.* Field test kits are available
for this purpose.
   9.2 Grab  samples  must  be collected  in
 glass containers having a total volume of at
 least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle Just to
 overflowing  in such a manner that no air
 bubbles pass through the sample as the bot-
 tle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no
 air bubbles are entrapped in it. If preserva-
 tive has been added, shake vigorously for 1
 mln. M*<«fc«J'" the hermetic seal on the sam-
 ple bottle until time of analysis.
  9.3  Experimental evidence indicates that
some aromatic compounds, notably benzene.
toluene, and ethyl benzene are susceptible to
rapid biological degradation under certain
environmental   conditions.9  Refrigeration
alone may not be adequate to preserve these
compounds in wastewaters  for  more  than
seven days. For this reason,  a separate sam- .
pie should  be collected, acidified, and ana-
lyzed when these aromatics are to be deter-
mined. Collect about 500 mL of sample in a
clean container. Adjust the pH of the sample
to about 2  by adding 1+1 HC1 while stirring
vigorously. Check pH with narrow range (1.4
to 2.8) pH paper. Fill a sample container as
described in Section 9.2.
  9.4  All samples  must be analyzed within
14 days of collection.9

      10. Daily GC/MS Performance Tests

  10.1  At the beginning  of each day that
analyses are to be performed, the GC/MS sys-
tem must  be checked to see if acceptable
performance  criteria are achieved for BFB.*
The performance test must be passed before
any samples, blanks,  or standards are ana-
lyzed,  unless the  instrument has met the
DFTPP test described in Method 625 earlier
in the day.10
  10.2  These performance tests  require the
following instrumental parameters:
  Electron Energy: 70 V (nominal)
  Mass Range: 20 to 260 amu
  Scan Time: TO give at least  5 scans per
    peak but not to exceed 7 s per scan.
  10.3  At the beginning of each day. inject 2
|iT. of BFB solution directly on the column.
Alternatively, add 2 pL of BFB solution to
5.0 mli of reagent water or standard solution
and analyze  the solution according to sec-
tion 11. Obtain a background-corrected mass
spectrum of BFB  and confirm that all the
key m/z criteria in Table 2 are  achieved. If
all the criteria are not achieved, the analyst
must retune the mass spectrometer and re-
peat the test until all criteria are achieved.

  11. Sample Purging and Gas Chromatography

   11.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended
operating  conditions  for  the  gas  chro-
matograph. Included in this table are reten-
tion times and MDL that  can  be  achieved
under these  conditions. An  example of the
separations  achieved by  this  column  is
shown in Figure 5. Other  packed columns or
 chromatographic conditions may be used  if
 the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
   11.2 After  achieving the  key m/z  abun-
 dance criteria in Section 10, calibrate the
 system daly as described in Section 7.
   11.3 Adjust the purge  gas (helium) flow
 rate to  40 mL/min. Attach  the trap inlet to
 the purging device, and  set the purge  and
 trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the sy-
 ringe valve located  on the purging device
 sample introduction needle.
                                          812

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  11.4  Allow the sample to come to ambient
temperature prior to introducing It Into the
syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL sy-
ringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open
the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully
pour the sample into the syringe  barrel to
Just short  of overflowing. Replace the sy-
ringe plunger and compress the sample. Open
the syringe valve and vent any residual air
while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL.
Since this  process of taking an aliquot de-
stroys  the  validity  of the sample for future
analysis, the analyst should fill a second sy-
ringe at this time to protect against possible
loss of data. Add 10.0 jiL of the surrogate
spiking solution (Section 6.7) and 10.0 uL of
the internal standard spiking solution (Sec-
tion 7.3.2) through the valve bore, then close
the valve. The surrogate and internal stand-
ards may be mixed and added as a single
spiking solution.
  11.5  Attach the syringe-syringe  valve as-
sembly to the syringe valve on the purging
device. Open  the syringe  valves and  inject
the sample into the purging chamber.
  .11.6  Close both valves and purge the sam-
ple for 11.0±0.1 min at ambient temperature.
  11.7  After the 11-min purge time, attach
the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the
purge and  trap system  to the desorb mode
(Figure 4). and begin  to  temperature pro-
gram the gas chromatograph. Introduce the
trapped materials to the GO column by rap-
idly heating  the  trap to  IPO  *C  while
backflushing the trap with an Inert gas be-
tween 20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid
heating of  the trap cannot be achieved, the
OC cloumn must be used as a secondary trap
by cooling  it to 30 *C (subamblent  tempera-
ture, if problems persist) instead of the ini-
tial program temperature of 45 *C.
  11.8  While the trap is being desorbed into
the gas chromatograph. empty the purging
chamber using the  sample introduction sy-
ringe.  Wash  the  chamber with two 5-mL
flushes of reagent water.
  11.9  After desorbing the sample for 4 min.
recondition the trap by returning the purge
and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15
s then close the syringe valve on the purging
device  to begin gas flow through  the trap.
The trap temperature should be maintained
at 180 °C. After approximately 7 min. turn
off the trap  heater and  open the syringe
valve to stop the gas flow through the trap.
When the trap is cool, the next sample can
be analyzed.                         ^
  11.10  If the response  for any m/z exceeds
the working range of the system, prepare a
dilution  of the sample  with reagent  water
from the aliquot in the second syringe and
reanalyze.

         12. Qualitative Identification

  12.1  Obtain EICPs for  the primary  m/z
(Table 4) and at least two secondary masses
for each parameter of interest. The following
              Pt. 136, App. A. Meth. 624

criteria must be met to make a qualitative
identification:
  12.1.1  The characteristic masses  of each
parameter of interest must maximize in the
same or within one scan of each other.
i  12.1.2  The retention time must fall within
±30 s of the retention time of the authentic
compound.
  12.1.3  The relative peak  heights of  the
three characteristic masses in the EICPs
must fall within ± 20%  of the relative inten-
sities of these masses in a reference mass
spectrum. The reference mass spectrum  can
be obtained from a standard analyzed in the
GC/MS system or from a reference library.
  12.2  Structural isomers  that  have very
similar mass spectra and less than 30 s  dif-
ference in retention time, can be explicitly
identified only if the resolution between au-
thentic isomers in a standard mix is accept-
able. Acceptable resolution Is achieved if the
baseline to valley height between the  Iso-
mers is less than 25% of the sum of the two
peak heights. Otherwise,  structural  Isomers
are identified as isomeric pairs.

              13. Calculations

  13.1  When a parameter has.been identi-
fied, the  quantitation of  that  parameter
should be based on the integrated abundance
from the EICP of the primary characteristic
m/z given  in Table 4. If the sample produces
an interference for  the primary m/z, use a
secondary characteristic m/z to quantitate.
  Calculate the concentration in the sample
using the response factor (RF) determined in
Section 7.3.3 and Equation 2.
      Concentration (|ig/L)=
(A.KCU)

(AfXRF)
                               Equation 2
where:
  Aa=Area of the characteristic m/z for the
   parameter or surrogate standard to be
   measured.
  Ata=Area of the characteristic m/z for the
   internal standard.
  Cte=Concentration of the internal  stand-
   ard.
  13.2  Report results in \igfL without correc-
tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.

          14. Method Performance

  14.1  The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.1  The MDL concentrations  listed  in
Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.11
Similar  results were  achieved  using rep-
resentative Wastewaters. The MDL actually
                                         813

-------
achieved in a given analysis  will vary de-
pending on instrument sensitivity and ma-
trix effects.
  14.2  ThiB method was tested by 15 labora-
tories using reagent water,  drinking water,
surface water, and  industrial wastewaters
spiked at six concentrations over the range
&-600 ng/L.12 Single operator precision,  over-
all precision, and  method accuracy  were
found to be directly related to the concentra-
tion of the parameter and essentially  inde-
pen4ent of the sample matrix. Linear  equa-
tions to describe these relationships are pre-
sented in Table 5.

               REFERENCES

  1. 40 CPB part 136, appendix B.
  2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. "De-
termining Volatile Organics at Microgram-
per-Litre  Levels by Gas Chromatography,"
Journal American Water Works Association, 66,
739 (1874).
  3. Bellar,  T.A.,  and Lichtenberg,  J.J.
"Semi-Automated  Heatispace  Analysis   of
Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters  for
Purgeabje Volatile  Organic Compounds, "
Measurement of Organic Pollutants in Water
and Wastewater,  CiE.  Van  Hall,  editor.
American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, PA. Special Technical Publica-
tion 683,1978.
  4. "Carcinogens—Working With Carcino-
gens," Department of Health, Education, and
Welfare,  Public Health Service. Center for
Disease Control. National Institute for Occu-
pational  Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-308, August 1977.
  5. "OSHA Safety  and Health Standards,
General Industry," (29 CPB part 1910), Occu-
pational  Safety and  Health Administration,
OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
   6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion,  Committee  oh Chemical Safety,  3rd
Edition, 1979.'.
   7. Provost. L.P., and Elder, R.S. "Interpre-
 tation of Percent Recovery Data," American
 Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1963). (The  value  2.44
 used in the  equation in Section 8.2.3  is two
 times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
   8. "Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric,  DPD-FAS)
 and  330.5  (Spectrophotometric,  DPD)  for
 Chlorine, Total  Residual,"  Methods   for
 Chemical Analysis  of Water  and Wastes,
 EPA-600/4-79-020,  U.S.  Environmental Pro-
 tection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
 and  Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Ohio
 45268, March 1979.
   9.  Budde,  W.L..  and Eichelberger, J.W.
 "Performance Tests for the Evaluation of
 Computerized  Eas  Chromatography/Mass
 Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories."
 EPA-60GY4-80-025,  U.S. Environmental  Pro-
 tection  Agency, Environmental Monitoring
 and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Ohio
 45288, April I960.
  10. Eichelberger,  J.W.. Harris. L.E.,  and
Budde, W.L. "Reference Compound to Cali-
brate ion Abundance Measurement in  Gas
Chromatography—Mass  Spectrometry Sys-
tems,"  Analytical  Chemistry,  47,  995-1000
(1975).
  11. "Method Detection Limit for Methods
624 and 625," Olynyk, P., Budde. W.L.,  and
Eichelberger, J.W. Unpublished report, May
14,1980.
  12. "EPA  Method Study '29 EPA Method
624—Purgeables," EPA 600/4-84-054. National
Technical Information Service, PB84-209915,
Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
  13."Method Performance  Data for Method
624," Memorandum  from R. Slater and T.
Pressley,  U.S.  Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
port Laboratory. Cincinnati, Ohio 45266, Jan-
uary 17,1984.

 TABLE 1—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS  AND
         METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
Parameter
ChkVomemane .~....~~...~~.~..~..«.
Bromomettiane ~..~~._~.~~.~~~~.~
Vinyl chloride ~~...~~~..~~~..~..~.—
Chloroethane ~»~~~~~~~. ~~..~~



1 l-0tehtof06ttwno 	 	 	 •
trant-l^-Ofchtofoethenc m-» ».».«
Chloroform ... ... .... ~~«
1/M-Trfchtoroettiana — -.. 	
n^^^-SSli!^^
1.2-Dfchloropfoane 	
ets-13-Oidiloropcopeoe 	

n^uvur lil/wrwniMhnnii
1.1.2-Trichloroethane 	
tnns-144Xchloropropflne 	
|-Cjtoo«ttiyMn(yl ether . -•"•"••
1.1^2-Tetrachloroethane 	
Tetrachloroethene ... 	
Tohjene . ~~» 	 ' ~~~.~
Chlorobenzene ... 	 . — . 	
Ethyl benzene 	
1.3-Dtehtorebenztine 	 •
1,2-Dichlorobenzene . — . 	 . 	
1,+Oichlorobenzene 	
Retention
time (min)
2.3
3.1
3.8
4.6
6.4
84
9.0
10.1
104
11.4
12.1
13.4
• 137
144
15.7
15.9
164
17.0
17.1
17.2
186
194
22.1
22J2
234
24.6
26.4
33.9
35.0
35.4
Method
detection
Hmit(no/L)
nd
nd
nd
nd
24
nd
24
4.7
14
14
24
34
24
22
6.0
5.0
14
4A
3.1
5.0
nd
nd
4.7
64
4.1
6.0
6.0
nd
nd
nd
   Column conditions: Carbopak B (60/80 mean) coated wHh
 1% SP-1000 packed in a 6 tt by 0.1 in. ID otua column with
 helium earner gas el 30 mUmin. How rate. Co^ntempera-
 _ire held at 45*0 for 3 min., then prognimmed at 8*C/min. to
 22CTC and held for 15 min.
   nd-not determined.

   TABLE 2-—BFB KEY M/Z ABUNDANCE CRITERIA
Mass
50 .................~........™—— — •••
75 „ 	 „; 	 ~ 	 ~~....
95 .__™..~....~.~....—.~«~~««
m/z Abundance criteria
15 to 40% of mass 95.
30 to 60% of mass 95.
Base Peek. 100% Relative
Abundance.
                                           814

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

    TABLE 2—BFB KEY M/Z ABUNDANCE
          CRITERIA—Continued
         Pt. 136. App. A. Mctti. 624

TABLE 4—CHARACTEFHSHC MASSES FOR
  PURQEABLE ORQANICS—Continued
Mass
aa 	 „-„„., -
173 	 , 	 J4^_
174 	 	 	
ITS . 	 	 , 	 ^
1 76 	
177 ...........



5 to 9K of mass 95.
<2% of mass 174.
>60% of mass 95.
5 to 9% of mass 174.
>95%bul< 101% o( mass
174.
5 to 9% of mass 176.
   TABLE 3—SUGGESTED SURROGATE AND
          INTERNAL STANDARDS
Compound
Benzene d-6 ..........................
4-eromofluorobenzane — .....
1.2-Dicnloreemane•_ !___ £____
12-Dichloroeth8ne 	
1,1.1-Trichtoroethane 	 _ ..
Carbon tetrachtoride 	 ._.
Bremodichlorornethane ..„...„._„
iiZ-UKtuorepropana ....„.._.„„.„.
trana-i ,3-uicniaropropene ............
Trichtoroethene — . 	
Benzene ....................................
OixomocMoremethane .... — .. 	 .
1,12-Trichtoroethane 	 .
cis-i ,^-LncnioroprepflnB .._.......„..
2-Chtoroethylvinyl after 	 . 	
1.122-Tetrachloroetriane 	
i OlUOOO •«•»•••*•»«•••*••*»«••••«••*•»•***•
Chtorobanzene .......... „............_..
Ethyl benzene ......... 	 	 . 	
1,3-Oichlorobenzene 	 „.„
12-Otohlorobenzene 	 	 ._.._.
1,4-DichIorobenzene . .. — ............
Pri-
mary
62
64

101
96
63
96
83
96
97
117
127
112
75
130
78
127
97
75
106
173
168
164
92
112
106
146
146
146

SeGGTuty
64.
66.
AS 
-------
        TABLE 5—CALIBRATION AND QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 624*—Continued
. tamttr.
1 1.2-TfkJJorosUtan*
TricWixtHrthtn* 	 	 	 	 , 	 	 _ 	 _........,..... 	

\flnyi nhinrirte 	 : 	 	 	 	 	 .....::,.,„
Range forQ
134-26.7
94-30.4
04-392
Limit for
54
64
104
20.0
Range for X
144-27.1
184-274
a9-314
0-434
O-CoocertnUion measured in QC check samcta. in uo/L (Section 744).
Range for P,
ft <%)
52-150
71-157
17-181
D-281

  ••Standard deviation of four recovery meaaurementiVh pg/L (Section 62.4).
  X-Avsrage recovery of four recovery measurements, in uoTL (Section 82.4).
  P, P^Paroerrt recovery measured, (section 8.32, Section 8.42).
  D«Oi»artarJ; raau* mi* be greater than zero.
  •Criteria were caiculeled assuming a QC check sample concentration of 20 pg/l_
  Ncrre These criteria are based dreetiy upon the method performance data in Table 6. Where necessary, the limits for recov-
ery have been broadened to assure appfcabmty of the Hmte to coreenl/aUons betow those used to develop Table 6.

  TABLE 6—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCENTRATION—METHOD 624
                          Parameter
 Accuracy, as
 recovery, X'
                                                                Single analyst
                                                                 precision, a/
 Over
 •ton,
Benzene
Chtoroethane,
DtoromocWoromethane.
trans-12.-Otehtoroethene
Etrryi benzene
Toluene
1.1.1-
Trichioroflouomethaoe
VJnyl chloride	
0.93C+2.00
1.03C-148
1.180-245
1.000
1.100-1.68
o.eec+228
1.180+041
1.000
0.930+0.33
1.03C+041
1.010-043
0.94C+4.47
1.060+1.68
0.94C+4.47
1.050+046
1.020+0.45
i.i2C+aei
1.05C+0.03
1.00C
1.00C
1.000
0.980+2.48
047C+148
093C+1.76
1.06C+0.60
0.98C+2.03
1.08C+0.73
0.950+1.71
1.04C+227
0.990+0.39
1.000
                                                                026X-1.74
                                                                0.15X4049
                                                                0.12X4046
                                                                0.43X
                                                                0.12X4025
                                                                0.16X-0.09
                                                                0.14X42.78
                                                                0.62X
                                                                0.16X4022
                                                                047X42.14
                                                                0.17X-0.18
                                                                022X-1.45
                                                                0.14X-0.48
                                                                022X-1.45
                                                                0.13X-045
                                                                0.17X-042
                                                                0.17X+146
                                                                ai4X+049
                                                                043X
                                                                048X
                                                                025X
                                                                0.14X41.00
                                                                0.15X41.07
                                                                0.16X4046
                                                                0.13X-0.18
                                                                0.15X-0.71
                                                                0.12X-0.15
                                                                0.14X40.02
                                                                0.13X4046
                                                                0.33X-1.48
                                                                0.48X
025X-143
020X41.13
0.17X4148
048X
ai 1X4047
026X-1.92
029X41.75
044X
0.18X40.16
048X40.43
0.17X+0.49
040X-120
0.18X-042
040X-120
0.18X+0.47
021X-048
0.43X-022
0.19X+0.17
0.45X
a52X
044X
026X-1.72
042X44.00
020X40.41
0.16X-0.45
021X-049
0.18X4040
0.12X4049
044X-049
0.65X
recovery for one or i
                                          rrts of a sample containing a <
       mtratton of C, in
  S'-Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average coraerrtntfon found ofxTin pg/L.
  SVExpeciad kiteriaborakxy standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found ofX, in pg/L '
  C-True value for the concentration. In pg/L.
  X-Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concenUaUon of C. In pg/L.
  •Estimaisa based upon the performance in a single laboratory.15
  »Due to chromstographta n»a/u&on problems, performance statements for these isomers are based upon the sums of their
concentrations.
                                                 816

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                   Pt. 136. App. A. MsSh. 624
      OPTIONAL
      FOAM
      TRAP
  0. D. EXIT
EXIT % IN.
    0. D.
                     —14MM 0. D.

                     INLET tt IN.
                           0. D,
   SAMPLE INLET

   2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
   17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

   6MM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM

   ^~10MM. 0. D.    1/16 IN. O.D.
                   y STAINLESS STEEL
                               INLET
                                IN. 0. D.
     10MM GLASS FRIT
     MEDIUM POROSITY
                                           13X MOLECULAR
                                           SIEVE PURGE
                                           GAS FILTER
                                             PURGE GAS
                                             aow
                                             CONTROL
                  Figure 1. Purging device.
                             817

-------
     PACKING PROCEDURE
    GLASS -
    WOOL 5MM
GRADE 15 o
SILICA Ga8CM
  TENAX 15CM
  3% OV-1
  GLASS
  WOOL
5MM

                     CONSTRUCTION
                                COMPRESSION
                                FITTING NUT
                                AND FERRULES
                                 14FT. 7^/FOOT
                                 RESISTANCE WIRE
                                 WRAPPED SOLID
                                  THERMOCOUPLE/
                                  CONTROLLER
                                  SENSOR
   TRAP INLET
                                   ELECTRONIC
                                   TEMPERATURE
                                   CONTROL
                                   AND
                                   PYROMETER
                                         TUBING 25CM
                                         0.105 IN. I.D.
                                         0.125 IN. O.D.
                                         STAINLESS STE
      Figure 2. Trap packings and construction to include
              desorb capability.
                            818

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Pt. 136. App. A.
                                    624
        GAS FLO* CONTROL
PRESSURE REGULATOR
            \
 PURGE GAS
 FLOW CONTROL XT"
 13X MOLECULAR
 SIEVE FILTER
LIQUID INJECTION PORTS
                  COLUMN OVEN
                <-- CONFIRMATORY COLUMN
                  TO DETECTOR
               |  ^-ANALYTICAL COLUMN
        OPTIONAL 4-PORT COLUMN
 « o««,.  SELECTION VALVE
 *%?Sl   .TRAP INLET
  VALVE  _/  -RESISTANCE WIRE
                                                          CONTROL
          PURGING
          DEVICE
                                            Nota:ALL LINES BETWEEN
                                                TRAP AND GC
                                                SHOULD BE HEATED
                                                TO80X
         Figure 3. Purge and trap system - purge mode.
          CARRIER GAS
          FLOW CONTROL   LIQUID INJECTION PORTS
    PRESSURE
    REGULATOR
                 COLUMN OVEN
                   CONFIRMATORY COLUMN
 PURGE GAS  . _
 FLOW CONTROL  ,
   13X MOLECULAR
   SIEVE FILTER"
       	ANALYTICAL COLUMN
     OPTIONAL 4-PORT COLUMN
     SaECTION VALVE
6-PORT  TRAP INLET
VALVE  J DISTANCE WIRE  H£ATER

 S^ itt7    im"?3^^^ CONTROL
                                    PURGING
                                    DEVICE
                    Note:
                    ALL LINES BETWEEN
                    TRAP AND GC
                    SHOULD BE HEATED
                    TO 95°C.
         Figure 4. Purge and trap system - desorb mode.
                                819

-------
COLUMN: 1% SP-1000 ON CARBOPACK:B
PHOGRAM: 45°C FOR 3 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 220°C
DETECTOR: MASS .SPECTROMETER
                          _L
                                         J_
                                              _L
                      10   12   14   16    18    20

                           RETENTION TIME. MIN.
22
24
26
                                                                 28
Figure 5. Gas ihromatogram of volatile organics.
                                  820

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Ft. 136, App. A, M®Hh. 625
   METHOD 625—BABE/NEUTRALS AND ACIDS

          1. Scope and Application

  1.1  This method covers the determination
of a number of organic compounds that are
partitioned into an organic solvent and are
amenable to gas chromatography. The pa-
rameters  listed  in  Tables 1 and 2  may be
qualitatively and quantitatively determined
using this method.
  1.2  The method may be extended to in-
clude the parameters listed in Table 3. Benzi-
dlne can be subject to oxidative losses during
solvent concentration. Under the alkaline
conditions of the extraction step, a-BHC, y-
BHC. endosulfan 1 and n. and endrin are sub-
ject          to           decomposition.
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene  is   subject  to
thermal decomposition in the inlet of the gas
chromatograph.  chemical reaction  in ace-
tone solution, and photochemical decomposi-
tion. N-nitrosodimethylamine is difficult to
separate  from  the solvent   under  the
chromatographic conditions  described.  N-
nitrosodlphenylamine decomposes in the gas
chromatographic inlet and cannot be sepa-
rated  from dlphenylamine. The preferred
method for each of these parameters is listed
in Table 3.
  1.3  This is a gas  chromatographic/mass
spectrometry (GC/MS) method* "applicable
to the determination of the compounds listed
in Tables 1. 2, and 3 in municipal and indus-
trial  discharges as provided under 40 CFR
136.1.
  1.4  The method detection limit (MDL. de-
fined in Section 16.1)' for each parameter is
listed in Tables 4 and 5. The MDL for a spe-
cific wastewater may differ from those list-
ed, depending  upon  the nature of  inter-
ferences In the sample matrix.
  1.5  Any modification  to this method, be-
yond those expressly permitted, shall be con-
sidered as a  major modification subject to
application and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5. De-
pending upon the nature of the modification
and the extent of intended use, the applicant
may  be required to  demonstrate that the
modifications will produce equivalent results
when applied to relevant wastewaters.
  1.6  This method is restricted to use by or
under the supervision  of analysts experi-
enced in  the use  of a  gas  chromatograph/
mass spectrometer and in the interpretation
of mass spectra. Each  analyst must dem-
onstrate the ability to  generate acceptable
results with this method using the procedure
described in Section 8.2.

           2. Summary of Method

  2.1 A measured volume of sample, approxi-
mately 1-L, is serially extracted with meth-
ylene chloride at a pH  greater than 11 and
again at a pH less than 2 using a separatory
funnel or a continuous extractor.8 The meth-
ylene chloride extract is dried, concentrated
to a volume of 1 mL, and analyzed by GC/MS.
Qualitative identification of the parameters
in the extract is performed using the reten-
tion time  and the  relative abundance  of
three characteristic  masses  (m/z).  Quan-
titative analysis is performed using internal
standard techniques  with  a  single  char-
acteristic m/z.

              3. Interferences
  3.1  Method  interferences  may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glass-
ware, and other sample processing hardware
that lead to discrete artifacts  and/or -ele-
vated baselines in the total ion current pro-
files.  All of these materials must be  rou-
tinely demonstrated  to  be free from inter-
ferences under the conditions of the analysis
by running laboratory reagent blanks as de-
scribed in Section 8.1.3.
  3.1.1  Glassware  must  be  scrupulously
cleaned.3 Clean all glassware as soon as pos-
sible after use by rinsing with the last sol-
vent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be fol-
lowed by detergent washing with hot water,
and  rinses with tap water  and  distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 *C
for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable ma-
terials, such as PCBs. may not be eliminated
by this treatment. Solvent rinses with ace*
tone and pesticide quality hexaae may  be
substituted for the muffle  furnace heating.
Thmrough rinsing with such solvents usually
«»11miT?«M?«  PCS  interference. Volumetric
ware should not be heated in  a muffle fur-
nace. After drying and cooling, glassware
should be sealed and stored in a clean envi-
ronment to prevent any accumulation  of
dust or other- contaminants. Store inverted
or capped with aluminum foil.
  3.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to minimize interference prob-
lems. Purification of solvents by distillation
in all-glass systems may be required.
  3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused by
contaminants that are co-extracted from the
sample. The extent of matrix interferences
will vary considerably from source to source,
depending upon the nature and diversity of
the industrial complex or municipality being
sampled.
  3.3  The base-neutral extraction may cause
significantly reduced recovery of phenol, 2-
methylphenol, and 2.4-dimethylphenol. The
analyst must recognize that results obtained
under these conditions  are minimum  con-
centrations.
  3.4  The packed gas chromatographic col-
umns recommended  for the basic fraction
may not exhibit sufficient resolution for cer-
tain isomerlc pairs including the following:
anthracene and phenanthrene; chrysene and
benzo(a)anthracene;                    and
benzo(b)fluoranthene                   and
benzo(k)fiuoranthene.       The       gas
                                         821

-------
 chromatographlc retention  time and mass
 spectra for these pairs of compounds are not
 sufficiently different  to make  an unambig-
 uous  Identification. Alternative  techniques
 should be used to identify and quantify these
 specific compounds, such as Method 610.
 .  3.5  In samples that contain an inordinate
 number of interferences, the use of chemical
 iordzation (CI) mass spectrometry may make
 identification  easier.  Tables 6  and 7  give
 characteristic  CI ions for most of the com-
 pounds covered by this method. The use of CI
 mass  spectrometry to support electron ion-
 izatlon (El) mass spectrometry is encouraged
 but not required.

                 4. Safety

   4.1  The  tozicity or  carcinogenicity of
 each reagent used  in  this method have not
* been precisely  defined; however, each chemi-
 cal compound  should be treated as a poten-
 tial health hazard. From this viewpoint, ex-
 posure to these chemicals must be reduced to
 the lowest possible level by whatever means
 available. The laboratory  is responsible for
 maintaining a,  current  awareness  file of
 OSHA regulations  regarding the safe han-
 dling of the chemicals  specified in this meth-
 od. A reference file of material data handling
 sheets should also  be  made available to all
 personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
 Additional  references  to laboratory safety
 are available and have been identified*-* for
 the information of the  analyst.
   4.2  The following parameters covered by
 this method have been tentatively classified
 as known or suspected, human or mamma-
 lian carcinogens: benzo(a)anthracene>  benzi-
 dine,  S.S'-dichlorobenzidlne,  benzo(a)pyrene,
 a-BHC,      p-BHC,     5-BHC,      y-BHC,
 dlbenzo(a,h)anthracene,                  N-
 nitrosodimethylamine, 4,4'-DDT,  and poly-
 chlorinated  biphenyls   (PCBs).  Primary
 standards of these toxic  compounds should
 be prepared in a hood. A  NIOSH/MESA ap-
 proved toxic gas respirator should be  worn
 when  the analyst  handles high concentra-
 tions of these toxic compounds.

          5. Apparatus and Materials

   5.1  Sampling  equipment,  for  discrete or
 composit sampling.
   5.1.1  Grab sample  bottle—1-L or  1-gt,
 amber glass, fitted with  a screw cap  lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Tef-
 lon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles are  not  available,  protect  samples
 from light. The bottle  and cap liner must be
 washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
 chloride, and dried before use  to minimize
 contamination.
   5.1.2 Automatic  sampler  (optional)—The
 sampler must incorporate  glass sample con-
 tainers for the collection  of a  minimum of
 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
 kept refrigerated at 4  *C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses
a  peristaltic pump, a  minimum  length  of
compressible silicone rubber tubing may  be
used, before use, however, the compressible
tubing  should' be throughly  rinsed with
methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimize the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect flow propor-
tional composites.
  5.2  Glassware (All specifications are sug-
gested. Catalog numbers are included for  il-
lustration only.):
  5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon
stopcock.
  5.2.2 Drying   column—Chrpmatographic
column, 19 mm ID, with coarse frit
  5.2.3 Concentrator   tube,   Kuderna-Dan-
ish—10-mL, graduated  (Kontes K-570050-1025
or equivalent). Calibration must be checked
at the volumes employed in the test. Ground
glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation
of extracts.
  5.2.4  Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—
500-mL (Kontes K-57001-0500  or equivalent).
Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
  5.2.5  Snyder  column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Three  all  macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121  or
equivalent)..
  5.2.6  Snyder  column,  Kuderna-Danish—
Two-ball  macro (Kontes  K-569001-0219  or
equivalent).
  5.2.7  Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with
Teflon-lined screw cap.
  5.2.8  Continuous liquid—liquid extractor-
Equipped  with Teflon  or  glass connecting
joints and stopcocks requiring  no lubrica-
tion. (Hershberg-Wolf Extractor, Ace  Glass
Company.   Vlneland,  N.J.,  P/N  6841-10  or
equivalent.)
  5.3  Boiling   chips—Approximately  10/40
mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 min of Soxhlet ex-
tract with methylene chloride.
  5.4  Water bath—Heated, with  concentric
ring cover, capable of  temperature control
(±2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.
  5.5  Balance—Analytical, capable of accu-
rately weighing 0.0001 g.
  5.6  GC/MS system:
  5.6.1  Gas  Chromatbgraph—An  analytical
system  complete -with  a temperature pro-
grammable gas chromatograph  and all re-
quired accessores including syringes, analyt-
ical  columns, and gases. The injection port
must be designed • for  on-column injection
when using packed columns and for splitless
Injection when using capillary columns.
  5.6.2  Column for base/neutrals—1.8 m long
x 2 mm ID glass, packed with 3% SP-2250  on
Supelcoport  (100/120 mesh)  or  equivalent.
This column was used to develop the method
performance   statements , in  Section   16.
Guidelines for  the use  of alternate column
packings are provided in Section 13.1.
  5.6.3  Column for acids—1.8 m long x 2 mm
ID glass,  packed with 1%  SP-1240DA  on
Supelcoport  (100/120 mesh)  or equivalent.
                                          822

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency
              Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 625
This column was used to develop the method
performance  statements  In   Section   16.
Guidelines for the use of alternate column
packings are given in Section 13.1.
  5.6.4  Mass spectrometer—Capable of scan-
ning from 35 to 450 amu every 7 s or less, uti-
lizing a 70 V (nominal) electron energy in the
electron impact ionization mode, and  pro-
ducing a mass spectrum which meets all the
criteria   in  Table  9   when  50   ng  of
decafluorotriphenyl   phosphine   (DFTPP;
bis(perfluorophenyl) phenyl phosphine) is in-
jected through the GO inlet. .
  5.6.5  GC/MS  interface—Any  OC to  MS
Interface that gives acceptable calibration
points at 50 ng per injection for each of the
parameters of Interest'and achieves  all ac-
ceptable performance criteria  (Section 12)
may be used.  OC  to MS interfaces  con-
structed of all glass or glass-lined materials
are  recommended. Glass can be deactivated
by silanizing with  dlchlorodlmethylsilane.
  5.6.6  Data  system—A  computer system
• must be interfaced to the mass spectrometer
that allows the contiluous acquisition  and
storage  on machine-readable  media  of all
mass spectra  obtained throughout the dura-
tion of  the chromatographic program.  The
computer  must have  software that allows
searching any GC/MS data file for  specific m/
z and plotting such m/z  abundances versus
time or scan number. This type of plot is de-
fined as an Extracted Ion* Current  Profile
(EICP). Software must also be available  that
allows  integrating  the abundance In  any
EICP between specified time or scan .number
limits.

                6. Reagents
  6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is de-
fined as a water in which an  interferent is
not observed  at the MDL of the parameters
of interest:
  6.2 Sodium hydroxide  solution (10  N)—
Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water
and dilute to 100 mL.
  6.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
  6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly,  add 50 mL
of H2SO4 (ACS,  sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL Of rea-
gent water.
,  6.5 Acetone,  methanol, methlylene chlo-
ride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
  6.6 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular,  an-
hydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h
in a shallow tray.
  6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 |ig/nD—
standard solutions can be prepared from pure
standard materials or purchased as certified
solutions.
  6.7.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g  of  pure
material. Dissolve the material in pesticide
quality acetone or other suitable solvent and
 dilute  to  volume  in  a  10-mL  volumetric
 flask. Larger  volumes can be used  at the con-
 venience of the analyst. When compound pu-
 rity is  assayed to be 96%  or .greater, the
weig-bt may be used  wlt&out correction to
calculate  the concentration  of  the  stock
standard.   Commercially  prepared  stock
standards may be used at any concentration
if they are certified by the manufacturer or
by an independent source.  '
 6.7.2  Transfer the  stock  standard  solu-
tions into  Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
Store at 4 °C and protect from light.  Stock
standard solutions  should be checked fre-
quently for signs of  degradation or evapo-
ration,  especially just prior to preparing
calibration standards from them.
 6.7.3  Stock standard solutions must be re-
placed after six months, or  sooner if com-
parison with quality  control check samples
indicate a problem.
 6.8  Surrogate standard spiking solution—
Select a minimum  of three surrogate com-
pounds  from Table'8. Prepare a surrogate
standard spiking solution containing each
selected surrogate compound at a concentra-
tion of 100 pg/mL in acetone. Addition  of 1.00
mL of this solution to 1000 mL of sample is
equivalent  to a concentration of 100 \tgl~L of
each surrogate standard. Store the spiking
solution at 4 °C in Teflon-sealed glass con-
tainer. The solution should be checked fre-
quently for stability. The solution must be
replaced after six months, or sooner if com-
parison with quality control check standards
Indicates a problem.
 6.9  DFTPP standard—Prepare a 25  |ig/mL
solution of DFTPP in acetone.
 6.10 Quality  control check  sample con-'
centrate—See Section 8.2.1.

               7. Calibration
    ?  -       -      -
 7.1  Establish gas chromatographic operat-
ing parameters equivalent to those indicated •
in Table 4 or 5.
 7.2  Internal  standard calibration  proce-
dure—To use this approach, the analyst must
select three or more internal standards that
are  similar in analytical behavior to the
compounds of interest. The analyst must fur-
ther demonstrate that the measurement of
the  internal standards  is not  affected by
method or matrix interferences. Some rec-
ommended internal standards are listed in
Table 8. Use the base peak  m/z as the pri-
mary m/z for quantification of the standards.
If  interferences are  noted,  use one  of the
next two most intense m/z quantities  for
quantification.
  7.2.1 Prepare  calibration  standards at a
minimum of three concentration levels for
each parameter of interest by adding appro-
priate volumes of one or more stock stand-
ards to a volumetric flask. To each calibra-
tion standard or standard  mixture,  add a
known constant amount of one or more in-
ternal standards, and and dilute to volume
with acetone. One  of the calibration stand-
ards should be at a concentration near, but
above,  the MDL and the other concentra-
tions  should correspond to the  expected
                                          823

-------
range of concentrations found in real sam-
ples or should define the working range of
the GC/MS system.
  7.2,2  Using injections of 2 to 5 jiL. analyze
each calibration standard according to Sec-
tion 13 and tabulate the area of the primary
characteristic m/fe (Tables 4 and 5) against
concentration for each compound and inter-
nal standard. Calculate response factors (RF)
for each compound using Equation 1.

                   (A,XCj.)
                               Equation 1
where:
  A.^Area of the characteristic m/z for the
    parameter to be measured.
  A*-Area of the characteristic m/z for the
    internal standard.
  CtasConcentratton of the internal standard
  Ct«Concentration of the parameter to be
    measured (wc/L).
If the RR value over the working range is a
constant (<35% BSD), the RF can be assumed
to be invariant and the average RF can be
used for calculations. Alternatively, the re-
sults <•*"•! be used to plot a calibration curve
of response ration, AJA*. vs. RF.
   7.8 The working calibration curve or RF
must be verified on each working day by the
measurement of one or  more  calibration
standards. If the response for any parameter
varies from the predicted response by more
tfr*T> ±20%. the test must be repeated uning
a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a
new calibration curve must be prepared for
 that compound.

              8. Quality Control
   3.1 Each laboratory that uses this method
 is required to operate a formal quality con-
 trol program. The .minimum requirements of
 this program consist of an Initial demonstra-
 tion of laboratory capability and an ongoing
 analysis  of spiked samples to evaluate and
 document data quality. The laboratory must
 TPE
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
              Pff. 136. App. A, Moth. 625
  8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
with  the  corresponding: acceptance  criteria
for precision  and accuracy,  respectively,
found in Table 6.  If s and X for all param-
eters  of interest  meet  the  acceptance cri-
teria, the system  performance  is acceptable
and analysis of actual samples can begin. If
any individual s exceeds the precision limit
or any individual  X falls outside the range
for accuracy, the system performance is un-
acceptable for that parameter.
  NOTE: The large number of parameters in
Table 6 present  a  substantial  probability
that one or more will fair at least one of the
acceptance criteria when all parameters are
analyzed.                                  '
  8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters
tested fail at least one of the acceptance cri-
teria, the analyst  must proceed according to
Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
  8.2.6.1  Locate and correct the source  of
the problem and repeat the test for all pa-
rameters of Interest beginning with Section
8.2.2.                               .   .     x
  8.2.6.2  Beginning with Section 8.2.2. repeat
the  test only for  those parameters  that
failed to  meet criteria.  Repeated failure.
however,  will confirm a general  problem
with the measurement system. If this occurs.
locate and correct the source of the problem
and repeat the test for all compounds of In-
terest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
  8.3  The laboratory must, on an  ongoing
basis, spike at least 5% of the  samples from
each  sample site  being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing 1  to 20
samples per month, at least one spiked sam-
ple per month is required.
  8.3.1.  The concentration  of the spike in
the sample should be determined as follows:
  8.3.1  If, as in compliance monitoring, the
concentration of a specific parameter in the
sample is being checked against a regulatory
concentration limit,  the spike should be at
that  limit or 1 to 5 times  higher than the
background  concentration   determined  in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
  8.3.1.2  If the concentration of a specific
parameter in  the  sample, is  not  being
checked against a limit specific to that pa-
rameter, the spike should be at 100 \igfL or  1
to 5  times higher than the  background con-
centration  determined  in  Section  8.3.2,
whichever concentration would be larger.
  8.3.1.3  If  it is  impractical  to determine
background levels before spiking (e.g.. maxi-
mum holding times will be exceeded), the
spike concentration  should be (1) the  regu-
latory concentration limit,  if any; or, if none
(2) the larger of either 5 times higher than
the   expected background  concentration or
100|ig/L.
   8.3.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to deter-
 mine the background  concentration  (B)  of
 each parameter. If necessary,  prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1)
appropriate for  the background concentra-
tions in the sample. Spike a second sample
aliquot with 1.0  mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the
concentration after spiking (A) of each pa-
rameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P)
as 100(A-B)%/T.  where T is  the known true
value of the spike.
  8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for
each parameter  with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 6. These
acceptance criteria were calculated to in-
clude an allowance for error in measurement
of both the background and spike concentra-
tions, assuming  a spike to background ratio
of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the
extent that  the analyst's  spike to  back-
ground ratio approaches 5:1.7 If spiking was
performed at a concentration lower than 100
jig/L, the analyst must use either the QC ac-
ceptance criteria in Table 6. or optional QC
acceptance criteria calculated for the spe-
cific spike concentration. To calculate op-
tional acceptance criteria for the recovery of
a  parameter: (1)  Calculate  accuracy (X')
using the equation in Table 7, substituting
the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) cal-
culate overall precision (S') using the  equa-
tion in Table 7, substituting X' for X; (3) cal-
culate the range for recovery at the  spike
concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(1CO S'/T)%*
  8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the
designated range for recovery, that param-
eter has  failed  the acceptance criteria.  A
check standard  containing  each  parameter
that failed the criteria must be analyzed  as
described in Section 8.4.
  8.4  If any parameter fails the acceptance
criteria  for recovery in  Section  8.3.  a QC
check standard  containing  each  parameter
that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
  NOTE: The frequency for the required anal-
ysis of a QC check standard will depend upon
the  number of parameters being simulta-
neously tested, the complexity of the sample
matrix, and the performance of the labora-
tory. If the entire list of single-component
parameters in Table 6 must be measured in
the  sample in  Section 8.3,  the probability
that the analysis of a QC check standard will
be required is high: In this case the QC check
standard should be routinely analyzed with
the spike sample.
   8.4.1  Prepare the QC check standard  by
adding 1.0 mL  of QC  check  sample con-
centrate (Section 8.2.1 pr 8.3.2) to 1 L of rea-
gent water. The QC check standard needs
only to contain the parameters  chat failed
criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
   8.4.2 Analyze the  QC  check standard to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
 each parameter. Calculate  each percent  re-
 covery (Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true
 value of the standard concentration.
                                          825

-------
  S.CS  Compare the percent recovery  (P.)
for each parameter with the corresponding
QC acceptance criteria found in Table 6. Only
parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3
need to be compared with these criteria. If
the recovery of any such parameter falls out-
side the designated range,  the laboratory
performance for that parameter is judged to
be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified  and corrected.  The
analytical result for that parameter in  the
unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
  8.5  As part of the QC program for the lab-
oratory, method accuracy  for  wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be maintained. After the analysis of  five
spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3,
calculate the average percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (s,). Express the accuracy assessment
as a percent interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. If
P»90% and 8,^10%, for example, the accuracy
interval is expressed as 70-110%. Update the
 accuracy assessment for each parameter on a
 regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new
 accuracy measurements).
   8.6  As a quality control check, the labora-
 tory must spike all samples with the surro-
 gate standard .spiking solution  as  described
 In Section 10.2, and calculate the percent re-
 covery of each surrogate compound.
   8.7  It is recommended that the laboratory
 adopt-additional quality assurance practices
 for use with this method. The specific prac-
 tices that are most productive  depend  upon
 the needs of the laboratory and the nature  of
 the samples. Field duplicates may' be  ana-
 lyzed to' assess the precision of the environ-
 mental measurements. Whenever possible,
 the laboratory should analyze standard ref-
  erence materials and participate in relevant
  performance evaluation studies.

     9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                  Handling

    9.1   Grab samples must  be  collected  in
  glass   containers.  Conventional   sampling
  practices* should be followed, except that
  the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
  before collection. Composite samples should
  be collected in refrigerated glass containers
  in accordance with  the requirements  of the
  program.  Automatic   sampling  equipment
  must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
  and  other potential sources of contamina-
  tion.                                _,
    9.2  All sampling must  be iced or  reirig-
   erated at 4 «C from the time of collection
   until extraction. Pill the sample bottles and,
   if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of
   sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and
   mix well. EPA Methods 830.4  and 330.5 may
   be  used for measurement of  residual chlo-
   rine.' Field test kits are available for this
   purpose.
  9.3  All samples must be extracted within 7
days of collection and completely analysed
within 40 days of extraction.

      10. Separator!/ Funnel Extraction

  10.1  Samples are usually  extracted using
separatory funnel techniques. If emulsions
will prevent achieving acceptable solvent re-
covery with separatory  funnel extractions,
continuous extraction (Section  11) may be
used.  The   separatory  fdnnel   extraction
scheme described below assumes  a  sample
volume of 1 L. When sample volumes of 2 L
are to be extracted, use 250, 100, and 100-mL
volumes of methylene chloride for the serial
extraction of the base/neutrals and 200, 100,
and 100-mL volumes of  methylene chloride
for the acids.                      „.'-.;•
  10.2  Mark the water meniscus on the side
of the sample bottle for  later determination
of  sample volume. Pour the  entire sample
into a 2-L aeparatory funnel. Pipet 1.00 mL
of  the  surrogate standard spiking solution
into  the aeparatory funnel and  mix well.
Check the pH of the sample with wide-range
pH paper and adjust to pH>ll with sodium
hydroxide solution.
  10.3 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to
 the sample bottle, seal, and shake for 30 s to
 rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
 to the separatory funnel  and  extract the
 sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with
 periodic venting to release excess pressure.
 Allow the organic layer  to separate from the
 water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
 emulsion  interface between layers  is  more
 than  one-third the  volume  of the  solvent
 layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
 techniques to complete the phase separation.
 The optimum technique depends upon the
 sample, but may include stirring, filtration
 of the  emulsion  through  glass  wool, cen-
 trifugation, or other physical methods. Col-
 lect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-
  mL Erlenmeyer flask. If the emulsion cannot
  be broken (recovery of less than 80% of the
  methylene chloride, corrected for the water
  solubility of methylene chloride),  transfer
  the sample, solvent, and emulsion into the
  extraction  chamber of  a continuous extrac-
  tor and proceed as described in Section 11.3.
    10.4 Add a second 60-mL volume of meth-
  ylene chloride to the sample bottle and re-
  peat the extraction procedure a second time,
  combining the extracts in  the  Erlenmeyer
  flask. Perform a third extraction in the same
  manner. Label the combined extract as the
  base/neutral fraction.       .
    10.5  Adjust the pH of the aqueous phase to
  leas than 2 using sulfuric acid.  Serially  ex-
  tract the acidified aqueous phase three times
  with 60-mL aliquots of methylene  chloride.
  Collect and combine the extracts in a 250-mL
  Erlenmeyer flask and label the combined ex-
  tracts as the acid fraction.
    10.6 For  each   fraction,   assemble  a
   Kuderna-Danlsh  (K-D) concentrator by
                                           826

-------
tactitag a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-
mL. evaporative flask. Other concentration
devices or techniques may be used in place of
the K-D concentrator if the requirements of
Section 8.2 are met.
  10.7  For each fraction, pour the combined
extract through a solvent-rinsed drying col-
umn containing about 10 cm of anhydrous so-
dium sulfate.  and collect the extract in the
K-D  concentrator.  Rinse  the  Erlenmeyer
flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methyl-
ene chloride  to complete  the quantitative
transfer.
  10.8  Add  one or two clean boiling chips
and attach a three-ball Snyder column to the
evaporative flask  for each fraction. Prewet
each Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of
methylene chloride to the top. Place  the K-
D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 *C)
so that  the concentrator tube  is partially
Immersed in the  hot water, and the entire
lower rounded surface of the flask is  bathed
with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position
of the apparatus and the water temperature
as required to complete the concentration in
15 to  20 mln, At the proper rate of distilla-
tion the balls of  the column will actively
chatter but  the chambers will not flood with
condensed solvent. When the apparent vol-
ume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D
apparatus from the water bath and allow it
to drain and cool for at least 10 mln. Remove
the Snyder  column and rinse the  flask and
Its lower Joint into the concentrator tube
with 1 to 2  mL of methylene chloride. A 5-
mL syringe is recommended for this oper-
ation.
  10.9 Add another one or two clean boiling
chips to the concentrator tube for each frac-
tion and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder col-
umn.  Prewet the Snyder column by  adding
about 0.5 mL  of methylene chloride  to the
top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water
bath (60 to  66 *C) so that the concentrator
tube is partially Immersed in hot water. Ad-
just the vertical  position of the apparatus
and the  water temperature  as  required  to
complete the  concentration in 5 to 10 min.
At the proper  rate of distillation the balls of
the column will   actively  chatter but the
chambers will not flood with condensed sol-
vent.  When the apparent volume of liquid
reaches about 0.5 mL. remove the K-D appa-
ratus from  the water bath and allow it  to
drain and cool for at least  10 min. Remove
the Snyder  column and rinse the  flask and
its lower Joint into the concentrator tube
with  approximately 0.2 mL of acetone  or
methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume
to 1.0 mL with the solvent. Stopper the con-
centrator tube and store refrigerated if fur-
ther processing will not be performed imme-
diately. If the extracts will  be stored longer
than two days, they should be transferred to
Teflon-sealed  screw-cap  vials and  labeled
base/neutral or acid fraction as appropriate.
   10.10  Determine the original eampie vol-
  ume  by refilling  the sample bottle  to  the
  mark and transferring the  liquid to  a 1000-
  mL graduated cylinder. Record the  sample
  volume to the nearest 5 mL.

           11. Continuous Extraction
   11.1 When experience with a sample from
  a given source indicates that a serious emul-
  sion problem will result or an emulsion is en-
  countered using a separatory  funnel in Sec-
  tion  10.3, a continuous extractor  should be
  used.                            ,
   11.2 Mark the water meniscus on the side
  of the sample bottle for later  determination
  of sample volume. Check the pH of the sam-
,  pie with wide-range pH paper and adjust to
  pH >11  with  sodium  hydroxide solution.
  Transfer the sample to the continuous  ex-
  tractor and using a pipet, add 1.00 mL of sur-
  rogate standard spiking  solution and mix
  well.  Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the
  sample  bottle, seal, and  shake for 30 s to
  rinse  the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
  to the extractor.
   11.3 Repeat the sample bottle rinse with
  an additional SO to 100-mL portion of methyl-
  ene chloride and add the rinse to the extrac-
  tor.
   11.4 Add 200 to 500 mL of methylene chlo-
  ride to the distilling flask, add sufficient re-
  agent water to ensure proper operation, and
  extract for 24 h. Allow to cool, then  detach
  the distilling flask. Dry, concentrate, and
  seal the extract as in Sections 10.6 through
  10.9.
   11.5 Charge a clean distilling flask with
  500 mL of methylene chloride and attach it
  to the continuous extractor. Carefully, while
  stirring, adjust the pH of the aqueous phase
  to less than 2 using sulfurlc acid. Extract for
  24 h.  Dry, concentrate, and  seal the  extract
  as in  Sections 10.6 through 10.9.

       12. Daily GC/MS Performance Tests

   12.1  At the beginning  of each day that
  analyses are to be performed, the GC/MS sys-
  tem must be checked  to see if acceptable
  performance  criteria  are   achieved  for
  DFTPP."> Each day that benzidlne is to be
  determined, the tailing factor criterion  de-
  scribed in. Section 12.4 must be  achieved;
  Each  day  that the acids are to  be deter-
  mined, the tailing factor criterion in Section
  12.5 must be achieved.
   12.2 These performance tests require the
  following instrumental parameters:
   Electron Energy: 70 V (nominal)
   Mass Range: 35 to 450 amu
   Scan  Time: To  give at least 5  scans  per
     peak but not to exceed 7  s per scan.
   12.3 DFTPP performance test—At the be-
  ginning  of each day. Inject 2 nL  (50 ng) of
  DFTPP  standard  solution.  Obtain a back-
  ground-corrected  mass spectra of  DFTPP
  and confirm that all the key m/z criteria in
                                         827

-------
Table 8 are achieved. If all the criteria are
not achieved, the analyst most retune the
man spectrometer and repeat the test until
all criteria are achieved. The performance
criteria must be achieved before any sam-
ples, blank*, or standards are analyzed. The
• taUllg factor tests In  Sections 12.4 and 12.5
may be performed simultaneously with the
DFTPP test.                   .
  12.4 Column performance test  for base/
neutrals—At the beginning of each day that
the base/neutral fraction Is to be analyzed
for benzidine,  the benzidine tailing factor
must be calculated. Inject 100 ng of benzidine
either separately or as a part of a standard
mixture that may contain DFTPP and cal-
 culate the wyt»g factor. The benzidine tail-
 ing1 factor must be lees than 8.0. Calculation
 of the tailing factor is Illustrated in Figure
 13." Replace the column packing if the tail-
 ing factor criterion cannot be achieved.
   12J Column performance test for acids—
 At the beginning of each day that the acids
 are  to  be determined,  inject -60 ng  of
 pentachlorophenol either separately or as a
 part of a  standard mix that may contain
 DFTPP.     The    tailing    factor   for
 pentaohlorophenol must be less than 5. Cal-
 culation of the tailing factor is illustrated in
 Figure 13." Replace the column packing  if
 the ^ung  factor  criterion cannot  be
 achieved.

    13, Gas Chromatographii/Mas* Spectrometry
    13.1  Table 4 summarizes the recommended
 gas chromatographio operating  conditions
 for the base/neutral fraction. Table 5 summa-
 rixes the recommended gas ohromatographic
 operating conditions for the acid  fraction.
 Included in these tables are retention times
 and MDL that can be achieved under these
 conditions. Examples  of  the  separations
 achieved by these columns are shown in Fig-
  ures 1 through 12. Other packed or capillary
  (open-tubular) columns or  chromatographic
  conditions may be used if the reauirements
  of Section 8.2 are met.
    13.2 After conducting the QC/MS perform-
  ance tests in Section 12, calibrate the system
  daily as described in Section 7.
    13.3 The Internal standard must be added
  to sample extract and mixed thoroughly im-
  mediately before it  is injected into the  in-
  strument. This procedure  minimizes losses
  due to  adsorption, chemical  reaction  or
  evaporation.                         .;  _
    13.4  Inject 2 to 5 |£L of the sample extract
  or standard into the GC/MS system using the
  solvent-flush technique.12  Smaller (1.0 |iL)
volumes  may  be injected if automatic de-
vices are employed. Record the volume in-
jected to the nearest 0.05 |iL.
  13.5  If the response for any m/z exceeds
the working range of the GC/MS system, di-
lute the extract and reanalyze.
  13.6  Perform  all qualitative  and quan-
titative  measurements as described in  Sec-
tions 14  and 15. When the. extracts are not
being used for analyses, store them refrig-
erated at 4*C, protected from light in screw-
cap vials equipped with unpierced Teflon-
lined septa.

         14. Qualitative Identification

  14.1  Obtain EICPs for the primary m/z and
the two  other masses listed in Tables 4 and
5. See Section 7.3 for masses to be used with
internal and  surrogate standards.  The fol-
lowing criteria must be met to make a quali-
tative Identification:
  14.1.1  The  characteristic  masses of each
parameter of interest must maximize in the
same or within one scan of each other.
  14.1.2  The retention time must fall within
±30 s of the retention time of the authentic
 compound.
   14.1.3  The  relative peak heights of the
 three characteristic  masses in  the EICPs
 must fall within ±20% of the relative inten-
 sities of these masses in a reference  mass
 spectrum. The reference mass spectrum-can
 be obtained from a standard analyzed in the
 GC/MS system or from a reference library.
   14J2  Structural isomers  that have very
 similar mass spectra and less than 30 s dif-
 ference In retention  time, can be explicitly
 Identified only If the resolution between au-
 thentic Isomers in a standard mix is accept-
 able. Acceptable resolution is achieved if the
 baseline to valley height between the  Iso-
 mers is less than 25% of the sum of the  two
 peak heights. Otherwise,,structural isomers
 are identified as isomeric pairs.

                15. Calculation*

    15.1  When a parameter  has  been identi-
  fied, the quantitation of that parameter will
  be based on the integrated abundance from
  the EICP of the primary characteristic m/z
  in Tables 4 and 5. Use the base peak m/Z for
  internal and surrogate standards. If the sam-
  ple produces an interference for the primary
  mte. use a secondary characteristic  m/z to
  quantitate.      •
    Calculate the concentration in the  sample
  using the response factor (RF) determined In
  Section 7.2.2 and Equation 3.
                             Concentration (pg/W=
                                           828

-------
                                Equation 3
 whan:
., A.sArea of the characteristic mfe for the
    parameter or surrogate standard to be
    measured.              '
  Ab=Area of the, characteristic m/z for the
    Internal standard,
  1.=Amount  of Internal standard added to
    each extract (tig).
  V0=Volume of water extracted (L).
  16.2 Report results in |ig/L without correc-
 tion for recovery data. All QC data obtained
 should be reported with the sample results.

           16. Method Performance

  18.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as the minimum concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 90% confidence that the value is above
 zero.1 The MDL concentrations  listed in Ta- •
 bles  4 and 5 were  obtained using reagent
 water.13 The  MDL  actually  achieved  in a
 given analysis will vary depending oh instru-
 ment sensitivity  and matrix effects.
  16.2 This method was tested by  15 labora-
 tories using reagent water, drinking water,
 surface water, and industrial  wastewaters
 spiked at six concentrations over the range 5
 to  1300 pg/L.14  Single  operator  precision,
 overall precision, and method accuracy were
 found to be directly related to the concentra-
 tion of the parameter and essentially  inde-
 pendent of the sample matrix. Linear equa-
 tions to describe  these relationships are pre-
 sented in Table 7.

       17. Screening Procedure for 23,7,8-
  TetrachlOTodibemo-i>-dioxin(2J,7,8-TCDD)

  17.1 If the sample must be  screened for
 the presence  of 2,3,7.8-TCDD,  it is rec-
 ommended that  the reference material not
 be handled in the laboratory unless extensive
 safety precautions are employed. It is suffi-
 cient to analyze  the base/neutral extract by
 selected ion monitoring (SIM) GC/MS  tech-
 niques, as follows:
  17.1.1 Concentrate the base/neutral ex-
 tract to a final volume of 0.2 ml.
  17.1.2 Adjust the temperature of the base/
 neutral column (Section 5.6.2) to 220 *C.
  17.1.3 Operate  the. mass spectrometer to
 acquire data in the SIM mode using the ions
 at  m/z 257, 320 and 322 and a dwell time no
 greater than 333 milliseconds per mass.
  17.1.4 Inject 5  to 7 |iL of the base/neutral
 extract. Collect  SIM data for a total  of 10
 min.
  17.1.5 The  possible  presence  of  2,3,7,8-
 TCDD is indicated if all three masses exhibit
 simultaneous peaks at any point In the  se-
 lected ion current profiles.
  17.1.6  For each occurrence where the pos-
 sible presence of 2,3,7,8-TCDD  is  indicated,
 calculate and retain the relative abundances
 of each of the three masses.
  17.2  False positives to this teat may be
caused by the presence of single or coalntin?
combinations  of  compounds  whose  mass
spectra contain all of thesa mastics.
  17.3  Conclusive results of the presence and
concentration level  of 2,3,7,8-TCDD can be
obtained only from a properly equipped lab-
oratory through the use of EPA Method 613
or other approved alternate test procedures.

       '  '      REFERENCES
  1. 40 CFR part 136. appendix B.
  2. "Sampling and Analysis Procedures for
Screening of Industrial Effluents for Priority
Pollutants," U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency/Environmental Monitoring and Sup-
port  Laboratory.  Cincinnati. Ohio  45268,
March 1977. Revised April 1977.  Available
from Effluent Guidelines Division. Washing-
ton. DC 20460.
  3. A8TM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Prepa-
ration of Sample Containers and for Preser-
vation of Organic  Constituents,"  American
Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
phia.
  4. "Carcinogens—Working  With Carcino-
gens." Department of Health. Education, and
Welfare. Public Health  Service, Center for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu-
pational Safety and Health, Publication No.
77-206, August 1977.
  5. "OSHA Safety  and Health Standards,
General Industry," (29 CFR part 1910), Occu-
pational Safety and  Health Administration,
OSHA 2206 (Revised. January 1976).
  6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories, "American Chemical' Society Publica-
tion,  Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd
Edition. 1979.
  7. Provost, L.P., and Elder. R.S. "Interpre-
tation of Percent Recovery Data," American
Laboratory, 15,  58-63 (1983). (The  value 2.44
used in the  equation in Section 8.3.3 is two
times the value 1.22 derived in this report.)
  8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31. D3370-76. "Standard Practices for  Sam-
pling  Water," American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia.
  9. "Methods 330.4 (Titrtmetric. DPD-FAS)
and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric,  DPD) for
Chlorine,  Total  Residual,"  Methods for
Chemical  Analysis  of Water and Wastes.
EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
and Support Laboratory. Cincinnati. Ohio
45268.  March 1979.
  10.  Elchelberger, J.W., Harris, L.E., and
Budde, W.L. "Reference Compound to Cali-
brate  Ion Abundance Measurement  in Gas
Chromatography-Mass Spectometry."  Ana-
lytical Chemistry, 47,995 (1975).
  11. McNair. N.M. and  BoneUI, E.J. "Basic
Chromatography."   Consolidated  Printing,
Berkeley. California, p. 52,1969.
  12. Burke, J.A. "Gas Chromatography for
Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical
                                          829

-------
Aspect*." Journal of the Association of Official
Analytical Chemists, 48,103ft (1965).
  13.  Olynyk,   P..   Budde.   W.L..   and
Elohelberger, J.W. "Method Detection Limit
for Methods 634 and 625," Unpublished report,
May 14,1080.
  14. "EPA Method Study  30.  Method 625,
Base/Neutrals'. Acids, and Pesticides," EPA
6004-84-068, National Technical Information
Service.  PB&4-306S72,  Springfield,  Virginia
22161, Jane 1034.

    TABLE 1—BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLES
                                                   TABLE 1—BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLES—
                                                                   Continued
Senzo0}luomnltMne
Benxo(igN)ptfyt«w .
Benzyl butytpMheMi
tuntir-
p*OVn* nil	i	
Bte(2-chtofo«>lhan«
Bto{»«ttyt>*xrtphtialali
8b<2-acytoit(1-cMoropropent).

                                                          TABLE 2—ACID EXTRACTABLES
111-01-1
117-81-7
108-80-1
                                                       opnemi —
                                                 2AOtahtorapheno1
  57-74-0
  01-66-7
7006-72-3
 218-O1-0
  72-64-8
  72-65-0
  50-29-3
  53-70-3
  84-74-2
 541-73-1
  05-60-1
 108-W-7
  01-04-1
  80-67-1
•  84-86-2
 131-11-3
 121-14-2
 808-20-2
 117-64-0
 1031-07-8
 7421-03-4
 206-44-0
  88-73-7
  70-44-6
 1024-67-3
  118-74-1
  87-68-3
          2 Mathy) ijBOiteophenol,
          24ttrephenot
                                                 44»ropinnol.
                                                                              STORET
                                                                                No.
                                                                                34452
                                                                                34586
                                                                                34801
                                                                                34606
                                                                                34616
                                                                                34657
                                                                                34501
                                                                                34646
                                                                                30032
                                                                                34804
                                                                                34621
                                                                                       CAS No.
 60-60-7
 05-67-8
120-83-2
106-67-0
 61-28-6
534-62-1
 88-75-6
100-02-7
 87-86-6
108-06-2
 88-08-2
                                                       TABLE 3—ADDITIONAL EXTRACTABLE
                                                                  PARAMETERS*
                                                  Bcnzttn
                                                  N
                                                                        STORET
                                                                          No.
                                                                          30120
                                                                          30337
                                                                          30340
                                                                          34361
                                                                          34358
                                                                          34368

                                                                          34433
                                                                                 CAS No.
                                            02-87-6
                                           310-84-6
                                         33213-85-0
                                            72-20-8
                                            77-17-4
                                            62-75-0
                                            88-30-6
                                                                                            od
                                                              606
                                                              608
                                                              608
                                                              808
                                                              808
                                                              608
                                                              612
                                                              807
                                                              807
                                                    •S»a Section 1.2.
    TABLE 4--CHROMATOQRAPH1C CONOmONS, METHOD DETECTION LJMTTS. AND CHARACTERISTIC
                            MASSES FOR BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLES
                                 tkxi tknft
                                  (R*l)
                                         ttonln*
                                                                Chi
                                                       Etacbon nipttct
                                                         Seoontf-
                                                                 Second-
                                                                   er
                                                                             Chemkal tantzafion
                                     7A
                                     7A
                                     84
                                             1J0
                                             1J6
              146
              146
              117
                              148
                              148
                              201
                                                                     113
                                                                     113
                                                                     190
                                               148
                                               146
                                               190
                                                148
                                                148
                                                201
      150
      160
      203

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Pt. 136, App. A, Meth. 625
  TABLE 4—-CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS, METHOD DETECTION LIMITS, AND CHARACTERISTIC
                 MASSES FOR BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLES—Continued
• Parameter
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether- 	 _-.. 	
12-Ctahtorobenzene 	 . 	
Bb(2-chtorotaopropyl) ether« 	
N-f«rosodM>-propyiamirte 	 „,.......
illlljujLJ_L 	

1 A4-Tricrtforoben2ene ...!.. 	 . 	
Isophofono «.*..««..«..««.............,..,„„„...
Naphthalene 	 ; 	
Riflf9-rft)lanMritiaw\ nutttuirui
HexacMorocyctopentaolene* 	 	
^i^*Mli>ala m -
**V*imJfUiHynTrMnirro *••*•.*•«..«........«......
Acenaphthytene 	 . 	
AcenepMhene ««••«.,....««...„.„.„ ..»»...
Dimethyl phthalate 	 ...
2.6-OWtrotoluene ... 	 . 	
Ruotene **•••«••••»•»•»«.•.•«..»....„.,.„„...».„„.
4-Chtarophenyl phenyl ether 	
2,4-OWtrotoliiene .; 	 ..
Diethyl phthalate ••••••»».....•..........„„.......
N MtrflflnrHpheiiylBiiiliie* .......................
Hmachtarobflfuonci ..... 	 ..„.
B-BHC*.. 	 ._. 	 „. ._.„_. .
4-Brornophenyl phertyl ether 	
fr6HC* 	
PhenanthiBiiie
A*tMM^M^^BkA
MUIHUBM „„„„ 	 miiii
O-BUf*
Heptachtor .„.. „ ...
WHO 	 ; 	 . 	 , 	
AVdrin 	 ...........M.wii
Dtxjtyl phttTBtnlB 	 .^ 	 ' 	 ™!."'
Heptachlor epoxide ..M«...M.HHHM....H......
Endoaultao l» -„„.„„,„.„,„„„„.„„
Roorarrthene ..__ 	 _. 	

4.4'-DDE 	 •„ .
P.--... —
Endrtn* 	 : 	 	
EndoauMM ilk ..__ 	
4,4'-ODD .. „ .
Detuiane*.. . „ 	
4.4'-OOT 	 • ^ 	 „„
Endowltan suKate . 	 i 	 	
End* aldehyde 	 .„_ 	
Butyl benzyl prrthalate 	
BJ»(2-e«hyt»exyO phthalate 	
Ctirytene 	 .._^^ — . 	 u 	
3.3*-Dtehlorotoenzidine 	 	
OkHwtyl phthalate 	 . 	
Benzo(b)fluoranthene 	 . 	
Benzo
-------
r«.
         /•**•»!•»*
                   »*«w"»- «*•**
   TABLE 4—CHROMATOGRAPHIC CoNomoNS, METHOD DETECTION UMITS, AND CHARACTERISTIC
                     MASSES FOR BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLES—Continued





PC® 1280« 	

Ratan-

(mini

23-32

Method
(totoO-
Don limn •
04/I-)
	




Primary
330
<

n*Ulflf •I^Mi

secono*
ary
362
Dharacterisi

ici

«y
394
ic fnsssos

Char

Methane
	


nicat ionizA

Malhana
— . 	


Don

Methane
	 —
  •Ttvt proper chemical name fc 22>-totaoxy(1-cMcropropene).
mariw     SFsSOpeckad Hnalmla  « 2 mrn   gass coumn w   eum carrer
8S?r^»sfl?^^
                  .          itions: Supetoopprt
mrnTD glass column with helium carrier gasi BJ 130 1 mUrnln.
ara mtoun* of various homers (See Figures 2 through 12). Column conditions:
                             rnTD gl
                                                                                         (100/120
                                                                                         flow rate.
   TABLE 5— CHROMATOGRAPHIC CoNomoNS, METHOD DETECTION UMITS, AND CHARACTERISTIC
                                MASSES FOR ACID EXTRACTABLES   ,
Parameter
O^Mnmnh^nl
2-NHrepnenol 	 .•••" —

2 4-Oimethylphanol 	 	 ...r,™ -
2.4-OicrikxripfnooJ ...._ 	 -.«... 	 .....
2 \ 6-TricMorcphtnol u... 	 ...,,,,r 	

i"5jr£!hn*i2iv!j!^>no^ ' " 	
2-M§thyHI8-rJWf/riphenol 	 	 - 	

J^^SrH^ 	
Ratan-
tkxi tJrno
(min)
5:9
8.0
9.4
9.8
162
175
203
Method
detec-
tion limit
(PO/U
3.6
1.5
2.7
2.7
2.7
3.0
42
24
3.6
2.4
Characteristic masses
Electron Impact
Primary
128
139
94
122
162
196
142
184
198
266
65
Second-
ary
64
65
65
107
164
198
107
63
182
264
139
Second-
ary
130
109
66
121
98
200
144
154
77
268
109
Column corxttons: Supekxport (100/120 masM coated wrftl* SP-«40pApacked in a 14
w»» heSum earrter pesat 30 fni/mln. flow rate. Column temperature held isothermal at 70 «C ft
•C/m)ruto200»C.
f^uvnlf^t ifmlJMltrtfi
Methane
129
140
95
123
163
197
143
185
199
267
140
Methane
131
168
123
151
165
199
171
213
227
265
168
Methane
157
122
135
163
167
201
183
225
239
269
122
m lon^ x 2rtun ID glau coturnn
x 2 mtn. then programmed at 8
                        TABLE 6—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 625
                       Pftramatar
                                                       Tetteonclu-
                                                 Units for*
                                                   (PO/U
                                Range tor
           Range for
           P.P.(Per-
             cent)
 Bfa{2-cfdoroethyi)
 Bis(2
-------
Environmental Protection Agency                         w. 136, Ap£. A, Mem. 625

                  TABLE 6—QC ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA—METHOD 625—Continusd
                       Parameter
                                                        Tastoondu-
      Untits tors
       (not)
       Range for
            Ranoa tor
            P. P. (Per-
              cant)
3^-Ohlorobanzldine
Dtthyl pntnalata	
Dbnamyt phthalate...
2,4-OMIrotokiane ....
2,6*OlnKfQtoluene .
rJMHOdyt phttiaMa
         isuttata
Endrin aldehyde
Ruoranthene....
Ruorene
lndeno(1 2,3-cd)pyrone
teophorene
12,4-Trichbroben;
4-Chtoro-3-methylphenol
2-CWoropnenoi „„
24ttropnenoi
4-Nttrophenol
Phenol
2.4,6-Trichtorophenol
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100

 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
 100
100
100
100
100

100
100
 71.4

 283
21.8
29.6
31.4
16.7
323
3244
20.7
372
54.7
24.9
26.3
243
44.6
63.3
30.1
39.3
55.4
542
20.6
 82-2123
44.3-119.3
   0-1004)
   D-100.0
473-1264
68.1-136.7
                                                                                              D-562
   D-1884*
 0-114
 D-112
39-139
50-158
 4-146
 D-107
71.6-108.4
   0-1722
70.9-109.4
 7.8-1413
37.8-1022
552-1004)
   O-150.9
48.8-1802
35.6-119.6
54.3-157.6
13.6-197.9
19.3-121.0
26-137
59-121
 O-192
26-155
 D-152
24-116
40-113
 D-171
21-196
21-133
35-180
28-1
372
28.7
26.4
26.1
49JB
932
352
472
48.9
22.6
31.7
69.6-100.0
57.3-1292
4041-127.9
52-115

22-147
                                                                               523-121.7
                                                                               4141-1094)
              32-119
53.0-100,0
4S4M68.7
1641-1004)
52.4-1292
 D-181
29-182
 D-132
14-176
 5-112
37-144
  ^Standard deviation for tour recovery measurements, in IIO/L (Section 82.4).
  X-Averaga recovery for tow recovery measurements, in fift- (Sedton 82.4).
  P. P^Percent recovery measured (Seetton 8A2. Sectton8.42).                             .
  CMMectect; result must be greater than zero.
  N?re: H^y?^^^? bsted **% "P0" *" «n«*h6d performance data in Table 7. Where neceessry. the limits for reoov
ery have been broadened to assure appfcabUfty of the limts to concentiaUoiis betow those used to devstop Table 7.
  •The proper chemical name is ^oxyfateO-chloropropane).

  TAJBLE 7—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CoNCEh4TRAiTON—METHOD 625
Parameter
Acenaphtnene 	 '. — hMT«T,.«...«.,,.. 	 	 0..................H«..Ji.«i.iiii^J
Aoanaphthylene .....««.__«.«m«......_...... M !
Aldrin „ 	 .. 	 ....

Benzo(a)anthracene 	 . 	 ...... 	 ..
Benzo(b)fluaranthene ...„.....„_ 	 ..„ 	 . 	 . 	 ; 	 „..„..„.......„ 	
Benzo(k)fluorantnene 	 „ 	 „..«..„ 	 •, 	
Banzo(a)pyrene — . 	 ..._....: 	 . 	 ........ 	 . 	 . 	 ;„..
Benzo(ghi)perylene 	 	 	 	 . 	 	
Benzyl butyl pnttialate ..._....... 	 . 	 .. 	 . 	
B-BHC 	
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether 	 	 	 	
Bb(2-chloroethoxy)methane 	 . 	 ...
Bte(2-chtoroiaopropyl) ether- 	 : 	 „ 	 	 t 	 .....
Bis(2-ethytnexyl) pritttalate 	 	 	 	
4-Bromophenyl prieny) ether . 	 . 	 . 	
2-Chtoronaphthalene 	 	 	 	 	 	
4-Chloropoenyl phenyt ether 	 4 	 .-. 	 ... 	 ;...;„...
Chryaene „._„„.._ 	 „__.... 	 ^.. 	 . 	 „..„ 	 .._....«_«..™.._ 	
Accuracy, as
recovery. X'
(WU
096C+0.19
0.89C+0.74
078C+1 66
080C+068
088C-060
0.93C-1.80
0.87C-1.56
0.900-0,13
0.96C-0.86
0.66C-1.68
0.87C-0.94
029C-1 09
086C- 1 54
1 12C— 504
1 03C-231
084C— 1 18
091C-1 34
089C+001
0.91C+0.53
0.93C-1.00
Sintfa anaiyst
preciaton, s,1
(lipA)
015X— 0 12
024X— 1 06
097Y — \9R
021X 032
0 15XH-093
022X -1-0.43
0.1 9X+ 1.03
022X+0.48
029X+2.40
0.18X-I-0.94
020X-038
034X^-086
035X 099
0 1BX + 1.34
024X+028
026X+073
0 13X+066
007X4-032
020X-0.94
028X4-0.13
OvereHpraei-
eton,S'(»iortJ
n?iy— OUT
026X— 034
ni4Ayj.i 11
noTY— n AA
n 9Ay*. O9ft
029X+0.96
OJ5X4-0.40
0.32X+1J5
031X-0.44
033X+0.92
0.30X-1.94
n cwv_n IT
n •SKY^.O in
n 9AY j. 9 ni
0955f+1 04
n^AYo-fl K7
n myu-n AA
n iiy4.niA
OJOX-0.46
OJ3X-a09
                                               833

-------
TABLE 7—METHOD ACCURACY AND PRECISION AS FUNCTIONS OF CONCEHTRATION—METHOD 825—
                                          Continued
                                                           Accuracy, as
                                                              m lan r V*
                                                              owyi A
                                                              (WL)
                                              Singfomry*
                                              praSihsn..,'
                                                 (MOW
           Ovtniprao^
           •ton. 8'
44'-DOE
4.4'-ODT
1AWe
1.4-WcWorol
DMhylphtfitMa
          Mna
2,64)MmoliMna
D^HXtyl pfUhakto
                                  056C-0.40
                                  0.700-054
                                  0.79C-328
                                  O^SC-t-4.72
                                  058C 4-0.71
                                  OJOC4-028
                                  0.860-0.70
                                  0.73C-1.47
                                  1230-12.65
                                  042C-0.16
                                  0.43C+1.00
                                  020C+1.03
                                  0.92C-4.81
                                  1.060-3.60
                                  0.76C-0.79
029X-0.32
026X-1.17
0.42X4-0.19
020X4-047
025X4-0.68
024X4-023
Etxkinaktehyda
Fkxxmthtfl*
 Hnachkxobanxane _
 H«acWoroc*3tad«ioo
                                   0.76C-3J6
                                   0.8104-1.10
                                   0.90C-0.00
                                   OJ7C-2.97
                                   0.92C-1J7
                                   0.74C4-0.66
                                   0.71C-1.01
020X-0.16
028X4-1.44
O54X 4-0.19
0.12X4-1.06
0.14X4-126
021X4-1.19
0.12X4-2.47
0.18X4-3.91
022X-0.73
 r44ttro*odtopropytarnine
                                   0.78C-3.10
                                   1.12C4-1.41
                                   0.7604-1^8
                                   1.00C-3J6
                                   1.12C-622
                                  0^10-10^6
OJ3X-046
0.18X-0.10
0.19X4-0.92
0.17X4-0.67
029X4-1.46
 Ptv»n«nthrto«
 021X-041
 0.19X4-0.92
 027X+0.68
 OJ5X4-3.61
 0.12X4-057
                                                             OA4C-0.16
                                                             0.940-0.79
                                                             0.84C4-0.35
                                                             0.78C 4-029
                                                             0^704-0.13
                                                             0.71C4-4.41

                                                             1.04C-28.04
                                                              1.07C-1.15
                                                              0.61C-122
                                                              0^304-1.99
                                                              0.43C4-126
                                                              0.91C-0.18
                                                0.15X4-0.85
                                                .023X4-0.75
                                                0.18X4-1.46
                                                0.15X4-125
                                                0.16X4-121
                                                OJ8X4-2J6
                                                0.05X4-4229
                                                0.16X4-1.94
                                                OJ8X-t-257
                                                024X+343
                                                026X4-0.73
                                                0.16X4-222
OJ66X-O96
OJ9X-1M
OJ6X-O66
056X4-026
OJ0X 4-060
024X4-O39
041X4-O11
029X4-O36
0.47X4-3.45
026X-O07
052X4-022
1JJ6X-OJ92
021X4-150
0.19X4-0^5
027X4-1.19
053X-1D3
0.73X-O62
028X-0.60
0.13X+0.61
050X-023
028X4-0.64
043X-O52
026X4-049
0.17X4-0JO
0.50X4-0.44
OJ3X 4-026
0.30X-0.66
027X4-021
0.44X4-0.47
043X4-142
0.15X4-025
0.1SX4-0.31
021X4-O39
029X4-1^1
028X4-0.97
021X4-128
022X4-1.31
042X4-2629
026X4-23.10
 027X4-^60
 044X4-324
 0.30X4-4.33
 035X4-058
 022X4-141
            recovery lor one or mom measurements of a sample ccnt§Jrtng a
                 ««»y«* «««lanl deviation of maasuremanti at an «
                                                                   rt*on of C. in
            ifrtbM»toyrt«ndanJ dewJatkxi of measurement, at an average concentration found of X, in w/l_
                            *
   •Trw proper chemical name is 22'oxybis(l-crikxopropafie).
       TABLE 8—SUGGESTED INTERNAL AND
            SURROGATE STANDARDS
                              TABLE &—SUGGESTED INTERNAL AND
                              SURROGATE STANDARDS—Continued
  4.4'-O*xDmobiph«nyl _.«...»™
  4,4'-
    Dtoromooctafiuofobtphenyl.
                                Acid fraction
2-Fkiorophenol.
Pantafluorophenol.
PtienoMi
2^>erfluorornethy1 phenol.
Base/neutral fraction
Nitrobenzene-ds 	 	
Phenanthrene
-------
Environmental Protection Agency

     TABLE 3—OFTPP KEY MASSES AND
      ABUNDANCE CRITERIA—Continued
                                                      ft. tod. App. A, Mem. 0*0

                                             TABLE 9—DFTPP KEY MASSES AND
                                              ABUNDANCE CRITERIA—Continued
    68
    70
   127
   187
   196
   199
                 mfe Abundance criteria
                                                Mass
Lass than 2 percent of mass 69.
Lass than 2 percent of mass 69.
40-60 percent of mass 198.
Lass than 1 percent of mass 198.
Base peak. 100 percent relative abundance.
5-9 percent of mass 198.
275
365
441
442
443
                                                         m/i Abundanea criteria
10-30 percent of rhassl98.
Greater man 1 percent of mass 198.
Present but less than mass 443. .
Greater than 40 percent of mass 198.
17-23 percent of mass 442.
                                           835

-------
                                                  COLUMN: 3K SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT

                                                5 PROGRAM: U*C FOR 4 HIM. i*KR HIM TO 270*0

                                                  DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                I.  7
     2.4-OmiTROTOUlENE-'
N-NITHOSO OIPHENVLAMINE
10         15        20         25         30
                         RETENTION TIME. MIN.
                              35
                                         40
•45
      Figure 1. Gas chromatogram of base/neutral fraction .

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
     Pt. 13*. App. A, Mem.
 COLUMN: IX SP-1240DA ON SUPB.COPORT
.PROGRAM: 70°C FOR 2 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 200°C
 DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER.    ^    _,

.•','   ••  '   ••• . •     *'
                     5
                     £
                     a
                     2
                     g
                                           J.
                             8      10     12

                             RETENTION TIME. MIN.
14
16
18
                    20
22
                       Figure 2. Gas chromatogram of acid fraction.

-------
COLUMN: 3X SP-22SO ON SUPB.COPORT
PBQGBAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN. 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                                                     i

      »  1
      «B  il
                                                                   tS
                                                                   a
                                                           g
                   10            15           20
                       RETENTION TIME, MIN.
25
30
                 Figure 3. Gas chromatogram of pesticide fraction.

-------
 COLUMN: 3X SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
 PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
 DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                                     m/z»35 TO 450
                                     m/z»377
                                     m/z«375
                                      m/z*373
   18    20    22    24    26    28    30    32   34    36
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure  4.  Gas chromatogram of chlordane.

-------
 COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
 PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
 DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
m/z-35 TO 450
 m/zg233
 m/z-231
 m/z-159
   22   24
Figure  5.
  26    28-   30   32    34    36   38
   RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Gas chromatogram of toxaphene.
                        840

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
  COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
  PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 WIN. 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
  DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
Pt. 136, App. A, Mem.
                                      m/z«=35 TO 450
                                      m/z=294
                                      m/z=260
                                      m/z«224
        18     20    22    24    26    28    30    32
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.
 Figure 6.   Gas chromatogram of PCS-1.016.
                             841

-------
              COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
              PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
              DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                                       m/z =35 to 450
      18
20    22    24    26    28    30    32
                 RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure 7. Gas chromatbgram of PCB-1221
                         842

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Ft. 136, App. A,
               COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPOBT
               PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
               DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                                        m/z=35 TO 450
                   RETENTION TIME, MIN.
  Figure 8.  Gas chromatogram of PCB-1232,
                            843

-------
COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN. 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                                      m/z=35 TO 450
      18
20
                 22    24    26    28    30
                 RETENTION TIME. MIN.

Figure  9.   Gas chromatogram  of PCB-1242.
                          844

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                        Pt. 136. App. A, Meth. 625
  COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
   PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 M(N, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
  DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
  m/z»35 TO 450
  m/z-362
        18
20
22
24    26    28    30
                  RETENTION TIME, MIN.
 Figure  10.   Gas chromatogram of  PCB-1248
                            845

-------
 COLUMN: 3% SP-2250 ON SUPELCOPORT
 PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN. 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
 DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
       IB
                                                    36
38
                      RETENTION TIME. MIN.

Figure 11.  Gas chromatogram of PCB-1254.
                                846

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

 COU/IW: 3X SP-22SO ON SUPELCOPORT
 PROGRAM: 50°C FOR 4 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 270°C
 DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
Pt. 136, App. A,
625
                      RETENTION TIME, MIN.

Figure 12.  Gas chromatogram of PCB-1260.
                               847

-------
                TAILING FACTOR^
                                AB
Example calculation: Peak Height = DE = 100mm
                 10% Peak Height =BD= 10 mm
                 Peak Width at 10% Peak Height = AC = 23mm
                          = 11mm
                          = 12mm
                                       12
                 Therefore: Tailing Factors—- =1.1


 Figure  13.   Tailing factor calculation.
                         848

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

 METHOD 1624 REVISION B—VOLATILE ORGANIC
   COMPOUNDS BY ISOTOPE DILUTION GC/MS

          /.  Scope and Application

  1.1  This method is designed to determine
the volatile toxic organic, pollutants associ-
ated with the 1976 Consent Decree and addi-
tional compounds amenable to  purge and
trap gas chromatography-mass spectrometry
(GC/MS).
  1.2  The  chemical compounds listed in
table 1 may be determined in municipal and
industrial discharges by this method. The
methmd is designed  to meet the survey re-
quirements  of Effluent Guidelines Division
(EGD) and the  National  Pollutants  Dis-
charge Elimination System (NPDES) under
40 CFR 136.1 and 136.5. Any modifications of
this method,  beyond those  expressly  per-
mitted, shall be considered as major modi-
fications subject to application and approval
of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR
136.4 and 136.5.
  1.3  The detection  limit of this method is
usually dependent on the  level  of interfer-
ences rather than instrumental limitations.
The limits in table 2  represent the minimum
quantity that can be detected with no inter-
ferences present.   •
  1.4  The GC/MS  portions of this method
are for use only by analysts experienced with
GC/MS or under the close supervision of such
qualified persons. Laboratories  unfamiliar
with the analyses of environmental samples
by GC/MS should run the performance tests
in reference 1 before beginning.

          2.  Summary of Method

  2.1  Stable isotopically labeled analogs of
the compounds of interest are added to a 5
mL water sample. The sample is purged at
20-25 *C with an inert gas in a specially de-
signed chamber. The volatile organic  com-
pounds  are transferred • from the  aqueous
phase into the gaseous phase where they are
passed into a sorbent column and trapped.
After purging  is  completed, the  trap is
backflushed and heated rapidly to desorb the
compounds into  a gas chromatograph  (GC).
The compounds are separated by the GC and
detected by a mass spectrometer (MS) (ref-
erences 2 and 3). The labeled  compounds
serve to correct the variability of the analyt-
ical technique.
  2.2  Identification  of a  compound (quali-
tative analysis) is performed by comparing
the GC retention time and the  background
corrected   characteristic   spectral  masses
with those of authentic standards.
  2.3  Quantitative analysis is performed by
GC/MS using extracted ion current profile
(EICP) areas. Isotope dilution is used  when
labeled compounds are available; otherwise,
an internal standard method is used.
             Pi.
  2.4  Quality is assured through reprodno-
ible calibration and testing' of the purge and
trap and QC/MS syctems.

     3. Contamination and Interferences

  3.1  Impurities in the purge  gas. organic
compounds out-gassing from the  plumbing
upstream  of the trap, and solvent vapors in
the laboratory, account for the majority of
contamination problems. The analytical sys-
tem is demonstrated  to be free from inter-
ferences under conditions of the analysis by
analyzing blanks  Initially  and with  each
sample lot (samples analyzed on the same 8
hr shift), as described in Section 8.5.
  3.2  Samples can be contaminated by diffu-
sion of volatile organic compounds (particu-
larly methylene chloride) through the bottle
seal during shipment and  storage. A  field
blank prepared from reagent water and car-
ried through the sampling and handling pro-
tocol serves as a check on  such contamina-
tion.
  3.3  Contamination  by   carry-over   can
occur when high level and low level samples
are analyzed  sequentially. To reduce carry-
over, the purging device and sample syringe
are rinsed between  samples with reagent
water. When an unusually concentrated sam-
ple is encountered, it is followed by analysis
of a reagent water blank to check for carry-
over. For samples containing large amounts
of water soluble materials, suspended solids,
high boiling  compounds, or high  levels or
pnrgeable  compounds, the  purge device is
washed with  soap  solution, rinsed with tap
and distilled water, and dried in an oven at
100-125 •C. The trap and other  parts of the
system  are also subject to contamination;
therefore,  frequent bakeout and purging of
the entire system may be required.
  3.4  Interferences resulting from samples
will vary considerably from source to source,
depending on the diversity of the industrial
complex or municipality being sampled.

                4. Safety
  4.1 The  toxicity or  carcinogenicity  of
each compound or reagent used in this meth-
od has not been precisely determined;  how-
ever,  each chemical  compound should  be
treated as a potential health hazard. Expo-
sure to these  compounds should be reduced
to the lowest possible level. The laboratory
is responsible for maintaining a current -
awareness file of OSHA regulations regard-
Ing the safe handling of the chemicals speci-
fied in this method. A reference file of data
handling sheets should also be made avail-
able to ail personnel involved in these analy-
ses. Additional information  on laboratory
safety can be found in references 4-6.
  4.2  The following compounds covered by
this method have been tentatively classified
as known or suspected human
carcinogens: benzene, carbon tetrachloride,
                                         849

-------
chloroform. and vinyl  chloride.  Primary
standards of'these toxic compounds should
bs prepared in a hood, and a NIOSB7MESA
approved toxic gas respirator should be worn
when high concentrations are handled.

        5.  Apparatus and Materials
  S.I  Sample bottles for  discrete sampling.
  5.1.1  Bottle—25 to 40 mL with screw cap
(Pierce 13076, or equivalent). Detergent wash.
rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at
>105 *0 for one hr minimum before use.
  6.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced       silicone
(Pierce 12722.  or equivalent),  cleaned as
above  and baked at 100-200 *C,  for one hour
  5.2  Purge  and  trap device—consists of
purging device, trap, and desorber. Complete
.devices are commercially available.
  6.2.1 Purging device—designed to accept 5
mL samples with water column at least 3 cm
deep. The volume  of the gaseous head space
between the water and trap shall be less than
16 mL. The purge gas shall be introduced less
than 5 mm from the base of the water col-
umn and shall pass through the water as
bubbles with a diameter less than 3 mm. The
purging device shown in Figure 1 meets these
criteria.
  5.2.2  Trap—25 to 30 cm x 2.5 mm i.d. mini-
mum, containing the following:
  6.2.2.1  Methyl silicone packing—one ± 0.2
cm, 3 percent OV-1 on 60/80 mesh Chromosorb
W, or equivalent.
  6.2.2.2 Porous polymer—15 ± 1.0 cm, Tenax
GC (2,6-diphenylene oxide  polymer).  60/80
mesh, chromatographic grade, or, equivalent.
  6.2A8 Silica gel—« ± 1.0  cm, Davison
 Chemical, 35/60 mesh, grade 15,  or equivalent.
 The trap shown in Figure 2 meets these spec-
 ifications.
  5.2.3 Desorber—shall heat the trap to 175 ±
 6 "C in 45 seconds or less. The polymer sec-
 tion of the trap shall not exceed 180 *C, and
 the remaining sections shall not  exceed 220
 •C. The desorber shown in Figure  2 meets
 these specifications.
   5.2.4 The purge and trap device may be a
 separate unit or coupled to a GC as shown in
 Figures 3 and 4.
   5.3 Gas chromatograph—shall be linearly
 temperature programmable with  initial and
 final holds, shall contain a glass Jet sepa-
 rator as the MS interface, and shall  produce
 results which meet the calibration (Section
 7), quality  assurance (Section 8), and per-
 formance tests (Section 11) of this method.
   6.3.1  Column—2.8 ± 0.4 m x 2 ± 0.5 mm 1. d.
 glass, packekd with one percent SP-1000 on
 Carbopak B. 60/80 mesh, or equivalent.
   5.4 Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron im-
  pact ionization; shall repetitively scan from
  20 to 250 amu every 2-3 seconds, and produce
  a unit resolution (valleys between m/Z 174-176
  less than 10 percent of the height of the m/z
  176  peak), background corrected mass spec-
  trum from  50  ng  4-bromo-fluorobenzene
(BFB) injected into the GC. The BFB spec-
trum shall meet the mass-intensity criteria
In Table 3. All portions of the GC  column,
transfer lines, and separator which connect
the GC  column to the ion source shall re-
main at or  above the column temperature
during analysis to preclude  condensation of
less volatile compounds.
  5.5 Data system—shall collect and record
MS data, store mass Intensity data in spec-
tral libraries, process GC/MS data and gen-
erate reports, and shall calculate and record
response factors.
  5.5.1  Data acquisition—mass spectra shall
be collected continuously  throughout  the
analysis and stored on a mass storage device.
  5.5.2  Mass spectral libraries—user created
libraries containing: mass spectra obtained
from analysis of authentic standards shall be
employed to reverse search GC/MS runs for
the compounds of Interest (Section 7.2).
  5.5.3  Data processing—the  data system
shall be used to search, locate, identify, and
quantify the compounds of  interest in each
GC/MS analysis.  Software routines shall be
employed to compute retention  times  and
EICP  areas. Displays  of spectra,  mass
chromatograms. and library comparisons are
required to verify results.
  5.5.4  Response  factors   and multipoint
calibrations—the data system shall be  used
to record and maintain lists of response fac-
tors (response ratios for isotope dilution) and
generate multi-point calibration curves (Sec-
tion 7). Computations of relative  standard
deviation (coefficient of variation) are useful
for testing calibration linearity.  Statistics
on initial and on-going performance shall be
maintained (Sections 8 and 11).
   5.6  Syringes—6  mL  glass hypodermic.
 with Luer-lok tips.
   5.7  Micro syringes—10, 25, and 100 uL.
   5.8 Syringe valves—2-way, with Luer ends
 (Telfon or Kel-F).
   5.9 Syringe—6 mL. gas-tight,  with shutr-
 bff valve.
   5.10  Bottles—15  mL.,   screw-cap   with
 Telfon liner.
   5.11  Balance—analytical,   capable    of-
 weighing 0.1 mg.

          6.  Reagents and Standards

   6.1  Reagent  water—water  in which the
  compounds of interest and interfering com-
  pounds are not detected by this method (Sec-
  tion 11.7). It may be generated by any of the
  following methods:
   6.1.1  Activated carbon—pass   tap   water
  through a  carbon bed (Calgon Filtrasorb*300,
  or equivalent).
   6.1.2  Water   purifier—pass   tap    water
  through a purifier (Milllpore Super  Q, or
  equivalent).
   6.1.3  Boil and purge—heat  tap water to 90-
  .100 *C and bubble contaminant free inert gas
  through it for approx one hour. While still
                                           860

-------
hot, tnaitee the water to screw-cap bottles
*nd aeai with & Tenon-lined 
-------
  7,2.1  Obtain a mass spectrum of each pol-
lutant and labeled compound and each inter-
nal  standard by  analyzing  an  authentic
standard either singly or as part of a mix-
ture in which there is no interference be-
tween closely eluted components. That only
a single compound  is present is determined
by examination of the spectrum. Fragments
not  attributable to  the compound under
study indicate the presence of an interfering
compound. Adjust the analytical conditions
and scan rate (for this test only) to produce
an  undistorted  spectrum at the QC peak
maximum.  An  undistorted  spectrum  will
usually be obtained if five complete spectra
are collected across the upper half of the GC
peak. Software algorithms designed to   en-
hance" the spectrum may eliminate distor-
tion, but may also eliminate authentic m/z s
or introduce other distortion.        •
  7 2,8  The authentic reference spectrum is
 obtained under BPB tuning conditions (Sec-
 tion 7.1 and table 3) to normalize it to spec-
 tra from other instruments.
   7.2.4  The spectrum is edited by saving the
 6 most intense mass spectral peaks and all
 other mass spectral peaks greater than 10
 percent of the  base  peak. This spectrum is
 stored for reverse search and  for compound
 confirmation.
   7.8  Assemble the purge and trap device.
 Pack the trap as shown in Figure 2 and con-
 dition   overnight   at  170-180   «C   by
 backfluBhing with an inert gas at a now rate
 of 20-30 xnL/min. Condition traps daily for a
 minimum of 10 minutes prior to use.
   78.1  Analyze  the  aqueous performance
  standard (Section 6.7.2)  according to the
  purge and trap procedure in Section 10. Com-
  pute the area at the primary m/z (table 4) for
  each  compound.  Compare  these  areas  to
  those obtained by injecting one jiL of the
  methanolic standard (Section 6.7.3) to deter-
  mine compound recovery. The recovery shall
  be greater than 20 percent for the water solu-
  ble compounds, and  60-110 percent for  all
  other  compounds.  This  recovery  is  dem-
  onstrated initially  for each purge and trap
  GC/MS system. The test is repeated only if
  the purge and trap or GC/MS systems are
  modified in-any way that might result in a
  change in recovery.
     ml  Demonstrate that 100 ng toluene (or
   toluene-d8) produces an area at m/z 91 (or 99)
   approx one-tenth that required to exceed the
   linear range of the system. The exact value
   must be determined by  experience for each
   instrument. It is used to match the calibra-
   tion  range of the instrument to the analyt-
   ical range and detection limits required.
     74  Calibration  by isotope dilution—the
   isotope dilution approach is used for the
   purgeable organic  compounds when  appro-
   priate labeled compounds are available ana
   when interferences do not preclude the anal-
   ysis If labeled compounds are not available,
    or interferences are present, internal stand-
ard methods (Section 7.5 or 7.6) are used. A
calibration curve  encompassing the  con-
centration range of interest is prepared for
each compound determined. The  relative re-
sponse (RB) vs concentration (|ig/L.) is plot-
ted or computed using  a  linear regression.
An example of a calibration curve for tolu-
ene using toluene-d8 is given in figure 5. Also
shown are the ±10 percent .error  limits (dot-
ted lines). Relative  response is  determined
according to the procedures described below.
A minimum of five data points are required
for calibration (Section 7.4.4).             .
  7 4.1  The relative  response (RB) of pollut-
ant to labeled compound is determined from
isotope ratio values calculated from acquired
data. Three isotope ratios are used in this
process:
   R,=the isotope ratio measured in the pure
    pollutant (figure 6A).            ,*.,.,
   R,=the  isotope  ratio  of  pure  labeled
    compound (figure 6B).
   R™=the isotope ratio measured in the ana-
    lytical mixture  of the pollutant and la-
    beled compounds (figure 6C).
   The  correct way to  calculate  RR  is:
 RR=(R,-Rm)  (R,+iy(Rm-R.)(R,+l) * »- 1B
 not between 2R, and 0.5R». the  method does
 not apply and the sample is analyzed by  in-
 ternal or external standard methods (Section

  ' 7 4 2  In most cases, the retention times of
 the pollutant and labeled compound are the
 same  and isotope  ratios (R's)  can  be cal-
 culated from the EICP areas, where: R=(area
 at m,/zy(area at nu/z) If either of the areas is
 zero, it is assigned a value of one to .the cal-
  culations: that is. if: area of m,/z=5ffm. and
  area of m^O, then R=S0721/1=5072Q. The ro/
  z's  are always selected such  that R»>K».
  When there is a difference in retention times
  (RT) between the pollutant and labeled com-
  pounds, special precautions are required to
  determine the isotope ratios.    _
    R,. Ry, and Rm are defined as follows.
    R,=[area mi/z (at RT01/1
    Ry=l/[area ma/z (at RT2)3                •
    R*=[area m,/z (at RT,)]/[area nVz (at RT2)J
    743  An example of the above calculations
   can be taken from the data plotted in figure
   6 for toluene and toluene-d8. For, these data,
   LS6892aSl68900. 1^=1/60960=0.00001640,^
   £1=96868/82506=1.174. The  RR  for the above
   data is then calculated using the equation
   given  in Section 7.4.1. For  the  example,
      j^.
     NOTE: Not all labeled compounds elute be-
   fore their pollutant analogs.
     744^ To calibrate the analytical  system
   by 'isotope dilution, analyze a 5 mL,  aliquot
   of each of the aqueous calibration standards
   (Section 6.7.1) spiked with an appropriate
   constant amount  of  the labeled compound
   spiking  solution  (Section  6.6),  ?****»
   purge and trap procedure in section 10. Com-
   pute the RR at each concentration.
                                            852

-------
  Environmental Protection Agency

   7.4.5  Linearity—If the ratio of relative re-
  sponse to concentration for any compound Is
  constant (less than 20 percent coefficient of
  variation) over the 5 point calibration range.
  an averaged relative response/concentration
  ratio may be used for that compound; other-
  wise, the complete calibration curve for that
  compound shall be used over the 5 point cali-
  bration range.
   7.5 Calibration by internal standard—used
  when criteria for Isotope  dilution (Section
  7.4) cannot be met. The method is applied to
  pollutants having no labeled analog and to
  the labeled compounds. The internal  stand-
  ards used for volatiles  analyses are bromo-
  chlorOmethane,    2-bromo-l-chloropropane,
  and 1,4-dichlorobutane. Concentrations of
  the labeled compounds and pollutants with-
  out labeled analogs are computed relative to
  the nearest eluted  Internal   standard, as
  shown in table 2.
   7.5.1 Response  factors—calibration  re-
  quires the determination of response factors
  (RF)  which  are  denned  by the  following
  equation:
   RF=(AaCi.y(AbXC.). where A, is  the EICP
,  area  at .the characteristic  m/z  for  the
  compound in the daily standard. A*  is the
  EICP area at the characteristic m/z for the
  internal standard.
   Cj. is the concentration (ug/L) of the inter-
  nal standard
   C. is the concentration of the pollutant in
  the daily standard.                •
   7.5.2  The response factor is determined at
  10, 20, 50,100, and 200 ug/L for the pollutants
  (optionally at five times these concentra-
  tions for gases and water soluble pollut-
  ants—see Section 6.7), in a way analogous to
  that for calibration by isotope dilution (Sec-
 tion 7.4.4). The RF is plotted  against con-
 centration for each compound in the stand-
 ard (C.) to produce a calibration curve.
   7.5.3  Linearity—If  the  response  factor
 (RF) for any compound is constant (less than
 35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5
 point calibration  range,  an averaged  re-
 sponse  factor may   be  used  for   that
 compound; otherwise, the complete calibra-
 tion curve for that, compound "frail be used
 over the 5 point range.
   7.6 Combined calibration—by adding  the
 isotopically labeled compounds  and internal
 standards (Section 6.6) to the aqueous cali-
 bration standards (Section 6.7.1), a single set
 of analyses can be used to produce calibra-
 tion curves for the isotope dilution and in-
 ternal standard methods.  These curves  are
 verified each shift (Section 11.5) by purging
 the aqueous performance standard (Section
 6.7.2). Recallbratlon is required only if cali-
 bration and on-going performance (Section
 11.5) criteria cannot be met.

     8.  Quality Assurance/Quality Control

   8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method
 is required to operate a formal quality assur-
              PI. i36, App. A, Mem. 1624
requirements
 initial dem-
 ance program. The
 of this  program consist of an            -
 onstration of laboratory capability, analysis
 of samples spiked with labeled compounds to
 evaluate and  document data quality*  and
 analysis of standards and blanks as tests of
 continued performance. Laboratory perform-
 ance is compared to established performance
 criteria to determine if the results of analy-
 ses meet the performance characteristics of
 the method.
  8.1.1  The  analyst  shall make an initial
 demonstration of the ability to generate ac-
 ceptable accuracy and  precision  with this
 method. This  ability is  established as de-
 scribed in Section 8.2.
1  8.1.2  The analyst is permitted to modify
 this method to improve separations or lower
 the costs of measurements, provided all per-
 formance specifications are met. Each time a
 modification is made  to the method, the ana-
 lyst is  required to repeat the procedure in
 Section  8.2 to demonstrate method perform-
 ance.
  8.1.3  Analyses of blanks are required to
 demonstrate freedom from  contamination
 and that  the  compounds of interest and
 interfering compounds have not been carried
 over  from a previous analysis (Section 3).
The procedures and criteria for analysis of a
blank are described in Sections 8.5 and 11.7.
  8.1.4 The laboratory shall  spike  all sam-
ples  with  labeled -compounds to  monitor
method performance. This teat is described
in Section 8.3.  When  results of these spikes
indicate atypical method performance  for
samples, the samples are diluted to  bring
method performance  within acceptable lim-
its (Section 14.2).
  8.1,5 The laboratory shall, on an on-going
basis, demonstrate through the analysis of
the aqueous performance standard  (Section
6.7.2) that the analysis system is in control.
This procedure is described in Sections 11.1
and 11.5.
  8.1.6 The laboratory shall m*infc%in rec-
ords to define the quality of data that is gen-
erated. Development of accuracy statements
is described in Sections 8.4 and 11.5.2.
  8.2  Initial precision and accuracy— to es-
tablish  the ability to generate acceptable
precision and accuracy,  the analyst  shall
perform the following operations:
  8.2.1 Analyze   two  sets  of four.  5-mL
aliquots (8 aliquots total) of the aqueous per-
formance standard (Section 6.7.2) according
to the method beginning in Section 10.
.  8.2.2 Using results  of the first set of four
analyses in Section 8.2.1. compute the aver-
age recovery (X) in ug/L and the standard de-
viation of the recovery (s) in pg/L for each
compound,  by  isotope dilution  for pollui-
tants with  a labeled analog, and by internal
standard for labeled compounds and pollut-
ants with no labeled analog.
  8.2.3 For each compound, compare a and X
with the corresponding limits for <"1t1n1 pre-
                                         853

-------
clsion and accuracy found in table 5. If s and
X for all compounds meet the acceptance cri-
teria, system performance is acceptable and
analysis of blanks and samples may begin, if
individual ± falls outside the range for accu-
racy; system  performance is unacceptable
for that compound.
  NOTE: The large number of compounds in
table 6 present a substantial probability that
one  or more will toil one of  the acceptance
criteria when all compoulds are analyzed. To
determine if the analytical system is out of
control, or if the failure can be attributed to
probability, proceed as follows:
  8.2.4 Using the results of the second set of
four analyses, compute s and  X for only
thoee compounds which failed the test of the
first set  of four analyses (Section 8.2.3). If
 these compounds now pass, system perform-
 ance is acceptable  for all compounds and
 analysis of blanks and samples may begin. 11,
 however, any of  the same  compounds fail
 again, the analysis system is not performing
 properly  for the compound(s) in question. In
 this-event, correct  the problem and repeat
 the entire teat (Section 8.2.1).  •
   8.3  The laboratory shall spike all samples
 with labeled compounds  to assess method
 performance on the sample matrix.
   8.8.1 Spike and analyse each sample ac-
  cording to the method beginning in Section

   8 8.2 Compute the percent recovery (P) of
  the labeled  compounds  using  the  internal
  standard method (Section 7.5).
   8.3.8 Compare  the percent recovery for
  each compound with the corresponding la-
  beled compound recovery limit in table 5. IT
  the recovery of any compound falls outside
  its warning limit, method performance is un-
  acceptable for that compound in that sam-
  ple. Therefore, the sample matrix is complex
  and the  sample  is  to  be  diluted and
  reanalyzed, per Section 14.2.               -
    84  As part of the QA program for the lab-
  oratory, method accuracy for  wastewater
  samples shall be assessed and records shall
  be maintained.  After the analysis pf five
  wastewater samples for which the labeled
  compounds  pass the  tests in Section 8.3.3,
   compute the  average percent recovery (P)
   and the standard deviation of the percent re-
   covery  (s.)  for the labeled compounds only.
   Express the accuracy assessment as  a per-
   cent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp.
   For example, if'P^90% and 8p=10%, the accu-
   ra?y internal is expressed as 70-110%. Update
   the accuracy assessment for each compound
   on a regular basis (e.g. after each 5-10 new
   accuracy measurements).
     8.5  Blanks—reagent water blanks are ana-
   lyzed to demonstrate  freedom from carry-
   over (Section 3) and contamination.
     851 The level  at which the  purge and
   trap'system will carry greater than 5 ng/L of
   a pollutant of interest (table 1) into a suc-
ceeding blank shall be determined by analyz-
ing successively  larger  concentrations of
these  compounds. When a sample contains
this concentration or more, a blank shall be
analyzed immediately following this sample
to demonstrate no carry-over at the 5 pg/L.
IfiVfil
  8.5.2 With each sample lot (samples ana-
lyzed on the same 8 hr shift), a blank shall be
analyzed immediately after,analysis of the
aqueous performance standard (Section ll.l)
to  demonstrate  freedom  from contamina-
tion  If any  of the compounds of interest
(table 1)  or any  potentially  interfering
compound is found in a blank at greater than
10 ug/L (assuming a response factor of 1 rel-
ative to the nearest eluted internal standard
for compounds not listed in table 1), analysis
of samples is halted until the source of con-
tamination is eliminated and a blank shows
 no evidence of contamination at this level.
   86 The specifications contained in Oils
 method can be met if the apparatus used is
 calibrated properly,  then  maintained in a
   •i-ne S«H««U.UO «,»- for calibration (Section
 7) calibration verification (Section 11.5) and
 for initial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section
 11.5) precision and accuracy should be iden-
 tical, so that the most precise results will be
 obtained. The GC/MS instrument in particu-
 lar will provide the most reproducible results
 if dedicated  to the settings and  conditions
 required for the analyses of volatiles by this

 ma.7 Depending   on  specific program  re-
 quirements, field replicates may be collected
  to determine the  precision of the sampling
  technique, and spiked  samples may be  re-
  quired to determine the accuracy of •  the
  analysis when internal  or external standard
  methods are used.
      9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                   Handling
    91  Grab  samples  are collected  in glass
   containers having a total volume *™ater
   than 20 mL. Pill sample bottles so that no
   air bubbles  pass  through  the sample as ttie
   bottle is filled. Seal each bottle so that no
   air bubbles  are entrapped. Maintain the  her-
   metic seal on the sample bottie until time of
          amp    are maintained at 0-4 -C! from
   the time of collection until analysis. If the
   sample contains residual  chlorine, add so-
   dium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/4p mL)
   to the empty sample bottles Just prior  to
   shipment to the sample site. EPA Methods
   330^ and 330.5 may be used for measurement
   of residual chlorine (Reference 8). H preserv-
   ative has been  added, shake bottie vigor-
   ously for one minute immediately after fill-

   iD93 Experimental evidence indicates that
   some aromatic compounds, notably benzene,
   toluene, and ethyl benzene are susceptible to
                                            854

-------
 rapid biological degradation  under certain
 environmental   conditions.   Refrigeration
 alone may not be adequate to preserve these
 compounds  in  wastewaters for more than
 seven days.  For this reason, a separate sam-
 ple should be collected, acidified, and ana-
 lyzed when these aromatlcs are  to be deter-
 mined. Collect about 500 mL of  sample in a
 clean container.
   Adjust the pH of the sample to about 2 by
 adding: HC1  (l+i) while stirring. Check  pH
 with narrow range (1.4 to 2.8) pH paper. Pill
 a sample container as described in Section
 9.1. If residual  chlorine is present, add  so-
 dium thiosulfate to  a separate sample con-
 tainer and fill as in Section 9.1.
   9.4  All samples shall be analyzed within 14
 days of collection.

     10.  Purge, Trap, and GC/MS Analysis

   10.1 Remove  standards  and samples from
 cold storage  and bring to 20-25 °.
   10.2 Adjust the purge gas flow rate to 40 ±4
 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to  the purging
 device and set the valve to the purge mode
 (figure 3). Open the syringe valve located  on
 the purging device sample introduction nee-
 dle (figure 1).
   10.3 Remove the plunger from a 5-mL sy-
 ringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open
 the sample  bottle and carefully pour the
 sample into the syringe barrel until it over-
 flows. Replace the plunger and compress the
 sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any
 residual air while adjusting the sample vol-
 ume to 5.0 mL.  Because this process of tak-
 ing an aliquot destroys the  validity of the
 sample for future analysis, fill a second sy-
 ringe at this  time to protect against possible
 loss of data. Add an appropriate amount  of
 the labeled compound spiking solution (Sec-
 tion 6.6) through the valve bore, then close
 the valve.
- 10.4  Attach the syringe valve assembly  to
 the syringe  valve on the purging device.
 Open both syringe valves and inject the sam-
 ple into the purging chamber.
  10.5  Close  both valves and purge the sam-
 ple for 11.0 ±0.1 minutes at 20-25 *C.
  10.6  After  the 11 minute purge time, at-
 tach the trap to the chromatograph and set
 the purge and trap apparatus to the desorb
 mode  (figure 4). Desorb the trapped com-
 pounds into  the GC column  by heating the
 trap to 170-180  °C while backfiushing with
 carrier gas at 20-60 mL/min for four minutes.
 Start MS data acquisition upon start of the
 desorb cycle, and start the GC column tem-
 perature program 3 minutes later. Table 1
 summarizes the recommended operating con-
 ditions' for the  gas chromatograph. Included
 in this table are retention times and detec-
 tion limits that were achieved under these
 conditions. Other columns may be used pro-
 vided the requirements in Section 8 can  be
 met. If the priority pollutant gases produce
 GC peaks so broad that the precision and re-
  covery specifications (Section a.2V carmot >»
  met, tie column may be cooled to ambient
  or sub-ambient  temperatures  to  sharpen
  these peaks.
    10.7 While analysis of the desorbed com-
  pounds proceeds, empty the purging chamber
  using the sample introduction syringe. Wash
  the chamber with two 5-mL portions of rea-
  gent water. After the purging device has
  been emptied,  allow  the purge gas to vent
  through the chamber until the frit is dry, so
  that it is ready for the next sample.
   10.8 After desorblng  the sample  for four
  minutes, recondition the trap by returning
  to  the  purge  mode.  Wait 15 seconds, then
  close the syringe valve on the purging device
%  to begin gas now through the trap. Maintain
  the trapi temperature at 170-180 °C. After ap-
  proximately seven minutes, turn off the trap
  heater and open the syringe valve to stop the
  gas flow through the trap. When cool, the
  trap is ready for the next sample.

           11.  System Performance
   11.1 At the beginning of each 8  hr shift
 during which analyses are performed, system
 calibration and performance shall be verified
 for all  pollutants and  labeled compounds.
 For these tests, analysis of the aqueous per-
 formance standard (Section 6.7.2)  shall  be
 used to verify all performance criteria. Ad-
 justment and/or recallbration (per Section 7)
 shall be performed until all performance cri-
 teria are met. Only after all performance cri-
 teria  are met may blanks and samples be
 analyzed.
   11.2 BFB  spectrum validity—the  criteria
 in table 3 shall be met.
   11.3 Retention times—the absolute reten-
 tion times of all  compounds  shall approxi-
 mate those given in Table 2.
   11.4 GC resolution—the valley height be-
 tween toluene and toluene-d8  (at m/z 91 and
 99 plotted on the  same  graph) shall be less
 than  10  percent of the taller of  the two
 peaks.
   11.5 Calibration verification and on-going
 precision and  accuracy—compute the  con-
 centration of each polutant (Table 1) by Iso-
 tope  dilution  (Section  7.4)   for   those
 compmunds  which have  labeled  analogs.
 Compute the concentration of each pollutant
 (Table 1) which has no labeled analog by the
 internal standard method (Section 7.5). Com-
 pute the concentration  of the labeled com-
 pounds by the internal standard  method.
 These concentrations are computed based on
 the calibration data determined in Section 7.
   11.5.1  For  each  pollutant  and  labeled
 compound, compare the concentration with
 the corresponding  limit for  on-going accu-
 racy in Table 5. If all compmunds meet the
 acceptance criteria, system performance is
 acceptable and analysis of blanks and  sam-
 ples may continue. If any individual value
 falls outside the range given, system per-
 formance is unacceptable for that compound.
                                         855

-------
  NOTE: The large number of compounds in
Table  5 present a  substantial probability
that one or more will fail the acceptance cri-
teria when all compounds are  analyzed. To
determine  if the analytical system is out of
control, or if the failure may be attributed
to probability, proceed as follows:
  11.5.1.1 Analyze a second  aliquot  of  the
aqueous  performance  standard   (Section
6.7.2).
  11.5.1.2 Compute  the  concentration  for
only those compounds.which failed the first
teat (Section 11.5.1). If these compounds now
pass, system performance is acceptable for
all compounds and analyses of blanks and
samples may proceed. If, however, any of the
compounds fail again, the measurement sys-
tem is not  performing  properly  for these
compounds. In this event, locate and correct
the problem or  recalibrate the system (Sec-
tion 7), and repeat the entire  test (Section
11.1) for all compounds.
  11.5.2 Add results which pass the speci-
fication in 11.5.1.2 to initial (Section 8.2) and
previous on-going data. Update QC charts to
form a graphic representation  of laboratory
performance (Figure 7). Develop a statement
of accuracy for each pollutant and  labeled
compound by calculating the average per-
centage recovery (B) and the standard devi-
ation  of percent recovery (s,). Express the
accuracy as a recovery interval from B—2sr
to R+2sr. For example, if R=95% and 8r=5%.
the accuracy is 85-105 percent.

22.  Qualitative  Determination—Accomplished
   by Comparison of Data from  Analysis of a
   Sample or Blank with Data from Analysis of
   the Shift Standard (Section 11J). Identifica-
   tion is Confirmed When Spectra and Reten-
   tion Times Agree Per the Criteria Below

   12.1  Labeled compounds  and  pollutants
 having no labeled analog:
   12.1.1  The signals  for  all  characteristic
 masses stored  in the spectral library (Sec-
 tion 7.2.4) shall be present  and shall maxi-
 mize within the same two consecutive scans.
   12.1.2 Either (1) the background corrected
 EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative in-
 tensities  of the mass spectral peaks at the
 QC peak maximum shall agree within a fac-
 tor of two (0.5 to 2 times) for  all masses
 stored in the library.
   12.1.3 The retention time relative to the
 nearest eluted internal  standard shall  be
 within ±7 scans or ±20 seconds, whichever is
 greater.
   12.2 Pollutants having a labeled analog:
   12.2.1 The  signals for all  characteristic
 masses stored in the spectral library  (Sec-
  tion  7.2.4) shall be present and shall maxi-
  mize within the same two consecutive scans.
   12.2.2  Either (1) the background corrected
  BICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative in-
  tensities of the mass spectral peaks at the
  QC peak maximum shall agree within a fac-
tor of two for all masses stored in the spec-
tral library'
  1IL2.3  The  retention  time difference be-
tween the pollutant and its labeled analog
shall agree within  ±2 scans or ±6 seconds
(whichever is greater) of this difference in
the shift standard (Section 11.1).
  12.3  Masses present in the experimental
mass spectrum that are not present in the
reference mass spectrum shall be accounted
for by contaminant or background ions.  If
the experimental mass spectrum is contami-
nated, an experienced spectrometrist  (Sec-
tion 1.4) is to determine the presence or ab-
sence of the compound.

       13.  Quantitative Determination

  13.1  Isotope  dilution—by adding a known
amount of a labeled compound to every sam-
ple prior to purging, correction for recovery
of the pollutant can be made because the pol-
lutant  and its labeled  analog  exhibit the
same effects upon  purging, desorption. and
gas chromatography. Relative response (RB)
values for sample mixtures are used in con-
junction with calibration curves described in
Section 7.4 to  determine concentrations di-
rectly, so long as labeled compound spiking
levels are constant. For the toluene example
given in Figure 6 (Section 7.4.3), RR would be
equal to 1.174. For this RR value, the toluene
calibration curve given in Figure 5 indicates
a concentration of 31.8 |ig/L.
  13J2   Internal standard—calculate the con-
centration using the response factor deter-
mined from calibration data (Section  7.5)
and the following equation:
   Concentration =(A. x CtaV(Au x RF)  where
 the terms are as defined in Section 7.5.1.
   13.3  If the EICP area at the  quantitation
 mass for any compound exceeds the calibra-
 tion  range of the system, the sample is di-
 luted by successive factors of 10 and these di-
 lutions are analyzed until the area is within
 the calibration range.
   13.4  Report results for all pollutants and
 labeled compounds  (Table  1) found  in  all
 standards, blanks, and samples, in pg/L  to
 three gig"**1"*"1'- figures. Results for samples
 which have  been diluted are reported at the
 least dilute level  at which the area at  the
 quantitation mass is within the calibration
 range  (Section   13.3)  and   the   labeled
 •compound recovery is within  the  normal
 range for the Method (Section 14.2).

        14.  Analysis of Complex Samples

    14.1 Untreated  effluents and other sam-
  ples frequently contain high levels (>1000 jig/
  li) of the compounds of interest and of inter-
  fering compounds. Some samples will foam
  excessively when  purged; others will over-
  load the trap/or GC column.
    14.2 Dilute 0.5 mL of sample with 4.5 mL
  of reagent water and analyze this  diluted
  sample when labeled compound recovery is
                                           856

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
            Pt. 136, App. A, Mem.
outside the range given in Table 5. If the re-
covery remains outside of the' range for this
diluted sample,  the  aqueous  performance
standard shall be analyzed (Section 11) and
calibration verified (Section 11.5).  If the re-
covery  for  the  labeled  compmund  in the
aqueous performance standard is outside the
range given in Table 5. the analytical system
is out of control. In this case, the instrumelt
shall be repaired, the performance specifica-
tions in Section 11 shall be met, and the
analysis of the undiluted sample shall be re-
peated. If the recovery for the  aqueous per-,
formance standard is within the range given
in Table 5, the method does not work on the
sample being analyzed and the result  may
not be reported for regulatory compliance
purposes.
  14.3  Reverse  search  computer  programs
can misinterpret the spectrum of chroma-
tographically unresolved pollutant and la-
beled compound pairs with overlapping spec-
tra when a  high level of the pollutant  is
present. Examine  each  chromatogram for
peaks greater than the height of the internal
standard peaks. These peaks can obscure the
compounds of interest.                  '

          15. Method Performance
  15.1  The specifications  for  this,  method
were taken from the inter-laboratory valida-
tion of EPA Method 624 (reference 9). Method
1624 has been shown to yield slightly better
performance on treated effluents than Meth-
od 624. Additional method performance data
can be found in Reference 10.

                 References
  1. "Performance  Tests for the Evaluation
of  Computerized Gas Chromatography/Mass
Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories."
USEPA,. EMSIVCincinnati,  OH 45268,  EPA-
600/4-40-025 (April I960).
  2.  Bellar,  T.A.  and  Lichtenberg,  J.J.,
"Journal  American  Water Works Associa-
tion," 66. 739 (1974).            .
  3.  Bellar,  T.A.  and  Lichtenberg.  J.J.,
"Semirautomated  Headspace  Analysis  of
Drinking  Waters and Industrial Waters for
Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds." in
Measurement of Organic Pollutants Water and
Wastewater, C.E. VanHall, ed..  American So-
ciety for  Testing  Materials,  Philadelphia,
PA. Special Technical Publication 686. (1978).
  4.  "Working  with  Carcinogens." DHEW.
PHS, NIOSH. Publication 77-206 (1977).
  5.  "OSHA Safety  and Health Standards,
General Industry," 29 CFR part 1910.  OSHA
2206, (1976).
  6. "Safety in  Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories," American Chemical Society Publica-
tion, Committee on Chemical Safety (1979).
  7.  "Handbook of Analytical Quality Con-
trol  in Water and Wastewater Laboratories,"
USEPA. EMSL/Cincinnati. OH 45268, EPA-4-
79-019 (March 1979).
  8. "Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Resid-
ual Chlorine," USEPA. EMSIVCincinnati, OH
45268. EPA-4-79-020 (March 1979).
  9.  "EPA Method  Study  29 EPA Method
624—Purgeables," EPA 600/4-84-054, National
Technical Information Service. PB84-209915,
Springfield. Virginia 22161. June 1984.
  10. "Colby, B.N.. Beimer, R.G., Rushneck.
D.R.. and Telliard, W.A., "Isotope Dilution
Gas  Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry for
the  Determination of Priority Pollutants in
Industrial  Effluents."  USEPA.   Effluent
Guidelines Division. Washington. DC 20460
(1980).
        TABLE 1—VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS ANALYZED BY ISOTOPE DILUTION Gc/MS
Compound -
Acotono J,i4. .............. 	 - 	 - 	
Acroloih • 	 .......TITT-- - 	
Acfytonfttfo * * * *..4..... 	 	 A...-...'.."."™™ 	 —


BfOfnofTMithsnB ........«..«....•.««...«.«.•--.«.«........»««..•«.•..««•••— «.«..«««»•••"-•«••••«.•..•..

^hiofpnthfln* • .„..»«••.•.•••«••••»•••••••••••••••••••••"
2-chtoroethytvinyi ether 	 . 	 • 	
fttlsvA^vm ' •••••••••
Chtoromethane 	 	 • 	 • 	
nfemnmchtammathanQ . .«»»..«».«.•..«..•••<«.»•»»-**•.» .«....«..«.. .............


1 1 *riif*htnraathtj)ne ............«..«.....«..«........«...«-—••«••••»•••••••"••••••••'"
Trans-1.2-dichloroethane — 	 „„ — . 	 ; 	 	 .-.-•» 	





Storet
81552
34210
34215
34030
32101
32104
34413
32102
34301
34311.
34576
32106
34418
32105
34496
34536
34501
34546
34541
34704
34699
81576
81582
34371
CASraO"
istry
67-64-1
107-02-8
107-13-1
71-43-2
75-27-4
75-25-2
74-83-9
56-23-5
108-90-7
75-00-3
110-75-8
67-66-1
74-87-3
124-48-1
75-34-3
107-06-2
75-35--t
156-60-6
78-87-5
10061-01-5
10061-02-6
60-29-7
123-91-1
100-41-4
EPA-
EGD
516V
002V
003V
004V
048V
047V
046V
006V
007V
016V
019V
023V
045V
051V
013V
010V
029V
030V
032V

033V
515V
527V
038V
NPDES
,.„.,„„..«
001 V
002V
003V
012V
005V
020V
006V
007V
009V
010V
011V
021V
008V
014V
015V
016V
026V
017V



•••••••»••.
019V
                                          867

-------
    .«-«., » *r*r**
  TABLE 1—VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS ANALYZED BY ISOTOPE DILUTION GC/MS—Continued
Compound

Mftmywo* cnwoOa ~..~~«»»»»»--"M'»-""~'~~~-— — - 	
Motnyf otnyi KWOOO „..„»..*.—«.*••••«*••«•»••«•••••*••••«—— — 	

TftUVCroOnHiWVQ «M...M».«™»~.«."«««""**""**"" 	 •" 	
Tolo*wi ..*».*»...... 	 *« 	 •* 	 .*..................••-•<
tivi^ncn|rOnxniUu)e »*,^,,w«.——»««— —««*—»—— ——••••
i,i^wcimxo*tnwie ™.«™~.»..«-~..«..~.»»...— — ~— 	
TncraorotvMMie „.„.„......_........-»...— -....»~~- 	 ,,_.....—
VinyJeNorida . 	 	 — 	 	 	 ~
Store!
34423
81595
34516
34475
34010
34506
34511
39180
39175
CAS reg-
istry -
75-09-2
78-93-3
79-34-6
127-18-J
108-88-3
71-55-6
79-00-6
79-01-6
75-01-4
EPA-
EGD
044V
514V
015V
085V
086V
011 V
014V
087V
088V
NPDES
022V
""023V
024V
025V
027V
028V
029V
031V
TABLE     2—GAS    CHROMATOGRAPHY     OF
   PURGEABLE  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS  BY  ISO-
   TOPE DILUTION GC/MS
                   TABLE     2—GAS    CHROMATOGRAPHY     OF
                     PURGEABLE  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS  BY ISO-
                     TOPE DILUTION GC/MS—Continued
EGO
 No.
 (1)
               Compound
 181
 245
 345
 246
 346
 288
 383
 216
 316
 244
 344
 616
 716
 002
 203
 303
 229
 329
 213
 313
 615
 715
 230
 330
 614
 714
 223
 323
 210
  310
  211
  311
  527
  206
  306
  248
  348
  232
  332
  233
  333
  287
  387
  204
  304
  251
  351
  214
  314
   019
      Bromocftlonxnothmna (I.S.)

      CJWonxnethane ...	
 Ref
EGO
 No.
      Vkry$chJoride-d3
      Vinyl chloride ...»
      Chkxoethane-d5
      ChJoroethane...
       Mftthytene chtoride-d2
       Methytone chloride —.
       Acatono-de —	
       Acetone	~~
       AcroWn
       AcryJonHrile-d3
       1,1-dichkxoethane
       1 ,i-dfchloroeth«ne-n tetmchloriete
        Bromodicnlorometnane-13Cl
        Bnxnodichkxomethane
        i;2- cafcration points. Column: 2.4m (8 ft)  x 2 mm
                    Id. rfassTpecked with one percent SP-1000 coated on 60)80
                    •— •   .- w *»,__•	i__t:._ ^4 Jt/\ «*l JOMH  T^iiirinrniiifTfl
                              . Carrier gas: helium at 40 mUmin. Temperature
                    nSSrn: 3 mm at 45*cTs -C per min to 240 •C. hold at 240
                    •C far 15 minutes.
                      NOTE: The.
                     datecoiected
                          .	; in this table were developed from
                          bom three wastewater laboratories.
                                                        TABLE 3—BFB Mass-Intensity Specifications
                     Mass
                       50
                       75
                       95
                       96
                       173
                       174
                       175
                       176
                       177
                                    Intensity required
                     15 to 40 percent of mass 95.
                     30 to 60 percent of mass 95.
                     base peak, 100 percent.
                     5 to 9 percent of mass 95.
                     <2 percent of mass 174.
                     >60 percent of mass 95.
                     5 to 9 percent of mass 174   .
                     95 to 101 percent of mass 174
                     5 to 9 percent of mass 176.
                                                   858

-------
environmental nrorocnon agency

   TABLE 4—VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND
           CHARACTERISTIC MASSES
 TABLE 4—VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND
  CHARACTERISTIC MASSES—Continued
Labeled compound
Acetone . 	 . 	 . 	
Acretoin ._. 	 ~
AcrytonHrile ,. 	 . 	 '"."
Benzene 	 . 	 .'. 	 ; 	
Bromodichloroinethane 	 . 	
BromoJorm ... — . 	
Bremomethale .- 	 . 	 : 	
Carbon tetrachloride 	 _._. 	
Chtorobenzene 	 »_„. 	 ....
Chtoroethane .......... 	 . 	
2-chtoroethylvinyl ether .„ 	
f*tlljLIJLijl_LLL
oniUfUK)Uil •--....«•.....»«.....„.................
Chtoromethane 	 . 	 . 	
Dtoromocrtkxornethane 	 .-. 	
1.1-dichloroethane 	 .„. „..
12-dfchloroethane 	 	 ..„
1.1-oTchtcroethene . 	 	 _.„_ _
Analog
d6
02
d3
d6
13C
13C
d3
13C
d5
d5
d7
13C
d3
13C
d3
d4
d2
Primary m/
z's
58/64
56/58
53/56
78/84
83/86
173/176
&UQQ
• t^OfJf9
47/48
112/117
64/71
106/113
85/86
50/53
129/130
63/86
62/87
81*5


Trans-l^-dichloroetnene 	
12-tfchJoropropane 	 „
Trai)s-1>3-dichloropropene 	 ... 	
DieJhyl ether'..1.......! 	 j 	 .„ 	
p-dtoxane 	
Ethyfcenzene 	
Memytene chloride 	
Methyl ethyl Ketone .._.................._......
•1,122-tetrachloroethane 	 . 	
TfltHM^linff>M
-------
  SZffSSir
                                                                                           .
                                                                                          «HO OC IHOOtO « MUinO
                                                                                          TOK-C
FIGURE 1  Purging Devlca.
FIGURE 3  Schematic of Purge and Trap
Device—Purge Mode.
                                                                                            f- COOTMMTOMT COIJMM
                                                                                            «— MM1VTKAL OOU«M
                                                                                           NOTE
                                                                                    OCVKC    AllLMIMTMIHTUr
                                                                                           >NO OC SHOUtO K MfATCO
                                                                                           TO«*C
 FIGURE 2  Trap Packings and Construction to
 Include Deiofb Capability.
 FIGURE 4  Schematic of Purge and Trap
 Device— Desorb Mode.
                                                      860

-------
  Environmental Protection Agency
    10-
 > 1.0-
   0.1-
                   I    I	L_
         ^r-	1	1	i     i	r—
         2        -10   20   SO   100 200
               CONCENTRATION (ugfU
              Pt. 136, App. A, Mem. 1624

I
1—
<
2 100.000-
K i
<



ui a
II ...•
Sg o.«o.


~ •
• • • •
* * " *

1 i 3 i .5 i' f i' i 10
ANALYSIS NUMBER '
TOLUENE
r • • *~ ~ • '
m. • • • * • *




.-3.





         en  8/1  8/1  «i  w w  OT  «a «* aa
                     DATE ANALYZED
 FIGURE 5  Relative Response Calibration Curve
 for Toluene. The  Dotted  Lines Enclose a  ± 10
 Percent Error Window.
FIGURE 7  Quality Control Charts Showing Area
(top graph) and Relative Response of Toluene to
Toluene-d, (lower graph) Plotted as a Function of
Time or Analysis Number.
      (A)
                            AREAMM020
                                   •M/ZM

                                   -M/ZS2
     (B)
        AftEA'aOMO
                                  • tta. as

                                  •M/Z82
     (C)
                              WZ9B  62SOS
                                  -M/ZW

                                  •M/Z92
FIGURE 6  Extracted  Ion  Current  Profiles for
(A) Toluene. (B) Toluene-d,,  and a Mixture of
Toluene and Toluene-d..
                                                861

-------
MffTHOD 1625 REVISION B—SEiflVOLATOE OR-
  GANIC COMPOUNDS BY ISOTOPE DILUTION GC/
  MS

         I. Scope and Application

  14  This method is designed to determine
the Bemivolatile toxic organic pollutants as-
sociated  with the 1976 Consent Decree and
additional  compounds  amenable to extrac-
tion and analysis by capillary  column gas
chromatography-mass   spectrometry   (QCf
V*Q\
  12 The chemical compounds listed in Ta-
bles 1 and 2 may be determined in municipal
and industrial discharges  by this method.
The method is designed to meet the survey
requirements of Effluent Guidelines Division
(EGD) and the National  Pollutants  Dis-
charge Elimination  System (NPDES) under
40 CFR 196.1. Any modifications of this meth-
od, beyond those  expressly permitted, shall
be considered as major modifications subject
to application and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
   1,3  The detection limit of this method is
 usually  dependent  on the  level  of inter-
 ferences rather than instrumental  limita-
 tions. The limits listed in Tables 3 and 4 rep-
 resent the minimum quantity that can be de-
 tected with no interferences present.
   1.4  The GC/MS portions  of  this method
 are for use only by analysts experienced with
 GC/MS or under the close supervision of such
 qualified  persons. Laboratories  unfamiliar
 •with analyses of environmental samples by
 GC/MS  should run the performance tests in
 reference 1 before beginning.

           2.  Summary of Method
   2.1  Stable isotopically labeled analogs of
  the compounds of interest are added to a one
  liter  wastewater sample. The sample is ex-
  tracted at pH 12-13, then at pH <2 with meth-
  ylene chloride using continuous extraction
  techniques. The extract is dried over sodium
  sulfate and concentrated to a volume of one
  mL. An internal standard is added to the ex-
  tract, and the extract is injected into the gas
  chromatograph (GC). The  compounds are
  separated by GC and  detected by a  mass
  spectrometer (MS). The labeled compounds
  serve to correct the variability of the analyt-
  ical technique.
    2.2  Identification  of  a compound (quali-
  tative analysis) is performed  by comparing
  the GC retention time and background cor-
  rected characteristic spectral masses with
  those of authentic standards.
    2.3 Quantitative analysis is performed by
  GC/MS using extracted ion current  profile
  (EICP) areas. Isotope dilution is used when
  labeled compounds are available;  otherwise,
  an internal standard method is used.
   ' 2.4  Quality  is assured through reproduc-
   ible calibration and testing of the extraction
   and GC/MS systems.
     3.  Contamination and Interferences

  3.1  Solvents,  reagents,  glassware,  and
other sample processing hardware may yield
artifacts and/or elevated baselines causing
misinterpretation  of  chromatograms  and
spectra. All materials shall be demonstrated
to be free from interferences under the con*
ditions of analysis by running method blanks
initially and with each sample lot (samples
started  through the  extraction process on a
given 8  hr shift, to a maximum of 20). Spe-
cific selection of reagents and purification of
solvents by distillation in all-glass systems
may be required. Glassware and, where pos-
sible, reagents are cleaned by solvent rinse
and baking at 450 *C for one hour minimum.
  3.2  Interferences  coextracted  from sam-
ples will vary considerably from source to
source,  depending on the diversity of  the in-
dustrial complex or municipality being sam-
ples.

                 4.  Safety
  4.1 The toxicity  or carcinogenicity  of
each compound or reagent used in this meth-
od has  not been precisely determined;  how-
ever, each chemical compound  should be
treated as a potential health hazard. Expo-
sure to these compounds should be reduced
to the  lowest possible level. The laboratory
is  responsible  for  maintaining  a current
awareness file of OSHA regulations  regard-
 ing the safe handling of the chemicals speci-
 fied in this method. A reference file  of data
 handling sheets should also be made avail-
 able to all personnel involved in these analy-
 ses.  Additional  information  on laboratory
 safety  can be found in references 2-4.
   4.2 The following compounds  covered by
 this method have been tentatively classified
 as known or suspected human or mammalian
 carcinogens: benzidine benzo(a)anthracene,
 S.S'-dichlorobenzidine,       benzo(a)pyrene,
  dibenzo(a,h)anthracene.                 N~
  nitrosodimethylamine, and p-naphtylamine.
  Primary standards of these compounds shall
  be prepared in a hood, and  a NIOSH/MESA
  approved toxic gas respirator should be worn
  when high concentrations are handled.
          5. Apparatus and Materials

    5.1  Sampling  equipment  for  discrete or
  composite sampling.
   ' 5,1.1 Sample bottle, amber glass. 1.1 liters
  minimum. If amber bottles are not available.
  samples shall be protected from light.  Bot-
  tles are  detergent water washed, then sol-
  vent rinsed or baked at 450 °C for one  hour
  minimum before use.
    512 Bottle caps—threaded to fit  sample
  bottles.  Caps are lined  with Teflon.  Alu-
  minum foil may be substituted if the sample
  is not corrosive. Liners are detergent water
  washed, then reagent water (Section 6.5) and
   solvent rinsed,  and baked at approximately
   200 *C for one hour minimum before use.
                                            862

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency

   5.1.3  Compositing equipment—automatic
 or manual compositing: system incorporating:
 glass containers for collection of a minimum
 1.1 liters. Sample containers are kept at 0 to
 4 *C during: sampling:. Glass or Teflon tubing
 only shall be used. If the sampler uses a peri-
 staltic pump,  a  minimum  length  of com-
 pressible silicone rubber tubing may be used
 in- the pump only. Before use, the tubing is
 thoroughly rinsed with methanol,  followed
 by repeated rinsings  with reagent water
 (Section 6.5) to minimize sample contamina-
 tion. An integrating flow meter is used to
 collect proportional composite samples.
   5.2 Continuous  liquid-liquid  extractor-
 Teflon   or  glass  conncecting  joints  and
 stopcocks without  lubrication  (Hershberg-
 Wolf Extractor) one liter capacity, Ace Glass
 6841-10, or equivalent;
   5.3 Drying column—15 to 20 mm i.d. Pyrex
 chromatographic   column   equipped  with
 coarse glass frit or glass wool plug.
   5.4 Kuderna-Danish (K-D) apparatus
   5.4.1  Concentrator tube—lOntL, graduated
 (Kontes  K-570050-1025.  or equivalent)  with
 calibration verified. Ground glass stopper
 (size 19/22 joint)  is used to prevent evapo-
 ration of extracts.
   5.4.2 Evaporation  flask—500  mL (Kontes
 K-570001-0500,  or  equivalent),  attached to
 concentrator tube with springs (Kontes K-
 662750-0012).
   5.4.3 Snyder  column—three  ball macro
 (Kontes K-503000-0232, or equivalent).
   5.4.4 Snyder   column—two   ball   micro
 (Kontes K-469002-0219. or equivalent).
   5.4.5 Boiling chips—approx 10/40 mesh, ex-
 tracted with methylene chloride  and baked
 at 450 °C for one hr .minimum.
   5.5 Water bath—heated, with  concentric
 ring, cover, capable of temperature control ±2
 •C, installed in a.fume hood.
   5.6 Sample  vials—amber  glass.  2-5  mL
 with Teflon-lined screw cap.
   5.7  Analytical balance—capable of weigh-
 ing 0.1 mg.
.   5.8  Gas   chromatograph—shall    have
 splitless  or on-column injection port for
 capillary column, temperature program with
 30 *C hold, and shall meet all of the perform-
 ance specifications in Section 12.
   5.8.1 Column—30±5 mx0.25±0.02 mm i.d. 5%
 phenyl, 94%  methyl, 1% vinyl -silicone bond-
 ed phase fused silica capillary column (J & W
 DB-5, or equivalent).
   5.9  Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron im-
 pact ionization, shall repetitively'scan from
 35 to 450 amu in 0.95 to 1.00 second, and shall
 produce  a unit resolution (valleys  between
 m/z 441-442 less than 10 percent of the height
 of the 441 peak),  backgound corrected mass
 spectrum   from    50   ng   decafluorotri-
 phenylphosphine    (DFTPP)     introduced
 through the GC  inlet. The spectrum  shall
 meet the mass-intensity  criteria  in Table 5
 (reference 5). The  mass spectrometer shall be
 interfaced to the GC such that the end of the
              Pt. 136, App. A, Mottl.  1625

 capillary column terminates within one cen-
 timeter of the ion source but does not inter-
 cept the electron or ion beams. All portions
 of the column which connect the GC to the
 ion source shall remain at or above the col-
 umn temperature during analysis to preclude
 condensation of less volatile compounds.
   5.10 Data system—shall collect and record
• MS data, store, mass-intensity data in  spec-
 tral libraries, process GC/MS data, generate
 reports, and shall compute and record re-
 sponse factors.
   5.10.1  Data   acquisition—mass   spectra
 shall  be collected continuously throughout
 the analysis and 'stored on a mass storage de-
 vice.
   5.10.2  Mass spectral  libraries—user cre-
 ated libraries containing mass spectra ob-
 tained from analysis of authentic standards
 shall be employed to reverse search GC/MS
 runs for the compounds of interest (Section
 7.2).
   5.10.3  Data processing—the data system
 shall be used to search, locate. Identify, and
 quantify the compounds of Interest in  each
 GC/MS analysis. Software routines  shall be
 employed  to compute  retention times and
 peak  areas.  Displays  of  spectra,   mass
 chromatograms, and library comparisons are
 required to verify results.
   5.10.4  Response  factors  and  multipoint
 calibrations—the data system shall be  used
 to record and maintain lists of response fac-
 tors (response ratios for isotope dilution) and
 multipoint calibration curves  (Section  7)'.
 Computations of relative standard deviation
 (coefficient of variation) are useful for  test-
 ing calibration linearity. Statistics on ini-
 tial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section 12.7)
 performance  shall be computed and main-
 tained.

         6.  Reagents and Standards

   6.1  Sodium hydroxide—reagent grade. 6N
 in reagent water.
,   6.2  Sulfuric acid—reagent grade, 6N in re-
 agent water.
   6.3  Sodium sulfate—reagent grade, granu-
 lar anhydrous,  rinsed with methylene  chlo-
 ride (20  mL/g) and conditioned at 450 °C for
 one hour minimum.
   6.4  Methylene chloride—distilled in  glass
 (Burdick and Jackson, or equivalent).
   6.5  Reagent  water—water  in which the
 compounds of interest and interfering  com-
 pounds are not detected by this method.
   6.6  Standard solutions—purchased as. so-
 lutions  or mixtures  with certification to
 their  purity, concentration, and authentic-
 ity, or prepared from materials of known pu-
 rity and composition. If compound purity is
 96 percent or greater, the weight may be
 used without correction to compute the con-
 centration of the standard. When not  being
 used, standards are stored in the dark at -20
 to -10 °C  in screw-capped vials with Teflon-
 lined lids.  A mark is placed on the vial at the
                                          863

-------
W. 136, App. A, M0th. 1625
level of the solution so that solvent evapo-
ration loss  can  be. detected. The  vials are
brought to  room temperature prior to use.
Any precipitate is redissolved and solvent is
added if solvent loss has occurred.
  6.7  Preparation of stock solutions—^pre-
pare  in methylene chloride,  benzene,   p-
dioxane. or a mixture  of these solvents per
the steps  below. Observe the  safety pre-
cautions in Section 4.  The large number of
labeled and unlabeled acid, base/neutral, and
Appendix C compounds used  for  combined
calibration (Section 7) and  calibration ver-
ification (12.5) require high concentrattmns
(approx 40 mg/mL) when individual stock so-
lutions are prepared,  so  that  dilutions of
mixtures will permit calibration  with  all
compounds in a single set of solutions. The
working range for most compounds is 10-200
ug/mL. Compounds with  a  reduced MS re-
sponse may be prepared at higher concentra-
tions.
   6.7.1  Dissolve an appropriate amount of
assayed reference material in a suitable  sol-
vent: For example, weigh 400 mg naphthalene
 in a 10 mL ground glass stoppered volumetric
 flask and  fill  to  the mark  with benzene.
 After the  naphthalene is  completely  dis-
 solved, transfer the solution to a 15 mL  vial
 with Tenon-lined cap.
   6.7.2 Stock standard solutions should be
 checked for signs of degradation prior to the
 preparation  of  calibration or performance
 test standards. Quality control check sam-
 ples that can be used  to determine the accu-
 racy  of calibration standards are available
 from  the  US  Environmental  Protection
 Agency, Environmental Monitoring and  Sup-
 port Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
   6.7.3  Stock standard solutions shall be re-
 placed after six months, or  sooner  if com-
 parison with quality  control check  samples
 indicates a change in  concentration.
   6.8 Labeled  compound spiking solution—
  from stock standard solutions prepared as
  above, or from mixtures, prepare  the spiking
  solution at a concentration of 200 |ig/mL, or
  at a concentration appropriate to the MS re-
  sponse of each compound.
    6.9  Secondary standard—using stock solu-
  tions (Section 6.7),  prepare a  secondary
  standard containing  all of the compounds in
  Tables 1 and 2 at a  concentration of 400 fig/
  mL, or higher concentration appropriate to
  the MS response of the compound.
    610  Internal standard  solution—prepare
  2,2'-difluorobiphenyl  (DPB) at a concentra-
   tion of 10 mg/mL in benzene.
    6.11  DFTPP solution—prepare at 50 |ig/mL
   in acetone.
    612  Solutions  for  obtaining  authentic
   mass spectra (Section 7.2>—prepare mixtures
   of compounds at concentrations which will
   assure  authentic spectra are obtained for
   storage in libraries.
    6.13 Calibration  solutions—combuie o.s>
   mL of the solution in Section 6.8 with 25, 50.
          40 CFR Ch. I (7-1-95 Edition)

125, 250, and 500 uL of the solution in section
6.9 and bring to 1.00 mL total volume each.
This will produce calibration  solutions of
nominal  10. 20. 50. 100,  and 200 \tglmL of the
pollutants and a constant nominal 100 \iglmL,
of the labeled compounds.  Spike  each solu-
tion with 10 uL of the internal standard solu-
tion (Section 6.10). These  solutions permit
the relative response (labeled to  unlabeled).
to be measured as a functidn- of  concentra-
tion (Section 7.4).
  6.14  Precision  and  recovery  standard-
used for determination  of initial (Section 8.2)
and on-going (Section 12.7) precision and re-
covery. This solution shall contain the pol-
lutants and labeled compounds at a nominal
concentration of 100 |ig/mL.
  615  Stability  of solutions—all standard
solutions (Sections 6.8-6.14) shall be analyzed
within 48 hours 9f preparation and  on a
monthly basis thereafter  for signs of  deg-
radation. Standards will remain acceptable
if the peak  area at the quantitation mass
relative  to  the DPB  internal standard re-
mains within ±15 percent of the area ob-
tained in the initial analysis of the standard.
               7.  Calibration

   11  Assemble the GO/MS and establish the
 operating conditions  in Table  3.  Analyze
 standards per the procedure in Section 11 to
 demonstrate  that .the  analytical, system
 meets the detection limits in Tables 3 and14.
 and the mass-intensity criteria in Table 5 for
 50 ng DFTPP.                      ,      ,
   7.2  Mass spectral libraries—detection and
 identification  of compounds of interest  are
 dependent upon spectra stored in user cre-
 ated libraries.
   7.2.1 Obtain a mass spectrum of each pol-
 lutant, labeled compound, and the internal
 standard by analyzing an authentic standard
 either singly or as part of a mixture in which
 there is no  interference  between closely
 eluted  components.   That  only   a  single
  compound is present is determined  by exam-
  ination of the spectrum. Fragments not at-
  tributable to the compound under study indi-
  cate  the  presence  of   an   interfering
  compound.                               ,
    7 2.2  Adjust the analytical conditions and
  scan rate (for this test only) to produce an
  undistorted spectrum at the GC peak maxi-
  mum An undistorted spectrum will usually
  be obtained if five complete spectra are col-
  lected across the upper half of the GC peak.
   Software algorithms  designed to "enhance
   the  spectrum may eliminate distortion, but
   may also eliminate authentic masses or in-
   troduce other distortion.
    723  The authentic reference spectrum is
   obtained  under  DFTPP  tuning conditions
   (Section 7.1 and  Table 5) to normalize  it to
   spectra from other instruments.
     7  2.4  The spectrum is edited by  saving the
   5 most intense mass spectral peaks and  all
   other mass  spectral peaks greater than 10
                                            864

-------
percent of the base peak. This edited spec*
tram is stored for reverse search and for
compound confirmation.
  7.3  Analytical range—demonstrate that 20
ng anthracene or phenanthrene produces an
area at m/z 178 approx one-tenth that re-
quired to exceed the linear range of the sys-
tem. The exact value must be determined by
experience for each instrument. It is used to
match the calibration range  of the instru-
ment to the analytical range and  detection
limits required, and to diagnose instrument
sensitivity problems (Section 15.4).  The 20
ug/mL calibration standard (Section 6.13) can
be used to demonstrate this performance.
  7.3.1  Polar  compound   detection—dem-
onstrate that  unlabeled  pentachlorophenol
and benzidine are detectable at the 50 \igfmL
level (per all criteria in Section 13). The SO
lig/mL calibration standard (Section 6.13) can
be used to demonstrate this performance.
  7.4  Calibration with isotope dilution—iso-
tope dilution is used when (1) labeled  com-
pounds are available. (2) interferences do not
preclude its use,  and (3) the quantitation
mass extracted ion current  profile (EICP)
area for the compound is in the calibration
range.  If any  of these conditions preclude
isotope dilution, internal standard methods
(Section 7.5 or 7.6) are used.
  7.4.1  A  calibration  curve   encompassing
the concentration range is prepared for each
compound to be determined. The relative re-
sponse (pollutant to labeled)  vs concentra-
tion in standard solutions is plotted or com-
puted using a linear regression. The example
in Figure 1 shows a calibration curve for phe-
nol using phenol-d5 as the isotopic diluent.
Also shown are the ± 10 percent error limits
(dotted iihes). Relative Reponse (RR) is de-
termined  according to  the procedures de-
scribed below. A  minimum  of   five  data
points are employed for calibration.
  7.4.2  The  relative response of a pollutant
to its labeled analog is determined from iso-
tope ratio values  computed  from acquired
data.  Three isotope ratios are used in this
process:
   R» = the  isotope ratio measured for the
pure pollutant.
   Ry = the isotope  ratio measured for the la-
 beled compound.
   Rm  = the isotope ratio  of an  analytical
. mixture of pollutant and labeled compounds.
   The m/z's are selected  such that R»>Ry. If
 Rm is not between  2Ry and 0.5R*. the method
 does not apply and the sample is analyzed by
 internal or external standard methods.
   7.4.3  Capillary columns usually separate
 the pollutant-labeled pair, with the labeled
 compound eluted  first (Figure 2). For this
 case, Rx = [area mi/z]/l, at the retention time
 of the pollutant (RT2). Ry = 1/tarea nVz, at
 the retention time of the labeled compound
 RTi).  Rm = [area  at m,/z (at RT2)]/[area at
 RTi)], as measured in the mixture of the pol-
 lutant and labeled compounds (Figure 2), and
 RR=R~
  7.4.4  Special precautions are taken when
 the pollutant-labeled pair is not separated,
 or  when another  labeled compound  with
 interfering spectral masses overlaps the pol-
 lutant (a case which can occur with isomeric
 compounds). In this case, it is necessary to
 determine the  respective contributions of
 the pollutant and labeled compounds to the
 respective EICP areas. If the peaks are sepa-
 rated well enough to permit the data system
 or operator to remove the contributions of
 the compounds to each other, the equations
 in Section 7.4.3  apply. This  usually occurs
 when the  height of the valley  between the
 two GC peaks at the same m/z is less than 10
 percent  of the height of the shorter of the
 two peaks. If significant GC and spectral
 overlap occur, RR is computed using the fol-
 lowing equation:
                                      '
  RR = (Ry - Rm) (R, + 1V(R» - R.) (R, + 1).
 where R> is measured as shown in Figure 3A,
 Ry is measured as shown in Figure 3B. and
 Rm is measured as shown in Figure 3C. For
 example, R, = 46100/4780 = 9.644. Ry = 2650/43600
 = 0.0608. Rm = 49200/48300 = 1.019. amd RR =
 1.114.
  7.4.5  To  calibrate the  analytical  system
 by isotope dilution, analyze a 1.0 pL aliquot
 of each of the calibration standards (Section
 6.13) using the procedure in Section 11. Com-
 pute the RR at each concentration.       ,
  7.4.6  Linearity— if the ratio of relative re-
 sponse to concentration for any compound is
 constant (less than 20 percent coefficient of
 variation) over the 5 point calibration range.
 and averaged relative response/concentration
 ratio may be used for that compound; other-
 wise, the complete calibration curve for that
 compound shall be used over the 5 point cali-
 bration range.
   7.5  Calibration by internal standard— used
 when criteria for istope dilution (Section 7.4)
 cannot be met. The internal standard to be
 used for  both acid and base/neutral analyses
 is 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl. The  internal stand-
 ard method is also applied to determination
 of compounds having no labeled analog, and
 to measurement of labeled  compounds for
 mtra-laboratory  statistics (Sections 8.4 and
 12.7.4).
   7.5.1 Response   factors— calibration  re-
 quires the  determination of response factors
• (RF)  which are defined by the following
 equation:
   RF = (A, x Ci,)/(Au x C,), where
   A, is the area of the characteristic mass for
     the compmund in the daily standard
   Ab is the area of the characteristic mass
     for the internal standard
   Cb  is  the concentration of  the  internal
     standard (jig/mli)
   C, is the concentration of the compound in
     the daily standard (jig/mL)
                                           865

-------
  7.5.1.1 The response factor IB determined
for at  least five concentrations appropriate
to the response of each compound (Section
6.13); nominally. Id, 20. 50,100, and 200 |ig/mL.
The amount of internal standard added to
each extract is the same (100 pg/mL) so that
Ci» remains constant. The BF is plotted ys
concentration for each compound in the
standard (C.) to produce a calibration curve.
  7.5.1.2  Linearity—if the response  factor
(RF) for any compound is constant (less than
35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5
point  calibration range, an averaged  re-
sponse  factor  may  be  used  for that
compound; otherwise, the complete calibra-
tion curve for that compound shall be used
over the 5 point range.
  7.6  Combined calibration—by using cali-
bration solutions (Section 6J3) containing
the pollutants, labeled compounds, and  the
internal standard, a single set of analyses
can be used to produce calibration curves for
the isotope dilution and internal standard
methods. These curves are verified each shift
(Section 12.5) by analyzing the  100  Og/mL
calibration   standard    (Section   6.13).
Recalibration is required only if calibration
verification (Section 12.5) criteria cannot be
met.

     8. Quality Assurance/Quality Control
   8.1   Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality assur-
ance program. The minimum requirements
of this program consist of  an initial dem-
onstration of laboratory capability, analysis
of samples spiked with labeled compounds to
evaluate and document  data  quality,  and
analysis of standards and blanks as  tests of
 continued performance. Laboratory perform-
 ance is compared to established performance
 criteria to determine if the results of analy-
 ses meet the performance characteristics of
 the method.
   8.1.1 The analyst shall  make an initial
 demonstration of the ability to generate ac-
 ceptable accuracy  and precision with  this
 method. This ability  is established as de-
 scribed in Section 8.2.
   8.1.2 The analyst is permitted to modify
 this method to improve separations or lower
 the costs of measurements,  provided all per-
 formance specifications are met. Each time a
 modification is made to the method,  the ana-
 lyst is required to repeat the procedure in
  Section 8.2 to demonstrate method perform-
 ance.
   8.1.3  Analyses of blanks are  required to
  demonstrate freedom from contamination.
  The procedures and criteria for analysis of a
  blank are described in Section 8.5.
   8.1.4  The  laboratory shall spike  all sam-
  ples  with  labeled  compounds  to  monitor
  method performance.  This  teat  is described
  in Section 8.3. When results of these spikes
  indicate  atypical  method  performance  for
  samples, the samples are  diluted  to  bring
method performance within acceptable lim-
its (Section 15).
  8.1.5 The laboratory shall, on an on-going
basis, demonstrate through calibration ver-
ification and  the analysis of the precision
and recovery standard (Section 6.14) that the
analysis system is in control. These procer
dures are described in Sections 12.1.12.5, and
12.7.
  8.1.6 The   laboratory   shall  maintain
records to  define the quality of data that is
generated.  Development of accuracy  state-
ments is described in Section 8.4.
  8.2  Initial precision and accuracy—to es-
tablish the ability to  generate acceptable
precision and accuracy,  the analyst shall
perform the following operations:
  8.2.1  Extract,  concentrate,  and  analyze
two sets of four one-liter aliquots (8 aliquots
total) of the precision and recovery standard
(Section 6.14) according to the  procedure in
Section 10.
  8.2.2  Using results of the  first set of four
analyses, compute the  average  recovery (X)
in |ig/mL and the standard deviation  of the
recovery (s) in 6g/|iL for each compound, by
isotope dilution for pollutants with a labeled
analog, and by internal standard for labeled
compounds and  pollutants with no labeled
analog.
   8.2.3  For each compound, compare s and X
with the corresponding limits for initlal_pre-
 cision and accuracy in Table 8. If s and X for
 all compounds meet the acceptance criteria,
 system performance is acceptable and analy-
 sis of blanks and samples may begin. If, how-
 ever, any  individual s  exceeds  the precision
 limit or any individual X falls outside the
 range for accuracy, system performance is
 unacceptable for that compound.
   NOTE: The  large number of compounds in
 Table  8 present  a  substantial probability
 that one or more will fail the acceptance cri-
 teria when all compounds are analyzed. To
 determine if the analytical system is out of
 control, or if the failure can be attributed to
 probability, proceed as follows:
   8.2.4  Using the results of the second set of
  four analyses,  compute s  and X for  only
  those compounds which failed the test of the
  first set  of  four analyses (Section 8.2.3). If
•  these compounds now pass, system perform-
  ance is acceptable for  all  compounds and
  analysis of blanks and samples may begin. If.
  however, any of the same compoulds fail
  again, the analysis system is not performing
  properly  for these compounds. In this event,
  correct the  problem and  repeat the entire
  test (Section 8.2.1).
    8.3  The laboratory shall spike all  samples
  with  labeled compounds  to assess  method
  performance on the sample matrix.
    8.3.1 Analyze  each  sample  according to
   the method in Section 10.
                                           866

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

  S.3.2 Compute the percent recovery (P) of
the  labeled  compounds using the internal
standard methmd (Section 7.5).   ;
  8.3.3 Compare the labeled compound re-
covery  for'.each compound with  the  cor-
responding: limits in Table 8. If the recovery
of any compounds falls outside its warning-
limit, method  performance is unacceptable
for that compound in that sample, Therefore.
the sample is complex and is  to be diluted
and reanalyzed per Section 15.4.
  8.4  As part of the QA program for the lab-
oratory,  method accuracy for wastewater
samples shall be assessed and records shall
be maintained. After the analysis of five
wastewater samples for which the labeled
compounds pass the  tests in Section 8.3.
compute the average  percent recovery (P)
and the standard deviation of the percent re-
covery (Sp) for the labeled compounds only.
Express the accuracy  assessment as  a  per-
cent recovery interval from P—2 ^ to P+2^,.
For example, if P=90% and Sp=10%, the accu-
racy interval is expressed as 70-100%. Update
the accuracy assessment for each compound
on a regular basis (e.g. after each 5-10 new
accuracy measurements).
  8.5  Blanks—reagent water blanks are ana-
lyzed to demonstrate freedom from contami-
nation.
  8.5.1  Extract and  concentrate  a  blank
with  each sample  lot  (samples started
through the .extraction process on the same
8 hr shift, to a maximum of 20 samples). Ana-
lyze  the blank immediately after analysis  of
the precision and recovery standard (Section
6.14) to demonstrate freedom from contami-
nation.
  8.5.2  If any of the compounds  of interest
(Tables 1 and 2) or any potentially interfer-
ing compound is found in a blank at greater
than 10 |ig/L (assuming a response factor of 1
relative to the internal standard for com-
pounds not listed in Tables 1 and 2), analysis
of samples is halted until the source of con-
tamination is eliminated and a blank shows
no evidence of contamination at this level.
  8.6  The  specifications contained in  this
method can be met if  the apparatus used is
calibrated  properly,, then  maintained in a
calibrated state. The standards used for cali-
bration  (Section 7),' calibration verification
(Section  12.5),  and  for initial (Section 8.2)
and on-going (Section 12.7) precision and re-
covery should be identical, so that the most
precise results  will  be obtained. The GC/MS
instrument in  particular  will provide the
most reproducible results if dedicated to the
settings and conditions required for the anal-
ysis of semi-volatiles by this method.
  8.7  Depending on  specific  program re-
quirements, field replicates may be collected
to determine the precision of  the sampling
technique,  and  spiked  samples may  be re-
quired to  determine  the  accuracy of the
analysis when internal or external standard
methods are used.
             t*i.  i do, App. A, iviem.
    9.  Sample Collection, Preservation, and
                 Handling

  9.1  Collect samples  in  glass  containers
following conventional sampling practices
(Reference 7).  Composite samples  are col-
lected in refrigerated glass containers (Sec-
tion 5.1.3) in accordance  with the require-
ments of the sampling program.
  9.2  Maintain samples at 0-4 °C from the
time collectimn until -extraction. If residual
chlorine  is  present,  add  80 mg  sodium
thiosulfate per liter of water. EPA Methods
330.4 and 330.5 may be used to measure resid-
ual chlorine (Reference 8).
  9.3  Begin sample extraction within seven
days of collection, and analyze all extracts
within 40 days of extraction.

 10.  Sample Extraction and Concentration (See
                 Figure 4)
  10.1  Labeled compound spiking — measure
1.00 ± 0.01 liter of sample into a glass con-
tainer. For untreated effluents, and samples
which are expected to be difficult to extract
and/or concentrate,  measure  an  additional
10.0 ± 0.1 mL and dilute to a final volume of
1.00 ± 0.01 liter with reagent water in a glass
container.
  10.1.1   For each sample or sample lot (to a
maximum of 20) to be extracted at the same
time, place three 1.00 ± 0.10 liter allquots of
reagent water in glass containers.
  10.1.2   Spike  0.5  mL  of  the   labeled
compound spiking solution (Section 6.8) into
all samples and one reagant water aliquot.
  10.1.3   Spike 1.0 mL of  the  precision and
recovery standard (Section 6.14) into the two
remaining reagent water aliquots.
  104.4   Stir and equilibrate all solutions for
1-2 hr.
  10.2  Base/neutral extraction— place 100-150
mL methylene chloride in each continuous
extractor and 200-300 in each distilling flask.
  10.2.1  Pour the  saxnple(s),  blank,  and .
standard aliquots into the extractors. Rinse
the glass containers with 50-100 mL methyl-
ene chloride and add to the respective ex-
tractor.
  10.2.2  Adjust the pH of the waters in the
extractors to 12-13 with 6N NaOH while mon-
itoring- with  a pH meter.  Begin the extrac-
tion by heating the flask until the methyl-
ene chloride 'is boiling. When properly ad-
justed, 1-2 drops  of methylene chloride per
second will fall from the condenser tip into
the water. After 1-2 hours of extraction, test
the pH and readjust to 12-13 if required. Ex-
tract for 18-24 hours.
  10.2.3  Remove  the distilling  flask, esti-
mate and record  the volume  of extract (to
the nearest 100 mL), and pour the contents
through a drying column  containing 7 to 10
cm  anhydrous sodium sulfate. Rinse the dis-
tilling flask with 30-50 mL  of  methylsne
chloride and pour through the  drying- col-
umn. Collect the solution in a 500 mL K-D
                                         867

-------
evaporator flask equipped with a 10 ml, con-
centrator tube. Seal, label as the base/neu-
tral fraction, and concentrate per Sections
10.4 to 10.5.      - -
  10.3  Acid extraction—adjust the pH of the
waters in the extractors to 2 or less using 6N
sulfuric acjd. Charge clean distilling flasks
with 300-400 mL of methylene chloride. Test
and adjust the pH of  the waters after the
first 1-2 hr of extraction. Extract for 18-24
hours.
  10.3.1 Repeat  Section  10JL3. except label
as the acid fraction.
  10.4  Concentration—concentrate the  ex-
tracts  in  separate  500 mL K-D  flasks
equipped with 10 mL concentrator tabes.
  10.4.1 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling chips to the
flask and attach a three-ball macro Snyder
column. Prewet  the column  by  adding: ap-
proximately one mL  of methylene chloride
through the top. Place the K-D apparatus in
a hot water bath BO that the entire lower
rounded surface  of the flask is bathed with
steam. Adjust the vertical position of the ap-
paratus and the water  temperature as re-
quired to complete the concentration in 15 to
20 minutes. At the proper rate ,of distillation.
the balls of the column will actively chatter
but the chambers will not flood. When the
liquid has reached an apparent volume of 1
mL, remove  the K-D apparatus from the
bath and allow the solvent to drain and cool
for at least 10 minutes. Remove the Snyder
column and rinse the flask and its lower
joint into the concentrator .tube with 1-2 mL
of methylene chloride. A 6-mL syringe is rec-
ommended for this operation.
   10.4.2  For  performance  standards  (Sec-
tions 8.2  and 12.7) and for  blanks (Section
8.5), combine the acid and  base/neutral ex-
 tracts for each at this point. Do not combine
 the acid and base/neutral extracts for sam-
 ples.
   10.5  Add a clean boiling chip and attach a
 two ball  micro Snyder column  to the con-
 centrator tube. Prewet the column by adding
 approx 0.5 mL  methylene chloride through
 the top. Place the apparatus in the hot water
 bath. Adjust the vertical  position and the
 water temperature as required  to  complete
 the concentration in 5-10 minutes.  At the
  proper rate of distillation, the balls of the
  column will actively chatter but the cham-
  bers will not flood. When the liquid reaches
  an apparent volume of approx 0.5 mL. re-
  move the apparatus from the water bath and
  allow to drain and cool for at least 10 min-
  utes. Remove the micro Snyder column and
  rinse  its lower Joint into the  concentrator
  tube with approx 0.2 mL of methylene chlo-
  ride. Adjust the final volume to 1.0 mL.
    10.6  Transfer the concentrated extract to
  a clean screw-cap vial. Seal the vial with a
  Teflon-lined lid, and mark the level on the
  vial. Label with the sample number and frac-
  tion, and store in the dark at -20 to -10 »C
  until ready for analysis.
            11.  GC/MS Analysis

  11.1  Establish  the  operating  conditions
given in Table 3 or 4 for analysis of the base/
neutral or acid extracts, respectively. For
analysia   of combined  extracts  (Section
10.4.2). use the operating conditions in Table
3.
  11.2  Bring the concentrated extract (Sec-
tion 10.6) or standard (Sections 6.13 through
6.14) to room temperature,and verify that
any precipitate has redissolved.  Verify the
level on the extract (Sections 6.6 and 10.6)
and bring to the mark with solvent  if re-
quired.
  11.3  Add  the internal standard solution
(Section 6.10) to the extract (use 1.0 uL of so-
lution per 0.1  mL  of extract) immediately
prior to injection to minimize the possibility
of loss by evaporation, adsorption, or reac-
tion. Mix thoroughly.
  11.4  Inject a volume of the standard solu-
tion or extract such that 100 ng of the inter-
nal standard will be injected, using on-col-
umn or splitless injection.  For 1 mL ex-
tracts, this volume will be 1.0 uL. Start the
GC column initial  isothermal hold upon in-
jection.  Start  MS  data collection after the
solvent  peak  elutes. Stop  data collection
after   the   benzo   (ghi)   perylene   or
pentachlorophenol  peak elutes for the base/
neutral or acid fraction, respectively. Return
 the column to the initial temperature for
 analysis of the next sample.

    12. System and Laboratory Performance

   12.1 At the beginning of each 8 hr shift
 during which analyses are performed, GC/MS
 system performance and calibration are veri-
 fied for all  pollutants and  labeled com-
. pounds. For these tests, analysis of the 100
 |ig/mL  calibration standard  (Section 6.13)
 shall be used to verify all performance cri-
  teria. Adjustment and/or recalibration (per
  Section 7) shall be performed until all per-
  formance criteria are met. Only after all per-
  formance  criteria are met may  samples,
  blanks, and precision and recovery standards
  be analyzed.
    12.2 DFTPP  spectrum validity—inject 1
  uL of the  DFTPP solution  (Section 6.11) ei-
  ther separately or within a few seconds of in-
  jection  of the standard (Section 12.1) ana-
  lyzed at the beginning of each shift. The cri-
  teria in Table 5 shall be met.
    12.3  Retention  times—the absolute reten-
  tion time of 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl shall be
  within the range  of 1078 to 1248 seconds and
  the relative retention times of all pollutants
  and labeled compounds shall fall within  the
  limits given in Tables 3 and 4.
    12.4  GC resolution—the  valley height be-
  tween  anthracene and phenanthrene at  m/z
  178 (or the analogs at m/z  188) shall not ex-
  ceed 10 percent of the taller of the two peaks.
     12.5  Calibration     verification—compute
  the concentration of each pollutant (Tables 1
                                            868

-------
 tnvtronmemai rroiecnon Agency

 and 2) by isotope dilution (Section 7.4) for
 those   compounds   which   have  labeled
 analogs. Compute the concentration of each
 pollutant which has no labeled analog  by the
 internal standard method (Section 7.5). Com-
 pute the concentration of the labeled com-
 pounds by the internal  standard method.
 These concentrations are  computed based on
 the calibration data determined in Section 7.
  12.5.1  For  each pollutant  and  labeled
 compound being tested,  compare  the con-
 centration with the calibration verification
 limit in Table 8. If all compounds meet the
 acceptance criteria,  calibration  has been
 verified and analysis of blanks, samples, and
 precision and recovery standards may pro-
 ceed. If. however, any compound fails,  the
 measurement system is not performing prop-
 erly for that compound. In this  event, pre-
 pare a fresh calibration standard or correct
 the problem causing  the  failure  and repeat
 the test (Section  12.1). or recalibrate (Sec-
 tion?).
  12.6  Multiple peaks—each  compound  in-
 jected shall give a single, .distinct GC peak.
  12.7  On-going precision and accuracy.
  12.7.1  Analyze the  extract  of one  of  the
 pair of  precision and  recovery  standards
 (Section 10.1.3) prior to analysis  of samples
 from the same lot.
  12.7.2  Compute the concentration of each
 pollutant (Tables 1 and 2) by isotope dilution
 (Section 7.4) for those compounds which have
 labeled analogs. Compute the concentration
 of each pollutant which has no labeled ana-
 log by the internal standard method (Section
 7.5). Compute the concentration of the la-
 beled compounds by  the  internal standard
 method.
  12.7.3  For each pollutant  and  labeled
 compound, compare the concentration with
 the limits for on-going accuracy in Table 8.
 If all compounds  meet the acceptance cri-
 teria, system performance is acceptable and
 analysis of blanks and samples may proceed.
 If,  however, any  individual  concentration
 falls outside  of the range  given, system per-
 formance is unacceptable for that compound.
  NOTE: The  large number of compounds in
 Table  8 present a substantial probability
 that one or more will fail when all com-
 pounds are analyzed. To determine if the ex-
 traction/concentration system is out of con-
 trol or if the failure is caused by probability,
 proceed as follows:                  '
: 12.7.3.1  Analyze the second aliquot of the
 pair of precision and recovery standard (Sec-
 tion 10.1.3).
  12.7.3.2  Compute  the   concentration  of
 only those pollutants or labeled compounds
 that failed the previous test (Section 12.7.3).
 If these compounds now pass, the extraction/
 concentration processes are in control and
 analysis of blanks and samples may proceed.
 If. however, any of the same compounds  fail
 again,  the  extraction/concentration  proc-
             n.  too,
 esses are not being performed properly for
 these compounds. In this event, correct the
 problem, re-extract the sample lot (Section
 10) and repeat the on-going precision and re-
 covery test (Section 12.7).
  12.7.4 Add results which .pass the speci-
 fications in Section 12.7.2 to Initial and pre-
 vious on-going  data. Update QC  charts to
 perform a  graphic representation of contin-
 ued laboratory  performance (Figure 5).  De-
 velop a statement of laboratory accuracy for
 each pollutant and labeled compound by cal-
 culating the average  percent recovery  (R)
 and the standard deviation of perc -at recov-
 ery (Sr). Express the accuracy as a recovery
 interval from R-2Sr to R+2s,. For example, if
 R=95% and s,=5%, the accuracy is 85-105%.

       13.  Qualitative Determination

  13.1  Quantitative determination is  ac-
 complished by comparison of data from anal-
 ysis of a sample  or blank with data from
 analysis of the shift standard (Section 12.1)
 and with data stored in the spectral libraries
 (Section  7.2.4).  Identification is confirmed
 when spectra and retention times  agree  per
 the criteria below.
  13.2  Labeled  compounds and pollutants
 having no labeled analog:
  13.2.1  The signals for  all characteristic
masses stored in the spectral library (Sec-
 tion 7.2.4) shall  be present and shall maxi-
mize within the  same two consecutive scans.
  13.2.2  Either (1) the background corrected
EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative in-
tensities of the  mass spectral peaks at  the
GC peak maximum shall agree within a fac-
tor of two  (0.5  to 2 times) for all masses
stored in the library.
  13.2.3  The retention time relative to the
nearest eluted  internal standard  shall be
within ±15 scans or ±15 seconds, whichever is
greater of this difference in the shift stand-
ard (Section 12.1).                 •
  13.3 Pollutants having a labled analog:
  13.3.1  The signals for  all characteristic
masses stored in the spectral library  (Sec-
tion 7.2.4) shall  be present and shall maxi-
mize within the  same two consecutive scans.
  13.3.2. Either (1) the background corrected
EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative in-
 tensities  of the  mass spectral peaks at  the
GC peak maximum shall agree within a fac-
 tor of two for all masses stored in the spec-
tral library.
  13.3.3. The retention time difference  be-
 tween the  pollutant and its labeled analog
shall agree within ± 6 scans or ±  6 seconds
 (whichever is greater) of this difference in
 the shift standard (Section 12.1).
  13.4  Masses present in the experimental
mass spectrum that are not present in  "-he
reference mass spectrum shall be accounted
 for by contaminant or background ions. If
 the experimental mass spectrum is contami-
 nated, an experienced spectrometrist (Sec-
                                         869

-------
tlon 1.4) is to determine the presence or ab-
sence of the cmmpoiind.

       14.  Quantitative Determination

  14.1  Isotope dilation—by  adding a known
amount of a labeled compound to every sam-
ple 'prior to extraction, correction for recov^
ery of the pollutant can be made because the
pollutant and its labeled analog exhibit the
same effects upon extraction, concentration,
and gas chromatography. Relative response
(RR) values for mixtures are used in conjunc-
tion  with calibration curves  described in
Section 7.4 to determine concentrations di-
rectly, so long as labeled compound spiking
levels are constant. For the phenml example
given in Figure 1 (Section 7.4.1), KB would be
equal to 1.114. For this KB value, the phenol
calibration curve given in Figure 1 indicates
a concentration  of 27 ng/mL in the sample ex-
tract (C«).
  14.2 Internal  standard—compute the con-
centration in the extract using the response
factor  determined  from  calibration  data
(Section  7.5) and  the  following equation:
C^(|ig/mL)=(A, x (V(Aj.  x RP) where  C«» is
the concentration of the compound in the ex-
tract, and the other terms are as defined in
Section 7.5.1.
  14.3 The concentration of the pollutant in
water is computed using the volumes  of the
original water sample (Section 10.1) and the
final extract volume  (Section 10.5), as fol-
lows:  Concentration in  water (iig/LMGn x
V«yV, where V«, is the extract volume in
mL. and V, is the sample volume in liters.
  14.4 If the EICP area  at the quantisation
mass for any compound exceeds the calibra-
tion range of the system, the extract  of the
dilute aliquot (Section  10.1) is analyzed by
Isotope dilution; otherwise, the extract is di-
luted by a factor of 10, 9  uli of internal  stand-
ard solution (Section 6.10) are added to a 1.0
mlt aliquot, and this diluted extract is  ana-
lyzed by the internal  standard method (Sec-
tion  14.2). Quantify each' compound at the
highest concentration level within the cali-
bration range.
  14.5 Report results for all pollutants and
labeled compounds (Tables  1 and 2)  found in
all standards, blanks, and samples in jig/L, to
three significant figures. Results for samples
which have been diluted are reported  at the
least dilute level at which the  area  at the
quantitation mass is  within the calibration
range  (Section  14.4)   and  the   labeled
compound  recovery  is  within  the normal
range for the method (Section 15.4).

       IS.  Analysis of Complex Samples

   15.1  Untreated effluents and other  sam-
 ples frequently contain  high levels (>1000 jig/
 L) of the compounds  of interest, interfering
 compounds,  and/or  polymeric  materials.
 Some samples  will not concentrate  to one
mL (Section 10.5); others will overload the
GC column and/or mass spectrometer..
  15.2  Analyze the dilute aliquot  (Section
10.1) when the sample will not concentrate to
1.0 mL. If a dilute aliquot was not extracted,
and the sample holding time (Section 9.3) has
not been exceeded, dilute an aliquot of the
sample with reagent water and re-extract
(Section  10.1); otherwise, dilute  the extract
(Section  14.4) and analyze  by the  internal
standard method (Section 14.2).   .
  15.3  Recovery of internal standard— the
EICP area of the internal standard should be
within a factor of two of the area in  the shift
standard (Section 12.1).  If the absolute areas
of the labeled compounds are within a factor
of two of the respective areas  in the shift
standard, and the internal standard area is
less than one-half of its respective area, then
internal standard loss in the extract has oc-
curred. In  this case, use one of the labeled
compounds  (perferably a  polynuclear aro-
matic  hydrocarbon) to compute  the con-
centration of a pollutant with no labeled
analog.
  15.4  Recovery of labeled compounds— in
most samples, labeled compound recoveries
will be similar to those from reagent water
(Section  12.7). If the labeled compound recov-
ery is outside the limits given in Table 8,  the
dilute  extract (Section 10.1) is analyzed as in
Section 14.4. If the recoveries of all labeled
compounds and the internal staldard are low
(per the criteria above), then a loss in instru-
ment sensitivity is the most likely  cause. In
this case, the 100 |ig/mL calibration  standard
(Section 12.1) shall be analyzed  and calibra-
tion verified (Section 12.5). If a loss in sen-
sitivity has  occurred, the instrument shall
be repaired, the  performance specifications
in Section 12 shall be met, and the extract
reanalyzed. If a loss in instrument sensitiv-
ity has not  occurred, the method  does  not
work on the sample being analyzed and the
result may not be reported for regulatory
compliance purposes.

           16. Method Performance

   16.1  Interlaboratory  performance for this
method is detailed in references  9 and 10.
   16.2  A chromatogram of the 100 pg/mL
acid/base/neutral calibration standard (Sec-
tion 6.13) is shown in Figure 6.

                REFERENCES

   1. "Performance Tests for the Evaluation
 of Computerized  Gas Chromatography/Mass
 Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories"
 USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268.  EPA-
 600/4-60-025 (April 1980).
   2. "Working  with  Carcinogens," DHEW,
 PHS,  CDC. NIOSH, Publication 77-206,  (Au-
 gust 1977).
   3. "OSHA  Safety  and Health Standards,
 General Industry" OSHA 2206,  29  CFR  part
 1910 (January 1976).
                                          870

-------
              n.  loo,
                                                                            . >%,
  4. "Safely In Academic Chemistry Labora-
tories, " ACS Committee on Chexnical Safety
(1979).
  5. "Reference Compound to Calibrate Ion
Abundance  Measurement in  Gas  Chroma-
tography-Maaa Spectrometry Systems." J.W.
Eichelberger, LJB. Harris, and W.L. Budde.
Anal. Chem., 47.955 (1975).
  6. "Handbook of Analytical Quality Con-
trol in Water and Wastewater Laboratories,"
USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati. OH 45268,  EPA-
600/4-79-019 (March 1979).
  7.  "Standard   Practice  for   Sampling
Water," ASTM Annual Book  of  Standards
ASTM, Philadelphia, PA. 76 (1980).
  8. "Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Resid-
ual cmortne," USEPA, EKSLf Cincinnati
OS 45268. EPA 600/4-70-020 (March 1979).
  9. Colby,  B.N.,  Beimer,  R.G.. Rushneck.
D.R.. and Telliard,  W.A..  "Isotope Dilution
Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry for
the determination of Priority Pollutants in
Industrial   Effluents."   USEPA,   Effluent
Guidelines, Division. Washington, DC  20460
(1980).
  10. "Inter-laboratory Validation of US En-
vironmental   Protection  Agency ,  Method
1625," USEPA, Effluent Guidelines Division.
Washington, DC 20460 (June 15, 1984).
                        TABLE 1—Base/Neutral ExtractaWe Compounds
                         Compound
            STORET
CAS reg-
  istry
EPA-
EGD
                                                                                       NPDES
Acanaphttiene
                                                              34200
Oenzo(b)ftjoranlhene,
Banzo(l<)fluarantMne
Banzo(a)pyrane.
             34242
             34247
BipheiTyMAppendaC)

Bta(2
-------
         TABLE 1—Base/Neutral Extractabte Compounds—Continued
Compound
1 l**m l-b il If ilirtlTM^Ttftftflfln 	 -. 	 i.ir*»*«M* 	 «,..«.... «t..«*n 	 	 -_..-...
lruH*|-W1/1 ^ *\4*fftnVnm ... 	 	 ...rrr 	 	 -.--...»— —..-«-.
UWJWRH'<^f^AA'/r/1OTW 	 " 	 " 	 .".
fi 1 ikr^iHh iliVM ' ••••••«m»«««ii«»*»»«««fn'T 	 — — - —

f Iff I rJ~^1T I* 	 .... 	 _._.«*«.»• 	 •• 	 .....Tm^^r—— --------


lst.j-kjkr>aririf^^Tw1afnikT^ _.«..«..—.....•«...•••-•••••••••••««*"-*——————

ClhK c^^rJ .I..-M. !«»•••••••*•••••»»••
fc.rVri^-* f*U**fc -W\ 	 „„ 	 ,, 	 	 r 	 ~ 	 — — -
DuM-M%* 	 	 .....Tti 	 - 	

• fcttrriruM-d fcirrMvliT ,O - 	 , 	 	 	 •••< 	 — —
4 O 1_*pUKl*-nK*l* V-VU MjM ... 	 7r 	 	 	 	
1 ,2,4-*fch»orcb6eu««« 	 ~~~
STORET
34386
34403
34408
34686
82553
34447
34438
34428
34433
34461
34604
77088
34469
77128
77493
77613
34551
CAS reg-
istry
77-47-4
193-09-6
78-69-1
91-20-3
91-69-8
98-95-3
62-75-9
621-64-7
88-30-3
85-01-8
108-05-2
109-06-89
129-00-0
100-42-6
98-65-6
87-61-6
120-82-1
EPA-
EGD
053 B
083 B
054B
055B
502 B
056B
061 B
063B
062B
081 B
065A
503 B
084B
510 B
509 B
529B
006 B
NPOES
035B
037 B
038B
039B
""MOB
041 B
042B
043B
044B
010 A
~045B
'~046B
                   TABLE 2—Acid ExtractabJe Compounds
Compound



?VflWfcriih-nrt .._._...._._ 	 	 	 .....,-— 	


JrJJfcnnKjTrJnl

*> »» ft. Mr h_,r_rr_r J-___r_rJ f4r\ 	 ,.._ 	 -. 	 *

eAfrMcMoRVlMnd -: 	
STORET
34452
34586
34601
34616
34667
34591
34646
39032
77688

34621
CAS reg-
istry
59-60-7
95-67-8
120-83-2
51-28-6
534-62-1
88-75-6
100-02-7
87-66-6
93-37-65
96-96-*
88-06-2
EPA-
EOO
022A
024 A
031 A
059A
060 A
057 A
058A
084A
530 A
531 A
021 A
NPOES
OOBA
001 A
002 A
005 A
004 A
OOBA
007 A
009 A
...••••••mi
.............
011 A
TABLE 3—GAS CHHOMATOGRAPHY OF BASE/NEUTRAL EXTRACTABLE COMPOUNDS
                                                             Rotantion tint6
                                                                        RatetJve
Detec-
 tion
 BmH*
 (pg/L)
                                                                       1.000-1.000
                                                                          IU
                                                                       0.326-0.393
                                                                       1X06-1.028
                                                                       0.450-0.488
                                                                       1.002^1.009
                                                                       0.624-0.652
                                                                       1.008-1.023
                                                                       0.584-0.613
                                                                       0.995-1.010
                                                                       0.584-0.607
                                                                       1.007-1.016
                                                                       0.585-O.615
                                                                       1.022-1.038
                                                                       0.605-0.636
                                                                       0.998-1.008
                                                                       0.601-0.666
                                                                       0.997-1.009
                                                                       0.632-0.667
                                                                       0.995-1.008
                                                                       0.664-0.691
                                                                        1.010-1.016
                                                                       0.690-0.717
                                                                       0.999-1.001
                                                                           ns
                                                                        0.706-0.727
                                                                        1X02-1.007
                                                                        0.747-0.767
    10
    50
    50
    50
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
     10
    20
     10
     10
     10
                                       872

-------
Environmental Protection Agency
                                                                    136. App.A Molh.  1625
  TABU= 3-G»s CHROMKTOGRAPHY OF BASE/NEUTRAL EXTHACTABLE
EGO
No.'
 354
 234
 334

 208

 256
 355
 609
 709
 606
 706
 529
 252
 352
 253
 353
 220
 320
 518
 612
 712
 608
 708
 377
 271
 371
 336
 201
 301
 60S
 705
 602
 702
 280
 380
 240
 340
 270
 370
 619
 719
 235
 335
 237
 337
 607
 707
 262
 362
 041
 209
 309
 281
 520
 381
 278
 378
 604
 704
 528
 621
 721
 268
 368
 239
 339
 284
                             Compound
       bto(2-cMoraefiacy) methane
       12.4-*richJoi
       12.4-Wchta
      Dimethyl phthatBto
      2JB4HtMUkmrm d3
      Anthiaoene-dlO
      Dtoenzothiopnane-dB __
      Caitazata
      OMvfcutylpMhaMB.
      Ruoranthane-tflO,
      Ruoranthene	
                                                                     Retention time
                                                              Mem
                                                              (aac)
  889
'921
  924
  939
  955
  958
  963
  967
  973
  975
  953
  981
1003
1005
1006
1147
1142
1185
1203
1205
1195
1211
1216
1265
1247
1289
1273
1283
1300
                                                               1304
                                                               1331
                                                               1335
                                                               1368
                                                               1371
                                                               1395
                                                               1401
                                                               1406
                                                               1409
                                                               1414
                                                               1447
                                                               1469
                                                               1359
                                                               1344
                                                               1433
                                                               1439
                                                               1437
                                                               1439
                                                               1447
                                                               1464
                                                               1498
                                                               1521
                                                               1522
1583
1588
1592
1559
1650
1655
1677
1719
1723
1813
1817
1844
                                                                       EGO
                                                                        Ref
 254
 164
 234
 164
 164
 206
 164
 255
 164
 609
 164
 606
 164
 164
 252
                                                                         164
                                                                         164
608
164
277
164
271
164
236
164

164
605
281
164
240
164
270
164
619
164
235
164
237
164
607
164
262
164
164
209
164

281
164
278
164
604
164
164
621
164
268
164
239
164
                 Retsava
 0.781-0.803
 0490^1403
   n*
 0.813-0.830
 1400-1405
 0.819-0.833
 1401-1406
 naso-naAt
                                                                                0.730-0.908
                                                                                0466-1451

                                                                                0.856-0671

                                                                                0476-0.988
                                                                               0497-1407
                                                                                  ns
                                                                               0497-1409
                                                                               1480-1496
                                                                               1400-1404
0498-1405
1490-1.112
1401-1405
1.107-1.125
0499-1409
1.134-1.155
0498-1407
     1.189
                1.185-1214
                0499-1408
                1.197-1229
                0.996-1.006
                1410-1.478
                1413-1420
                1.152-1.181
                1400-1402
                1216-1248
                0.993-1.009
                1213-1249
                1400-1.007
                1.000-1.002
                1271-1.307
                1288-1.327
                0.999-1.001
                                                                                  ns
1.342-1.388
0.996-1.006
1.314-1.361
   ns
1.184-1.662
1.010-1.021
1.446-1.510
1.000-1.003
1.522-1.596
1.000-1.004
1.523-1.644
Detec-
 tion
fen**
(Moyy_

    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
   50
   50
    10
    10
    10
   10
   10
   10
   10
   10
   10
   10
   20
   20
   20
   20
   20
   20
    10
   10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
   20
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
    10
                                              873

-------
 TABIE 3-GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY OF BASE/NEUTRAL BCTRACTABLE COMPOUNDS-Continued
EGO
 384
 205
 305
 522
 623
 723
 067
 27fl
 376
 272
 372
 228
 328
 268
 368
 524
 260
 380
 525
 274
 354
 275
 375
 273
 373
 626
 728
 063
 OB2
 278
 379
      BanzkSrw
      n-docour	
      n-Mtmcosane-dSO.
                         Compound
};3'-™^~
        c*tor*boo pointi.
         *» tzob«nz«n«.
  Qas valodty: 30 ±5 cm/sac.
              TABLE 4— GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY OF ACID EXTRACTABLE COMPOUNDS
I
EGO
No. •
	 1
164
224
324
257
35'
231
331
222
322
221
321
531
530
259
359
258
358
• 260
360
r>KA

Compound


2-chterophenoW4 — . 	
2*ch)orophenol ............ 	 —•• • 	 •• • ™
jcH^iwOpfrOfiOi O^ *«»»»*»»««»»»i»»»»*««*«»»«»«""""
n jtiij-j-uTJ* ^jfc «»i __......«••••.*••••*•••*•••••••••**•••••*
2.4-diehkxophanol-d3 	 •: 	
2,4-olchlofophenol 	 • 	
4oro-3-methyJphanol-d2 	
4-cNorc-3-m«thy1phenol 	
2,4,6-«chkxoph«noW2 	 • 	
2.4,8-trichJoropnenol 	 	
Z,4^HnCtmXOpnWKJ( .„........."..—. 	 •........— 	
2A6-trichlorcphanol 	 : 	
2,4-dm«roph«ooM3 — 	 	 ; 	



2-m«thyU.6
-------
Environmental Protection Agency                       R. 136. ADD. A. Mom. 1625

        TABLE 4—GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY OF ACID EXTRACTABLE COMPOUNDS—Continued
EGO
No. i
364
• . Compound
Pentachlorcphenol^.........'...................'......^............................................
Retention lima
Mam
(sec)
1561
EGO
Ref
264
Retail
0.996-1.002
Detec-
tion limit
»
-------
TABLE 77—ACID EXTRACTABLE COMPOUND
  CHARACTERISTIC MASSES—Continued
TABLE 77—ACID EXTRACTABLE COMPOUND
  CHARACTERISTIC MASSES—Continued
Compound
tooehwwl — '
P«mli»5>krc>pheoct 	
?,3.R-kich$oroori«nol _......-..... — .
Labeled
analog
d4
13C6
02
Primary ml
z
139/143
266/272
1967200 •
Compound
2.45-tnchtorophenol — . 	
2,4.6-trichkxophenol 	 	
Labeled
analog
d2
02
Primary m/
z
196/200
196/200
             TABLE 8—ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PERFORMANCE TESTS
EGO
Na»
301
201
377
277
379
278
305
206
372
272
374
274
376
275
373
273
379
279
712
612
318
218
043
342
242
3«6
26C
041
067
717
617
706
60S
518
719
619
520
721
621
522
723
623
524
525
728
623
528
320
220
322
222
324
224
340
240
376
276

Compound

AcgnipnthflW - — ,,,.....n.r 	
AcMuohthww-dlO ™,.. 	 ,„„.,.-, —

ACenapfKyWM 	 ••• 	 «~«~~. 	 —•
AceniphtnyierHKtS 	 	 	 .. 	 ...„-,-
ArrihaKW>ft 	 	 ••." 	
Arrthracent-rJIO 	 	 •• —

B*nzk#f>»-rtfl 	 „„,--. .".. 	 	 	
Bm*i*r*/m\mnUifmr**l* 	 	
BonTtXilifKhfirfffKHll? ..u4... 	 	

B4nzo{b)RuoraiTtrtorKHi12 ......... r, - — —
Btnxo()()fuoranthQnfl i.^.*^.,.,. 	 imr 	
Bonzo(k)fiuoranthen*-d12 _. — -
Bonzo(a}pyrono •.».«.»..•.•« 	 ••••• 	 - 	 «• •
Bocuo(>)pyr*n*-d1? 	 	 ••••••
BtnzofohQporylono 	 	 ,....,r-,,mT- 	
&eruo(ghi}perytone-d12 „ .„ ._ __ ...
Biphflnyi (ApponoTx G) 	 	 • 	 1-1— -
RjchwtvMilT ' ,, 	 	
m*/3LnhIrmAttrun ^h*tr
Rrt/2-cWofotttrvfl athor-dS ^...... 	 ^..........nT,-
^{^•J^»i^MhriTy)mfrfHHn** x^«.. 	 	
RfWXffJrwtt^'wr'WTufl ^hAT
^rc-ditoroboornrwftathor-cil? 	 	
Bi*(2-*thylhBxy1) prrthaJate 	 - 	 .
Bh(2-etftylh*xyl) phthalatoHM . 	 	 ,....,.,, ,-
4-bromophenyi phonyl ottwr* 	 	
Butyl benryl phth»li*e* .„., 	 ......r.
ivCIO (Aooendix C) . _„„._-.
n-C10-cJ22 	 ,,,,,,,1,,,,
ri-C12 (Appondix C) 	 	 	 	 .........rrr-
rvC12-d26 *-. .«.^u........... 	 	 	 	
n-CM (Appendix C)* .. „„„.... 	 , 	 r,T 	
n-rtlR /Annonrfiv ftt 	 ._!.„„....„..
rvC16-d34 .. ...-. ~- _.._.~~...__
ivC18 (Apponcfix C)' 	
n-C20 {Appendbe O 	
n-C20-d42 ^~.~,, ™ . 	 	 ~
i>C22 (Appendix C)* ............ 	 _„......_........—.
r\_f^t t ArwwilY C\
n-C24-d50 .„„..... 	 ~~ 	 — 	
fVC2S {ApOendiX C)* ..M...M........H..H.M...H...HH...
n-C28 (ADDondix C)* .......TT..«.»..,^^............
ivO30 (ADoendix C) '
&C3Q-dB2 ., 	 .. „. 	 ^._

2-chkxon«phthalen« 	 ™...« — _... 	 . 	
2-ch!oroo*phlhaJftnft-d7 ................................ ..~.
4-chloro-3-n«rthyiphenol ..„. 	 ~ — . 	
4-cto)ofO-3-me
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Pt. 136, App. A, Moth. 1625
          TABLE-8—ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PERFORMANCE TESTS—Continued
EGO
No.'
713
613
082
705
60S
704
604
368
268
325
225
326
226
327
227
328
228
331
231
370
270
334
234
371
271
359
259
335
235
336
236
369
269
707
607
708
608
337
237
339
239
380
280
309
209
352
252
312
212
353
253
083
354
254
360
260
355
255
702
602
356
256
357
257
358
258
061

Compound •

p-cymene (Appendix C) ....... 	 	 	
p-cymene-d14 	 ...................... 	 .......... 	
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene* 	 . 	 : 	
Dibenzofuran (Appendix C) 	 .. 	
Dibenzofuran-dS 	 	
Dfeenzothiophene (Synfuei) 	
Dibenzothiophene-d8 ; 	 ..................................
Di-o-buty) phthalate 	 	
Di-n-butyl phthatate-d4 . • .
1 ,2-dichtorobenzene ............ 	 .............. 	
1 ,2-dichlorobenzene-d4 	 ...... 	 ... 	
1 ,3-dichtorebenzene 	 « 	 ..............
1 ,3-dich|orabenzene-d4 	 .. 	
1 ,4^jicWorob6ozene .,„,„.,..,.„!.!„., , _,,,..,...,......
1 ,4-dichlorobenzene-d4 .....................................
3,3'-dic)itorobenzidino .. .... .. 	
3,3'-dichlofobenzidine-d6
2,4-dichloraphenol 	 : 	 . 	 .'.
2.4-dichlorophenoW3 	 ; 	 . 	
Oiethyt phthalate ™ 	 - 	
Oiethyl phthalate-d4 	 . 	
2,4-dtmethylphenol ......... 	 „ 	 .
2.4-dimethy)pheooW3 	 	 	
Dimethyl phthalate 	 .. 	 ._..„ 	
Dimethyl phthalate-64 	 	 	
2v4'vinitrOPllenOl • .•••m.n.«.n..«m...«......»«««M<»l>ml..>
2,4-dinHrophenc4-d3 ...........................................
2,4-dinitfotokiene ...............................................
2,4-dinitFotohjene-d3 	 ~. 	 .. 	 .
2,6-dinHrotohiene .........:..~........_.................._..
2,6-dinHroiohjerie-d3 	 . 	
Di-iwv^yl phthplata ,„„„.„....„...„„_,„ , „ , ,-„ tl
Dt-n-octyl phthalate-d4 ....' 	
Diphenytamine (Appendix C) 	 . 	
Diphenyianiine-d10 	 . 	
Diphenyl ether (Appendix C) 	
1 ,2-diohenylhydrazine .. 	 ............. 	 „..
1,2-diphenyihydrazine-dlO 	 ._._ 	 .„„_
FJuoranthene ......._.....-. _. 	 	
Ruoranthene-dlO ..........._.................„..............
Ruorene .»««_.......»..„..„_„...„.„„......„.....„._...
Ruorene-dIO ........«..„_...».;....__........_.„.....„...
Hexachloraoenzene ........„.......»..„..............._...
Hexaohlorobenzene-1 3C6 	 ... 	 .....................
hexachlorotxitadwoe
hnmrhlf»ntMitj>1'nMm 1*lfM
hexachlofoettiane >
hexachloroethane-1 3C1
hexacftlOfocycSopentadtene , 	 .. 	
hexachkxocydopentactiene-13C4 ..'... 	 	
idenod^ 3-cdk>vrene*
isopnoronfl ....
isophorone-dS ..................................................
2-methyM,6-dinitrophenol 	 .. 	 . 	
2-methyM.6-dinitrophenoKJ2 . 	
naphthalene 	 	 	 	
naphthalene-dS .................................................
R-naphthytfjTTi'pn (AppQf^iX C) . , ,
frflaDhthvlamine-d7 	 	 	
nitrobenzene
nrtrobenzene-d5 ............. 	 .... 	 ..... 	 .. 	 . 	
2-nttrophenol ......... ..........~......................... ........
2-nttrophenol-d4 ..............._... 	 ........................
4-nitrophenol 	 	
4-nrtrophenoW4 	 „.. 	 ....... 	 . 	
N-nHrosodimethylamte* 	 . 	 . 	 ... 	
Acceptance criteria
Initial precision and ac-
curacy section 8.2.3
(UPA)
s
18
67
55
20
31
31
31
15
23
17
35
43
48
42
48
26
80
12
28
44
78
13
22
36
106
18
68
18
37
30
59
16
46
45
42
19
37
73
35
33
35
29
43
16
81
56
63
227
77
15
60
55
25
23
19
64
20
39
49
33
25
28
15
23
42
188
198
X
76-140
ns-359
23-299
85-136
47-136
79-150
48-130
76-165
23-195
73-146
14-212
63-201
13-203
61-194
15-193
68-174
ns-562
85-131
38-164
75-196
ns-260
62-153
15-228
74-188
ns-640
72-134
22-308
75-158
22-245
80-141
44-184
77-161
12-383
58-205
27-206
82-136
36-155
49-308
31-173
71-177
36-161
81-132
51-131
90-124
36-228
51-251
ns-316
21-68
19-340
79-146
39-160
70-168
40-156
74-169
•22-209
70-152
11-247
55-225
ns-260
53-219
11-245
64-185
ns-ns
83-135
34-182
65-222
ns-ns
60-156
14-242
67-207
ns-ns
68-141
17-378
72-164
19-275
70-159
31-250
74-166
10-433
51-231
21-249
77-144
29-186
40-360
26-200
64-194
. 30-187
70-151
38-172
85-132
23-321
43-287
ns-413
13-03
ns-563
67-148
ns-ns
19-340
70-168
44-147
72-142
. 28-307
75-149
22-192
ns^ns
ns-ns
65-169
15-314
75-145
37-158
51-175
ns-ns
12-«07
                                    877

-------
             TABLE 8—ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PERFORMANCE TESTS—Continued
EGO
Na«
Compound
                                                                   Acceptance criteria
Initial precision and ac-
 curacy section 82.3
       (HO/U
                                                                Labeled
                                                              compound re-
                                                               covery sec.
                                                              8.3 and 14.2 P
                                                                (percent)
Calibration
verification
 sec. 12.5
 (lip/mL)
 On-going
 accuracy
sec. 11.6 R
  (HCA.)
  063
  362
  262
  364
  264
  381
  281
  366
  266
  703
  603
  334
 '284
  710
  010
  700
  800
  529
  308
  208
  530
  531
  321
  221
N^titroccdiphenylcrnine
pemschJorophenol
pwttschloropnenoi-13CB
•-torpirMOl (Appendix C)
  4erpineokJ3
2,4.6-ttchloroph«nol
2.4.6^lchlorophenokg
                              198
                               45
                               37
                               21.
                               49
                               13
                               40
                               36
                              161
                               38
                              138
                               19
                               29
                               42
                               49
                               44
                               48
                               69
                               19
                               57
                               30
                               30
                               57
                               47
             21-472
             65-142
             54-126
             76-140
             37-212
             93-119
             45-130
             77-127
             21-210
             59-149
             11-380
             76-152
             32-176
             53-221
             n»-281
             42-234
             22-292
             15-229
             82-136
             15-212
             58-137
             58-137
             59-205
             43-183
                                                                   26256
   40-249
   68-148
   59-170
   77-130
   42-237
   75-133
   67-149
   65-155
   48-208
   60-165
   31-324
   76-132
   48-210
   65-153
   44-228
   54-186
   20-602
   60-167
   78-128
   61-163
   56-180
   56-180
   81-123
   69-144
    12-807
    53-173
   '40-166
    71-150
    29-254
    87-126
    34-168
    62-154
     ns-ns
    50-174
    ns-606
    72-159
    28-198
    48-244
    ns-348
    38-258
    18-339
    11-297
    77-144
    10-282
    51-153
    51-153
    48-244
    34-226
                           I with 0.1 or5 indicate a pollutant quantified by the internal standard method; reference num-
                           '      '       ^3 quantified by the Internal standard method; reference numbers beginning
with3cT7 iooical*• poButant quwtmed by isotope dilution.
  •Manured by Womal standard; specification derived from related
  n*.no •pecfScafion; In* to outside the range that can be measured rebabry.
                                                   878

-------
 Environmental Protection Agency
         Pt. 136, App. A, Mett). 1625
   10-
ui
> .1.0-
   0.1-
                    10   20    50    100  200
               CONCENTRATION (ugftnU
                                                                (3A)

                                                                AREA»«100
                                                                wyz
                                                                M,/Z.
                                                                               AREA.47O)
                                                                               AREA .43600
                                                                               AREA-48300
        (3C)

        AREA-49200
FIGURE 1   Relative Response Calibration Curve
for  Phenol. The Dotted Lines Enclose  a ±10
Percent Error Window.
FIGURE 3  Extracted Ion Current Profiles for (3A)
Unlabeled Compound.  (3B) Labeled Compound,
and (3C) Equal Mixture of Unlabeled and Labeled
Compounds.   •
FIGURE 2  Extracted Ion Current Profiles for
Chromatographically Resolved Labeled (rrij/z) and
Unlabeled (m,/z) Pairs. .
                                                879

-------
110.1.1]  ..
 110.1.2]
 I10.1.3J
 [10.1.4]
   110.2]
   [10.3}
  [10.42]
[10.4,10.5]
    [11.3]
    111.4]
                   STANDARD
                                     BLANK
                                        SAMPLE
       1 L REAGENT
         WATER
       1 L REAGENT
         WATER
                                                   1 L ALIQUOT
        SPIKE 500 pL
        OF 200 jjg/mL
         ISOTOPES
       SPIKE 500 pL
       OF 200 pgJmL
         ISOTOPES
SPIKE 500 pL
OF 200 pg/mL
 ISOTOPES
        SPIKE 1.0 mL
      OF STANDARDS
                       1
         STIR AND
        EQUILIBRATE
         STIR AND
        EQUILIBRATE
  STIR AND
EQUILIBRATE
                STANDARD OR BLANK
       EXTRACT BASe
          NEUTRAL
                      EXTRACT BASE/
                         NEUTRAL
              ORGANIC    I    AQUEOUS
                                             ORGANIC    I    AQUEOUS
                           EXTRACT ACID
CONCENTRATE
  TO 2-4 mL
CONCENTRATE
  TO 2-4 mL
                  L
                     J
                                                          EXTRACT ACID
        CONCENTRATE
          TOLOmL
                CONCENTRATE
                  TO 1.0 mL
                                                           CONCENTRATE
                                                             TOLOmL
         ADD INTERNAL
          STANDARD
                ADD INTERNAL
                  STANDARD
                                                           ADD INTERNAL
                                                             STANDARD
                        INJECT
INJECT

INJECT

                                   880

-------
                                                                  _	+3s
roxecnon agency
a -r-noo ' '

*>«•,'.
K

( (
1 l t
n. toe
t i
ANTHRACENE-OM

 s» _
58
E| OJO-
i i i i ii i i i
ANTHRACENE
• * t . «
L • • • _• — :






                            6/1  6/1  6/1  6/1   e« e«  era  era  e/4
                                           DATE ANALYZED
                FIGURE 5  Quality Control Charts Showing Area (top graph) and
                Relative Response of Anthracene to Anthracene-d10 (lower graph)
                Plotted as a Function of Time or Analysis Number.
             tIC                .      MTto MWIDlIGi II      SCHHS  I TO 32M
             tVI3^4 ScMiM            CM.il MHIDtlGE II
             SMVlCs «.C.«Bt.WI«.M,r.l«kilM.N«     ../___
             CCM6.I I62Sft-3«t.*,2a»l,5«3l.3»-2««i8.15«28«.3KH^I
             MMEGt C  I-32M UKLt N 2. 3.i OU»*l A  2. 2.9 J 6 BOfiEl U 2*.  3
        IM.I
          •JC.
                       7i95
                                            19M
                                            23149
                                                                                   7I577S.
                                                      31149
39l35
           47<3t
                   SCflH
                   TIIC
              FIGURE  6  Chromatogram of Combined Acid/base/neutral Standard.


[49 FR 43261. Oct. 26.1964; 50 FR 692, 695, Jan. 4,1985, as amended at 51 FR 23702. June 30.1986]
                                               881

-------
APPENDIX .B TO PART  136—DEFINITION
    AND  PROCEDURE  FOR  THE DETER-
    MINATION  OF  THE METHOD DETEC-
    TION LIMIT—REVISION 1.11

                Definition
  The method detection limit (MDL) is de-
fined as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99%  confidence that the analyte con-
centration is greater than zero and is deter-
mined from analysis of a sample in a given
matrix containing the analyte.

           Scope and Application
  This procedure is designed for applicability
to a wide variety of sample types ranging.
from  reagent   (blank)  water  containing
analyte to wastewater containing analyte.
The MDL for an analytical procedure may
vary as a function of sample type. The proce-
dure requires a complete, specific, and well
defined analytical  method. It is essential
that all sample processing steps of the ana-
lytical method be included in the determina-
tion of the method detection limit.
  The MDL  obtained  by  this  procedure is
used to judge the  significance  of a single
measurement of a future sample.
  The MDL procedure was designed for appli- •
cability to a broad variety of physical and
chemical methods.  To accomplish this, the
procedure was made device- or instrument-
independent.

                Procedure
  I. Make an estimate  of the detection limit
using one of the following:
  (a)  The  concentration value  that  cor-
responds to an instrument signal/noise in the
range of 2.5 to 5.
  (b) The concentration equivalent of three
times the standard deviation of replicate in-
strumental measurements of the analyte in
remgent water.
  (c) That region of the standard curve where
there is a significant change in sensitivity,
i.e.. a break in  the slope of the standard
curve.
  (d) Instrumental limitations.
  It is recognized that the experience of the
analyst is important to this  process. How-
ever, the analyst must include the above
considerations in the initial estimate of the
detection limit.
  2. Prepare reagent (blank) water that is as
free of analyte as possible. Reagent or inter-
ference free water is defined as a water sam-
ple in which analyte  and interferent  con-
centrations are  not detected at the  method
detection limit  of each analyte of interest.
Interferences are defined as systematic er-
rors in the measured analytical signal of an
established procedure caused by the presence
of  interfering  species (interferent).  The
interferent concentration is  presupposed  to
be normally distributed  in  representative
samples of a given matrix.               ;
  3. (a) If the MDL is to be determined in re-
agent (blank) water, prepare a laboratory
standard (analyte in reagent water) at a con-
bentration which is at  least  equal to or in
the same  concentration range as  the esti-
mated method detection limit. (Recommend •
between 1  and 5 times the estimated method
detection limit.) Proceed to Step 4.
  (b) If the MDL is to be determined in an-
other sample matrix, analyze the sample. If
the measured level of the analyte  is in the
recommended range of one to five times the
estimated detection limit, proceed to Step 4.
  If the measured  level of analyte is  less
than  the  estimated detection limit, add a
known amount of analyte: to bring the level
of analyte between one and five times the es-
timated detection limit.
  If the measured level of analyte is greater
than  five  times  the  estimated detection
limit, there are two options.
  (1) Obtain  another sample with a  lower
level  of analyte in the  same  matrix if pos-
sible.
  (2) The sample may be used  as is for deter-
mining  the method detection limit if the
analyte level does  not  exceed 10 times the
MDL of the analyte in reagent water.  The
variance of the analytical method changes as
the analyte concentration increases from the
MDL.  hence the  MDL determined  under
these circumstances may not truly  reflect
method variance at lower analyte concentra-
tions.
  4. (a) Take a minimum of seven aliquots of
the sample to be used to calculate the meth-
od detection limit and process each through
the entire analytical method. Make all com-
putations according to the defined method
with  final results  in the method reporting
units. If a blank measurement is required to
calculate  the measured level  of analyte. ob-
tain a separate blank measurement for each
sample aliquot analyzed. The average blank
measurement is subtracted from the respec-
tive sample measurements.
  (b) It may be economically and technically
desirable  to evaluate the estimated method
detection limit before  proceeding with 4a.
This  will:  (1) Prevent repeating this  entire
procedure  when  the  costs of analyses are
high  and (2) insure that the procedure  is
being conducted at the correct concentra-
tion. It is quite possible that  an inflated
MDL will be calculated from data obtained
at many times the real MDL even though the
level of analyte  is less than five times the
calculated method detection limit. To insure
that the  estimate of the method  detection
limit is a good estimate, it  is necessary to
determine that  a lower  concentration  of
analyte will not  result  in  a significantly
lower method  detection limit. Take  two
aliquots of the sample to be used to calculate
the method detection limit and process each
                                         882

-------
Environmental Protection Agency

through .the entire method, including blank
measurements  aa described  above in  4a.
Evaluate these data:
  (1)  If  these  measurements indicate  the
sample is in desirable range for determina-
tion  of  the  MDL.  take  flve  additional
aliquots and proceed. Use all seven measure-
ments for calculation of the MDL.
  (2)  If  these  measurements indicate  the
sample is not in correct range, reestimate
the MDL, obtain new sample as in 3 and re-
peat either 4a or 4b.
  5. Calculate the variance (S*) and standard
deviation (S) of the replicate measurements,
as follows:
             i=lS
where:
Xt; 1=1 to n, are the analytical results in the
   final method reporting units obtained
   from the n sample aliquots and £ refers
   to the sum of the X values from i=l to n.
  6. (a) Compute the MDL as follows:
MDL *
                            (S)
where:
  MDL = the method detection limit
  V-i.i— - .99) = the students' t  value appro-
   priate for a 99% confidence level and a
   standard deviation estimate with n-1 de-
   grees of freedom. See Table.
  S = standard deviation of the replicate
   analyses.
  (b) The 95% confidence interval estimates
for the MDL derived in Ga are computed ac-
cording to the following  equations  derived
from  percentiles of the chi square over de-
grees of freedom distribution (Ta/df).
  LCL = 0.64 MDL
  UCL = 2.20 MDL
  where: LCL and UCL are the  lower and
   upper 95% confidence limits respectively
   based on seven aliqnots.
  7. Optional  iterative  procedure  to verify
the reasonableness of the estimate of the
MDL  and subsequent MDL determinations.
  (a) If this is the initial attempt to compute
MDL  based on the estimate of MDL formu-
lated in Step  1, take the MDL as calculated
in Step 6. spike the matrix at this calculated
MDL  and proceed through the procedure
starting with Step 4.
  (b) If this is the second or later iteration of
the MDL calculation, use S2 from the cur-
rent MDL calculation and S2 from the pre-
vious MDL calculation to  compute the  F-
ratio. The F-ratio is calculated by substitut-
ing the larger S2 into the  numerator S2* and
the other into the denominator  S2*. The com-
                                                           Pt. 136. App. B

                                  puted F-ratio Is then compared with the F-
                                  ratio found in the table which is 3.05 as fol-
                                  lows: if SVSV3.05, then compute the pooled
                                  standard deviation by the following equa-
                                  tion:                               .
                                             'pooled*
                                                         12
                                    if S2A/S2n>3.05, respike at the most recent
                                     calculated MDL and process the samples
                                     through the procedure starting with Step
                                     4. If the  most recent  calculated MDL
                                     does  not  permit  qualitative identifica-
                                 •    tion when samples are spiked at that
                                     level, report the MDL as a concentration
                                     between the current and previous MDL
                                     which permits qualitative identification.
                                    (c) Use the Sp.** as calculated  in 7b  to
                                  compute the final MDL according to the fol-
                                  lowing equation:

                                              MDL=2.681
where 2.681 is equal to toa, t_« =.„).
  (d) The 95% confidence limits for MDL de-
rived in 7c are computed according to the
following .equations derived from precentiles
of the chi squared over degrees  of freedom
distribution.
  LCL=0.72MDL
  UCL=1.65 MDL
where LCL and UCL are the lower and upper
95% confidence limits respectively based on
14 aliquots.

  TABLES OF STUDENTS' t VALUES AT THE 99
        PERCENT CONFIDENCE LEVEL
Number of rapticatas
7 ..._ 	 	 „ „ „
8 .; 	 .. 	 	 ..
9 [[[
1 o ..... 	 ..„.._„.„..,. 	
11 .... 	 .... 	
16 	 „„.„ 	 „
21 .................. 	 ...™......
81 	 .
00- . 	

Degrees
oHrae-
dom(n-1)
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
25
X
60
00

U-i.*.)
3 143
2.998
2.896
2421
2.764
2.602
2.528
2.485
2.457
2.390
2.326

                                                  Reporting

                                    The analytical method.used must be spe-
                                  cifically identified by number or title aid the
                                  MDL for each analyte expressed in the ap-
                                  propriate method reporting unite. If the ana-
                                  lytical method permits options which affect
                                  the method detection limit, these conditions
                                  must be specified with the MDL value. The
                                  sample matrix used to determine  the MDL
                                  must also be identified with MDL value. Re-
                                  port the mean analyte level with  the MDL

-------
ated. If a laboratory standard or a sample
that contained a known amount analyte was
used for this determination, also report the
mean recovery.  •.
  If the level of analyte in the sample was
below the  determined  MDL or  exceeds 10
times the  MDL of the analyte  in reagent
vrater, do not report a value for the MDL.
[49 FB 43430, Oct. 26, 1964; 50 PR 694, 696, Jan.
4, 1965, as amended at 51 FB 23703, June 30,
1966]

APPENDIX C TO PART 136—INDUCTIVELY
    COUPLED PLASMA—ATOMIC EMISSION
    SPECTROMETMC METHOD FOR TRACE
    ELEMENT ANALYSIS  OF WATER AND
    WASTES METHOD 200.7

           1. Scope and Application

  1.1  This method may be used  for the de-
termination of dissolved, suspended, or total
elements in  drinking water, surface water,
and domestic and industrial wastewaters.
  1.2 Dissolved elements are determined in
filtered and acidified samples. Appropriate
steps must be taken in all analyses to ensure
that potential interferences are  taken into
account. This is especially  true when dis-
solved solids exceed 1500 mg/L. (See Section
5.)
   1.3  Total  elements are determined after
appropriate  digestion  procedures are per-
formed. Since digestion techniques increase
the  dissolved solids content of the samples,
appropriate steps must be taken to correct
for potential interference effects. (See Sec-
tion 5.)
   J.4  Table  1 lists elements for which this
method  applies along with  recommended
wavelengths  and typical  estimated  instru-
mental detection limits using conventional
 pneumatic nebulization. Actual working de-
 tection limits are sample dependent and as
 the sample matrix  varies, these concentra-
 tions may also vary. In time, other elements
 may be added as more information becomes
 available and as required.
   1.5 Because  of  the differences  between
 various makes and models of satisfactory in-
 struments, no detailed instrumental operat-
 ing instructions can be provided. Instead, the
 analyst is referred to the  instruction pro-
 vided by the manufacturer of the particular
 instrument.

            2. Sttmmary of Method

   2.1 The method describes a technique for
  the simultaneous or sequential multielement
  determination of trace elements in solution.
  The basis of the method is the measurement
  of    atomic   emission   by   an   optical
  spectroscopic  technique.    Samples   are
  nebulized and the aerosol that is produced is
  transported to the plasma torch where exci-
  tation  occurs. Characteristic   atomic-line
  emission spectra are produced by a radio-fre-
quency  inductively coupled  plasma  (ICP).
The spectra are dispersed by a grating spec-
trometer and the intensities of the lines are
monitored  by photomultiplier  tubes. The
photocurrents  from  the  photomultiplier
tubes are processed and controlled by a com-
puter system. A background correction tech-
nique is required to compensate  for variable
background contribution to the determina-
tion of trace  elements. Background must be
measured adjacent to analyte lines on sam-
ples during analysis.  The  position selected
for the  background intensity measurement,
on either or both sides of the  analytical line,
will be determined by the complexity of the
spectrum adjacent to the analyte line. The
position used must be free of spectral inter-
ference and reflect the same change in back-
ground  intensity  as occurs  at  the analyte
wavelength measured.  Background correc-
tion is not required in cases of line broaden-
ing where a background correction measure-
ment would actually degrade the analytical
result. The possibility  of additional inter-
ferences named in 5.1  (and  tests for their
presence as described in 5.2) should also be
recognized  and  appropriate  corrections
made.

               3.  Definitions

  3.1 Dissolved—Those elements which will
pass through a 0.45 \an membrane filter.
  3.2 Suspended—Those elements which are
retained by a 0.45 |im membrane filter.
  3.3 Total—The  concentration  determined
on an unfiltered  sample  following vigorous
digestion (Section 9.3), or the sum of the dis-
solved plus suspended concentrations. (Sec-
tion 9.1 plus 9.2).
  3.4 Total  recoverable—The concentration
 determined on an unfiltered sample follow-
 ing treatment with hot, dilute  mineral acid
 (Section 9.4).
  3.5 Instrumental detection  limit—The con-
 centration equivalent to a signal, due to the
 analyte. which is equal to  three times the
 standard deviation of a series of ten replicate
 measurements of a reagent  blank signal at
 the same wavelength.
   3.6  Sensitivity—The slope of the analytical
 curve,  i.e. functional  relationship between
 emission intensity and concentration.
   3.7  Instrument  check standard—A multiiele-
' ment standard  of known concentrations pre-
 pared by  the analyst to monitor and verify
 instrument  performance  on a  dally basis.
 (See 7.6.1)
   3.8 Interference check  sample—A. solution
 containing  both interfering  and  analyte
 elemelts of known concentration that can be
 used to verify  background and interelement
 correction factors. (See 7.6.2.)
   3.9  Quality control sample—A. solution ob-
  tained from an outside source having known,
  concentration values to be. used to verify the
  calibration standards. (See 7.6.3)
                                           884

-------